
Class 



3 A,£ r p<??7 



Book 1 3 ?^ 



GopwighTft . 






COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT; 



A 
LATIN GRAMMAR 



BY 
FREDERICK J. BUNSE, Q. J. 

TEACHER OF LATIN IN CANISIUS COLLEGE 



SECOND EDITION 
FOR PRIVATE CIRCULATION 



BUFFALO, N. Y. 
1908 



1 



fh 



)1 



> 



IlIB«ARY of CONGRESS 1 
Two Cooies Hecei*<* 

AUG 5 W08 

(XuLq M Wll 

OUASS /I AXC, to. 



s 



COPYRIGHT, 1908, 

BY 

CHARLES JOSEPH WEBER, 
BTJEFALO, N. Y. 



ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 





■ 1 

N 



Preface to the Second Edition 



since most of our grammars seemed to be more adapted to the study of 
UA.atin philology than of the Latin language, the need of a practical hand- 
book for the study of the la ng u a g e suggested itself. 

In view of this purpose the accustomed scientific treatment of the declensions 
according to stems, which, in the opinion of many, has proved time-wasting 
and by far moreirksome than profitable, was abandoned. A practical definition 
of thestem (21), made it possible to group the words of the third declension, 
winch in other grammars requires between 20 and 30 paradigms, around four 
paradigms (41). 

The "casus vocativus," which properly is no case (18), has been 
omitted from the paradigms; in its place the " form of address" has been 
introduced where it was thought necessary (19; 85). 

The ''Rules of Gender" which are often either neglected or made so 
"complete" as to contain long lists of exceptions which never or rarely occur in 
school authors, have been carefully adapted to the needs of high school students. 

The infinitive, as the most important verbal form, (pointing out the 
conjugation and. except in the verbs in io-ere, the present stem), has been 
[daced first among the principal parts in the list of verbs; throughout this list 
the verbs are accompanied by short examples illustrative of their construction. 

The uses of the cases and the subjunctive, on whose proper classification 
philologists disagree (484,), were so grouped as to fulfil the modest demands of 
the schoolroom; namely, of teaching the facts of the lauguage and giving, at 
the same time, some insight into its organism. 

In the paradigms no translation of the subjunctive, has been given; for, 
as w i del y varying translations are attached to the different persons and 
tenses of the independent and the different constructions of the dependent sub- 
junctive, any single translation or translations would be misleading and 
result in the most mechanical composition as well as rendering of the Latin 
authors, and moreover any attempt to give all is evidently impossible. (It 
seems preferable, therefore, to drill the meanings of the subjunctive separately. 
begining with cum and ut laud em.) 



The paragraphs on pronunciation (4; 5) are intended to give a general 
idea of that pronunciation of Latin which was in use at the time of the 
classical Latin authors. 

Those vowels which are long by nature (8) have been marked throughout 
the book; short vowels have been left unmarked. An exception has been made 
in regard to e, a, u in such words as peior, eius, maior, cuius; these vowels, 
though short by nature, were marked long, because they were pronounced as 
diphthongs : peiior, eiius, maiior, cuiius; similarly o in hoc was marked long, 
because, though short by nature, it is part of a syllable which was commonly 
pronounced long by position : hocc from hodce; "hidden quantity" questioned 
by scholars, as the length of vowels before g n aud g m in most cases, has not 
been marked. Finally, the distinction of quantity between the l of the 2d ps. 
sg. and the 1st and 2d ps. pi. of the Perfect subjunctive and the i of the cor- 
responding form of the Future Perfect, demanded by the evidence collected by 
Neue - Wagener, 3,428-430, Hale and Buck, Lane and others, and introduced into 
our foremost grammars, has been admitted. 

The author considers it a duty to acknowledge his obligation to the litera- 
ture on the subject treated, especially to SeeJmann, Aussprache des Latein, 
Stolz, Lautlehre, Stammbildungslehre (1st volume of the Flistorische Gram- 
matik), Neue, Formenlehre der lateinischen Sprache; to the grammars and other 
works of Stolz and Schmalz, Gildersleeve-Lodge, Hale and Buck, Lane, Ben- 
nett, Allen and Greenough, and Harkness; to the Lexicons of Merguet, Nizolius 
and others; to articles in the various journals, and to a number of school-gram- 
mars used in this country and elsewhere. 

He acknowledges his indebtedness to the Rev. C. Harzheim, S. J., Professor 
of Latin in St. Stanislaus' Novitiate, Brooklyn, O., for his accurate criticism and 
selfless assistance in the preparation of the work, to the Rev. Gerard Gietmann, 
S. J., Professor of Poetry in the Collegium Canisianum Exatense, Exaten, Hol- 
land, and the Eev. Francis S. Betten, S. /., Professor of Latin in Canisius Col- 
lege, Buffalo, N. Y., for their cheering encouragment and valuable advice, and 
in particular to Mr. Dominic E. Hammer, S. J., of Canisius College, Buffalo, N. 
Y., for proof-reading and many important suggestions, for the w r riting of the 
index, various single paragraphs and many notes and examples to the list of 
verbs. His thanks are also due to many other friends who have given him the 
benefit of their scholarship and experience. 



PART I : PHONOLOGY 



1. CHARACTERS 

The Latin language contains the following characters ; 

ABCDE FGHIK LMNOPQRSTU VXYZ. 
a b c d e f g h i k 1 m n o p q r s t u v x y z. 

It does not contain : j, w. 

2. Capitals are used only: 

1. for the first letter of a sentence; 

2. for the first letter of a proper name : Graecia; 

3. for the first letter of adjectives and adverbs de- 

rived from proper names: lingua Graeca, 
the Greek language. 



:;. 



SOUNDS 



Consonantes 


Labi- 
ales 

P 
b 

ph 

m 
f, v 


Guttu- 
. rales 


Den- 
tales 


Lin- 
guales 


Pala- 
talis 


Mutae tenues ( hard ) 
mediae (soft) 
asplratae (fol- 
lowed by h) 
Semi voeales liquid ae 
" na.sa.les 
" splrantes 


c, k, q 

cr 
& 

ch 

n g 

(h) 


t 
d 

th 

n 
s, z 


l,r 


i-j 


Voeales 

Consonans duplex 
Diphthong!: voeales 
duplices 


a, e 


, i, o, u, y 






x- (c 

ae, o 


s, or gs.) 
e, au, en. 







2 PRONUNCIATION § 4 

4.. APPROXIMATE PRONUNCIATION 

The following list contains the main points of that pro- 
nunciation of Latin which was in use at the time of the clas- 
sical Latin authors, 
a a as in father, fatigue 

e e as in obey, bet : see note 1. 

T i as in fatigue, fit 

6 o asin holy, obey : see note 1. 

u u asin rude, put 

y like German ii : see note 2. 

ae oe \ Both elements of these diphthongs were pro- 
au ue J nounced in the same breath-impulse : see notes 
3 and 4. 

b, d, f, 1, \ as in English 
m, n, p, q, / 

c and k as in cat, kin 

g as in get 

h a sign of aspiration, no letter : see note 6. 

r trilled with the tip of the tongue 

s as in s e e 

t as in tit 

z like a lisped soft s. 

consonant i like y in yet : see notes 10 and 11. 
consonant v like w in win : see note 12. 
bs bt like ps, pt 

x (=cs, gs) as in extra ; not soft as in exact 
nc, nq; ng like nk and ng in rank, rang 
n before s was usually not pronounced as a consonant, but 
lengthened and nasalized the preceding vowel : 
consul, censor were pronounced cosul, cesor 
with nasalized 6 and e. 
qu ngu as is quick, sanguine 

su like sw; (in suadeo, -suesco, suavis) 



^ 5 PRONUNCIATION 3 

5. N O T E s : 

1. The Latin words and diphthongs are pure, without the vanishing sound 
of some English vowels. 

"2, The vowel y occurs in f o re ig n words only : s y 1 1 a b a , syllable. 

3. The e- element in ae and oe seems to have been more pronounced at the 
time of Cicero than the preceding a and o ; the diphthongal pronouncia- 
tion of ae and oe was gradually becoming monophthongal, the a- and o- 
sounds disappearing. > 

4. The diphthong eu is found in foreign words and, perhaps, in some in- 
terjections : Europa, Europe; heu, alas. 

Eu in neuter, neither of the two, and in neutiquam , 
by no meant, is no diphthong: ne-u-ter, ne-u-ti-qnam. 
b. The sign of d iaere s is (*") is sometimes used to distinguish ae and oe as 
two separate vowels each from the diphthongs ae and oe : 
aer = aer, air; aes, brass; poeta = poeta; poet; foedus, league. 

(5. The Latin h , generally, was not an independent sound or letter, as our h; 
it was a sign of aspiration (nota aspiratidnis ), intended to denote that the 
vowel following it should be uttered with a stronger aspiration than 
other vowels, or that c, p, t in ch, ph,th should be aspirated (followed by 
or joined with a breath-element). By careful speakers, especially on the 
stage, this h was, indeed, expressed; sometimes, even as an independent 
sound: as a rule, however, it was neglected; hence the variation in 
spelling : 

harena or arena, sand, have or ave, hail ! farewell! 
In some words it was a mere sign of diaeresis : 
aheneus or aeneus, of bronze. 

7. Consonants preceding any other consonant except 1. r, u (-v), were so fully 
pronounced as though they were a short syllable of their own. Follow- 
ing a short vowel, they, indeed, did form, together with it, a long syllable 
(positionelonga). Thus in an-nus, year, an is long, nus, short; while 
in a -nus, old woman, both a and nus are short. 

8. K is rare : Kalendae, Kaeso, Karthago = Carthago. 

( .i. Z occurs in foreign words only : Zama, Zephyrus. 

10. I is both a vowel and a consonant; a consonant, a) when it stands 
at the beginning of a word before a vowel : iiis; b) between two vowels : 
mfiior, iciunus. 
In Greek words i always is a vowel : Iones - [-6-nes. 



4 PRONUNCIATION, SYLLABLES § 5-8 

11 Instead of ii only one i is written : 

a) in the compounds of iacio : 

e.g. write abicio, but pronounce abyikio. 

b) in the declension of words in aius, eius, oius : 

e. g. write Grai, Grais, Vei, B6I, but pronounce Gra - yi 

12. Also v denoted but both a vowel and a consonant; now, when a vowel, 

it is usually written u. 

13. Final vowels and m followed by a vowel or h were, in ordinary speech 
as well as in poetry, slurred, not entirely dropped. In versification their 
quantity was neglected. Besides est, is, and es, you are, after a final vowel 
or m lost their vowel : Thus magnum esse was pronounced in three syllables, 
um-e forming one sound : magn^Jssse; magna est and magnum est were pro- 
nounced magnast and magnust respectively. 

6. SYLLABLES 

A word has as many syllables as it contains vowels and 
diphthongs : 

ae-ris, 2 syllables; a-e-ris, 3 syllables 

7. Separation of syllables in both speaking and 

writing: 

a. Of consonants occurring between two vowels the follow- 
ing go with the second : 

1. Single consonants : su-pe-n, pe-ius, di-vi-do 

2. gu, qu : san-guis, se-quor 

3. Combinations of p , c , t , ( b, g, d ) with 1 , r : 
cas-tra, mons-trum, qua -dru- plus, a-la-cris; but: Al-pes, 

ar-gu-o 

4. The second of doubled consonants : an-nus, sic-cus 

5. In other combinations the separation is made before the 
last consonant : om-nes, ap-tus, fac-tus, is-te, nos-co, 
sanc-tus, rex-i or re-xi 

b. Compound words in writing usually divide into their ' 
etymological parts : 

ab-rogo; post-ea; prod -est; ex-traho, 
in ordinary speech, however, we separate: 
ab-rogo; pos-tea; pro-dest; ex-traho 

8. Quantity of syllables: 

a. The quantity of syllables is the relative time taken in 
sounding them, a long syllable requiring about twice the time 
of a short one. 



fc 8-9 SYLLABLES, ACCENT ."> 

h. A long syllabic may be long by nature or by position; itis 
long by nature, if it contains a diphthong or a long vowel: 

foe-dus, fi-dus. 
NOTE: Long vowels aire usually marked : A, e, I, 6, 11; 

short vowels are not marked : a, e, i, o, u. 

A syllable is long by position, if its vowel, even when it 
is short, is followed by two consonants, except p, c, t, (b, g, 
(1) with 1, r: qu being considered as a simple consonant: thus in 
the words an-n us, dux: x=es, con-co-quo, the syllables 
an , dux, con are long by position. 

In poetry, however, a mute followed b} r a liquid may make a 
syllable long: vo-lu-cris or vo-luc-ris. 
NOTE: Vowels before n f , n s , n x , net are long (by nature), 

vowels before n t , n d , are short : 

in fans, sanxi, sfmetus; but infantis, laudandus. 

9. ACCENT 

a. In words of two syllables the accent is on the first : 

laudans, eo, sequor. 

b. In words of more than two syllables, the accent is on the 

paenultima (next to the last), if that is long: 

infantis, collaudas; 
on the antepaenultima (second from the last), if 
the paenultima is short: 

super!, quadruplus, mediocris. 

NOTE: Words with appended que, ve, ne, as well as Greek 
words follow the same rules : 
iitraque, triave, tibine; 
Iones, Eumenes, philosophia, Academia. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. Compounds of facio which keep the a of facio, retain 
also the accent on facio: benefacis, calefacit, but: 
reficis. 

2. Words which have lost a final syllable after a long 
penult, kept the accent in its former place : 

educ, illlc from educe, illiee; Arplnas from ArpTnatis. 

3. Genitives and forms of address and substantives in ius 
and iu m : Vergil!, ingen!. 



INFLECTION § 10-13 



10. 

PART II: INFLECTION 



Nouns-( substan , tives ' adj ' ectiveS '!are inflected by declension, 
•(numerals, pronouns J 

Verbs are inflected by conjugation. 

Particles- (adverbs prepositions \ are nQt inflected . 

j: cti licicv^. | con j Unc tions, interjections J 



11. DECLENSION OF NOUNS 

Declension is that inflection which indicates gender, num- 
ber and case. 

12. GENDERS 

The genders of nouns are determined by general and par- 
ticular rules. 

The particular rules (stated in the single declensions) are 
applied only, when the general rules cannot decide 
the gender. 

13. GENERAL RULES OF GENDER 

1. Men and rivers are masculine (m.): mascullna. 

2. Women and trees are feminine (f.): feminma. 

3. Indeclinables are neuter (n.): neutra. 

4. Nouns denoting either sex are common (c): communia. 



Genus masculmum; genus neutrum : neither m. nor f. 

genus feminmum; genus commune : either m. orf. 



^ 14-1/ MOBILIA AM) COLLECTIVE 7 

EXAMPLES: 

1. nauta, ae, in., sailor Persa, ae, m., Persian 
Tiberis, is, m., the Tiber Albis, is, m., the Elbe 

2. populus, T, f.. poplar ilex, icis, f., holmoak 
quercus, us, f, oak soror, oris, f., sister 

3. fas, n., divine right vale, n., farewell 
Also phrases, clauses, quotations etc., are neuter. 

4. parens, entis, c. (i. e., m. and f.) father or mother. 
infans, antis, c, child (boy or girl) 

conies, itis, c, companion (male or female) 

15. Some names of men and animals have a masculine and 
a feminine ending (substantiva mobilia): 

filius, T, m., son filia, ae, f., daughter 

nepos, otis, m. t grandson neptis, is, f., granddaughter 
puer, T. m., boy puella, ae, f., girl 

victor, oris, m., co nq ueror victrix, icis, f , conqueror 
rex, regis, m., king regina, ue, f., queen 

gallus, T, m., rooster gallina, ae, f., hen 

N* )TE : No name of an animal is neuter. 

16. EXCEPTIONS : 

to 13, 1. a: COLLECTIVE NOUNS follow the particular rules of gender.(12.) : 

copiae, arum, f., troops auxilia, orum, n., auxiliaries 

operae, arum, f., workmen manus, us, f., troop 

b. mancipium, I, n., slave, (chattel) 

c. Elaver, eris, n., Allier (river in Gaul); Allia, ae, f., Allia (river near 
R<ime) 

NOTE : Names of rivers in a are of variable and uncertain gender, as Sequaiia, 
ae, Seine 

t<» 1:5, 2 : acer, aeeris, n., maple-tree 

17. NUMBERS 

There are two numbers in the Latin declension: 

Numerus sing til ari s , the Singular, 
N u m cms p 1 u r a 1 i s , the Plural . 



8 CASES, RULES OF DECLENSION § 18-22 

18. CASES 

Case is that form or use of a noun by which its relation 

to other words in a sentence is denoted. 

There are five cases : 

Nominativus. answering the question : W h o ? or what ? 
Genetivus, answering the question : Whose ? or of what ? 
Dativus, answering the question : To or for whom, or what? 

A c c us a tiy u s , answering the question : Whom? or what ? 
A b 1 a t i v u s , answering the question : By what means? 

NOTE : The nominative is called casus rectus, independent case; 
the other cases are called casus obliqui, dependent cases. 

19. FORM OF ADDRESS 

When used to name a person or thing addressed, the noun 
is in no case, as the address has no relation to any part of a 
sentence (18); a special form of address, (usually called the 
Vocative,) is used only for the singular of words in us of the 
second declension; the nominative serves that purpose for 
all other words. 

20. TABLE OF DECLENSIONS 



Declension 


I. II. 

mensa servus 


III. 
lex 


IV. 
fructus 


V. 

dies 


Nom. sing : 


Gen. sing : 


mensae servi 


legis 


fructus 


diet 


Stem: 


mens serv 


leg 


fruct 


di 


Ending" of Gen. 










sing: 


ae 1 


is 


us 


ei or ei 



NOTE : The ending of the Gen. sg. shows to which declension a word belongs. 

21. The stem of a noun (substantive or adjective) is found 
by cutting off the ending of the Genitive singular (20). 

22. GENERAL RULES OF DECLENSION 

a. The nominative and accusative of all neuters are alike, both in 
the singular and in the plural. 

h. The dative and ablative of all nouns are alike in the plural. 
NOTE : There is no article in Latin. 



§ 23-28 FIRST DECLENSION 



23. FIRST DECLENSION 







Gen. sg. -ae. 










Singular 




Plural 


Nom. 


mens 


a the table mens 


ae 


the tables 


Gen. 


mens 


ae of the table mens 


arum of the tables 


Dat. 


mens- 


ae to or for the mens 
table 


-is 


to or for the 
tables 


Ace. 


mens 


-am the table mens 


as 


the tables 


Abl. 


mens 


-a by means mens 
of the table 


-is 


by means 

of the tables 



24. The nominative is used to name 

a. the subject : mens a est rotunda 

b. the predicate subst. or adj. : Italia est terra, est pulchra 

c. the person or thing addressed : nauta! O sailor! 

25. The accusative is used for the object of 

a. a transitive verb : mensam h a b e t , he has a table 

b. a preposition governing the Accusative: 

ante mensam, before the table 
in aquam, into the water 

26. The ablative is used 

a. to express "by means of = by, through, with a thing" 

mensa, bv means of a table 

b. for the object of a preposition governing the ablative : 

sub mensa, under the table 
in aqua, in the water 

27. "By" (i. e. by means of the action of a living being), is expressed by a, 

(before vowels or h : ab,) with the ablative : 

a nauta, by the sailor; ab agricola, by the husbandman 

"With" (i. e. accompanied by a person) is expressed by cum^ with the 

al dative : 

cum nauta, with a sailor 
Similarly : cum uva, with a grape {having, holding it.) 

28. GENDER 

Words in a are feminine 
(See exceptions n. 13 and 16) 
Pert'uga, ae, m, deserter reglna, ae, f.. queen 

Mosa, ae, m, Maas (Meuse) terra, ae, f., earth, land 



1U 



SECOND DECLENSION 



§29-30 



29, 



SECOND DECLENSION 







Nomin. sing, -us, -er, -ir; -um. 








Gen. sing. -T. 




Singular Plural 


Nom. 


serv-us 


the slave 


serv - i 


the slaves 


Gen. 


serv - 1 


of the slave 


serv - drum 


of the slaves 


Bat. 


serv - 6 


to or for the 

slave 


serv - Is 


to or for the 

slaves 


Ace. 


serv -urn 


the slave 


serv - 6s 


the slaves 


Abl. 


a serv -6 


by the slave 


a serv -is 


by the slaves 


Nom. 


bell - um 


the war 


bell -a 


the wars 


Gen. 


bell-i 


of the war 


bell - drum 


of the wars 


Bat. 


bell- 6 


to or for the war 


bell -is 


to or for the 
wars 


Ace. 


bell-um 


the war 


bell -a 


the wars 


Abl. 


bell -6 


by means of the 
war 


bell -is 


by the wars 


Nom. 


liber 


the book 


libr-i 


the books 


Gen. 


libr-T 


of the book 


libr-orum 


of the books 


Bat. 


libr-6 


to or for the 

book 


libr-Ts 


to or for the 

books 


Ace. 


libr-um 


the book 


libr-6s 


the hooks 


Abl. 


libr-6 


by means ot the 


libr-Ts 


by the books 


1 




book 




Nom. 


puer 


the boy 


puer - T 


the bovs 


Gen. 


puer-i 


of the bov 


puer-o rum 


of the bovs 


Bat. 


puer -6 


to or for the boy 


puer -Is 


to or for the 

boys 


Ace. 


puer-um 


the hoy 


puer -6s 


the boys 


Abl. 


a puer-c 


by the hoy 


a puer -Is 


by the boys 



30. There is only one noun in-ir, vir, virT, m., man, 
Sing".: vir, viri, viro, virum, a viro. 
Plur.: viri, virorum, Anns, A T iros, a viris 



^ 31-33 SUBSTANTIVES AM) ADJECTIVES OF I. AND II. DECLENSIONS 

31. Like puer are declined : 

1. Compound substantives in -fer and -ger; as, 
signifer, -ferl m., standard-hearer; 
armiger, -geri, m., armor-hearer; 

2. gener, en, m., son-in-law; vesper, en, m., evening 
socer, en, m., father-in-law ; Liber, eri, m., god of wine, 

liberT, erorum, m., children 

Like liber: 

all other substantives of the 2d decl. ending in -er; as, 
ager, agrl, m., field; in agister, tri, m., teacher, master. 



32. ADJECTIVES OF THE I. AND II. DECLENSIONS 

1. Adjectives in -us, m., -a, f,,-um, n. \ are declined like 

as bonus, bona, b o num, good fservus, mensa, bellum 

2. Adjectives in-er, m.,-a, f,,-um, n.\ like 

as sacer, sacra, sacrum, sacred f liber, mensa, bellum; 

3. Adj. in -er, m.,-era, f.,-erum, n. \ like 

as asper, aspera, asperum, rough | puer, mensa, bellum; 

Like asper: a. miser, misera, miserum, wretched 

tener, tenera, tenerum, tender, soft 
liber, libera, liberum, free, independent 

b. Compound adjectives in -fer and -ger; as, 

frugifer, frugifera, frugiferum, fruitful 
corniger, cornigera, cornigerum, horned 

4. Dexter, dextra, or dextera, dextrum or dexteruin, on the right side 

5. Satur, satura, saturum, satiated, is declined like vir, mensa, bellum 

33. Remember that e is kept by 

puer, vesper, socer, gener, 
asper, liber, miser, tener, 
compound words in -fer and -ger. 



12 



AGREEMENT, FORM OF ADI>RI-» 



§ 34-35 



34. AGREEMENT 

Rule: The adjectives (both predicative and attributive) 
must agree with their substantives in gender, number and 
case: 

mensa mea, my table ' hortus tuus, your garden 

poeta clarus, a famous poet populus liber, a free people 

puer aeger, a sick boy aedificium sacrum, a sacred bldg. 



Singular 


Plural 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 


mens - a 
mens - a e 
mens-ae 
mens -am 
mens - a 


me-a 
me-ae 
me-ae 
me- am 
me-a 


mens-ae me-ae 
mens -arum me -arum 
mens -Is me -is 
mens - a s me - a s 
mens -is me -is 


Nom. 
Gn . 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 


poet -a 
poet-ae 
poet-ae 
poet- am 
a poet -a 


clar-us 

clar-T 

clar-o 

clar-um 

clar-6 


poet-ae clar-T 
poet-arum clar-orum 
poet-Ts clar-Ts 
poet -as clar-6s 
apoet-Ts clar-Ts 



35. The form of address (19) of all words of the 2d 
declension is like the nominative. However, words in us 
have e: 

servus - serve, Dareus-Daree, bonus -bone 

Exceptions: a. Proper nouns in ius, eius, aius drop 
us, i becoming T : Vergilius- VergilT, Pompeius - Pompel, 
Gaius-Gal. 

b. fllius has filT; 
meus has m T . 

Mi fill, my son! Poeta impie, ungodly poet ! 

MeafIlia,0 my daughter ! Serve piger, lazy slave ! 



NOTE: The usual position of the form of address is after the first word or 
words. 



§ 36-40 



II. DECLENSION, DEUS, GENDER 



L3 



36. Tin' gen. sg. of proper (and common) nouns in -ius, and -ium is 

often I. instead of il : 

Vergil I = Vergilii; ingenium, ingeni = ingenii, talents. (8c. ) 

37. Declension of deus, del, m., god: 



Sim 



deus, 



del, 



deo, 



deus 



a deo, 
Plur.: di (dii), deorum, dis (diis) deos, adis(diis) 

NOTE: The form of address in Christian writers is Deus; in other writers 
only the plural di occurs. 

Hi! and diis are pronounced di, dis. 

38. GENPEB (12, 13.) 

Words in -um are neutra, 
-us -er maseulma. 

EXCEPTIONS : 

Feminine are islands, lands and towns in us, and humus; 
Neuter: virus, vulgus. 

Corinthus clara, famous Corinth 
vims m o r t i f e r u m , deadly poison 
populi altae, high poplars (13). 



39. mains, I, m., mast; upright beam 
populus, i, m., people 
Aegyptius, I, m., Egyptian 
Peloponnesus, I, f., Peloponnesus 
Corinthus, I, f., Corinth 
malum, I, n., apple 
virus, T, n., poison 

Xote: Virus and vulgus form no plural. 



malus, i, f. , apple-tree 
populus, i, f., poplar 
Aegyptus, i, f., Egypt 
Cyprus, i, f., Cyprus 
humus, i, f., ground, soil 
malum, i, n., evil, misfortune 
vulgus, i, n.. crowd, rabble 



40. Pontus, Hellespontus and Isthmus remain masculine. 

The gender of islands, lands, and towns not ending* in 
us is determined by their ending (in all declensions): 
Saguntum, I, n., Sagunt; Leuctra, orum, n., Leuctra. 
Delphi, orum., m., Delphi. 



14 



THIRD DECLESION 



§ 41-43 



THIRD DECLENSION (20.) 

41. A word is parisyllabic, if the number of its syllables in the nominative 
and the genitive singular is equal : par; 
but imparisyllabic, if the number is unequal : i m par : 

IMPARISYLLABA : 

a) rex, regis, kinsr: the stem reg ends in one consonant : g. (21 ). 

b) ars, artis, art: the stem art ends in two consonants : rt. 

PAKISYLLABA : 

c) nubes, niibis, cloud: the stem nub ends in one consonant : b. 

d) linter, lintris, skiff: the stem lintr ends in three consonants : ntr. 



42, 



Masculina et Feminina 





Rule: 


But in ium, 




Masculines and feminines 


1) if parisyllabic (c,d,) 




form the genitive plural in 


2) if the stem ends in 




um 


two consonants (b,d,) 



Singular 



Plural 



Singular 



Plural 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Bat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 



rex, king 
reg - is 
reg -1 
reg - em 
a reg - e 



reg - es 
reg-um 
reg-ibus 
reg - es 
a reg-ibus 



ars, art 
art - is 
art-i 
art - em 

art-e 



art - es 
art - ium 
art-ibus 

art-es (art-is) 
art-ibus 



43. 



Neutra 



Rule: 



All neuters have 



um 



But neuters ending in 
e, al, ar (with gen. aris) 
and par ( with gen. paris): 
1, ia, ium 



Singular 



Plural 



Singular 



Plural 



Nom. 


nomen 

name 


nomin-a 


mar - e, sea 


mar-ia 


Gen. 


nomm-is 


nomin-um 


mar -is 


mar - ium 


Dat. 


nomm-i 


nomin-ibus 


mar-1 


mar-ibus 


Ace. 


nomen 


nomm-a 


mar-e 


mar-ia 


Abl. 


nomm-e 


nomin-ibus 


mar-1 


mar-ibus 



$ 44-45 



CASE ENDINGS <)F THE III. DECLENSION 

IRREGULAR CASE ENDINGS. 



L5 



44. 

1. Acc. sg. -im; Abl. sg. 1: 

Sitis, puppis, turris, 

FebrivS and seeuris, 

Cum parisvllabls 

Of streams and towns in is. 

2. Gen. pi . -um: 
Senex, pater, also mater; 
Canis, iuvenis and frater. 



3. Gen . pi. -ium: 

Fauces, lis and optimates; 
Then Quirites and penates, 
With Samnites, Arpmates. 



4. A 1)1. sg. -T and -e : 
CTvis, ignis, also navis, 
Imber and supellex, clavis. 



Gen. pi. -um (and -ium): 
Mensis, civitas, parentes; 
Sedes, fraus and also vates. 



6. Abl. sg. of rete is rete. 

7. Os, ossis, n., bone, has ossium, 

8. Abl. sg. -e. 

Neuter names of towns in e, 
As Bibracte and Praeneste. 



t5. 1. sitis, is, im, i; f. 


thirst 


puppis, is, im, T; f., 


stern 


turris, is, im, T; f , 


tower 


febris, is, im, i; f., 


fever 


seeuris, is, im, I; f., 


axe 


Tiberis, is, im, I; m. 


Tiber 


Neapolis, is, im, I; f. 


, Naples 


Elis, id is, em, e, f., 


Elis. 


senex, senis, in., 


old man 


pater, patris, m., 


father 


mater, matris, f., 


mother 


canis, is; c, 


dog 


iuvenis, is; m., 


(young) 




man 


frnter, fratris, m-, 


brother 



3. fauces, (pi. ) ium, f., throat 
lis, litis, ium, f., strife 

optimates, (pl.)ium, m., aristocrats 
Quirites, (pi.) ium, m., Quirites 
penates, (pi. ) ium, m,, household 

gods 
Samnites^pl.jium, m., Samnites 
Arpinates,(pl.)ium, m.,Arpinates 



cms, is; c, 


citizen 


ignis, is; m., 


fire 


navis, is; f., 


ship 


imber, bris; m., 


heavy rain 


supellex, supellec- 
tilis, f., (plu. not 

used) . 


furniture 


clavis, is; f., 


key 


mensis, is; m., 


month 


civitas, atis, f., 


state- 
citizenship 


parentes, um; m., 
sedes, is; f., 


parents 
seat 


fraus, fraudis, f., 


deceit 


vates, is; m., 


seer; bard 


6. rete, is; n., 


net 



10 RULES OF GENDER § 46. 

46. RULES OF GENDER 

I. Masculine are =6, =or, =er, sol, sal. 

Exceptions 

Feminine are caro, -do, 
arbor, Hnter, -io, -go. 
Masculine stay pugio, 
ordo and septentrio. 
Neuter*, fruits and plants in -er, 
aequor, marmor, cor and ver, 
iter, verbera, cadaver. 

II. Feminine are =s and =x. 

Exceptions 

Masculine is pes, 
as and paries; 
dens and fons and mons, 
lepus, mus and pons; 
collis, orbis, ensis, 
pulvis, lapis, mensis; 
words in -nis, -guis, -cis, 
and in -ex, (icis); 
grex and words in-os. — 

Feminine: cos, dos; 

Neuter: aes, vas, 6s, 
-us (with-ris) and os. 

III. Neuter are 

-e, -al, -ar; 
-ma, -men, caput, fel, 
-ur and lac and mel. 
Masculine stays yultur. 



^ 47-4S 



RULES OF GENDER 



17 



47. 



VOCABLES CONTAINED IN RULES OF GENDEE 



sol, sol is, m., sun 
sal, sal is, m., salt 
caro, carnis, f., flesh 
arbor, arboris, f.. tree 
1 inter, lintris, f., skiff 
pugio, pugionis, in., dagger 
ordo, ordinis, in., order, series 
Septentriones, inn, in., North 
aequor, oris, n., smooth sea 
marmor, oris, n., marble 
cor, cordis, n., heart 
ver, veris, n., spring (season) 
iter, itineris, n., march, road 
verbera, urn, n , lashing 
cadaver, eris, n., corpse 
pes, pedis, in., foot 
as, assis, m., 1. unit of money 
2. unit of weight 
paries, etis, m., wall 
dens, dentis, m.. tooth 



tons, fontis, m., fountain, spring 
mons, montis, in., mountain 
lepus, oris, in., hare 
in us, muris, m., mouse 
pons, pontis, m., bridge 
coll is, is, m., hill 
orbis, is, in., circle 
ensis, is, m , sword (poetical ) 
pulvis, eris, m., dust 
lapis, pidis, in., stone 
mensis, is, m., month 
grex, gregis, m., flock 
cos, cot is, f., home 
dos, dotis, f., dowry 
aes, aeris, n. t bronze, copper- 
money 
vas, vasis, n., vessel (79) imple- 
ment 
6s, oris, n., mouth, face 
os, oss is , n., bone (ossium) 



III, caput, capitis, n., head 
fel, fellis, n., gall 
lac, lactis, n., milk 
mel, mellis, n., honey 
vultur, vulturis, m., vulture 

4-8. NOTE: Many other words are ma sculine: 



1. eardo, in is, hinge 

harpago, onis, grappling hook 

papilio, onis, butterfly 

scipiOi onis, staff 

vespertilio,6nis, bat 



aries, 


etis, 


ram 


quadrupes 


edis, 


quadruped 


caespes, 


itis, 


turf, sod 


gurges, 


itis, 


whirlpool 


stipes, 


itis, 


stock, post 


glis, 


gliris 


dormouse 


rudens, 


entis 


rope 


calix, 


icis, 


cup 


fornix. 


icis, 


arch, vault 



axis, 


is, axle 


callis, 


is, path 


canfilis, 


is, (water) pipe, canal 


can lis, 


is, cabbage 


fustis, 


is, cudgel 


postis, 


is, post 


vermis, 


is, worm 



Names of fractions of 12, ending 
in s or x, as : 



two-tweltths 

five 

six 

eight 

Words in n (not men) as : 
pecten. inis, comb 

renes am, kidneys 



sextans, antis 
quincunx, uncis 
semis, scinissis. 
bes, bessis, 



18 



RULES OF GENDER, VOCABULARY TO RULES OF GENDER 



§ 49-50 



49. GENDER OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES USED AS 

SUBSTANTIVES 



continens, entis, f., ( = continens terra ), 

occidens, entis, in. ( usu. occidens sol ), 

oriens, entis, m.,( usa. oriens sol ), 

torrens, entis, m.,( = fluvius torrens ), 

annalis,, is, m.,( = liber annalis ), 

Aprilis, is, m.,(usu. mensis AprTlis ), 

September, bris, m.,(usu. mensis September), September 

(Declension: 60, 63 



continent, main- 
West [land 
East 
torrent 

usu. pi.: annals' 
April 



50. 



VOCABULARY TO RULES OF GENDER 

{See also 45, 47, 48, 49. ) 

RULE FOR MASCULINES 



aquilo, onis, m., north wind 
carbo, onis, m., coal 
leo, onis, m., lion 

mucro, onis, m., point ot a 

sword 
pavo, onis, m., peacock 
pulmo, onis, m., lung 
sermo, onis, m., conversation 
Sulmo, onis, m., Sulmo {40.) 
turbo, inis, m., whirlwind 
Vesontio, onis, m.,(exc. to40.) 
amor, oris, m., love 
color, oris, m., color 

6 r d 6 plebeias 
serm 6 p atrius 
card ferina 
arbor procera 
cadaver cruentum 
cor hiimanum 



dolor, oris, m., pain 
agger, eris,m., mound, dam 
munitio, onis, f. Entrenchment 
ratio, onis, f., reason, plan 
consuetudo, inis, f., custom 
testudo, inis, f., tortoise, shelter 
soror, oris, f., sister 

mulier, ieris, f., woman 

imago, inis, f., picture 

orlgo, inis, f., origin 

aeer, aceris, n.,maple-tree(46) 
papaver, eris, n., poppy 
piper, eris, n., pepper 

class of the common people 

mothertongue 

game 

tall tree 

bloody corpse 

human heart 



$• Di-DL' 



\ <)( AIU F.AUY To RULES of GENDER 



LH 



51. 



RULE FOR FEMININES 



anas, 


atis, f., cluck 


salus, utis, 


{., welfare 


aetas, 


at is, f., age 


senectus, utis, 


f., old age 


aestas, 


atis, f., summer 


servitus, utis, 


i., slavery 


crudelitas, 


atis, f., cruelty 


virtus, utis, 


f., manly 


gra vitas, 


atis, f., heaviness 




excellence, 


levitas, 


atis, f., fickleness, 




bravery , etc. 




frivolity 


palus, udis, 


f., swamp 


allies, 


etis, f., tir(13) 


pecus, udis, 


f., single head 


seges, 


etis, f., crop 


of cattle; sheep 


compedes, 


urn, f., shackles 


gens, gentis, 


f., race, 


merces, 


edis, f., reward, pay 




nation 


quies, 


etis, f., rest 


mens, mentis, 


f., 777777C? 


nubes, 


is, f., cloud 


frons, frontis, 


f., forehead 


vulpes, 


is, f., fox 


frons, frondis, 


f., foliage 


feles or fel 


lis, is, f., cat 


pars, partis, 


f., part 






urbs, urbis, 


{., city 


auris, 


is, f., ear 






avis, 


is, f., bird 


pax, pacis, 


f., peace 


classis, 


is, f., fleet, class 


lex, legis, 


f., law 


vltis, 


is, f., vine 


nex, necis, 


f., murder 


laus, laud 


is, f., praise 


nix, nivis, 


f., S770VT 


iuventus, 


utis, f., yout/z(age) 


nox, noctis, 


f., night 




young men 


lux, lucis, 


f., (day)light 




dux ca 1 1 id us, a 


experienced leader {13) 




navis 1 o n g a 


man-of-war 






virtus s u m m a 


perfect manhood, manliness 




vox magna 


loud voice 




52. 








vas, vadis, m., bail 


piscis, is, m 


., 77S/7 


cinis, eineris, m., ashes 


hostis, is, m 


., enemy (in 




(of a corpse) 




war) 


crlnis, 


is, m., hair 


codex, icis, m 


., book, ledger 


finis, 


is, m., boundary 


cortex, icis, m 


., bark 


panis, 


is, m., bread 


vertex, icis, m 


., top; whirl 


anguis, 


is, m., serpent 


fids, floris, m 


., flower 


unguis, 


is, m., 77a// 


mos, moris, m 


., manner 




of a finger 


ros, roris, m 


., dew 




p a n i s cibariua 


coarse bread 






co 1 lis a rd uu s 


steep hill 





20 



VOCABULARY TO RULES OF GENDER 



§ 53-54 



53. 

fas , indecl. , n . , divine right (13) 
nefas,/rzcfec7.,n., wrong, sin 
crus, cruris, n., leg' 
ius, iuris, n., right; justice 
rus, ruris, n., country (opp. 

to city; pi. has n. 

and ace. only.) 



tus, turis, n., frankincense 
genus, eris, n., descent; race 
latus, eris, n., side, Bank 
vulnus,eris, n., wound 
corpus, oris, n., body 
pecus, oris, n., herd of small 

cattle 
tempus, oris, n., time 



a e s alienum 

6 r a dura 

rfis suburb a nuni 

latus a p e r t u m 

m a t u t i n a tempora 



debt 

brazen laces 
country-seat 
exposed Bank 
morning-hours 



54. 



RULE FOR NEUTERS 



conclave, is, n., 
hastile, is, n., 
animal, alis, n., 

tribunal, alis,n., 
vectigal, alis,n., 
calcar, aris, n., 
far, far r is, n., 
par, paris, n., 
poema, atis, n., 
agmen, inis, n., 

certamen,inis,n. 



room; cage flumen, inis, n., river 

shaftofaspear fulmen, inis, n., striking 
living being; lightning 

beast lumen, inis, n., light, lumin- 
tribunal ous object 

tax; rents fulgur, uris, n., flashing 
spur lightning 

spelt (farra) murmur,uris, n., humming; 
pair (paria) roaring 

poem robur, oris, n., oakwood, 
army (on the strength 

march) Tibur, uris, n., City in 
, contest Latium 



mare internum 
animalia domestica 
flumina lata 
fulmen sinistrum 
capita cana 



Mediterranean Sea 
domestic animals 
broad rivers 
favorable lightning- 
gray heads 



^ 55-56 



ADJECTIVES <)K TIIK TIIIKI) DECLENSION 



21 



55. Adjectives of the Third Declension 

(See Comparison of Adjectives, 86. ) 
FIRST CLASS 

3 endings : Acer, acris, acre, keen ) Abl N L n Gen - 

2 endings: brevis, brevis, breve, short ) _ f . l 



1 ending : felix, felix, felix, lucky ) 



la, 



1U111. 



Singular 





m. 1*. n. 


m., f. n. 
brevis breve 


m., f. n. 


Nom. 


acer acris acre 


felix 


Gen. 


acris 


brevis 


felieis 


Bat. 


acri 


brevT 


felici 


Ace. 


acrem acrem acre 


brevem breve 


felicem felix 


Abl 


acri 


brevi 


felici 



Plural 





m., f., n. 


Nom. 


acres acria 


Gen. 


acrium 


Dat. 


acribns 


Ace. 


acres (-is) acria 


Abl. 


acribus 



m., f. 



breves brevia 
brevium 
brevibus 



m., f. 



felices felici a 

felicium 
felici bus 



breves(-Ts)brevia felices(-is) felicia 
brevibus felicibus 



56. 



ADJECTIVES OF 3 ENDINGS 



acer, acris, acre, 

alacer, alaeris, alacre, lively 

celeber, Celebris, celebre, 

much frequented; renowned 

celer , c e 1 e r i s , c e 1 e r e , s wift 
sal fiber \ 



keen equester, equestris, equestre, 



salfibns , 
(campester)\ 



campestris, 



-bris, -bre, wholesome 
tris, -tre, level 



equestrian, cavalry- 
paluster, palustris, palustre, 

swampy 
pedester, pedestris, pedestre, 

foot. 
September, Septembris, 

Septembre, of September 

volucer \ ,. . ,. \flv- 

Y61ucris) V()lucns ' volucre l ing 



celeber, celer, pedester; 
alacer, acer, equester. 



ADJECTIVES OF THE TRIED DECLENSION 



§ 57-50 



ADJECTIVES OF 2 ENDINGS 



liigubris, bre, mourning 



57. 

bre vis, 
dulcis, 
fortis, 

inlustris, inlustre, 1 )full of light silvestris, tre, woody 
2 ) famous terrestris, tre, land - 



breve, short 

dulee, sweet medioeris, ere, middling 

forte, strong, manly suavis, suave, pleasant, sweet 



58. 



ADJECTIVES OF 1 ENDING 



anceps, ancipitis, doubtful; 
two-sided 
audax, audacis, bold 
clemens, entis, forbearing 

or do equ ester, 
orator medioeris, 
lamlentatio liigubris, 

me] dulee. 
proelium anceps, 
remedia celeria, 



felix, Teis, lucky, fortunate 
iners, ertis, unskilful; inactive 
locuples, etis, opulent 
par, paris, equal 

order of knights 
an ordinary speaker 
mourning oxer the dead 
sweet honey 
a double battle 
efficacious remedies 



59. SECOND CLASS 

The following adjectives of one ending belong to this class: 

1. Princeps, compos, pan- | Abl x andAcc>nt . L G L 

per, dives J & l ' F 

Also particeps, superstes J e wanting, um 

2. Memor, inops : I wanting, um 

3. Vetus, : vetere, vetera, veterum 



Singular 


Plural 


m., f. n. 


m., f. n . 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 


dives dives 

divitis 

diviti 
divitem dives 

divite 


divites — 
divitum 
divitibus 

divites — 
divitibus 



princeps, cipis, chief 
compos, potis, master of 
pauper, peris, not wealthy; 

of small income 



dives, vitis, 



rich 



particeps, cipis, sharing 
superstes, stitis, surviving 
memor, oris mindful 

inops, inopis, without re- 
sources 
vetus, veteris, old 



^ ii<)-<>J 



DECLENSION O* ADJECTIVES WD PARTICIPLES 



60. Some adjectives in is and er, used as appellatives or as names of 
months, are declined like adjectives : Ablative singular l: 

aequalis, is, m., contemporary consularis, is, in., ex-consul 

affinis, is,c, relationby marriage familiaris, is, c, friend, intimate 

annalis, is, m., (usu. pi.), annals natatis, is, in., birthday 

Athentensis, is, ni., Athenian sodalis, is, m., comrade 

Aprilis, is, m., April (49.) September, bris, m., September 

Abl.: aequali, natal i, Sep tern bri. 

61. Adjectives u^cd as proper names have e in the ablative singular: 

Martialis, a Martiale; Felix, cum Felice 

Metellus Celer, a Metello Celere 

62. Adjectives in as, litis, and is, it is, have e, when denoting persons; 

i, when denoting things : 

in £ rplniiti ( fundo ), on the estate in Arpinum; 

ab Arpinate (homine), by an inhabitant ot Arpinum, (9, c.) 

)3 ' DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES IN NS 

e 1 

Abl. sg. | < ; Norn. pi. neut. ia; Gen. pi. ium. 

When used as adjectives, participles in ns have l 

When used as participles or substantives, they have e 

a milite vigilant!, by a watchful soldier 

milite vigilante, while the soldier was watching; 

a sapient! sene, hy a discreet old man, 

a sapiente, by a judicious person. 



64. 



FOURTH DECLENSION 



fructus, us, m., fruit: 


cornu, us, n., horn: 


| Singular \ Plural 


Singular Plural 


Xoiu. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Ahl. 


fruct - us 
fruct - us 
fruct -ui,(u) 
fruct -um 

fruct - ii 


fruct -us 
fruct -uum 
fruct - ibus 
fruct -lis 
fruct - ibus 


corn-ii 
corn - us 
corn - u 
corn-u 
corn ii 


com - ua 
corn-uum 

corn-ibus 
corn - ua 

corn-ibus 



24 



FOURTH AND FIFTH DECLENSIONS 



$ 65-68 



65. Ubus, instead of ibus, is taken by 

artus, us, joint, (pi.: limbs,) and tribus, us, tribe: 
artubus, tribubus. 

The same ending is occasionally found in other words, as in 

lacus, us, lake; portus, us, harbor. 

1 a c i b u s and 1 a c u b u s . 
Distinguish arcibus from arcubus: 
arx, arcis, f., stronghold; arcus, us, m., bow. 

66. Domus, us, house, has forms of both the 4th and 2nd 

declensions : 

Singular: domus, domus, domui domum, domo, 
Plural: domus, domuum, domibus, domos, domibus, 

domi, at home (Locative) 

domum, home, homeward 

domo, from home. 



67. 



GENDER 
Us is masculine : u is neuter. 

Exceptions 
Feminina are in us 
Idus, tribus, porticus; 
acus, domus, manus. 



68. artus, us, m., joint, 

(pi. limbs ) 
exercitus, us, m., (discip- 
lined) army 
fructus, us, m., fruit 
quercus, quercubus, us, f., 
oak (13) 
anus, us, f., old woman 
acus, us, f., needle 
domus, us, f., house 
Idus, uum, f., Ides (13th 
or 15th of the month 
cornu, lis, n., horn 

portus celeber, 
v isus acer, 
domus ampla, 
tribus rustica, 
Idus Martiae, 
genu einistrum 



lacus, us, m., lake 
portus, us, m., harbor 

sensus, us, m., feeling; tact 
nurus, us, f., daughter-in-law 
socrus, us, f., mother-in-law 
manus, us, f., hand 
porticus, us, f., colonnade, 

porch 
tribus, us, f., tribe 

genu, us, n., knee 

much-frequented harbor 
keen sight 
spacious house 
country -tribe 
Ides of March 
the left knee 



§69 -71' 



Fll-TH DECLENSION 



25 



69. 



FIFTH DECLENSION 



dies, die!, m 


., day 




Singular 


Plural 


Norn. 


di - e s 


di-es 


Gen. 


di-ei 


di-ebus 


Dat. 


di-ei 


di-erum 


Ace. 


di-em 


di - es 


Abl. 


di-e 


di-ebus 





res, re!, 


f., thing 


Singular 

r-es 
r-ei 
r-ei 
rem 

r-e 


Plural 


r-es 
r - erum 
rebus 
r-es 
r-ebus 



70. Fides, spes, res have el: fide!, spel, re!; 
the rest have ei: perniciei, specie!, acie!, facie! etc. 

Note: a. Only dies and res form a complete plural. 

Species forms the nominative and accusative plural. 
b. The other cases of the plural are supplied by synonyms : 
Plural : species, species, formarum, tormis, tormis. 



71. 



GENDER 

E s of the fifth is f e m i n i n e . 

Exceptions 
Masculine are dies, day, 
and meridies, midday; 
dies, an appointed day 
feminine does mostly stay. 

acies, ei, f., keenness, species, el, f., outward appearance 

battle-array 
facies, ei, f. face, fides, ei, f., trust, faithfulness 

pernicies, el, f., ruin, bane spes, e!, f., hope 

res public a, ) the common -weal 

rei publicae, t, S a common- wealth 

dies festus feast-day 

dies dicta, cons tit uta appointed d ay 

NOMINA DEFECTIVA 

72. Indeclinab!lia: Indeclinable words (13;53) 

mane, morning Instar, like; as much as (gen. ) 

frugi, honest nequam, naughty 

homo frugi, an honest man 
espistula voluminis instar, a letter like a volume 



26 DEFECTIVE SUBSTANTIVES § 73-75 

73. Singularia tantura occur in the singular only: 



scientia, ae, f., knowledge 
aes alienum, 11., debt 
indoles, is, 1, native quality 
vestis, is, f., clothing 



regula, ae, f., rule, pattern 
itis iurandum, n., oath 
specimen, inis, n., sample, proof 
(vestimenta, drum, n., pieces of cloth 



74. Pluralia tantum occur in the plural only 



Athenae, arum, Athens 
angustiae, i.,l)defile 

2)distress 
catenae, f., chain 
deliciae, f. 5 delight 
divitiae, f., riches 

arma, drum, n., arms 
castra, drum, n., camp 
Leuctra, drum, n., Leuctra 

Al pes, ium, f , the Alps 
altaria, ium, n , altar 
cervices, um, f., neck 
fides, ium, f., lyre 
inoenia, ium, n., citv wall 



Syraousae, arum, !'., Syracuse 
inimicitiae f., enmity 
insidiae, f., ambush 
minae, f., threat 
niiptiae, f., wedding 
tenebrae, f , darkness 

hiberna, drum, n., winter-camp 

spolia, drum, n., booty 

Olympia, drum, n., Olympic games 

nares, ium, f , nose 

sord£s, ium, f., \(dirt 2)lowness of 

rank 
maiores, um, m., ancestors 
manes, ium, m., shades of the dead 



75. Some Substantives form 

a complete Singular and Plural in one meaning 
and a Plural only in another meaning: 



Singular: 

aqua, ae, f., water 
cdpia, ae, f., plenty 



Plura 

aquae, £ood 
I copiae, supplies 



littera, ae, f. , letter, a, b, c, ' litterae, letters 



Plur. tantum 

medicinal springs 
troops (15 ) 
letter-epistle 



fortuna, ae, f., fortune 



fortunae, good or ill haps possessions 



opera, ae, f., service, pains \ operae, services 



auxilium, i, n., help 



auxilia, means of help 



comitium, i, n., place of ■ comitia, places of 

assembly assembly 

hortus, i, m., garden 
impedimentum, I, n., 

hindrance 
rostrum, i, n., beak 



workmen (16) 
auxiliaries (16) 
assembly (ies) 

park, parks 



aedes, I, f., temple 
finis, is, m., boundary 
pars, partis, f., part 



horti, gardens 

impedimenta, hindrances ba gg a ge 



rostra, beaks 

aedes, temples 
fines, borders 
partes, portions 



platform (s) for 



house (s) 
territory (ies) 
party, parties, 
role, roles 



speakers 



§ 76-78 






DEFECTIVA, ABUNDANT] \ 


76. 




Other d e fe c t i v e substantives 


a. Sg.: 




— on is, 

fors, — 


oni, dicionem, one, f., sway { 

forte, f. , chance < : no v 


b. Sg. : 




- opis, 
vis, — 


— opem, ope, f., help 

— prece, f., prayer; request 
vim, vT, f., violence; power 


PL 


\ 


opes, 

preces, 

vires, 


opuin, opibus, r iches ; influence 
precum, precibus, prayers 
virium, viribus, forces ; strength 



c. Some substantives form the ablative singular only : 
iuss u imperatoris, by command of the leader 
inius s u meo, without my order 

mea.tua, sua (red.) | aponte of hi etc . free will 

nostra, vestra s F ' J 

grandis natu, advanced in age 

77. SUBSTANTIVA ABUNDANTIA 
(Substantives aboun iing in forms ) 

I. a. luxuria = luxureis, luxuriam =luxriem. i., riotous living 
materia - materies, materiam = materiem, f., building material 

b. The old genitive singular in as is sometimes used instead of ae : 
pater famili a s or pater famil iae, head of the household 
mater famili as or mater famil iae , mistress of the house 

c. The old dative and ablative plural -abus, instead of is, is used in the 
expressions : 

dis et dea bus to the gods and goddesses 

ffliis et f ibi a bus to the sons and daughters 

NOTE: When ambiguity is excluded, the dative and ablative plural are dis, 

filiis; ambabus dis. filiis. 

78. II. a. The genitive plural often has um instead of drum in words 
denoting money, and measure, in the compounds of vir and in other 

words : 

nummus, i, m., coin sestertius, I, m., sesterce {silver-coin of 

modius, i, m., peck about 5c) 

duumvir, I, m., one of the triumvir, i, m., > one of the Board of 

Board of Two decemvir, i, m., \ Three, Ten 

sestertium decern milia ten thousand sesterces 

decemvirum potestas the authority of the College of Ten 

praefectus fabrum leader of workmen-troops 

liberum = liberorum; deum = deorum. 



28 ABUNDANTLY, GREEK WORdS § 78-81 

b. Sing-.: iugerum, iiigerl, iugerd, o., acre 

Plur.: iugsra, iugerum. iiigeribus, n.. acres 

c. locus. I, in., place; pi. : loci, m.. arid. 1 oca. oram, n. 
loci, passages in books, grounds of proof 

loci aprici. sunny spots : single places 

loca haec. ea, ilia, regions : connected places 

d. iocus, i. in., joke pi.; ioci or ioca 

i ad vesperum ) 

e. vespW, 1, m., evening < ac { V esperam ," untl1 evening 

79. III. a. plebs, plebis. f., \ ' 
plebes, plebei or plebi, f. \ common people 

plebi scitum, decree of the people 

plebi tribunus. defender of the people' s cause 

b. requies. etis, f., rest 
requietem-requiem ; requiete-requie 

c. Sing-.: vas, vasis, vasi, n., vessel 

Plur.: yasa, Yasorum, vasis, n,, vessels; military baggage 

80. PARTICULAR SUBSTANTIVES 

bos, bovis, c, ox, cow ; boves, bourn, biibus=bobus 

grus, gruis, c, crane ; grttes, gruum, gruibus 

sus, suis, c, swine ; sues, suum, subus - suibus 

Anio , Anienis, m., tributary of the Tiber 
Iuppiter, Iovis, m., (from Iov-pater), Jupiter 

81. DECLENSION OF GREEK WORDS 

Pronunciation: Greek words are pronounced like Latin words, except that 
i always is a vowel (5, 10). 

Accent: Greek words are accented according to the same laws as Latin 

words (9). 

Gender: The gender of Greek words remains the same in Latin as it 

is in Greek. 

Declension: Greek words usually take Latin forms : 

bibliotheca, ae, f., library diphthongus. i. f., diphthong 

granimatica, ae, 1, philology periodus, i, 1, a complete sentence 
poeta, ae, m.. poet pelagus. i. n., sea 



^ s_> 85 DECLENSION OF GKEEK WORDS 29 

GREEK FORMS 
S 2. FIRST DECLENSION 

Nom. -e, f. ; -as and -es, m. 
Antigone, ae, ae, am, a, f., Antigone 

Aeneas, ae, ae, am, a, m , Aeneas 

Spartiates, ae, ae, am, a, m., the Spartan 

Spartiatae, arum, Is, ap, is, m., the Spartans 

Note: Also other tonus occur. 

83. SECOND DECLENSION 

Nom. sg. -eus, m.; form of address -eu 

Orpheus, el, eo, ei'im, eo; m., Orpheus 

( The eu in the nom. and in the form of address is a diphthong: ) 

£4. THIRD DECLENSION 

Nom. sg. -es, m.; -is, (parisyll.) f . ; -ma, n. 

a. Pericles is or I, I, em or en, e, m., Pericles 

Form of address : Pericles or Pericle 

basis is, i. im or in), I, f., pedestal 

poema, mat is, mati, ma, mate, n., poem 

poemata, ! "j!^J m Um poematls, mata, n., poems 

h. aer, aeris, m., air : ace: aera 

aether, aetheris, m., ether : ace.: aethera 

85. VOCABLES 

Penelope, ae, f., Penelope I'erses, ae, m., Persian 

Note: All patronymics in des have ae: 

A tildes, ae, m., scion of At reus 

Aristides, is. m., Aristides poesis, is, f., work of poetry 

epigranima, atis, n., 1) inscription, 2) epigram 

Note: Proper nouns in is, ys, as, like those in eus, es, drop the s in the 
form of address : 

Alexis, Alexi; Cotys, Coty; Atlas, At la, (Gen. Atlantis) 

Names o f n at ions often take es and as (instead of es) 
Nom. pi.: Arcades, Ace. pi.: Arcadas 
Ma. Macedon 



30 

86. 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 



COMPARISON 



§ 86-90 



In Latin, as in English, there are three degrees of compari- 
son (gradus comparationis), 

the Positive, - Comparative and Superlative 
positivus, comparativus, superlati vus . 

87. The comparative is formed by adding 



ior (m. and f.) and iu 
the superlative, by adding 
issimus, 



(n.) 



a, -um, to the stem (21) 



severus, 




sever-ior, -ins, 


sever-issimus, a, um 


severe; 




1 ) more severe 


most severe 






2 ) too severe; 


very severe 


levis, e, 


light; 


lev -ior; 


lev - issimus 


tenuis, e, 


thin; 


tenu-ior; 


tenu- issimus 


loquax, 


talkative 


loquac-ior; 


loquac -issimus 



88. Also participles when used as adjectives: 
vigilans, watchful; vigilant -ior; vigilant -issimus 



egens, 
ornatus 

89. NOTE. 



90. 



poor; 
adorned: 



egent-ior; 
ornat-ior; 



egent- issimus 
ornat- issimus 



aether tenuior est quam aer, 

the ether is thinner than the air; 

senectus loquiicior est, old age is rather talkative. 

DECLENSION OF THE COMPARATIVE (55, 59.) 

The abl. &g. ends in e; 

the nom. neut. pi. ends in a; 
the gen. pi. ends in um. 



Singular 


Plural 




m. and f. 


n. 


m. and f. 


n. 


Nom. 


severior 


severius 


severiores 


se veri 6 r a 


Gen. 


severioris 


severioris 


severiorum 


severiorum 


Bat. 


sever ion 


severiori 


severioribus 


severioribus 


Ace. 


severiorem 


severius 


severiores 


severiora 


Abl. 


seven ore 


severiore 


severioribus 


severioribus 



^ 91-95 comparison of ^d.iectives :;i 

PECU LIARITI ES 

91. Adjectives in er form their superlative by adding rimus, 
-a, -um to the nom. sg. m.: 

pulcher, beautiful; pulchr-ior, puleher- rimus 
liber, free; Hber-ior, liber -rimus 

Acer, keen; acr-ior, Acer -rimus 

celer, swift; celer-ior, eeler -rimus 

92. Adjectives in ilis from their superlative variously: 
Five form it regularly in issimus, -a, -um : 

fe rt i lis, utilis, mob ilis, 
a m a b i 1 i s and n 6 b i 1 i s ; 

fertile, useful, movable, 
amiable, noble. 

93. Five adjectives change ilis into illimus : 

f a c i 1 i s , d i f f i c i 1 i s , easy, difficult, 
si m ilis, dissimilis like, unlike, 
and h u m i 1 i s : and lo \v. 

facillimus, simillimus, humillimus. 

NOTE: The other adjectives in ilis usually form no superlative in issimus(95). 

94. Adjectives in us with preceding- vowel form their de- 
grees by means of magi s and maxime: 

idoneus, fit, magis idoneus, maxime idoneus 

pins, pious, magis pius, maxime pius 

arduus, steep, hard, magis arduus, maxime arduus 

but aequus, fair, just, aequior, aequissimus 

antiqttus, ancient, antiquior, antiquissimus 

95. Adjectives whose comparatives or superlatives are not used, and adjectives 
with unusual endings, may take magis and maxime (103): 



a. 



laudabilis, S laudabilior, 



pra 



iseworthy \ magis laudabilis, 



maxime laud. (93. Note) 



( 1 1 'i c r i o r 

alacer lively, • i ' maxime alacer 
rtictcej, mcij, i maglS alacer. 

b. hospitalis, hospitable, \ h 08 pi talissi m u 

magis hospitalis \ maxime hospitalis 

c. rudis, unwrought, magis rudis maxime rudis 
(1. sedulus, diligent, magis sedulus, maxime sedulus 



32 



IRREGULAR COMPARISON 



§ 96-100 



ANOMALA : IRREGULAR FORMATIONS 



96. Adjectives in dicus,ficus, volus (=dicens, faciens, volens). 

maledicus, slanderous, maledic-entior, maledic-entissimus 
magnificus, magnificent, magnific-entior, magnific-entissimus 
benevolus, benevolent, beneYol-entior, benevol-entissmus 



97. bonus, good; 

malus, bad; 

magnus, great; 

parvus, small; 



melior, melius 
peior, peius 
maior, mains 
minor, minus 



optimus 
pessimus 

maximus 
minimus 



98. Sing. 



Plur. 



multus, much; 

multa, " 

multum, " 

multi, many; 

multae, " 

multa, " 



no compar., plurimus 
no compar., plurima 
plus, plurimum 

plures, plurimi 

plures, plurimae 

plura, plurima 



99. NOTE: a. The singular plus, a larger amount, is a substantive 

only : 

plus auri, more gold 

b. Of plus no other forms than plus and pluris are used : 
pluris hoc facio, I esteem this more highly ( 457) 



The genitive of plures and plus is plurium (90): 
plures plura, plurium, 

complures, complura, complurium, 

plurimi = plerique; gen. only plurimorum 

plurimae = pleraeque, " " plurimarum 

plurima - pleraque, " " plurimorum 



more 
several 



100. 



ABUNDAXTIA 



exterior, outer extremus (extimus), outermost 

inferior, lower infimus=!mus, lowermost 

posterior, next in postremus, hindmost, last 

order, time; place; (postumus, lateborn) 
superior, higher, summus, highest 

(supremus, last) 
(dies supremus, day of death) 



S 101-10:; 



DEFECTIVE COMPAHIf 



33 



The positive forms of the preceding adjectiv 



ea arc rare : 



exterae nationes (gentes) 
infer!, thovc below 

mare inferum, Tyrrhene Sea 

poster!. descendants 

super! d!, gods on high 

Distinguish : superior, 
altior, 



foreign nations 

apud Inferos in the infernal regions 

mare superum, Adriatic Sea 

postero die, on the following- day 

omnia supera, infera etc. 

higher in place 

higher in extent upward 



DEFECTIV E COM PARISON 

102. Defect Tva gradu positive"): without a positive (308): 

a. citerior, hither, (adj.) citimus, nearest on this side 
interior, inner intimus, inmost, intimate 
prior, first of two; former primus, foremost, first 
propior, nearer proximus, nearest 
ulterior, farther ultimus, farthest 

b. deterior, less goo d; inferior, deterrimus, meanest 
potior, preferable potissimus, most important 

Distinguish; peior, worse = more bad 

deterior, worse = Jess good 

103. Comparative or superlative supplied by synonyms or different 
forms of the same adjectives : 



alacer, lively; 

ferus, wild; 

frugi, worthy, honest; 

gnarus, acquainted 

with a thing; skilful; 
nequam, naughty; 

novus, new; 

novissimus, last 

agmen novissimum, rear guard 
propinquus, near, 
providus, circumspect 

sacer, sacred (to a god) 

salutaris, wholesome, 

vet us, old, 



alacrior, 
ferocior, 
friigalior, 

peritior, 
nequior, 
recentior, 



propior, 
providentior, 
s a n c t i o r , 
salutarior, 
vetustior, 



laetissimus (95, a.) 
ferocissimus 

frugal issim us 

perltissimus 
nequ issim us 
recentissimus 



proximus (102) 
provident issimus 
sacerrimus 
saluber r im us 
v e t e r r i m us 



34 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS 



§ 104-107 



104. 

a. 



105. 



NOTE: 

(decern, centum 
maior natu, 
maximus, natu, 
Cato pater or 
Cato filius or 



annos natus, 

minor natu, 
minimus natu, 
Cato maior, 
Cato minor, 



superior Africanus or A. maior, 
posterior Africanus, or A. minor, 
iuvenis, man between 40 and 45; 



(10, 100) years old 
older, younger {511) 
oldest, youngest 
Cato Sr. 
Cato Jr. 

the elder Africanus 
the younger Africanus 
(iunior, sg., not used) 



mniores 

senex, 

senior, 



younger class of citizens or of senators 
more than 60 years old 
between 45 and 60 



a. admodum difficilis | 

valde diflicilis > 

perdifficilis J 



STRENGTHENING OF THE DEGREES 

difficillimus, very difficult 



b. paulo difficilior quam, 
etiam difficilior quam, 
multo difficilior quam, 

c. vel difficillimus, 
quam difficillimus, 
longe difficillimus, 



somewhat more difficult than 

even more difficult than 

by far more difficult than {515} 

perhaps the most difficult 
as difficult as possible 
by far the most difficult 



ADVERBS FORMED FROM ADJECTIVES 

{For other adverbs see 114, 128, 129, 178-182, 346, 347, 351.) 

106. Most of the adjectives of the 2nd declension and 

some participles in us, when used as adjectives form their ad- 
verbs by adding e to their stems (21): 

pulcher, pulchr-e, 

liber, liber -e, 

assiduus, assidu-e, 

ornatus, 6rnat-e, 

107. Adjectives and other participles of the 3rd declension 
ending in ns, when used as adjectives, form their adverbs 
by adding er to their stems; adjectives of other endings 
add iter: 

clemens, clement -er, 
sapiens , sapient - er , 
fellx, fellc-iter, 

acer, acr-iter, 

similis, simil-iter, 



beautifully 

freely 

without intermission 

elegantly 



mildly, gently 

wisely 

luckily 

keenly 

similarly 



* i os : 1 1 1 



108. Some accus. sg. neut. are used as adverbs : 



nmltiim, 


much: 


nimium, too much; too 


pa u lu m, 


little; 


parum, too little 


facile, 


Ccisilv; 


non facile, with difficulty 




ceterum, for the rest 




109. Mi 


my abl. 


sg. neut. are employed 


as adverbs : 


cito, 




quickly necessarid, 


necessarily 


consulto, 




on purpose neeoplnato, 


unexpectedly 


continue"), 




right after optato, 


ace. to wish 


crebro, 




frequently perpetuo, 


perpetually 


falso, 




falsely ra.ro, 


seldom 


fortuito, 




by ch'd ncc secre 1 6 , 


secretly 


(de, ex) improviso, 


, on a sudden sedulo, 


busily 


manifesto, 




palpably sero, 


(too) late 


mfituo, 




mutually subito, 


suddenly 


Distinguish 


continuo, right after 








continenter = perpetuo = 


assidue 



110. To the following adjectives correspond adverbs of 
peculiar formation: 

bonus, bene, well; malus, male, badly 

alius, aliter, otherwise; propinquus, prope, near 

and ax, audacter, boldly; sollers, sollerter, skilfully 



iiequam, nequiter, 
diuturnus, diu, 
fidus, fideliter, 

repentmus, repente, 
temerarius, temere, 
recens, nil per, 

i m p u n e , 



worthlessly 

a long time 

faithfully 

suddenly 

indiscreetly 

lately 

with impunity 



firm us, 


f I r in e 


or firm iter, 


humfinus, 


hiiiQ a ne 


or h u m a n i t e r , 


largus, 


large, 


o r largi t er , 


certus, 


c e r t e , 


certainly; at least 


\vrus, 


ve re, 


according to truth 



firmly 

humanly; humanely 
abundantly 

certo, with certainty: 
ve r 6 truly; assuredly. 



36 
111 



COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 



COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 



§ 111-112 



Only such adverbs as are derived from adjectives can be 
compared. 

The comparative of the adverb is like the comparative of 
the corresponding adjective in its neuter form. 

The superlative of the adverb is formed from the super- 
lative of the corresponding adjective by adding e to the 
stem (20): 

ornate ornatius ornatissime 

elegantly 1 more elegantly 1 most elegantly 
2 too elegantly 2 vtry elegantly 



a. prudenter, 
celeriter, 
crebro, 

b. bene, 
male, 
prope, 

paulum 



prudently; prudentius, 
swiftly; celerius, 

frequently; crebrius, 



well; 

badly; 

near; 



melius, 

peius, 

propius, 



non multum j httk > minus, 

nequiter, worthlessly; nequius, 

mature, [opportunely; maturius, 

( early 



prudentissime 

celerrime 

creberrime 

optime 

pessime 

proxime 

minime 

nequissime 

/ maturissime 
\maturrime 



112. 



IRREGULAR COMPARISON 



diu, 
saepe, 

magnopere, 
magno opere, 

multum, 



long; 
often; 

greatly; 
much; 



diutius, 


diutissime 


saepius, 


saepissime 


magis, 

more (in degree) 


£ maxime 

\ most (in degree) 


plus, 

more (in extent) 


{ plurimum 

\ most (in extent) 



§ 1 12 — 1 14 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS, NUMERALS 37 

Duper, lately; nuperrime, <juite recently 

merito, deservedly; meritissimo 

tiito, safely; tutius tutissimo 

P° tius \ prl e r r ahly PO^imum \%™*»' 

prius $ before primo, in the beginning 

<■ sooner primum, ^ for the first time 
I first 

posterins, later \ postremo, at last 

( post. e mum, for the last time 

satis, enough, satius, better; more 

serviceable 

nihilosetius } ^ , , 

nihilo minus \ nevertheless 

n 6 n s e t i u s none the less 

113. Note: The three degrees, especially the comparatives, ol adverbs in 
ee, ie, ue are very rare; they may be formed by means of magis and 
coaxime, or supplied by synonymous expressions: 

assidue, continually, magis assidue, more incessantly 
assiduissime (Cic.) or maxima assiduitiite, most incessantly 



NUMERALIA : NUMERALS 



114. The Question is answered by 

quot, how many? adiectiva cardinalia 

n ii ot ii « / which in order? . . _ _,._.. 

quotus, { ofwhkhnumherini£lrow ? adiectiva ordinaha 

quoteni, how many at a time? adiectiva distributi va 

q u o t i e n s Jiow many times? adverbia numeralia 



38 


NUMERALS 


§ Ho 


115. 


Cardinalia 


Ordinalia 


1 


unus, a, um, one 


primus, a, um, first 


2 


duo, ae, o, two 


seeundus or alter, second 


3 


tres, tria, three 


tertius, third 


4 


quattuor 


quartus 


5 


qulnque 


quintus 


6 


sex 


sextus 


7 


septem 


septimus 


8 


oct 6 


octavus 


9 


novem 


nonus 


10 


decern 


decimus 


11 


undecim 


undecimus 


12 


duodecim 


duodecimus 


13 


tredecim 


tertiu s deeimus 


14 


quattuordecim 


quartus decimus 


15 


qulndecim 


quintus decimus 


16 


sedeeim 


sextus decimus 


17 


septendecim 


septimus decimus 


18 


duode viginti 


duode vicensim u s 


19 


unde viginti 


undevicensimus 


20 


vlginti 


vicensimus 


21 


unus et viginti 


unuset vicensimus 




or viginti unus 


or vicensimus primus 


22 


duo et viginti 


a 1 1 e r et vicensimus 




or viginti duo 


or vicensimus alter 


23 


tres et vlginti 


tertius et vicensimus 




or viginti tres 


or vicensimus tertius 


28 


duode triginta 


duodetricensimus 


29 


unde triginta 


undetrlcensimus 


30 


triginta 


tricensimus 


40 


quadraginta 


quadragensimus 


50 


qulnquaginta 


qulnquagensimus 


60 


sexaginta 


sexagensimus 


70 


septuaginta 


septuagensimus 


80 


o c 1 6 ginta 


octogensimus 


90 


nonaginta 


nonagensimus 



1 15 



:;m 



Distributrva 


Adverbia numeralia 


Notation 
I 


singuli, ae, a., one by one 


semel, onec 


bini, ae, «-i, two 6j hvo 


bis, twice 


II 


term, three by three 


ter, three times 


III 


quaterni 


quater 


1111= IV 


(|iiTni 


quinquiens or ies 


V 


seni 


sexiens 


VI 


septeni 


septiens 


VII 


o c t o n T 


oetiens 


VIII 


noveni 


noviens 


Villi = IX 


(1 eni 


deciens 


X 


undeni 


nndeeiens 


XI 


duodeni 


duodeciens 


XII 


t er hi dem 


ter deciens 


XIII 


quaterni denl 


cjuater deciens 


XIIII = 

XIV 


cjiiinT denl 


quinquiens deciens 


XV 


sen! denl 


sexiens deciens 


XVI 


septeni denl 


septiens deciens 


XVII 


du ode viceni 


duodevlciens 


XVIII 


tinde viceni 


undeviciens 


XIIII^ 

XIX 


viceni 


viciens 


XX 


singuli et viceni 


semel et viciens 




or viceni singuli 


or viciens semel 


XXI 


bini et viceni 


bis et viciens 




or viceni bini 


or viciens bis 


XXII 


ternl et viceni 


ter et viciens 




or viceni ternl 


or viciens ter 


XXIII 


duodetriceni 


duodetriciens 


XXVIII 


undetriceni 


undetrlciens 


XXIX 


trlcenl 


trlciens 


XXX 


quadrageni 


quadra gi ens 


XL 


qumquageni 


qulnquagiens 


L 


sexageni 


sexagiens 


LX 


septuageni 


septuagiens 


LXX 


o c 1 6 genl 


octogiens 


I LXXX 


nonageni 


nonagiens 


xc 



40 



NUMERALS 



§ 115-117 



100 


centum 


centensimus 


200 


ducenti, ae, a 


ducentensimus 


300 


trecentl 


treeentensimus 


400 


quadringenti 


quadringentensimus 


500 


qumgenti 


quingentensimus 


600 


sescenti 


sescentensimus 


700 


septingenti 


septingentensimus 


800 


octingentl 


octingentensimus 


900 


nongenti 


nongentensimus 


1000 


ruille 


millensimus 


2000 


duo milia 


bis millensimus 


1000000 


deciens c en ten a milia 


deciens centiens millensimus 


" 5000000 


quinquagiens centena milia 


quinquagiens centiens 




millensimus 



DECLENSION OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES 
116. The only cardinals declined are 

1, unus, duo, tres 

2, the hundreds above 100 

3, the plural milia 





m. f. n. 


m., f. 


n. 


Nom. 


unus, una. unum 


duo, duae, 


duo 


Gen. 


U111US 


duorum, duarum, 


duoum 


Bat. 


unl 


duobus, duabus, 


duobus 


Ace. 


unum, unam, unum 


duos or duo, duas, 


duo 


Abl. 


uno una, uno 


duobus, duabus, 


duobus 






m. f. n. n. 








Nom. 


tres, tres, tria 


milia 








Gen. 


tri um 


milium 










Dat. 


tribus 


milibus 










Ace. 


tres, tres, tria 


milia 










Abl. 


tribus 


milibus 







117. a. Ambo, ae, 6, both, is declined like duo, ae, o. (173) 



erant itinera duo 
amborum consulum 
cum duabus legionibus 



* 117-119 



M MKKAI.S 



II 



centeni 


centiens 


C 


due e n T 


ducentiens 


cc 


treeenT 


trecentiens 


ccc 


quadringeni 


quadringentiens 


cccc 


qumgeni 


qumgentiens 


D 


scsccmiT 


seseentiens 


DC 


septingeni 


septingentiens 


DCC 


octingem 


octitigentiens 


DCCC 


nongeni 


nongentiens 


DCCCC 


singula milia 


milliens 


M - CIO 


bina milia 


bis mil liens 


MM - IT 


deeiens cent e n a milia 


deeiens centiens milliens 


|X| 


qumquagiens centena milia 


quinquagiens centiens milliens 


\u 



b. mi lie is an indeclinable adjective, 
milia is a declinable substantive: 

mille homines : a thousand men 
mllle hominum : of a thousand men 
tria -milia hominum: three thousand men 
tribus milibus hominum : to three thousand men 

118. The ordinals and distributives are declined like 
adjectives of the 1st and 2d declensions; the genitive plural of 
the distributives (except singulT) however, usually ends in um 
instead of 6 rum : 

singula rum; blnum, binarum, blnum 

Note : alter, a, urn, second, is declined Hke iinus, a, um : 
genitive: alter I us; dative: alter!. 



119. 



COMPOUND NUMERALS 



a. In numbers from 21-99 inch 

either the lower denomination precedes with et, 
or the higher denomination precedes without et 
sex et viginti or viginti sex. 



42 COMPOUND NUMERALS, USES OF NUMERALS § 119-122 

b. In numbers above 100 
the higher denomination usually precedes without et : 

101 = centum (et) unus 

110 - centum (et) decern 

126 = centum viginti sex 

2300 men - duo milia trecentT homines 

or duo milia hominum et trecentT 
with 2300 men = cum duobus milibus trecentis hominibus 

or cum duobus milibus hominum et trecentis 

NOTE: Unus must be separated from a plural substantive : 
unus et viginti milites 
unius et viginti militum 
iinum et viginti milia hominum 

c. The compounds of tens with 8 or 9 are commonly ex- 
pressed by subtraction, duo- andun- remaining unchanged : 
duodetriginta naves, 28 ships 
undecentum nautae, 99 sailors 
but duae et trlginta naves, 32 ships 

USES OF NUMERALS 

120. An "infinite" number is formed by 
sescenti, millensimus milliens: 

sescentl ceciderunt, thousands fell 

vix millensima est pars an utterly sm all fraction 

milliens melius est this is infinitely better 

121. Dates and hours are expressed by ordinals: 

In 1821 : anno millensimo octingentensimo vicensimo uno 
(or primo): 

n , -. -, i exeunte hora nona or ineunte hora decima. 
at 3 o ciock: \ mo( ^ ern i ze( j : hora tertia (i. e. exeunte) 

122. Fractions (partes) are expressed by cardinals and 
ordinals: the numerator by cardinals, the denominator by 
ordinals : 

tres septimae (partes is understood) = 3 / 7 

However, 
a. if the numerator is 1, the denominator only is given; 
septima pars = V 7 decima pars = y 10 ] 



§ 122-125 USES OP NUMERALS 4;; 

b. if the numerator is but one smaller than the denomina- 
tor, the numerator only is mentioned : 

sexpartes-%; n o v e m p a r tes = '•' i () 

c. d i mid i a pars = V2. 

123. Distributives are used to express 

"so many apiece, so many at a time": 
den a iugera in singulos discripsit; 
he allotted ten acres to each one. 

NOTE? i. One of the two distributives is sometimes replaced by a cardinal ; 
decern iugera in singulos discripsit; 
dena iugera in elves discripsit. 

2. If "each, apiece" is understood; it is not expressed : 
unuui 6s habC-mus, duos pedes, duas manus. 

124. Excepting singuli and term, whose place is then taken by 
unl and trim, the distributives are also used instead of 
cardinals with nouns plural in form, but singular 
in meaning: 

u n a castra, one camp 

bin a castra, two camps 

trina castra, three camps 

quaterna castra, four camps, etc. 

125. NOTE: a. Qui and trlnl have one meaning, 

singuli and terni have two meanings, 
l)inT, quaterni etc. have three meanings. 

unae, trlnae litterae: one, three letters (epistles) 

, .... { one, three characters at a time 

singulae, teniae hUerae : J Qn ^ three letters (epistles) at a time 

C two, four etc. letters (epistles) 
blnac, quaternae etc. I'ae : 1 two, four etc. characters at a time 

I two, four etc. epistles at a time (See t 73) 

b. duo llberi, two children: 
(Liberi is plural both in form and in meaning.) 



44 USES OF NUMERALS, PRONOUNS . 

126. Numeral adverbs and distributives are employed in the 



§ 126-130 





MULTIPLICATION TABLE 


1X1 


= 1 


: semel unum est unum 


2X1 


— 2 


: bis singula sunt duo 


3X1 


= 3 


: ter singula sunt tria 


1X3 


= 3 


: semel tria sunt tria 


2X3 


= 6 


: bis tern a sunt sex 


3X3 


= 9 


: ter tenia sunt novem 



127. Multiplied tiva : Adjectives in plex, plicis. 

simplex, simple quadruplex, fourfold 

duplex, twofold septemplex, sevenfold 

triplex, threefold decemplex, tenfold 

128. Adverbia numeralia in um (formed from the ordinals) 

prlmum iterum, tertium postremum, 

tor the hist, second, third, last time; 

iterum consul, consul ior the second time. 



129. Note: a. Distinguish the preceding series from the following 
prlmum, deinde, turn, turn postremo or denique, 



hrst, secondly. 


thirdly, . 

next 

deinde, 






or: in the 1st place, then, 
b. prim 6 , at hrst; 


lastly 
afcerward; p o s tea 


, later on 



PRONOUNS 



I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS 

(Pronomina personalia) 
130. 

There are reflexive and non-reflexive personal pro- 
nouns; they are reflexive, when they refer to the subject of the 
sentence; otherwise they are non-reflexive. The reflexive and 
non-reflexive pronouns have the same Latin forms in the first 
and second persons; in the third person, however, different 
forms are used . 

( For a complete explanation of the reflexive pronoun see Syntax) 



§ LSI 



I'EKSi >\ \i. rii'iNorxs 



15 



131. 

vS 


FIRST PERSON 




ingular Phi nil 




No. ego 


\ I 
\- 


nos 


( we 


Gen. mei 


\ of me 

\ of myself 


nostrl 
] nostrum 


[ oi us 

[of ourselves 
fof, among us 
\of, among our- 
selves 


Dat. mini 


\ to, for me 

\ to, for myself 


nobis 


j to, for us 
\to, for oursefs 


Ace. me 


\ me (25) 

\ myself( as object, 25) 


nos 


\us 

\ ourselves (as 
object, 25) 


a me 

Ahl ' 


( by me 

\ by myself 


a nobis 


j by us 

\ by ourselves 


) _ ( with me 
[mecumj withmyself 


nobiscum 


\ with us 

\ with ourselves 



SECOND PERSON 



No. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Aec. 

Abl. 



Singular 



Plural 



t\\ 



tui 



tibi 



to 



| thou, vou 

t- 

\ of you 

\ of yourself 



\ to, for you 

\ to, for yourself 

\ you (as ob- 

\ yourself ject, 25) 



vos 



vou 



vestri { of y° u , 

\ or yourselves 

vestrum { of i ^ongyou 

\ of, among your- 
selves 



\ by you 

\ bv yourself 

I tecum ( wMyou 

[ \ with yourself 



a te 

tecum 



vobis 



vos 



f to, for you 

\ to, for yourselves 

j you (as object, 
\ yourselves 25) 



a vobis (by you 

\ by yourselves 

vobiscumi ™th you 

\ with yourselves 



46 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS 



§ 132-134 



132. a. 

b. 

But c. 

Gen. : 

Dat. : 
Abl. : 

133. 



Nostri and vestri are objective genitives (439): 
menior nostri, vestri, mindful oi us, of you; 

Nostrum and vestrum are partitive genitives (442) 



quis vestrum laudat ? 

nemo nostrum laudat 

Nos omnes laudamus, 

yds omnes laudatis 

nostrum omnium 

vestrum omnium 

nobis omnibus 

a nobis omnibus 
noblscum omnibus 
cum omnibus vobls 



who of you praises? 

no one of us praises 

all of us praise 

all of you praise 

of all of us (448) 

oi all of you 

to all of us 

by all of us 
with all of us 
with all of you 

THIRD PERSON 



The non-reflexive form for the nominative of the third person is 
wanting: but it is replaced by the nominative of the determinative pronoun; 
the non-reflexive forms for the oblique cases, however, are the same as 
the corresponding forms of the determinative pronoun. 



134. 



Non-reflexive Forms 



Reflexive Form:- 



Singular 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 

Abl 



is, ea, id, 
ems, eius, eius, 
el, el, el, 
eum, earn, id, 

!eo, ea, eo, 
ab eo, 
cum, eo, 



it — 



he, she, 

of him 

to him 

him, her, it 

by means of it s< ^ 

by him a se, 

secum, 



SUl, 

sibi, 

se, 



with him 



of himself. 

to himself. 

himself. .( object) 

by itself. 

by himself 

with himself 



Plural 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 

Abl. 



ii ( el) , eae, ea, they J — 

eorum, earum, eorum, oi them sul, 

iis or els, to them sibi, 

eos, eas, ea, them se, 

( iis, or els, by means of them\ se, 

\ ab iis, by them ; ^ g ^ 

f cum iis, with them - ' 

secum, 



of themselves... 
to themselves... 
themselves (object ) 
by themselves(th.ings) 
by themselves 
with themselves 



he praises himself, his own person 
he jjraises him, another person 



se laudat, 
eum laudat, 



§ 135-139 possessive pronouns 



i; 



STRENGTHENED FORMS 

135. Many forms of the personal pronouns can be strengthened : se by re- 
duplication, tu by appending to, the other forms except the non- 
reflexive 3d person and the genitive, by appending met : 

egomet, memet, mihimet, nosmet, nobismel 

tute, temet, tibimet, vosmet, vobisnaef 

scse, sese, sibimet, a sese 



136. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 
(Pronomina possessiva) 



Non-reflexive Forms 


Reflexive Forms 


1st and 2nd Person 


1st and 2d Persons : 


All cases of 


The oblique cases of 


mens, a, urn, my 


meus, a, um, my 


noster, a, nm, our (32) 


noster, a, um, our 


tuns, a. um, your (sg.) 


tuus, a, um, your (sg.) 


vester, a, nm, your (pi.) 


vester, a, um, your (pi.) 


3d Person: 


3d Person 


The unchangeable genitives 


All cases of 


eius, his, her, its 


suus, a, um, his etc. own 


eorum, earum, eorum, their 


suus, a, um, their own 



137. 

Note 1 : Meus, noster, tuns, vester and suus are pronominal adjectives 

of the 1st and 2d declensions (32); 

eius, eorum, earum, are the unchangeable genitives of the determ- 
inative pronoun (133, 142). 
Note 2: If the possessive can be understood from the context, it is omitted: 
amicum laudat, he praises his (own) friend. 

138. Suus is used to refer to the subject : 
amicum suum laudat, he praises his own friend. 
Use eius in all other cases : 

amicum eius mortuus est, his friend is dead 

(referring- to a word mentioned previously) 

amicum eius laudat, he praises his friend (another person's whose 
name is alieady known) . 

139. STRENGTHENED FORMS 

suopte pondere, by its own weight 

suapte tnanii, with his own hand 



48 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS § 140-141 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 
(Prono'mina demonstrativa) 

140. Hie, haec, hoc, this {near me) 

iste, ista, istud, that {near you) 
ille, ilia, illud, that (near him) 







Singular 




Plurai 


[ 


Nom. 


hie, 


haec, 


hoc 


hi, hae, 


haec 


Gen. 




huius 




horum,' harum, 


horum 


Bat. 




huic 




his 




Ace. 


htmc, 


hanc, 


hoc 


hos, has, 


haec 


Abl. 


hoc, 


hae, 


hoc 


his 




Nom. 


ille, 


ilia, 


illud 


illT, illae, 


ilia 


Gen. 




illius 




illorum, illarum, 


illorum 


Bat. 




ill! 




illis 




Ace. 


ilium , 


ill am, 


illud 


illos, illas, 


ilia 


Abl. 


illo, 


ilia, 


illo 


illis 





141. Xotes: a. Iste is declined like ille. 

b. The forms of hie ending in s may be strengthened 

by ce: huiusce, hosce, hasce, hisce. 

c. A secondary form for hae is haec. 

d. Rare forms for ille and iste are : illic, illaec, illuc, 
istic, istaec, istuc, (accent on the ultima : 9, c) 

e. When the interrogative ne is appended to the old 
forms in ce, the ending -cene is weakened into cine : 

hicine, baecinc, hocine, illicine ? 



§ 142-143 



DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS 



49 



DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS 
( Pronomina determinativa) 

14-2. The determinative pronouns specify the objects for which 
they stand. (See 143.) 

( 1) he, she, it; this , that 

is, ea, id 1 {referring to something preceding) 

I 2) he, she, this , that , the... 

(Declined 134) ( (as antecedent to qui with the indicative) 

\ 3) a , such a , the 

( (as antecedent to qui with the subjunctive) 

Idem, eadem, idem, the same 

ipse, ipsa, ipsum, -self (144) 

143. Is ( without qui) refers to a noun or clause preceding (374): 
apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus O rgeto rix was by far the most noble 
fuit Orgetorix. Is coniurationem among the Helvetians. This influential 
nobilitatis fecit. man formed a league of the nobles. 

Is, qui with the indicative determines the individual object for 
which it stands by a fact; is qui with the subjunctive describes the class 
by a characteristic (375, 673 sqq.) ; 
is sum, qui feci lam the {boy, man) who did this 



n 6n is sum qui terrear 



I am not the (boy, man) to be frightened 
or a boy that could be frightened 





Singular 




Plural 




Nom. 


idem eadem 


idem 


idem eaedem 
eorundem 


eadem 


Gen. 


eiusdem 




earandem 


eorundem 


Dat. 


eldem 




Tsdem 




Ace. 


eundem eandem 


idem 


eosdem easdem 


eadem 


Ahl. 
Nom. 


eodem eadem 


eo dem 


Tsdem 




ipse ipsa 


ipsum 


ipsT ipsae 


ipsa 








ipso rum 




Gen. 


ipsius 




lpsarum 
i 


psorum 


Dat. 


ipsi 




ipsis 




Ace. 


ipsum ipsam 


ipsum 


ipsos ipsas 


ipsa 


Abl 


ipso ipsa 


ipso 


ipsis 





50 DETERMINATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS §144-146 

144. Distinguish the determinative self from the reflexive self: 

a. The determinative self, ipse, which is used to emphasize a 
word, agrees in gender, number and case with its substantive or pronoun : 

ispi puerl the boys themselves 
ipsorum puedrum of the boys themselves 
egomet ipse, nostrum ipsorum, nobismet ipsis 

b. The reflexive self , suT, sibi, se, never modifies, but refers 

to the subject only, being dependent incase on the word by which it is governed: 

(ipse j se laudat he praises himself 

(ipsa) sui immemor est she is unmindful of herself 

(ipsi) sibi consulunt they care for themselves 

145. Instead of the plural idem, also iidem and eidem, 
instead of the plural isdem, also ilsdem and elsdem occur. 



146, 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS 
(Pronomina relativa) 
Qui, quae; quod, who; which 







Singi 


ilar 


Nom. 


qui quae 


quod 


who, which 


Gen. 


CUIUS 




whose, of which 


Dat. 


cui 




to whom, to v/hich 


Ace. 


quern quam 


quod 


whom, which 


Abl. 


/a quo a qua 


quo 


by whom, by which 




\ quocum quacum quocum 


with whom, with which 






Plui 


-al 


Nom. 


qui quae 


quae 


who, which 


Gen. 


quorum quarum 


quorum 


whose, of which 


Dat. 


quibus 




to whom, to which 


Ace. 


quos quas 


quae 


whom, which 


Abl. 


a quibus 


quibus 


by whom, by which 




quibuscum 


with whom, with which 



$ 147-150 RELATIVE PRONOUNS .'. | 

14-7. The relative refers to a substantive or pronoun, expressed or understood, 
called its antecedent: 

puer, qui bonus est, laudatur 

qui bonus est, is laudatur 
qui bonus est, laudatur. 

148. instead of quocum also cum quo, 
instead of quacum also cum qua, 
instead of quibuseum also cum quibus occurs, 

149. Kelativee agree with their antecedents in gender and number; 
their case depends on their construction in the clauses to which they 
belong (396-398). 



150. GENERAL RELATIVES 

Relative pronouns, adjectives and adverbs become general in signification 
by taking cumque or by being doubled : 

1. Quicumque, quaecumque, quodcumque, whoever, whatever 
are declined like qui, quae, quod, cumque remaining unchanged : 

cuiuscumque, or cuicumque; 

quemcumque, quoscumque 

they are both substantives : quicumque bonus est, laudatur, 
and adjectives : quaecumque res 

2, Ouisquis (substantive) , whoever 
quidquid (substantive), whatever 

quoquo modo, in whatever manner 

NOTE: Of quisquis only the 3 preceding tonus are in common use. 



52 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN! 



$ 151-155 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 
( Pronomina interrogativa) 



151. 



Quis, who? Quid, what? 

(Used as Substantives.) 



Singular 


Plural 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

AbL 


quis quid 

cuius 
cui 
quern quid 
a quo quo 


qui 

quos 
a quibus 


quorum 
quibus 


quae 

quae 
quibus 



NOTE; Quis is either masculine or indeterminate (masculine or feminine) 
The dative singular was also pronounced cui (2 syllables). 



152. Qui, quae, quod, what kind of ? what? which? 
are used as adj ecti ves; they are declined like the relative 

153. Titer, utra, utrum, 1 which of two persons ? 

) which or what of two things/ 

are used both as substantives and as adjectives. (169). 

Substantives Adjectives 

quis nostrum, who of us (many)? qui rex, what kind of king? 

uter nostrum, which of us two ? \ utra manus, which hand ? 

quid factum est, what has happened ? quod facinus, what outrage? 



154. 



STRENGTHENED FORMS OF THE INTERROGATIVE 
Substantives 



quisnam, quidnam ? 

quis tandem, quid tandem? 



who, what indeed ? 
who, what in the world? 



Adjectives 

quinam, quaenam, quodnam? 
quaenam res? quae tandem res? 



of what kind indeed. 



155. qui (an old abl.) - quomodo? 

qui fit ? 



in what manner, how? 
how does it happen ? 



ff L5(i— 160 



INDKI'IMTK ri;« >N< 'I N! 



53 



156. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 

( Pronomina indefinita ) 



Used ns Substantives 
aliquis aliquid 


Used as Adjectives 


a 1 i q u l , aliqua, a 1 i q u o d 


someone something' 


some 


illrit aliquis, someone says 
dicit aliquin, he says something 


aliqui rex aliqua res 
aliquod verbum aliqua verba 


quis quid 

some one anything 


(1 u i , quae or qua, quod 
any 


(Used especially after si, nis 


i , ne, n u m , and relatives) 


si quis, // any one 

si quid, /'/" anything 

1 lit: lest any one 
ne quis, | JJjm . t i iatno one 

ne quid that nothing 


si qui rex, si quae or qua res 
si quod verbum, si quae or qua verba 
n e qui puer, that no boy 
ne qua causa, that no cause 
n e qua verba, that no words 



157. The compounds of quis and qui are declined like quis and qui. 
But aliqua - 1) fern. sg. now.; 2) neut. pi. n. and ace. of aliquis; 
quae or qua- 1) fern. sg. nom.; 2) neat. pi. n. and ace. of quis. 
The prerix ali - and the appended syllables remain unchanged. 

158. Quis and aliquis are sometimes used as adjectives; 
qui and aliqui are sometimes used as substantives; 

si quis rex - si qui rex 
si qui dicit = si quis dicit 

159. Quispiam, quaepiam, quippiam (quidpiam) - aliquis, aliquid 
quispiam, quaepiam, quoppiam (quodpiam) = aliqui, aliquae, aliquod. 



160. Num quis - ecquis; num qui = ecqui 

num quis dixit, did any one say ? 

ecqua civitas est, is there perhaps any city? 



54 



INDEFINITE PR< >NOUN5 



§ 161-1(52 





Used as Substantives 


Used as Adjectives 


neuter, neutra, neutrum 


neuter, 


neutra, neutrum 




neither of t wo 


neither of two 




nemo nobody 






Gen. 


n u 1 1 I u s 






Dat. 


nemini 






Ace. 

Abl. 


n era in em 
a null 6 


u u 1 1 VI s , 


nulla, nullum 


Gen. 


nihil nothing" 

n u 1 1 T u s r e i 




no (169) 


Dat. 
Ace. 


null! r e i 
nihil 






Abl. 


nulla re 






quisquam, iilla, quidquam 
PL villi, ullae, ulla 


villus, 

villi, 


villa, ullum 
ullae, villa 




anybody 




any 


a. nemo venit, nobody came 






neque quisquam venit, 
{and not anyone), i. e. 

and nobody came 






b. nihil fecit, he did nothing 
neque quidquam fecit, 

and he did nothing 


nulla spes no hope 

neque illla spes, 

(and not any) i. e. and no hope 

sine ulla s p e , without any hope 



162. Nemo and quisquam, instead of nullus and ullus, are added 

a. to adjectives used as personal masculine substantives 

b. often to personal masculine substantives : 



a. nemo Romanus, 

neque quisquam doctus, 



no Roman 

and no learned man 



b. nemo civis, no citizen 

neque quisquam servus, and no slave 



But: nulla res, 
neque ulla res, 
NOTE: Quidquam = quicquam 



no thing- 

and no thing- 



§ 163-16; 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 






163. Used as Substantives 


Used as Adjectives 


quldam, quaeda m , quidd a m 


quidam, quae dam, quodd am 


a certain one 


a certain 


Note: rad is changed into nd: 


amicus quidam, a certain friend 


quendam, quandam, quorundam 


{who might be named, if necessary) 



GENERAL INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 



164. Used as Substantives 


Used as Adjectives 


quisque , quid que 


quisque. quaeque, quod que 


each one (severally) 


each (severally) 


Xote : Quisque usually follows : 


a superlative : optimus quisque, 


all the best men 


( quotus quisque, 
an ordinal: ) quinto quoque anno 
( tertio qubque die, 


how few ( in leading clauses only) 
, every fourth year 
every other day 


a reflexive: pro se quisque, 


each to the best of his power 


a relative: quod quisque amat 


what every one loves 


an interrogative: quid quisque amet 


what every one loves 


165. 




unusquisque, u numquidque 


unusquisque, -quaeque, 


each one [individually) 


-quodque 


Gen.: linmseuiusque 


each (individually) 


Dat.: unicuique. 




166. 


■ 


uteroue, utraque, utrumque 


uterque, utraque, utrumque 


each of two (separately) 


each of two {separately) 




(See n. 100 and 173) 



167. -quisque and uterque are distributive; (104-106 ) 
omnes and ambo arc collective; 

omnea = all together 

ambo = two together, both 



56 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 



§ 168-171 



168. 



Other general indefinite pronouns 



Used as Substantives 


Used as Adjectives 


qui vis, quae vis, quid vis 


quivis, quaevis, quodvis 


any one you will 


any you will 


quilibet, quaelibet, quidlibet 


quilibet, quaelibet, quodlibet 


any one you please 


any you please 


utervis, utravls, utrumvis 


utervis, utravis, utrumvis 


either of two you will 


either of two you will 


uterlibet, utralibet, utrumlibet 


uterlibet, utralibet, utrumlibet 


either of two you please 


either of two you please 



169. 



PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 
(AdiectTva pronominalia) 

unus, solus, totus, ullus, 
uter, alter, neuter, nullus 
and alius. 





Singular 




Plural 




Now. 


unus, una, 


unum 


urn unae, 


una 


Gen. 


unius 




unorurn, unarum, 


unorurn 


Dat. 


uni 




unis 




Ace. 


unum, imam, 


unum 


unos, unas, 


una 


Abl. 


uno, una, 


uno 


unis 





unus, a, um, one 

solus, a, um, alone 

totus, a, um, whole 

ullus, a, um, any 



uter, utra, utrum, which of two 
alter, altera, alterum, 

the other 
neuter, neutra, neutrum, neither 
nullus, a, um, none 



alius, alia, aliud, another 

170. The genitive singular of alter, a, um, is alterius. 

The genitive singular of alius, a, ud, is alterius ; (alius is rare). 

171. Uter is both an interrogative (133) and an in d efi n it e relative 

utrum tibi commodum est, elige : 

choose the one of the two which suits you. 



§ 172-177 



PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS 



57 



172. Alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum, any of two 

alter uter, altera utra, alterum utrum, any of two 

Gen. alterutrius; alterlus utrius 

Distinguish : 
Uter puer, which of the two boys 

uterque puer, each of the two boys, both (Ki7) 

alter puer, one of the two boys 

neuter puer, ne i t her of the two boys 

alteruter puer, either of the two boys 

173. The plural of uterque is used 

a. esp. of two individual subjects regarded as be lo ngi n g together: 

utrlque scyphi, both goblets 

utraeque i-ius uxores, both his wives 

b. with p 1 u r a 1 i a t a n t u m : 

utraeque litterae, both letters 

c. to denote a plurality on two sides: 

utrlque, both parties 

1*74?. CORRELATIVES 

The relation of question and answer is expressed by 
correlative pronouns and adverbs. 



175. 



CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS 
( Pronomina correlatlva) 



QUESTION 


DEFINITE ANSWEE 


INDEFINITE ANSWER 


Interrogatives 

quia, who ? 
qualis, of what sort ? 
quantus, how great? 

quantum, how much ? 

quot, how many ? 


Detcrm. & Relatives 


Indefinite Pronouns 


is, qui, he who 
talis, qualis, such as 
tantus, quantus, 

so great as 
tantum, quantum, 

so much as 
tot, quot, so many as 
Note: tot and quot are indeclinable. 


aliquis, someone 

aliquantum, not a little 

aliquot, several; 

a goodly number 



176. 
177. 



Totidem, just as many tantundern, just as much 
quotquot - quotcumque how many soever 

Tantus, a, um and quantus, a, um, are adjectives: 
tantum, T, n., and quantum, T, n., are substantives 
tanta peeunia - tantum pecuniae, so much money 



58 CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVEBBS §178-179 

178. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVERBS 



I. 



Adverbia loci = Adverbs of Place 



1. Interrogativ 
et relativa 



ubi, where; unde, whence 

quo, where =whither q u a( via), by what way 



2. Determinativa 


3. Demonstratiiva 


4. Indeflnita 


i b i , there 


hie , 


here 


alicubi, somewhere 


ibidem, in the same 


istic, 


there (near you) 


alibi, elsewhere 


place 






iisquam, anywhere 


illic 


there{ near him) 


(in sent, with neg. 








meaning) 


e 6 , there - thither 


hu c, 


here - hither 


aliquo, to some place 


eodeni, to the same 


istuc, 


there ~ thither 


alio, to another place 


place 


illuc, 
hinc 


thttre = thither 
, hence from here 


quoquam, to any place 


i n d e , thence, from 


alicunde, from some- 


there 






where 


indidem, from the 


istinc 


thence (2d p.) 


aliunde, from another 


same place 


illinc 


thence (3d p. ) 


— [place 


e a , on that side 


hac, 


by this way 


aliquii, on some way 


eadem, by the same 


istac, 


by that way 


alia, on another way 


way 


iliac, 


by that way 


— 



General Relatives General Indefinites 

ubicumque, wherever ubique, everywhere 

quocumque, to whatever place niisquam, nowhere 

undecumque, from whatever place undique, from all sides 



179. 



NOTE: 

pronouns : 



Aliquo loco = alicubi 
alio loco = alibi 
(in) omnibus locis 



somewhere 

elsewhere 

everywhere 



Ubique is used almost exclusively after relative and interrogative 



omnes, qui ubique sunt 



all, wherever thev mar be 



§ 180-183 



CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVERBS 



n'J 



180. II. Adverbia temporis: Abverbs of Time. 
1 . [hterrogativa e t R e 1 a 1 1 v a 

quando ? , 

i i- i , i when 

cum (relative only; ^ 

quotiens how often 

quamdiii how long 



2. D e te rm in a tiva 


3. I) cm on strativa 
nunc, now 

anteh a c , before ( this 
present time) 

posth a c , after (this 

present time) 


4. Indefinita 


turn I then, 

tunc S at that time 

cum turn 

when , then 

ant "a, before ( any 

fixed lime) 
postea , after (any 

fixed time ) 


ali quando, at some 

time 
alias, at another time 

unquam (in neg. sent. ) 
at any time 


totiens, so often 
(totiens, quotiens) 




aliquotiens, some, 

i. e. several times 


tam diu, so long 

( tain diu, quam diu ) 


ad li u c , until now 


aliquamdiii, for some 
(considerable) time 



General Relatives 
quadocumque, whenever 

quotienscumque, however often 



General Indefinites 

numquam, never 



181. NOTE: a. quondam, at a certain time; formerly 

like quidam, a certain one 

b. olim, 1) formerly; 2) at a future date 



182. III. Adverbia mod i : Adverbs of Manner and Degree 



Interrogativa et Relativa 
ut, (uti), how 

(how, esp. before adjectives 



Deter m in a tiva 



M ) so, in such a manner 
ita, sic ^ 2 j so ^ tQ such a degree 

item, itidem, in the same manner 
quam y and adverbs) tam so, [esp. before adj. and adv.] 

quam bonus, how good tam fortis, so brave 

uuam bene, how well tarn fortiter, so bravely 



183. NOTE: tot pueri = tam multi puerl 

General Relative: utcumque - howsoever 



60 VERBUM FINITUM ET INIFINITUM § 184-186 

is*. VERBS 

The inflection of the Verb (Conjugation) comprises : 

1. Verb forms proper (verbum finitum), expressing 

mode, tense, voice and person, 

2. Noun forms (verbum infinitum) expressing: 

— , tense, voice and case. 

185. VERB FORMS WITH PERSONAL END!NQS 

Three Modi 

Indicativus or mode of realit\r. 
Coniunctivus or mode of conception. 
Imperativus or mode of command. 
Six Tempora 

Praesens : (continued) present action 

Imperfectum: (continued) past action 
Futurum I. : (continued) future action 

Per feet um: completed present action 

Plusquamp.erfectum : completed past action 
Futurum II. (exactum) completed future action 
Two Genera 

A c 1 1 v u m : subject represented as acting 
P a s s T v u m : subject represented as acted upon 
(About the Deponens see 214.) 

Three Personae and Two Numeri 

The first person (I — we), the person speaking 

The second (thou or you — you), the person spoken to 
The third (he, she, it — they), the person spoken of 

186. NOUN FORMS WITH CASE ENDINGS 

(Infmitivus rp„ -,_ 

el , ,. ^ -r ai-+- jVjerundivum 

Substantives:^ Gerundium, Adjectives: { p,-- • 

[Supmum *■ l r P} um 

Tenses: Praesens Futurum Perfectum (538) 

Voices : Actlvum Passivum 

Cases : NominatTvus et casus obllqul 



§ 187-101 
1ST. 



6] 



INTUX Tlo.N of THE VERBJ 



The forms of the Verb are derived from three stems, 
the Present Stem, the Perfect Stem, and the Participial Stem, 190.) 
and accordingly, comprise three systems, 
the Present System, the Perfect System and the Participial System. 

188. The manner <»f deriving verbal forms from the perfect and partici- 
pial stems is the same for all Latin verbs (ISO, lid ); but there are four dif- 
ferent type- of derivation from the present stem, known as 



189. 



THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS 



The four conjugations arc distinguished by the endings of 
the present infinite active: 

1st: are, 2d: ere, 3d:ere, 4th: Ire, 
laudare, monere, regere, audire, 

to praise, to advise, to rule, to hear. 



190 



FORMS OF THE VERB PROPER ( 1ST 



Every form of the verbum finitum consists of one of the three stems 
( 1871 and an ending, made up of signs for mode, tense and person. These 
signs, together with certain changes resulting from their union with the stems, 
appear in the single conjugations. 



191. 



PERSONAL ENDINGS 



Indicative 


and Suhjunetive Imperative 


Active 


Pass. & Bepon. Active Deponent 


Sing. 




Present Future Present 


1 m (O) 




Y 


2 s 




ris to re 


t 




tur (to) 


Pint. 






1 mits 




mur 


2 tis 




mini te tdte mini 


3 nt 




ntnr (nto) 



NOTE: a. The personal ending of {he first person singular is o, not m, in 
the Present Indicative, the T. Future of the first and second conjugations, 
and in the IT. Future. 
b. The personal endings of th Perft ct Indicative Active are : 
l, *«tT, i + , imU9, i^Hs, £rr:nt 



62 PRINCIPAL PARTS , § 192-194 

192. PRINCIPAL PARTS 

Three forms of the verb are known as the principal parts, 
because they show the three stems from which all other forms 
are derived : 

1. The Present Infinitive Active 

2. The Perfect Indicative Active 

3. The Perfect Participle Passive 





Pres. Infinitive Act. 


Perf. Indie. A. 


Perf Pert. Pass. 




I. 

II. 
III. 

IV. 


1 a u d - a - re 
mon-e-re 
r e g - e - re 
a u d - i re 


lauda. v-i 

monu-T 

rex-i 

audiv-i 


lauda. t-um 
monit-um 
rect-um 
audit-um 


to praise 
to advise 
to rule 
to hear 



193. The neuter of the perfect participle passive, (alike in form with 
the 1st supine) is chosen to represent the third principal part, because many 
verbs lack the masculine and feminine forms. 

Where al 1 forms of the perfect participle passive are wanting, the 
future participle active in -virus, if it occurs, is given. 

Many verbs lack the third stem, some both the second and third 
entirely. 

194. The 1st person singular of the present indicative active, 

the "name" of the verb in the Latin dictionaries, is easily formed from the 

first principal part : 

land -are, mon-ere, reg-ere, cap- ere, aud-ire 
laud -6, mon-e5, reg-6, cap-io, aud-id 

Note: Those verbs which change ere to id, are placed in a separate class; 
their conjugation will be found in n. 209; the corresponding list of verbs in n. 
251-254. 

Note : In reciting the principal parts the 1st person singular present indicative 
active is always mentioned together with the first principal part : 

laudare, 1 a u d 6 , laudavl, laudatum, to praise 



§ L95-19I 
195. 



PERFECT AND PARTICIPIAL SYSTEMS 



i'-:; 



SYNOPSIS OF THE PERFECT SYSTEM 
containing five verb-forms and one noun-form of the 
Active Voice 

Perfect indicative and subjunctive 
Plupf. indicative and subjunctive 
lid Fut. indicative ( no subjunctive) 
Perfect infinitive : 

laudav-, m o n u - , rex-, an d I v - 



1 en in 

eram i s s e m 
e r 6 — 
i vS s e 



196. 



SYNOPSIS OF THE PARTICIPIAL SYSTEM 

containing 
I . Five verb- forms of the 

Passive Voice: 

Per to ct indicative and subjunctive 
P 1 u ]> f . indicative and subjunctive 
2d K u t . indicative (no subjunctive) : 

1 a u d a t - , m o n i t - , r e c t - , audit- 
u s , a , u m ; I , a e , a 



s u m s i m 
eram esse in 
e r 6 — 

II. Seven noun-forms 



Perf. participle passive : 
Perf. infinitive passive 
Fut. participle active : 
Fut. infinitive active: 



us, a, urn; T, ae, a 
um etc., os etc. esse 
urns etc., uri etc. 
firum etc., tiros etc. esse 



1st and 2d supines: um, u (unchangeable) 

Fut. infinitive passive: um lri (unchangeable) 



64 

197 



PRESENT SYSTEM, I. AND II. CONJUGATION 



SYNOPSIS 



§ io; 



TENSES 



ACTIVE 



PASSIVE 



II. 



ACTIVE 



PASSIVE 



VERB FORMS 



laud - 6 
-as 
Present -at 

Indie. -am us 

-atis 
-ant 



Present laud -em 
Subj. -es, etc. 



or 

aris 
-atur 
-amur 
- amim 
-antur 

-er 
-eris 



Imperf. laud-abatn -abar 
Indie. -abas, etc. -abaris 



Imperf. laud-arem -arer 
Subj. -ares, etc. -areris 



laud-abo 
-abis 
I Future -abit 

Indie. -abimus 

- abitis 
-abunt 

Imper- laud -a 
a tive - ate 



-abor 

-aberis 

-abitur 

-abimur 

-abiminl 

-abuntur 



mon-eo 

-es 

-et 

-emus 

-etis 

-ent 


-eor 
-eris 
-etnr 

- emur 

- emini 
-entur 


mon-eam 

-eas, etc. 


-ear 
-earis 


mon-ebam 

-ebas, etc. 


-ebar 
-ebaris 


mon-erem 
-eres, etc. 


-erer 
-ereris 


mon-ebo 

-ebis 

-ebit 

-ebimus 

-ebitis 

-ebunt 


-ebor 

-eberis 

-ebitur 

-ebimur 

-ebimini 

-ebuntur 


mon - e 

-ete 


— 



X O U X FORM S 



Infinitive laud - are 





an 



Present laud-ans 
Partic. (Gen. - antis) 



Gerund laud -and!, 
ando, etc. 



Ft. Pass. 
Part. 



laud- andus, 

a, um 



mon - ere 



en 



mon -ens 

(Gen. - entis) 



mon-endi 

endo, etc. 



mon- endus, 
a, um 



§ 197 



•KKFKtT SYSTEM, III. A M i 



OVULATIONS 






OF THE PRESENT SYSTEM 



III. ACTIVK PASSIVE IV. ACTIVE 



PASSIVE 



TENSES 



V E K B F <> KM S 



reg-o 
-is 

-it 

-imus 
-itis 
-unt 

reg - am 

-as, etc. 



reg -ebam 



ebas, etc 



-eres, etc. 



reg 


-am 




-es 




-et 




-emus 




-etis 




-ent 


reg 


-e 



-ite 



-or 


aud-io 


-ior 


-ens 


is 


-lns 


-itur 


-it 


-ltur 


-inmr 


-Tunis 


-lmur 


-lmim 


-itis 


-immi 


- untu r 


-iunt 
aud - iam 


- iuntur 


-ar 


-iar 


-aris 


-ias, etc. 


-uiris 


-ebar 


aud-iebam 


-iebar 


-ebaris 


-iebas, etc. 


-iebaris 


■ erer 


aud-irem 


-Trer 


- ereris 


-ires, etc. 


-ireris,.... 


-ar 


and -iam 


-iar 


ens 


-les 


-lens 


-etnr 


-iet 


-ietur 


-emur 


-lemus 


- lemur 


-em mi 


-ietis 


-lemini 


-entiir 


-ient 


ientur 


— 


aud -i 


— 


— 


-ite 


— 



Present Indie. 



Present Subj. 



I in per f. India. 



Imperf. Subj. 



Future Indie. 



Imperative 



NOUN V \< M s 



reg - ere 



reg-i 



reg - ens 

vGen. -entis) 



reg -end! 
-end 6, etc. 



endus, 
a, m 



aud -Tre 



-in 



aud-iens 

((ien. ientis) 

aud-iendT 

-ieiul6,ete. 



Infinitive 
Pres. Partic. 

Gerund 



aud- iendus, Future Passive 
a, urn Part. 



66 
198. 



FIRST 



§ 198 



laudare, laudo, laudavi, laudatum praise 
ACTIYUM 



Indicati vus 



laud - 6, I praise, am praising, do p. 

laud - as, thou praisest, (you praise) 

laud -at, he (she, it) praises 

laud - amus, we praise 

laud - atis, you praise 

laud - ant, they praise 



laud-abam, 
laud -abas, 
laud-abat, 

laud-abamus, 
laud -abatis, 
laud -ab ant, 



/was praising-, praised 
thou wast(you were)prais- 
he was praising V m S 

we were praising 
you were praising 
they were praising 



Coniunctivus 



laud-em 

laud-es 
laud-et 

laud-emus 

laud-etis 

laud-ent 



laud-arem 
laud -ares 
laud-aret 

laud-aremus 

laud-aretis 

laud-arent 



— laud-abo, 
laud-abis, 
laud-abit, 






laud-abimus, 

laud-abitis, 

laud-abunt, 



/ shall praise 
you will praise 
he will praise 

we shall praise 
you will praise 
they will praise 



laudav-T, 

laudav-isti, 

laudav-it, 



I praised, I have praised laudav- erim 
you praised laudav -eris 

he praised laudav -erit 



u j laudav -imus, 
£ laudav -istis, 
i laudav -erunt, 



we praised 
you praised 
they praised 



laudav -erirnus 
laudav -eritis 
laudav -erint 



199. The subjunctive is used to 


express e. g. : 


Cause S 

( all pers. \ 
and tenses) S 


cum laudem 
cum laudarem 
cum non laudem 
cum non laudarem 


since I praise 
since I praised 
since I do not praise 
since I did not praise 


Result J 

(all ps. ) I 


ut laudem (604 ) 
ut non laudem 


(so) that I praise 

(so) that I do not praise 



Note: For practice the list of -verbs in n. 230 may be used. 



8 r 



CONJUGATION 



laudare, laudo, laudavi, laudatum praise 
PASSIVUM 







[ nd ica tlv us 


Coniunctivus 


laud- 
laud- 

laud- 

laud - 
laud - 
laud- 


or, 
aris, 

atur, 

amur, 
a mini, 
antur, 


/ am (being') praised 
you are praised 
he is praised 

we are praised 
you are praised 
they are praised 


laud-er 
laud-eris 
laud • etur 

laud - emur 

laud-emini 

laud-entur 


laud- 

laud 

laud 

laud 
laud 
laud 


abar, 
-abaris, 

-abatur, 

-a-bamur, 
-abamini, 

-abantur, 


I was (being-) praised 
you were praised 
he was praised 

we were praised 
you were praised 
- they were praised 


laud-arer 
laud-areris 
laud - aretur 

laud-aremur 
laud-aremiirl 
laud-arentur 


laud 
laud 
laud 


-abor, 
aberis, 
-abitur, 


I shall be praised 
you will be praised 
he will be praised 





laud - abimur, we shall be praised 
laud - abi mini, you will be pra ised 
laud - abuntur, they will be praised 



laudat-us sum, I was praised, have b. p., 

a \es, you were praised 
urn jest, he was praised 

laudat-T sumus, we were praised 
ae \estis, you were praised 
a /sunt, they were praised 



laud -atussim 
a \ sis 
um | sit 

laud-atisimus 
ae (sitis 
a fsint 



Purpose I ut laudem, ( in order) to praise; that I praise 
(all ps.) S ni - laudem, not to p., lest I p., that J do not p 

Rogo, rogabo, rogavero te, ut urbem liberes (619) 
rogfibam, rogavi, rogaveram te, ut urbem libera res 



Exhortation 5 

( 1st. ds. present S 



laudem us 
n e laademue. 



let us praise 
Jet us net praise 



(58 

200. 



FIRST 



§ 200 



ACTIVUM 



Indicativus 


C oniuncti vus 


^ laudav -eram, I had praised 
^ laudav -eras, you had praised 
£ 1 au d a v - er at , he had pra ise d 

cr laudav -eramus, we had praised 
d laudav -eratis, voa /?ad praised 
E laudav - erant, they had praised 


laudav-issem 
laudav-isses 
laudav -isset 

laudav-issemus 

laudav-issetis 

laudav-issent 


»-i laudav - ero, i" si7a/i A a re praised 
! laudav -eris, you will have praised 
5 laudav -erit, he will have praised * 

'^ laudav -erimus we shall have praised 
3 laudav -eritis, vow will have praised 
G-i lauda v - erint, t/?e v will have praised 


> 



Pres.: laud -a praise thou laud -ate praise ve 
, Fut. : laud-ato t/zou shalt pr. laud-atote re shall pr. 
S c« [Fut.: (laud-ato /ze shallpraise laud-anto they shallpr.) 






•jjj qj fPres.: laud -[are 
^S -fc < Perf. : laud - a visse 



to praise 

to have praised 



(Fut. : laud-aturum etc. esse to be about to pr( 196,11) 



•£ <u f'Pres.: laud- ans,(laudantis, 63) praising 
~^» Perf.: 



&h ° (Fut. : laudat-urus, etc, 



about to praise (196, II 



Nom.: (laud -are) 

Gen. : (ad)laud-andum 

Z)at. : laud -and! 

Ace. : laud-ando (rare); 

Ah I. : laud-ando 



(praising; to praise) 
(to or for) praising 
of praising 
to or for praising 
by praising 



Supinum I. laudiit - urn in order to praise (only with verbs of motion, 
as Ire, venire, mittere, 585) 



Supinum II. laudat-u to praise (only after fas, facilis etc., 587 ) 



201. Rule: Finite forms (184) of the verb take their subject in the 
nominative: 

Carolus (subject nominative) est puerprobus 
Infinitives (186), demanded e. g. by verbs of thinking and saying, as 
putare and affirmare, take their subject in the accusative : 

Puto Carolum (subject accusative) esse puerum probum ". : 
/ believe Carl' to be an honest bov 



x -l«» 






CONJUGATION 



PASSIVUM 



I n d i c a 1 1 v tt s 



Coniunctivus 



laudat - us leram, I had been praised laudat-us|essem 
a [eras, you had been praised a jesses 



u in 



erat, 



he had been praised 



vim 



esset 



laud a t - 1 ) era urns, we had been praised \ laudat -T ) essemus 



ae 
a 



eratis, 



) era nt, 

uulat-us] ero, 

eris, 

lerit, 



a 

n m 



you had been praised 
they had been praised 

I shall have been pr. 
you will h. I), praised 
he will h. b. praised 



ae 
a 



I cssetis 
essent 



laudat -T 
ae 
a 



) erimns, we shall h. b. praised 
Jeritis, you will h. b. praised 
j erunt, they will h. b. praised 



Not used 



I. praesentis : lauda-ri to be praised 

I. perfeetT : laudat -um ete., esse to have been praised 

I. futuri : laudat -umlri( 196, II.) to 6e about to be pr. 



P. praesentis: 
P. perfect! 



udat-us etc. praised, having been praised 



P. futuri 



((ierundivum) S 



laud -andus etc, 



j 1 ) (he, she. it) that must be praised 
( 2) deserving to he praised 



Puto patrem laud - are 
puto euin laud -avisse 
puto eum laud-aturum esse 
p u to pue ros 1 a u < 1 - a r I 
puto eos laud - atds esse 
puto miltrein laud - iitum 

202. Laud-aturus sum 

laud-audus sum 

laud-audum est 



I think ( that) the father praises 

I think (that) he (has) praised 

I think ( that ) he will praise 

I think (that) the boys are praised 

I think ( that) they have been praised 

I think (that ) the mother will be praised 

I am about to praise 
I must }>e praised 
one must praise ' - 1 - ) 



70 

203. 



* 20; 



SECOND 



monere, moneo, monui, monitum to advise 



ACTIVUM 



Pres. 



Impf. 
But. I. 

Perf. 
~PlupT 
Fut.IL 



I n d i o a 1 1 v u s 




Coniunctivus 


mon-eo, 

mon-es, 
mon-et, 
mon-emus, 
mon-etis, 
i mon-ent, 


I advise, am advis- 
ing, do advise 
you advise 
he advises 
we advise 
you advise 
they advise 


mon - earn 

mon-eas 
mon -eat 
mon-eamus 
mon-eatis 
mon-eant 


mon-ebam, 


I was advising 




mon-erem 


mon-ebo, 


I shall advise 






monu-T, 


I advised, have 


ad. 


monu-erim 


monu-eram 


I had advised 




monu-issem 


monu-ero, 


I shall ha ve advised 





Is OJ 



Pres. mon-e advise thou, mon-ete advise ve 

\ mon -eto thou shalt adv. mon-etote ye shall ad. 
Fut. \ ( mon - eto he shall advise mon - ento they shall 

advise) 



(Pres. 
U \ Per. 
§ (Fut. 



mon - ere 
monu-isse 
monit-urum etc. esse 



to advise 

to have advised 

to be about to advise 



■^fPres. 
&h ^ I Fut. 



mon-ens (mon-entis, 63) advising 



momt-urus etc. 



about to advise 



(Nom.: (mon -ere) 

: mon-endi 

: mon-endo 

: ad mon-endum 

Abl. : mon-endo 



c I Gen. 
xiDat. 
r ^ Ace. 



{advising, to advise) 
of advising 
to or for advising 
(to or for) advising 



by advising 



Supine I. monit-um in order to advise (only with verbs 
of motion; as, ire, venire, mittere, 585) 



Supine II. monit = u\.. ...to advise (only after fas, facilis etc. 587 



bntrl from mone-vi. 



* 20; 



CONJUGATION 



monere, moneo, monui, monitum to advise 


PASSIYUM 


I 


ndicativus 


Coniunctivus 


mon-cor, 

mon-eris, 
mon-etur, 

mon-emur, 
mon-emini, 

mon-entur, 


I am advised 

you are advised 
he is advised 
we are advised 
you are advised 
they are advised 


mon-ear 

mon -earis 

mon-eatur 

mon-eamur 

mon-eaminl 

mon-eantur 


mon-ebar, 


I was (being) advised 


mon-erer 


mon-ebor, 


1 shall be advised 




monit-us sum, 


I have been advised 


monit-us sim 


monit-us eram 


I had been advised 


monit-us essem 


monit-us ero, 


I shall have been advised 




Not used 


mon-eri, 

monit-um etc., 
monit-um Irl 


to be advised 
esse, to have been advised 
(unchangeable) to be about to be advised 


monit-us etc. 


advised, having been advised 


r , -,■ r> tr- ; i„ ^., a „ "> (he, she, it) that must be advised 

Gerundive - Participle : mon - endus \ deservin ^ to be advised 



204. NOTE: The forms of monere in the indicative and subjunctive, begin- 
ning with the imperfect, correspond to those of laudare ( 195-197, 191). 



mon-e-, 
of laud -a-, 



monu-, monit- 

laudftv-, laudat- 



taking the place 

(tin- endings being alike. ) 



72 

205. 



THIRD 



§ 205- 



regere, rego, rexi, rectum, to rule 



ACTIYUM 



Indie ativus 


Coniunctivus 


Pres. 


reg -6 I rule, am ruling, do 
reg-is you rule [rule 
reg-it he rules 
reg-imus we rule 
reg-itis you rule • 
reg - u nt th ey rule 

reg-ebam I was ruling' 


reg - am 
reg - as 
reg - at 
reg-amus 
reg-atis 
reg- ant 


Impi. 


reg-erem 


Fut. I. 


I shall rule 
reg - am reg - emus 
reg-es reg -etis 
reg-et reg-ent 




Perl 


rex -I I ruled, have ruled 


rex-erim 


Plup. 


rex - eram / had ruled 


rex-issem 


Fut.II. 


rex-ero 1 shall have ruled 





S^iFt 



Pr.: reg-e 



rule thou, reg 

/ reg - i to thou shalt rule reg 
((reg-ito he shall rule 



ite rule ye 
itote ye shall rule 
reg - tint 6 they sh a U ru Ie 



.^ f'Pr.: reg -ere 
5 <u ^ Pf. : rex - isse 
•fe (Ft.: rect-urum etc. esse 






to rule 

to have ruled 

to be about to rule 




reg -ens (reg-entis, 63) ruling 



£•& Ft. 



rect-urus etc. 



about to rule 



<3 



'Norn, (reg-ere) 
Ace. (ad) reg-endum 
Gen . reg - endi 
Dat. reg -end 6 
Abl. reg-endo 



{ruling, to rule) 
(to or for) ruling 
of ruling 
to or for ruling 
by ruling 



Supine I. rect - urn in order to rule ( only with verbs 
of motion; as, ire, venire, mittere, 585) 

Supine II. rect-ii to rule (only after fas, facilis etc. 587) 



§ 205 



CONJUGATION 



regere, rego, rexi, rectum to rule 


Indicativus 


Coniunctlvus 


reg - or I am ruled 
reg - eris 

reg -i til r 
reg-imur 
reg -im in! 
reg untur 


reg-ar 
reg-ar is 
reg - atur 
reg - amur 
reg -am in! 
reg -antur 


regebar I was (being-) ruled 


reg - erer 


I shall be ruled 
reg-ar reg-emur 
reg-eris reg-emim 
reg - e t u r reg - entur 




rect -us sum I was ruled 


rect -us sim 


rect - us eram I had been ruled 


rect -us essem 


rect -us ero I shall have been ruled 




Not used 


reg"-! to be ruled 

rect -um etc. esse to have been ruled 

rect -urn irl (unchangeable) to be about to be ruled 


rect -us etc. ruled, having been ruled 


Gerundive- Participle S I (he, she, it) that must be ruled; 
regendus etc. ( 2 deserving- to be ruled 



206. NOTE: The forms of regere in the indicative and subjunctive, except 
those of the present and future tenses, resemble the corresponding forms 
of laudare(195, 197, 191) 



of 



reg-e, reg-e, 
laud - a 



ivx - , rect - taking the place 

laudav- laudat- (the endings being alike). 



74 

207. 



§20' 



FOURTH 



audire, audio, audrvi, auditum, to hear 
ACTIVUM 



Indicativus 

aud-io I hear, am hear- 
ing, do hear 
aud -Is yon hear 
Pres. aud ■ it he hears 

aud - lulus we hear 
aud-ltis you hear 
and - run t the v he a r 



C oniuncti vus 



aud -i am 

aud-ias 
aud -i at 
aud -iamus 
aud-iatis 
aud -ia nt 



Imp/. aud -ieb am I was h earing aud-Irem 



Fut. I. 



I shall hear 
aud - iam audieraus 
aud-ies audietis 
aud-iet audient 



Perf. audiv-i I heard, have h. audiv-erim 



Plup. audlv-eram 1 have heard audiv-issem 



Fut.IIl audiv-ero I shall have h. 



£ qj fPr.: aud-i hear thou 
§,.£ { Ft.: aud-ito thou shalt h. 
S^(Ft.: aud-ito heshallhear 



aud-ite hear ye 
aud -ltote ye shall hear 
aud - iunto ihev shall hear 



C3 
3* 



fPr.: 



aud -ire 
audiv-isse etc 



Ft.: audit -urum esse 



to hear 

to have heard 

to he about to hear 



•A ^ (Pr.: aud-iens, (audientis, 63) hearing 

d/o (Ft.: audit- urus, enc. about to hear 



<3 



Nom.: (aud -ire) 

Ace. : (ad) aud-iendum 

Gen. : aud-iendl 

Dat. : aud-iendo 

Abl. : aud-iendo 



{hearing, to hear) 
{to or for) hearing 
of hearing 
to or for hearing 
by hearing 



Supine I. audit- um in order to hear (only with verbs of motion as 
ire, venire mittere, 585. ) 



Supine II. audit - u 



to hear (only after fas, faeilis etc. 587. ) 



S 207 



CONJUGATION 



aucllre, audio, audivi, audltum to hear 


PASSIYUM 


Indicati v u s 


Coniuncti vus 

and -iar 

aud-iaris 
aud-iatur 
aud-iamur 
aud - ia mini 
aud-iantur 


aud-ior I am heard 

aud -iris 

aud-itur 
and - imur 
aud -imini 
aud- hint ur 


aud - iebar / was ( being) tieard 


aud-Irer 


I shall he heard 
aud-iar aud-iemur 
aud-ieris aud-iemini 
aud - ietur aud-ientur 


audit -us sum J was {have 

been) heard 


audit -us sim 


audit -us eram I had been h. 


audit -us essem 


audit - us er6 I shall have b. h. 




Not used 


aud-iri to be heard 

audit -um esse to have been heard 

audit -um Iri (unchangeable) to be about to be heard 


audit -us etc. heard, having been h. 


Gerundive - Participle : S 1) {he, she, it) that must be heard 
audiendus etc. 1 2) deserving- to be heard 



208. NOTE: The forms of audlre in the indicative and subjunctive except 
those of the present and future tenses, resemble the corresponding 
forms of laudare (195-197; 191, 176), 

audie-, audi-, audlv-, audit-, taking the place 

of laudd laudav laudiit ( the endings being alike. ) 



76 THIRD CONJUGATION, VERBS IN 10 §209-210 

209. VERBS OF THE 3d CONJUGATION IN 10 AND IOR 



capere, capio, cepi, cap tarn, to take 



Active 



Pa 



ssive 



Indicativus Coniunctiv. Indicativus Coniunctiv 



| cap-io 
cap is 
Present cap -it 

cap-imus 
cap-itis 
cap -hint 



cap-iam 

cap-ias 

cap-iat 

cap-iamus 

cap-iatis 

cap - iant 



cap -i or 
cap-eris 

cap-itur 
cap-imur 
cap-iminT 
cap-iuntur 



cap-iar 
cap-iaris 

cap-iatur 
cap-iamur 
cap-iamini 
cap-iantur 



Impf. cap-iebam cap-erem 



„ cap-iam 

FutL cap-ies 



cap-iebar cap-erer 



cap-iar 
cap - ieris 



^ £ (Pres. cap-e, cap-ite 

gi'-B \ j cap - ito , cap - itote 

^ « [Fut. \(cap-it6,cap-iunto) 

. (Pres. cap -ere 

vS > J Per. cep-isse 

►5 .§ (Fut. capt-iirum etc. esse 

'£^ fPres. cap-iens (ientis, 63) 

^ .««; r-ei . — 
0^ ° (Fut. : capt-urus 



not used 



eap-i 

capt-um etc. esse 

capt-um TrT 



capt - us 



Gerund (ad) cap-iendum 



Future Passive Participle 
cap-iendus, a, um 



210. NOTE: In every form of the present system (197) the final 
consonant of the stem is immediately followed bv one i, 



f the present passive form c a pe ri s 

t : 1 the imperfect subjunctive forms caperem , ca perea etc. 

^ ] the imperative form cape 

( the infinitive form capere 

The perfect and participial systems are regular ( 180, 181 ) : 

cep-I, cep-eram, cep-ero etc. 
cant - us, capt - urns, capt - um etc. 



§ 211-213 PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION 77 

21 1. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUUA'l ION 

The active periphrastic conjugation is formed by combin- 
ing tliL 1 participle in (ir us with the verb sum; itdenotes an 
action which is imminent, or about to take place. 

The passive periphrastic conjugation is formed by com- 
bining the participle in ndus with the verb sum; it denotes an 
action which must or ought to take place, comprising the 
meanings of debeo, oportet and necesse est. 



Ooniugiitio periphrastica activa 



Indie, laudatiirus sum (eram ) I am {was...) about to praise 

Subj. laudaturus sim (essem ) 

S laud.lt firum etc, esse to be about to praise 

I laudfiturum etc. fuisse to have been about to praise 



Infin. 



Coniugatio periphrastica passiva 



S , , , W am to be, must be praised 

•nil on. nc sj n m i / * 



auuandus 



( .auuouuua ut« j /ought to be, deserve. 



Indie, s laudandus eram S I was to be, had..., deserved. 

} laudandus ero \ I shall deserve to be praised 



Snbj. laudandus siin (essem ) 



( laudandum etc. esse to deserve to be praised 

Infin. \ to be such as is to he praised 

( laudandum etc. fuisse ( to have deserved to be praised 



212. 1. A ''periphrastic" form is a " round about way of speaking." 

'2. The subjunctives in urus sum supply the wanting subjunctives of the 

I ut Ci r u m I. 

.">. Transitive verbs have all forms of the future passive participle : 
us, a, urn: I. ae, a; intransitive verbs have only the form in um (with est). 

213. Rule: The doer of the action expressed by the participle in ndus is 
put in the dative, except, when it has an object-dative : 

.,.,,, . S the boy must be praised by me, 

puer mihi laudandus est j { Q . f m u g £ praige the boy 

litterae ei scribendae sunt he must write a letter 

tibi conatu desistendum est you must give up the attempt 

tibi parendum est you must obey 

but leg! a te parendurn est you must obey the law 

. \ it is necessary not to praise 

laudandum non est -j jt js } mj)ru de'nt, unlawful to praise 

NOTE: For the use of the < Jerundive - Participle in oblique cases see 576-584. 



7S 214-216S 

DEPONENTS 

(Verba deponentia) 

Deponents are verbs which have "put aside" (deponere) the 
active forms that thev formerlv had. 



hortari, hortatus sum, to exhort 



Indicativus 



Pres. 



jhortor 
\hortaris etc. 



I exhort 
you exhort 



Coniunetivus 

horter 
horteris etc. 



Impf. 
Fut. I. 
Perf. 
Plup. 



hortabar 
hortabor 
hortatus sum 
hortatus eram 



Fut. II. hortatus ero 



/ was exhorting hortarer 

I shall exhort — 

I exhorted, ha^ree. hortatus sim 

I had exhorted 

I shall haTe exh. 



hortatus essem 



Pres. Imper. h or tare exhort thou hortamini exhort ye 
Fut. Imper. not used 



Pres. In fin. 
Perf. In fin. 

Fut. Infin. 

Pres. Par tic. 

Perf. Partic. 
Fut. Partic. 

Gerund 

Fut. Pass. 
Partic. 

Supine I. 
Supine II. 



hortari 

hortatum etc. esse 
hortaturum esse 



to exhort 

to have exhorted 

to be about to exhort 



hortans (antis, 63 
hortatus etc. 
hortaturus etc. 



exhorting 
having- exhorted 
about to exhort 



ad hortandum 



to or for exhorting 



hortandus etc. 



(he etc.) that must 
he exhorted 



hortatum, 
hortatu 



in order to exhort{bSb) 
to exhort [587) 



2 15. The deponents have the following forms : 

1 ) all passive forms, except the infinitive in Iri; 

2 ) some active forms : 

the future infinitive 

the pres. and fut. participles 

the gerund 

the supines 

216. All forms of the deponents have active meaning 
except the participle in ndus, which has passive 
meaning. 



hortaturum esse 
hortans, hortaturus 

ad hortandum 

hortatum, hortatu 



§ 217-21W DEPONENTS, PASSIVE OF DEPONENTS 7<» 

217. DEPONENTS OF THE 2d, 3d AND 4th CONJUGATIONS. 

II. vererl, vcritus sum, feel a we of 
Imperative', verere, veremini (214) 

III. sequT s ecu t us sum, follow 
Present : sequor, sequeris 
Imperative: sequere, sequiminT 

p a t T , passus sum, suffer 

Present : patior, pateris 
Imperative: patere, patimim 

IV. partiri, partitus sum share 
Imperative: partire, partlminT 

218. PASSIVE OF DEPONENTS (cf. 265) 

The passive of deponents is supplied by synonymous 
expressions or circumlocutions, e. g.: 

Passive 



Active 

hortari, exhort 
suspiean, suspect 
oblivisci, forget 
adgredi, attack 

admirari, admire 



moneri 

in suspicionem vocari 

oblivione obrui 

fit impetus in hostes 

(res admirationem habet 

J res admiration! est 

Irei admlratio est 
laudari 



219. Some perfect participles of deponents are both active and passive 
in meaning; when passive, they are not employed to form tenses : 

Passive meaning 

pater fllio comitatus (505) accompanied by his son 

exercitus partitus divided army 

agri d e p o p u 1 fi 1 1 devastated lands 

scelus m e d i t a t U m premeditated crime 

mala oplnata imagined c vils 



80 



SEMIDEPONENTS, PASSIVE PARTICIPLES 



§ 220-223 



220. SEMIDEPONENTS 

( Semideponentia) 

Semideponents have onlysome passive forms with active 
meaning, either in the perfect or in the present system : 

Soleo, audeo, gaudeo, 

fido, confido, diffido; 

revertor and devertor, 

and mereor, paciscor. 



solitus sum to be wont 
ausus sum venture 

gavisus sum rejoice (abl.) 
fisus sum \rely on 

confisus sum ] trust (508) 
difflsus sum distrust (dat.) 



a. solere 


soleo 


audere 


audeo 


gaudere 

fidere 

confidere 


gaudeo 

fideo 

confido 


diffidere 


diffido 


h. merer! 


mereo 


Bene de te mereor, 


pacisci 


pacTscor 


reverti 


revertor 


deverti 


devertor 


221. NOTE: 1. 


Keversus, 


2. 


S gavisus, 
( rejoicing-, 



deserve 



make a contract 



Jmerui 
\meritus sum 

I deserve well of you 

/pepigi 

(pactus sum 
reverti return 

deverti lodge 

having returned 
fisus, difflsus 

trusting, distrusting 

3. reversurus, deversurus, about to return, lodge 

222. PASSIVE PARTICIPLES WITH ACTIVE MEANING 

cenatus, having dined; after dinner 

pransus, having breakfasted; after breakfast 

iuratus, having sworn; (also pass .: sworn) 

p 6 1 u s , ha ving drunk; ( also pass.: drunk ) 



223. 



PASSIVE PARTICIPLES USED AS ADJECTIVES ONLY 



adultus, grown up 

assuetus, accustomed 

inveteratus, deep-rooted 

error inveteratus, 



nupta, married 

obsoletus, worn out, obsolete 

praeteritus, past 
a deep-rooted error 



annus praeteritus, the past year 



§ 224-227 



NEUTKAL PASSIVES, PECULIARITIES IN CONJUGATION 



SI 



N EUTRA L PASS I V*E V ERBS 

(Neutralia p a s s I v a ) 
Fieri, perire, venire are aetive in form and appar 
entlv passive in meaning (292,295). 

PECULIARITIES IN CONJUGATION 



225. a. The ending re is used instead of ris iu the 2d ps. sg. 
of the passive and the deponent, when no ambiguity arises : 

laudaris, lauderis, laudabaxis, laudaroris, laudaberis 
— laudere, laudabare, laudarere, laudabere 

hortiiris, hortere, hoitabare, hortarere, hortabere 

b. In the perfect system 
vi is dropped before s, 



laudasse 


- assem 


- asti, 


delesse 


- essem 


- esti, 


cognosse 


- ossem 


- osti 


audisse 


- Tssem 


- isti, 



ve and v before r, 




- arunt - arim - aram 


- ard 


- erunt - eriin - eram 


-ero 


- orunt - orim - oram 


- oro 


- ierunt -ierim -ieram 


- ierd 



NOTE: Lavare, iuvare, cavere retain the v of their stems. 

NOTE: The ending ere is sometimes used instead of erunt : 
laudavere = laudaverunt 

226. The present imperative of dlcere, ducere, facere, 
ferre drops the final e: die, due, fac, fer; 

also their compounds, except those of facere : 

(maledic), educ, effcr (9, c) 
effice, interfice, calfa.ee (9, c) 

227. The future imperative (laudato, laudanto) is found in laws and 
In poets only; in classical prose the present subjunctive is used instead : 

laudet, laudent, be, they shall praise 
EXCEPTION: < >f Bcire only scito and scitote are used as imperatives. 



oo 



LIST <>F VERBS 



§ 228-230 



228. 



LIST OF VERBS 



The verbs of each conjugation are classified chiefly accord- 
ing to the different formations of the perfects: 

1. Perfects formed by v, u, s; 

2 . Perfects formed by reduplication; 

3. Perfects formed by lengthening or ablaut of the root- 
vowel; 

4. Perfects without apparent change of stem. 

229. NOTE: a. It will prove useful to recite all the forms of the three 
systems (195-197); e, g. : 

sectus, sectum esse 
seetiirus. serturum esse 
sectum. sectum iri 
or the groups of infinitives, participles etc. : 
e.g.: praising laud a lis 

being praised wanting (575) 

having praised wanting (574) 

( having been ) praised 1 a u d a t u s 

about to praise 1 a u d a t u r u s 

one that must be praised 1 a u d a n d u s 

b. Before enumerating the passive forms of a verb, state whether it 
is transitive (360), forming a complete passive, as 

laudor, laudaris, laudatur, etc. 

or i n tr ansi five (362), forming an impersonal passive only, as 
sal t a t u r , there is dancing 

230. FIRST CONJUGATION : are, 6 

Like laud a re: 



conclamare 

commutare 

decla.ra.re 

declmare 

defatigare 

explorare 

ignorare 

salutare 



shout 
change 
make clear 
turn aside 
tire 

explore 
not know 
srreet 



collocare place 

commemorare mention 



conclamo 



dissipare 
explicare 
flagitare 
na.viga.re 
occupare 
renovare 
colloco 



disperse 
unfold 
entreat 
(set) sail 
seize 
rene w 



& 231-233 



LIST OF VERBS, I CONJUGATION 



VS 



231. PERFECT FORMED BY V 

potare poto ]>6tavi potiim drink, tope (222) 



232. 



PERFECTS FORMED BY U 



c u b a r e 


cubo 


cubul 


cubitutn 


recline 1 


doraarc 


do mo 


domuT 


do mi turn 


tame 


vetare 


veto 


vetnl 


vetitum 


forhid- 


increpar e 


increpo 


-crepui 


-crepitum 


r eh uke 


sec a r e 


sec 6 


seen! 


see turn 


cut* 


in i c a r c 


mico 


niicuT 


-(193) 


gleam, quiver 


d I m i c a r e 


dimico 


- micfivi 


-micatum 


tight 


sonare 


son 6 


sonuT 


— 


sound 4 " 


t o n a r c 


tono 


tonul 


— 


thunder 



233. 
dare 



PERFECTS FORMED BY REDUPLICATION 



do 



ded! datum give 3 

Only <la, das, dans have a 
circumdare circumdo -dedi -datum surround <> 

The other compounds of dare belong to 
the 3d conjugation (244) 



1 ) excubare, excubo, etc., (keep) watch 5) do tibi librum 

2) veto eum scribere {ace. c. inf.) 6) nrbi fossam \ ■ , 

.,-i e — .-. i < ircumaare 



3) desecare, deseco, etc., cut oft' 

4) resonare, resono, etc., resound 



urbeni fossa ^ 



NOTE: In studying the elements of syntax the beginner should carefully 
observe the differences of the Latin and English idioms. Thus he will 
rind, e. g., that the Latin accusative is not always an equivalent for the English 
objective case : 

eumadiuvo \itdphim 

el auxiliur ) 

ei credo / believe him 

pecunia egeo / need money 

tnT coneilii indigeo 1 need your advice 



S4 



LIST OF VERBS, I AND II CONJUGATIONS 



§ 233-230 



stare, 


sto steti 


staturtis 


stand 


circumstare 


circumsto - steti 


— 


stand around [ace] 
( excel 1 


praestare 


praesto - stiti 


- staturtis 


1 vouch for [ace] 
I fulfil 


constare 


consto - stiti 


- staturus 


< consist 2 
} cost 


distare 


disto — 


- 


be distant 


234-. PERFECTS FORMED BY LENGTHENING OF VOWEL 


itrvare 


iuvo iuvi 


(iutum) 


help 


adiuvare 


adiuvo - iuvi 


a d i u t u m 


help 


1 a v a r e 


lavo lavi 


lautum 


wash 3 




SECOND CONJUGATION : 


ere, eo 


235. 


PERFECTS FORMED BY V 




delere 


deleo dele vi 


deletum 


destroy 


f lere 


fleo flevi 


fletum 


weep 


deflere 


defleo -flevi 


- fletum 


weep over [ace] 


nere 


neo nevi 


netum 


spin 


com pi ere 


compleo - plevi 


- pletum 


till up 


ciere 


cieo ( eivi) 


(citum) 


rouse 4 


accire 


accio accivi 


accitum 


summon 


236. 


PERFECTS FORMED BY U 




arcere 


arceo a r c u 1 


— 


keep off(tr.) 5 


coercere 


coerced coercui 


coercitum 


curb 


exercere 


exerceo exercui 


exercitum 


vex, harass 


habere 


habeo habui 


habitum 


have 


adhibere 


adhibeo -hibui 


- hibitum 


use [ad] 


prohibere 


prohibeo - hibui 


- hibitum 


keep o#"[tr.] 


deb ere 


debeo debui 


debitum 


owe, ought 


praebere 


praebeo praebui 


praebitum 


offer, grant 


admonere 


-moneo -monui 


- monitum 


f admonish 
\remind 6 


n o c e r e 


noceo nocui 


nocitum 


harm (dat.) 


placere 


placeo placui 


placitnm 


please (dat.) 


displicere 


displiceo displicui 


displicitum displease (dat.) 


1 ) tibi virtilte 


praesto, I excel (surpass) 


4) percitus, greatly roused 


you in manliness (courage) 


5) progressu eum arceo 


2 ) constamus ex animo et corpore 


6) de proelio eum admoneo 


3) lauta suppelles 


:, splendid furniture 




(451, note) 



§ 236 

t a c e r e 
reticere 
terrere 

deterrere 
vr d si"re 
Buscensere 
docere 
miscere 
tenere 
abstinere 
contiivre 
pertinere 
detinere 
distinere 
obtinere 

retinere 

s u s t i n e r < 

carere 
dolere 
par ere 

apparere 
valere 
calere 
egere 

indigere 
eminere 
florere 
horrere 
iacere 
latere 
nitere 
olere 
patere 
silere 



I [ST OF 


VERBS, 11 C 


ONJUG \ TION 


85 


taceo 


tacul 


taciturn 


be silent 1 


reticeo 


- ticui 


-- 


keep secret 


terreo 


terrui 


territum 


frighten 


deterreo 


deterrui 


deterritum 


deter [from-a] 


censeo 


ce nsui 


n"nsum 


estimate 


suscensec 


> suscensui 


— 


be angry [dat.] 


doeeo 


doeui 


doctum 


teach* 


niiseeo 


miseui 


m i x t ti m 


mix 


teneo 


tenui 


— 


hold 


abstineo 


abstinui 


— 


abstain [abl. or ab] 


contineo 


continui 


— 


hold together 


pertineo 


pertinui 


— 


extend [i.]3 


detineo 


detinui 


detentum 


detain 


distineo 


(listinui 


distenturn 


divide, busy 


obtineo 


obtinui 


obtentum 


hold; secure 

possession of 


retineo 


retinal 


retentum 


retain 


sustineo 


- ti n u I 


- 1 e n t a t u in 


endure 


careo 


caru! 


cariturus 


be without(ah\.) 


doleo 


dolui 


doliturus 


feel pain 4 ' 


pareo 


parui 


paritfirus 


obey (dat.) 


appareo 


appClrui 


apparitiirus 


appear 


valeo 


valuT 


valiturus 


be strong' 5 


caleo 


calm 


— 


be warm 6 


eged 


eguT 


— 


need (abl.) 


indigeo 


indigui 


— 


need [gen. and abl.] 


emineo 


eniinui 


— 


stand out 


floreo 


florui 


— 


bloom 


horreo 


horrui 


— 


shudder at (abl.) 


iaceo 


iacui 


— 


lie'' 


lateo 


latm 


— 


be hidden 


niteo 


nitui 


— 


shine (intr.) 


oleo 


okiT 


— 


smell of (intr.) 8 


pateo 


patui 


— 


stand open 


sileo 


siluT 


— 


be silent 



l)tacitU3, silent he had a gi eat, (greater, very great) 

'2) The passive of docere is discere influence over the people 

3) ad mare pertinere, extend to the sea 6) aestuare, feel warm 

4) oculi (mihi) dolent 7) in lecto iacet, but urbs (po)sita est 
caput (mihi) dolet in monte 

5) multum (plus, plurimum) valebat 8) malitiam olet | U3, b) 
apud populum 



86 


LIST 


OF VERBS, II. 


CONJUGATION 


fc 23(5-2:57 


s t u d e r e 


studeo 


studuT 


— 


take pains about 1 


stupe re 


stupeo 


stupui 


— 


be astounded 


titnere 


timeo 


timui 


— 


fear 2 


vigere 


vigeo 


vigui 


— 


be vigorous 


avere 


are 6 


— 


— 


long- for 


comvere 


coniveo 


— 


— 


half close the eves 


frigere 


frige 6 


— 


— 


be cold 


imminere 


immineo 


— 


— 


hang over 5 


maerere 


rnaereo 


— 


— 


mourn (ace. orabl.) 


pollere 


polleo 


— 


— 


be potent 


splendere 


splendeo 


— 


— 


shine (mtr.) 



237. 



PE RFECTS FORMED BY S 



augere 


augeo 


a u x T 


auctum 


i increase (tr.) 


torquere 


torqueo 


torsi 


tortum 


twist, torture 


abstergere 


abstergeo 


-tersi 


- tersum 


wipe off 


iubere 


iubeo 


iussT 


iussutn 


order 1 


permulcere 


-mulceo 


-mulsl 


- mulsum 


soothe 


ridere 


rideo 


rlsi 


risum 


laugh (at ace.) 


arridere 


arrldeo 


-risi 


- risum 


smile at (dat.) 


irridere 


irrideo 


- rlsi 


- risum 


laugh at (ace.) 


suadere 


suadeo 


suasi 


suasum 


advise 5 (dat.) 


persuadere 


- suadeo 


- suasi 


-sua sum 


( convince (dat.) 6 
\ induce (dat.) 


ardere 


ardeo 


arsi 


arsurus 


be on fire 


haerere 


haereo 


haesT 


haesurus 


stick (intr.) 


manere 


maneo 


mansi 


mansurus remain 7 


algere 


algeo 


alsT 


— 


feel cold 


fulgere 


fulgeo 


fulsi 


— 


flash 


indulgere 


indulged 


indulsT 


— 


am indulgent (dat, ) 


urgere 


urgeo 


ursl 


impulsum 


urge, press 


lucere 


luceo 


luxT 


— 


be light, beam 


lugere 


liigeo 


luxl 


— 


mourn, bewail (ace.) 



1 ) tibi studeo I am devoted to you 
arti, virtuti, litteris studere; 
audlre studeo (543) 

2) timeo ne (non), I fear that {not) 

3) mors tibi imminet 

4) eura scrlbere iubed ( ace. c. inf. ) 



5) suadeo tibi ut scribas, / advise you 
to write 

6) persuasi tibi ut venires, I induced 
you to come 

persuaded tibi non interire animas, 

(ace. c. inf.), /convince you 

1) eum domi maneo, J wait tor him... 



& 238-241 



LIST OF VKKI'.N, [[ AM) III CONJUGATION! 



23S. 



PERFECTS FORMED BY REDUPLICATION 

mordeo momordi morsum bite 



tnordere 

spondere spondeo spopondl sponsum promise 1 

respondere responded respond! responsum answer (dat, 



tondere 

dGtondere 

pen d ere 

impendere 
23i). 



tondeo 

detondeo 
pendeo 

impendeo 



totondi tdnsnm 

dctondi detonsum 

pependi — 



clip; shave 

clip oil 

hang (intr.) 2 

overhang 

threaten (i.) 



PERFECTS FORMED BY LENGTHENING OF VOWEL 



cavere 


caveo 


c a v i 


c a u t n m 


fa v ere 


faveo 


favi 


iaiitum 


fovere 


foveo 


fovi 


fotum 


movere 


moved 


mo vi 


mo turn 


vovere 


voveo 


VOVl 


v 6 turn 


sedere 


sedeo 


sedi 


sessum 


circumsedere 


eircumsedeo -sedi 


- sessum 


supersedere 


superseded 


-sedi 


• -eessuni 


obsidere 


obsideo 


-sedi 


- sessum 


possidere 


possideo 


-sedi 


- sessum 


videre 


video 


vidi 


V T s 11 m 


in videre 


invideo 


-vidi 


- visum 


providere 


provided 


- vidi 


-visum 


240. 


WITHOUT APPARENT 


CHANGE OF S 


prandere 


prandeo 


pran d 


i pransum 



\ beware (a.G.c.) 
\ take care of 
(dat.) 
favor (dat.) 
cherish 
move (tr.) 3 
vow 
sit 
invest 

refrain( from-abl. ) 
besiege 
possess 

see 

envy (dat. ) 
\ foresee 
\ provide 



breakfast 



THIRD CONJUGATION : 



ere, o 



241. 



PERFECT FORMED BY V 



stratum cover over 
-stratum prostrated 



sternere stern o stravi 

prosternere prdsterno -stravi 

eernere cerno — — discern 

decern ere decern 6 deerevi decre turn decree 



1) sponsus, bridegroom; sponsa, bride 3) commovere, permovere, stir (trans. 1 

2) ex ed pendet, it depends on him I ) consternere, c<>ver- like prosternere 



LIST OF VERBS, III CONJUGATION 



§ 241-242 



spernere 


sperno 


sprevi 


spretum 


spurn 


oblinere 


oblino 


oblevi 


oblitum 


daub over 


se-rere 


sero 


sevi 


satutn 


sow, plant 


conserere 


consero 


consevi 


consitum 


sow with 1 


Inserere 


insero 


insevi 


insitum 


implant 2 


sinere 


sino 


S1V1 


situm 


let, allow 3 


desinere 


desino 


S destiti 

\ desii 


desiturn 


cease 4(352, 1) 


petere 


peto 


petlvl 


petitum 


seek to obtainb 










\seek, look for 6 
)ask 


quaerere 


quaero 


quaes! vT 


quaesiturr 


conqulrere 


conquiro 


conquisivi 


conquisitnm 


go in quest of 


terere 


tero 


trivi 


tritum 


rub 7 


arcessere 


arcessd 


arcessivi 


arcessTtum 


{ summon 


accersere 


accerso 


accersivi 


accersitum 


\send for 


capessere 


capesso 


capessivi 


capessitum 


seize eagerly 


lacessere 


lacesso 


laces si vi 


lacessitum 


provoke{to-ab\.) 



24,2. 



PERFECTS FORMED BY U 



incumbere incumbo incubui 
procumbere procumbo procubui 



ineubitum lay one's self upon 

procubitum 



prostrate one s 
self 8 



gi-g-nere 
ponere 

anteponere 

exponere 

imponere 

alere 



gigno 

pono 

antepono 

expono 

iinpono 

alo 



genui 

posul 

anteposui 

exposui 

imposui 

aim 



g-enitum beget 



positum 

antepositum 

expositum 

impositum 

altum 



j place, lay 
[set, put 
prefer 

S set on shore 9 
\ explain 
place upon 

(dat.)10 

nourish 11 



1) ager consitus arboribus, ....... p la nted with 

2) insitus, inborn, innate 

3) eum ire sino (ace. c. inf.) 

4) timere desino, I cease fearing 

5) ab eo peto ut. ., I ask(=beg) him to 

6; ab (ex) eo quaeroquis sit, ..ask{= question). 
7) iter tritum, a beaten war 



conterere -like terere: tern pus c..., 
spend, waste time; proverbium 
contritum, a trite proverb 
8) tibi ad pedes procumbo, I fall at 
your feet 
9)milites ex navibus exponere, 

land 

10)c6pias in naves imponere, 

embark 

11 ) almus, a, um, genial, kind 
alma mater 



§ 242 



LIST OF VKKHS, III CoN.MOATION 



S9 



colere 

exeolere 
ineolere 



col 6 

excolo 
incolo 



coluT 

excolui 
incolul 



cultum 



t'xcultum. 



consulere eonsulo consului consultum 



conserere 

deserere 

disserere 

Inserere 

texere 
molere 
vomere 
freruere 
gemere 
strepere 
tremere 



consero 

desero 

dissero 

insero 

texo 
mold 

VOITlu 

fremo 
gem 6 
strepo 
tremo 



conserui 
deserui 
disserui 
Tnserui 

texui 

molul 
vomui 

f re mul 
gemui 
strepui 
tremul 



consertura 

desertum 

disputatttm 

Tnserttim 

textum 
molitam 
vomitum 



j cultivate 
\ honor 
perfect 
inhabit 1 

/ consult (ace.) 
I take care for{ dat.) 
join, /it 2 

desert 

discourse 4 ^ 

insert, put into 

weave 

grind 
throw up 
growl 
groan, sigh 
rumble 
tremble 



243. 



PERFECT FORMED BY S 



coquere 


coquo 


cox! 


coctum 


cook 


concoquere 


concoquo 


concoxi 


concoctum 


digest 


dlcere 


dico 


dlxl 


dictum 


say (226)* 


i n d I c e r e 


indico 


indlxl 


indictum 


announce 5 


indicare 


indico 


indicavi 


indicatum 


point out 


praedlcere praedico 


praedixi 


praedictum 


foretell 


praediciire 


praedico 


praedicavi praedicatum 


proclaim 


ducere 


due 6 


duxl 


ductum 


lead (226) 


conducere 


conduco 


condux! 


conductum 


hire, rent »> 


educere 


educo 


eduxi 


eductum 


lead forth 


educere 


educo 


educavi 


educatum 


bring up 


affligere 
profiigare 


ahMTgo 
profligo 


afflixi 
profligavi 


afflictum 
profligatum 


{ strike down 
I to the ground 


c 6 n f 1 1 g e r e con H igo 


conflixi 


con dictum 


be in combat 



1) incultus, untilled 

2) manus conserere, join battle 

3) disertus, skilful in speaking 
4 ) die el quis sis, tell him 

who you are 



5) helium populo Romano (dat.) 

he delared war against 

diem indlcere, appoint a day 

6) inducere, lead in, move to 
producere, lead before 

so sulxlucere. withdraw 



indixit, 



90 



LIST OF VERBS, III. CONJUGATION 



§ 243 



regere 


reg-o 


rexl 


rectum 


guide, rule 


corrigere corrigo 


correxi, 


correct am 


improve 


d e rigere 


derigo 


derC-xI 


directum 


\ set straight 1 
/ direct 


porrigere 


porrigo 


por rex I 


porrectum 


hold forth, offer 2 


perg-ere 


pergo 


perrexi 


perrectuin 


proceed {to go) 3 


surgere 


sorgo 


surrexi 


surrectum 


rise, stand up 


tegere 


tego 


texl 


tectum 


covert 


trahere 


traho 


traxi 


tractum 


draw, haul 


vehere 


veho 


vexi 


Tectum 


carry 5 


vehi 


veho 


rectus sum 


be carried 


cingere 


cingo 


cinxi 


cinctum 


gird 


tingere 


ting 6 


tinxi 


tmctum 


dye, tinge 


iung-ere 


iungo 


iunxi 


• iunctum 


join, connect^ 


eoninngere 


coniungo 


coniunxi 


coniiinctum 


join together 


disiangere 


disiungo 


disiiinxi 


disiunctum 


disjoin, part 


fiagere 


lingo 


finxi 


fictum 


form, mould 1 


pingere 


pingo 


pmxi 


pictum 


paint 


stringere 


stringo 


strinxl 


strictum 


\ graze* 
{strip off 


figere 


figo 


fixT 


f T x u m 


fix, fasten 9 


demergere. 


demergo 


demersi 


demersum 


dip, sink (tr.) 10 


demergi 


demergor 


demersus sum 


sink (intr.) 


emergere 


em ergo 


emersT 


emersum 


emerge (usu. i.) 


spargere 


spargo 


spar si 


sparsum 


strew, throw about 


aspergere 


aspergo 


aspersi 


aspersum 


besprinkle 11 


ftectere 


flecto 


flexi 


flexum 


bend (trans.) 12 


conectere 


conecto 


(conexuT) 


conexum 


tie together 


niibere 


nubo 


nupsi 


nuptum 


marry 13 



filia alicul nubit 

films aliquam virginem ducit 



1 ) aciem derigere, draw up in battle array 8) gladium destringere, draw the 

2) tibi dexteram porrigo 9) in terra criicem figere [sword 

3) eadem via perge 10) me demerge, I dive 

4) protegere, protect — like tegere 11) dispergere mflites, scatter 

5) eqao vehi, ride 12) d^nectere, turn aside (tr. and 

6) me ad vos (ad) iungo, I join you 13) nupta, married intr. ) 

7) fictus. fictitious; ficti di nubo, veil mv self for 



§ 24:; 


LIST 


OF VERBS, 111. CONJUGATION 


91 


scrlbere 


scribo 


scrips! 


scriptum 


write 1 


cdnscribere 


conscribo 


conscrlpsi 


conscriptum 


levy, enroll 2 


carpere 


carpo 


carpsi 


carptum 


pluck; carp at 


decerpere 


decerpo 


decerpsi 


decerptum 


pluck off 


scalpere 


scalpo 


scalps! 


scalptum 


engrave {of 
surface work 


insculpere 


inscul po 


Insculpsi 


insculptum 


chisel, carve in 
{of deeper work 


irrepere 


irrepo 


irreps! 


irreptum 


creep in 


serpere 


serpo 


serpsT 


— 


creep 


eontemnere 


contemno 


contempsi 


- tempt u m 


value little 


gerere 


gero 


gessi 


g-estum 


carry on 3 


digerere 


digero 


digessi 


digest urn 


arrange 


comburere 


coraburo 


combussi 


combustum burn up(tr.)4> 


ambiirere 


am burn 


am buss I 


ambustum 


scorch 


pre me re 


premo 


press! 


pressum 


press 


exprimere 


exprimo 


expressl 


expressum 


i press out 5 
- express, 
( portray 


opprimere 


opprimo 


oppress! 


oppressum 


press down 


cedere 


cedo 


cessi 


cessum 


give place to 

(463) 
approach (ad) 


accedere 


accedo 


access! 


acccssum 


claudere 


claudo 


clans! 


cl ausum 


close 


include re 


includo 


inclusl 


inclusum 


shut up 6 


intercliidere 


intercliido interclusi 


interclusum shut off] cut 

off 7 


dividere 


divido 


d I v i s I 


divisu m 


separate, divide 


laedere 


laedo 


laesi 


laesum 


trouble;offendS 


allidere 


allido 


allisi 


allisum 


dash against 


ludere 


ludo 


111 si 


lusum 


play (502) 


eliidere 


. eludo 


elusi 


elusum 


elude, mock 9 


plaudere 


plaudo 


plausi 


plausnm 


applaud (dat.) 


explodere 


explodo 


explos! 


explosum 


hoot off{ncc.) 



1 ) ad te scribo 

2) proscribere, outlaw 

3) bellum gerere, wage war 
[■ res gestae, exploits 

4) deflagrare, burn down (intr.) 

6) peciiniam vi exprimere, extort. 
eiua mores oratione exprimere, 
portray, describe his character 



alquid Latine exprimere, render, 
translate into Latin 

6) concludere, enclose, end, infer 

7) hostibus com meatus I intercliidere 
hostes commeatu $ 

cut off the enemies from supplies 

8) fidem laedere, break one's word 

9) eludere -illudere eum, jeer at him 



92 



LIsT OF VERBS, III. CON.TVGA' 



§ 243-244 



radere 


rado 


rasT 


rasum 


scrape, shave 


rodere 


rodo 


rosi 


rosum 


gnaw 


triidere 


trtido 


triisi 


trfisum 


thrust, shove 


invade re 


invado 


- v a s i 


-vasum 


invade (in c.aee.) 


evadere 


evado 


- vasi 


- vasum 


escape, become 


vadere 


vado 


— 


— 


go ( rapidly ) 


mittere 


mitto 


mlsi 


missum 


send 


amittere 


fi unit to 


-misi 


- missum 


lose {by accident) 


committere 


committc 


- misi 


- missum 


intrust 


dimittere 


dimitto 


- misi 


- missum 


dismiss 1 


metere 


meto 


seem 


messum 


wow, reap 


deuaetere 


demeto 


desecui 


demessum 


cut off, reap 


244. 


PERFECTS FORMED 


BY REDUPLICATION 


cadere 


cad 6 


cecidi 


casurus 


fall (intr.)- 


incidere 


incidd 


incidi 


(incasurus) 


fall into 


occidere 


occido 


occidi 


occasurus 


go down, die 


recidere 


recidd 


reccidi 


recasurus 


fall back 3 


concidere 


concido 


concidi 


— 


fall down 


caedere 


caedo 


cecidi 


caesum 


hew, fell, beat 


incidere 


incido 


incidi 


incisum 


cut into-i 


occidere 


occido 


occidi 


oecisum 


kill, slay 


currere 


curro 


c u c ti r r I 


cursum 


run (intr.) 


accurrere 


accurro 


S accurri 

I accucurrl accursum 


run to a place 5 


recurrere 


recurro 


recurri 


recursum 


run back 


sue currere 


succurro 


Buccurri 


succursum 


hasten to aid 


Note: 


The other compounds are conjugated like accurrere. 


fallere 


fallo 


fefelli 


deceptum 


deceive 


refellere 


refello 


refelli 


refutatum 


disprove, rebut 


parcere 


pare 6 


peperci 


temperatum spare (dat.) 


conservare 


eonservo 


-servavi - 


servatum 


spare (ace.) 



1) demittere, let down 4) abscidere and praecidere, cut off 

2) ammo cadere, lose courage concidere, cut to pieces 

3) suspicio in eum recidit 5 ) ad te accurro 



& 244 


i.i 


ST ok VERBS, 


Ill CONJUGATION 


'. 13 


pellere 


pel 16 


pepuli 


pulsum 


drive out,push 1 


appellere 


appelld 


appull 


appulsum 


drive toward 2 


appellare 


appello 


appelfivi 


appellatum 


address, accost 


rcpellere 


repel 16 


reppulT 


repulsum 


drive back 


pendere 


pendo 


pepend! 


pensum 


weigh, pay 


impendere 


impendo 


impend! 


impensum 


expend 3 


suspendere 


suspendo 


suspend! 


suspensum 


hang up ( tr. ) 


canere 


cano 


cecini 


cantatum 


sing, sound* 


concinere 


concino 


concinuT 


— 


agree together 


pungere 


pungo 


pupugi 


punctum 


sting, puncture 5 


compungere 


compungi 


') -pUQXl 


compunctum 


sting severely 


tangere 


tango 


tetigi 


tactum 


touch 


attingere 


attingo 


attig! 


(tactum) 


border on, reach () 


tendere 


tendo 


tetendi 


tentum 


stretch (tr.) 7 


attendere 


attendo 


attend! 


attentum 


attend (to acc.)> 


contendere 


contendo 


contend! 


contentum 


exert ( myself) 


extendere 


extendi") 


extend! 


( ex tentum 
( extensum 


extend (tr.) 


ostendere 


ostendo 


ostendi 


ostentatum show 


abdere 


abdo 


abdidi 


abditum 


put away, hide9 


credere 


credo 


credidi 


creditum 


believe, trust 

dat.(10) 


dedere 


dedo 


dedidi 


deditum 


give up 11 


edere 


edo 


edidi 


editum 


give out 


tradere 


trado 


tradidi 


traditum 


transmit 


reddere 


reddd 


reddid! 


redditum 


give back 



1 ) (ex) patria pellere, exile (4S6) 8) animum attendere ad 

2) navem ad ripam appellere, land stuporemattendite, mark the stupidity 

3) pecuniam in res vanas impendere 9) addere, add; condere, found; 

4) canit corvus, canit homo voce, prodere, betray 
fidibus, canere, play the harp (502) 10) mihi crede (Position!) 

5) pungit eum quod scribis res suasalicui credere, entrust, commit 

6) Rhenum attingere 11 ) host! se dedere, surrender 

7) manus ad adiquem tendere 



04 



LIST OF VERBS, III COUJUGATION 



§ 245-24; 



245. 


PRESENT 


r WITH REDI 


JPLICATION 




bi-bere 


bibo 


bib! 


potum 


drink 


con-si-stere 


consisto 


constiti 


— 


S place one 1 s self, 
I halt (intr.) 1 


desistere 


desisto 


destiti 


— 


leave off (from = 

abl. ) 


resistere 


resisto 


restitl 


— 


resist (dat. ) 


circumsistere 


circumsisto 


- stetl 


— 


surround 


246. 


REDUPLICATION LOST 




percellere 


percello 


perculi 


perculsum 


knock down 


antecellere 
excellere 


antecello 
excello 


'praesti 


Ltl — 


excel 2 


contundere 


contundo 


conttidi 


contusum 


crush, bruise 


obtundere 


obtundo 


obtudi 


obtusum 


blunt ( the mind} 


retundere 


retundo 


rettudT 


retiisiim 


blunt( the sword) 


lindere 


findo 


fidi 


fissum 


split 


diffindere 


diffindo 


diffidi 


diffissum 


cleave asunder 


scindere 


scindo 


scidi 


scissum 


tear asunder 


rescindere 


rescindo 


rescidi 


rescissum 


tear down, 

annul 


247. PERFECTS FORMED BY LENGTHENING OF VOWEL 


emere 


em 6 


emi 


emptum 


buy 3 


coemere 


coemo 


- emi 


- emptum 


buy up 


adimere 


adimo 


ademi 


ademptum 


take away 

(/rom=dat. ) 


dlrimere 


dirimo 


dii\jmi 


diremptum 


separate, end-i 


comere 


como 


compsi 


comptum 


adorn, dress 


demere 


demo 


dempsi 


demptum 


take away 

(/rom-dat. ) 


promere 


promo 


prompsi 


prompt um 


take out 


sumere 


sumo 


stimpsi 


stimptum 


take( for myself) 


legere 


lego 


legl 


lectum 


read 


legare 


lego 


legavi 


legatum 


send as legate 


perlegere 


perlego 


perlegi 


perlectum 


read through 5 


colligere 


colligo 


collegi 


collectum 


collect, gather 


deligere 


deligo 


delegT 


delect urn 


choose 6 



1) eo in loco consistit (o2l) 
hie (here) consistimus 

2) tibi antecello 

vobis (Plural.') excello 



3) domum magna pecunia emi 

4) interim ere, do away with 

5 ) relegere, read again 

6) eligere, seligere - deligere 



§ 247-248 


LIST OF VERBS, III CONJUGATION 


'.l. 


diligere 


diligo 


dilexi 


dileetum 


esteem highly i 


intellegere 


intellego 


intellexl 


intellectum 


see into 


neglegere 


neglego 


neglexi 


negleetum 


neglect, slight 


agere 


ago 


egi 


actum 


drive, act, do 


peragere 


perago 


peregi 


peractum 


carry through' 2 


abigere 


abigo 


abegi 


abactum 


drive a way 3 


eubigere 


subigo 


subegi 


subfictum 


subjugate 


ambigere 


ambigo 


- - 


— 


dispute about 


cogere 


cogo 


eoegl 


coactum 


gather, forced 


degere 


dego 


degi 


actum 


spend 5 


frangere 


frango 


fregi 


fr actum 


break to pieces 


confringere 


confringo 


confregi 


confractum 


dash to pieces 6 


relinquere 


relinquo 


reliqui 


relictum 


leave behind 7 


vincere 


vinco 


V1C1 


victttin 


conquer 


convincere 


convince) 


con vie J 


convictum 


convict 8 


rumpere 


rumpo 


rupi 


ruptum 


burst, rend iJ 


corrumpere 


corrumpn 


corrupi 


corruptum 


bribe, spoil 1 


fundere 


fundo 


fudi 


fiisum 


pour, rout 



248. 



PERFECTS WITHOUT APPARENT CHANGE OF STEM 



accendereaccendo accendi 

incendere incendo incendi 

succendere succendo succendl 

scandere scando — 

ascendere ascendo ascend! 

descendere descendo descend! 

excudere exefido excudi 
defendere defendo defend! 

prehendere prehendo prehendi 
deprehendere deprehendo deprehendi 



accensum 
incensum 
succensum 

asoensum 
descensum 

excusum 
defensum 

prehensum 
leprehensum 



kindle(above) 11 
k.(on every side of) 

k. (underneath) 
mount, climb 
mount, climb 12 
descend (de) 

hammer out 
/ ward off 13 
\ defend 

lay hold of 

sur/) rise 



1) nunc earn amd, ante diligebam 

2) circumagere, drive around 

3) adigere, drive buck 

4) euni emere coegit { 551 ) 



9) vincula, foedup rumpere 

10) proruinpere, burst forth 

1 1 ) Lumen accenditur {is lit ) 
domua incenditur [is set on tire) 



5) vitam in egestate degere, live in want rogue Buccenditur {is lighted) 
<>) portas refringere, break open 12) A I pes transcendere, cross 

7) delioquere, to fail in ones duty navein conscendere, embark 

8) te tnrti convinco (452) 13) bellum defendere; castraab hosted... 



96 



LIST OF VERBS, III CONJUGATION 



§ 248-249 



considere 


consido 


consed 


I — 


sit down 1 


possldere 


possido 


possedi 


possessum 


occupy 


NOTE: - 


sedi and - sessum are form 


s of sedere. 




possidere 


possideo 


possedi 


possessum possess 


pandere 


pando 


pandi 


passum 


spread out 2 


v e r t e r e 


verto 


verti 


versum 


turn 3 


animadvertere 


- verto 


- verti 


- versum 


S observe 

I punish (in eum ) 


evertere 


everto 


evert! 


e versum 


overturn, destroy^ 


vellere 


vello 


veil! 


vulsum 


pluck, tear out 


vi s e r e 


viso 


v is I 


— 


view; visit 5 


angere 


ango 


sollicitavi 


sollicitatum 


trouble 


furere 


furo 


insanivi 


— 


be furious 


vergere 


vergo 


— 


— 


stretcb(i. ), slope 6 



249. 



acuere 



Verbs in uo (vo) 
PERFECTS WITHOUT ANY APPARENT CHANGE OF STEM 



acuo 



acui 



acutus (adj. ) 



sharp, pointed, \ sharpen 
NOTE: Lacking forms may be expressed by acutum reddere 
arguere arguo 



argui acciisatum charge with* 



argutus (adj.), expressive; sagacious 

coarguo coargui convictum convict, proved 

redargue redargui refutatum refute 

imbuo imbuT imbutum moisten 

exuo exui exutum put off 10 

induo indui indutmn put on 11 

minuo minui mintitum diminish(tr.) 

statuo statu! statutum set up, decide 12 

stitutum determine 13 



coarguere 

redarguere 
imbuere 
exuere 
induere 
minuere 
statuere 
cohstituere constituo constitui 



1) hie, in umbra considamus(521 ) 

2 ) mandere, chew = like pandere 

3) terga vertere, Bee 

4) avertere, turn away 

5) invisere, visit - like visere 

6) ad septentriones vergere 

7) serram (saw), mentem acuere 



acutus homo; acute respondere 

8) eum sceleris ? - - - , ,- , 

capitis S arg ' accuso ( 4o2 ) 

9 ) eum avaritiae coarguo 
] 0) humanitatem exuere 

11) anulum mihi induo 

12) statuam ei fctatuemus 

13) idem facere constituit(543, 60S) 



249-250 



LIST OF VERBS, III COUJUGATION 



'■'7 



t rib hit e 


tribuo 


tribuT 


tributum 


impart, grant 


luere 


luo 


InT 


ablutum 


wash off 


lnere 


luo 


lul 


expiatum 


expiate 


abluere 


abluo 


ablui 


ablutum 


wash off I 


abnuere 


abnuo 


abnui 


recusatum 


refuse 2 


adnnere 


adnuo 


adnuT 


concessum 


nod assent to 3 


respuere 


respuo 


respui 


repudiatum 


reject, spurn 4 - 


ruere 


ruo 


rui 


ruittirus 


fall, rush 5 


diruere 


diruo 


dirui 


d irutum 


demolish 


obruere 


obruo 


obrui 


ob rutum 


overwhelm^ 


congruere 


congruo 


congruT 


— 


agree 7 


metuere 


metuo 


metui 


— 


fear 8 


solvere 


solvo 


solvT 


solfitum 


loose, pay 9 


persolvere 


persolvo 


persolvi 


persolutum 


pay 10 


volvere 


volvo 


volvT 


volutum 


roll 



250. 



PERFECTS FORMED BY S 



distinguere 


distinguo 


distmxi 


distinctum 


distingu 


exstinguere 


exstinguo 


exstinxi 


exstinctum 


put out 


unguere\ 
ungere \ 


unguo 
ungo 


unxT 


unctum 


anoint 


fluere | 


tiuo 


flux! 


/fluxus, adj. 


flow 12 


St. Hug j 






\ fleeting 




struere\ 
St. strug f 


struo 


struxT 


structum 


build 13 


vivere \ 
St. vig / 


vivo 


vlxi 


victurus 


live 



1) dlluere, wash away; crimen d.. 

2) nihil tibi abnuo 

3) toto capite i« 1 adnuo 

4) spuere, spud, spul, — , spit 
Bj sciens in mala ruit 
6) eorruere, corrud, corrui, 



7) tecum congruo 

8) metuo ne(non) / fear that (not) 
0) navem solvere, set sail 

10) promieea, vota persolvere 

11 ) vera a falsis distinguere 
tall down VI | divitiis adfluens, overflowing withr. 

13) aciem instruere. place in battle array 



98 



LIST OF VERBS, III CONJUGATION 



§ 251-254 



251. 



THIRD CONJUGATION : ere, io 

PERFECTS FORMED BY V OR U 

{For conjugation see page 76 ) 
cupio cupivi cupltum 



desire, long for 
be wise, savor of 
rob; snatch 

plunder 



cupere cupio cupivi 

sapere sapio sapivT — 

rap ere rapio rapui raptum 

dlripere diripio diripui direptuin 

conspicere conspicio conspex! -speetum get sight of 

suspicere suspieio suspex! suspectum look up to 

suspicor suspicatus sum suspect 

elicio elicul elicitum lure forth 



fcuspicari 
elicere 



252. 

inlicere 
pellicere 

adlicere 

coneutere 

percutere 

253. 

parere 



254. 

capere 
accipere 
decipere 
suseipere 

fa cere 

assuefacere 

patefacere 

vacuefacere 



PERFECTS FORMED BY S 



inlicio inlexl 

pellicio pellexi 

adlicio adlexi 

concutid concuss! 

percutio percuss! 



inlectum j seduce 
pellectum {inveigle 

— allure 

concussum shake 
percussum strike, pierce 



PERFECT FORMED BY REDUPLICATION 



pario peperi 

partus, acquired; 
PERFECTS FORMED BY LENGTHENING OF VOWEL 



jpartum hringforth 

\pariturus ° 

paratus, ready 



capio cep! captum take, seize 

accipio accepi acceptum get, receive 

decipio decepi deceptuin cheat 

suscipio suscepi susceptum take up 

facio fee! factum make, do 

Passive fieri etc., 295 

assuefacio assuefeci assuef actum accustom (551) 

patefacio patefeci patefactuni open 

vacuefacio vacuefeci vacuefactum empty 



§ 254 



LIST OF VERBS, III CONJUGATION, VKKHSIN lO 



99 



conficere 

afficere 

deficere 

efficere 

interficere 

perficere 

praeficere 

reficere 

The 
The 

iacere 

abicere 
proicere 
fodere 
confodere 
fugere 
aufugere 
confugere 



conficio confeci confectum accomplish 

officio affecl affectum affect 1 

deficio defeci defectum fail 

efficio effeci effectum effect (ut) 

interficio interfeci interfectum kill 

perficio perfeci perfectum complete 

praeficio praef eci praefectum place in authority 

over (dat. ) 

reficio refeci refectum restore 

Pass, of -facio is -fio, Accent: assuefacis 
Pass, of -ficio is -ficior; Accent: conficis (9, c.) 



lacio 

abicio(5, 11) 

proicio 
fodio 
confodio 
fugio 

aufugio 

confugio 



iecT iactum throw 

abieel abiectum throw away 

proieci proiectum fling away 

f 6 d I fossum dig 

confodi confossum stab 

fugi (fugiturus) flee 

aufugi flee away 

( •on t u gi flee to ( in, ad ) 



l)afficere a 1 i q u e m (or a 1 i qu i d ) a 1 i q u a re requires various transla- 
tions; as, bestow or inflict upon, grace or visit with; the phrase is often con- 
veniently rendered by changing the Latin Ablative into a corresponding 

English verb; as, 

afficere aliquem 

sepultura, bury; nomine(regis), style; praemio, reward 
timore, terrify; molestia, trouble; exsilio, banish 

timebant ne armis traditia supplicio ) they were afraid ot being put to death in 
afficerentur J case they should deliver up their arms 



100 



INCHOATIVES 



§ 255-257 



255, ( Verba incohativa) 

Inchoatives derive their name from incohare, begin, because 
they usually denote the beginning of an action or condition. 

- sco = begin to 

256. PRIMARY INCHOATIVES 

discere disco didicT — 

dediscere dadisc) dedidici 

poscere posco poposci postulatum 

deposcere deposed depoposci — 

reposcere reposed repetivi repetitum 

pascere pasco pavi pastum 

pasci pascor pastussum 

crescere cresco crevi — 

noscere nosco novi — 

novi, I know; (547, Note) notus (adj ) known 

cognoscere cognosco cognovi cognitum get to know 



learn 

unlearn, forget 
demand (425.697) 

demand earnestly 

demand back 

graze (tr.) 

graze (intr.) 

grow 

come to know 



agnoscere agnosco 



I know" well 
3 vi agnitum 
vi ignotum 



acknowledge 
forgive (dat.) 



repose 



accustom oneself 



ignotus (adj.), unknown 
quiescere quiesco quievi quieturus 

quietus (adj.), quiet 
consuescere consuescoconsuevi — 

consuevi, am accustomed; assuetus (a.) accustomed 
labdre assuetus, accustomed to labor 
assuevi = soled; assueveram = solebam 

INCOHATIVA VERB ALIA 

{Root-word a Verb) 
Perfect of inchoative - Perfect of root-verb. 

Only sciscere has a pf. part, 
inveterascere inveteravi become fixed 

inveteratus (adj.), deep-rooted 
adolescere adolevi grow up 

adultus (adj.), grown up 
obsolescere obsolevi fall into disuse 

obsoletus (adj.), worn out 
efflorescere efflorui begin to flourish. 

perhorrescere perhorrui begin to shudder 



257. 



inveterare 

render old 
(olere, grow) 



florere 

horrere 

sen ere, be old 



tacere 
timere 



consenescere cdnsenui grow old, weak 

amicus consenescit, vires, leges consenescunt 
conticescere conticui cease speaking 

pertimescere pertimm begin to dread 



§ 257-260 



LIST OF VERBS, IV COUJUGATION 



101 



valere 


convalcscere 


convalui 


regain health 


ardere 
alere 


exardescere 
coaleseere 


exarsi 
coalui 


become inflamed 
grow together 


vlvere 


reviviscere revixT revlcturus revive 


cupere 

dorinire 

scire 


eoncupiscere 
obdormiscere 
sclscere scivi 


concupivi 
obdormivT 
' scitnm (79) 


covet 
fall asleep 
decree 




mihi mortem conscisco, 
a rege descisco, 


commit suicide 
fall a way from . . 


258. 


INCOH ATI V A NO MIN ALIA 




creber 
durus 


percrebrescere 
obdurescere 


percrebrvri 
obdiiruT 


gain ground 
become insensible 


nmturus 


mattirescere 


maturuT 


grow ripe 


m utus 


obmiitescere 


obmutuT 


grow dumb 


Yinus 


evanescere 


evanui 


vanish 


gravis 
puer 


ingravescere 
repuerascere 


— 


become burdensome 
become a boy again 



FOURTH CONJUGATION: 



ire, 10 



soften, soothe 
fortify 
serve (dat.) 

know (227) 



259. PERFECTS FORMED BY V 

Like audire: 
condire season, embalm lemre 

custodire watch over(siCC.) murrire 

erudire bring up servire 

With Irregularities: 
scire scio scivi scitum 

neselre nescio nescivi nescltum not to know 1 

Instead of pres. part, use : ignorans, insciens 
6epelTre sepelio sepelivi sepultum bury 2 

260. PERFECTS FORMED BY U 

aperire aperio aperuT apertum ope/i, uncover 3 

operire operio operuT opertum cover 

sallre salio salrn — leap, hop 

desilire desilio desilui leap downA 



1 ) utrum scions fecit an insciens? 

2) in urbe ne sepelito neve urito 



3) litteras, occulta, caput aperire 

4 i ex equo(ad pedes)desilire, to dismount 



102 



LIST OF VEEBS. IV CONJUGATION 



§ 261-264 



refercire 


refercio 


refers! 


refer turn 


stuff, fill up 1 


fulclre 


fulcio 


ralsl 


fultum 


prop up 


saepire 


saepio 


saepsi 


saeptum 


hedge in 


sancire 


sancio 


sanxi 


sanctum 


ratify 2 


sarcire 


sarcio 


sarsi 


sartum 


repair, mend 


vincire 


vincio 


Ylnxi 


vinctum 


bind, fetter 


haurlre 


haurio 


hausi 


hanstum 


draw 3 


sentire 


sentio 


sens! 


sensum 


feel, deem 4 * 


consent Ire 


consentio 


cdnsensi 


consensum 


agree 5 


dissentire 


dissentio 


dissensi 


dissensum 


differ^ 


262. 


PERFECT 


FORMED BY REDUPLICATION 


reperlre 


reperio 


repperl 


repertum 


find out 1 


comperire 


comperio 


comperl 


compertum 


ascertain* 


263. 


PERFECTS FORMED BY 


LENGTHENING 


OF VOWEL 


venire 


venio 


venl 


ventum 


come 9 


advenire 


advenio 


adveni 


adventum 


arrive 10 


convenire 


convenio 


conveni 


conventum 


come together 1 1 


in venire 


invenio 


inveni 


inventuin 


find 


pervenire 


pervenio 


perveni 


per ventum 


reach 1 


subvenire 


subvenio 


subveni 


subventum 


come to assist(dat.) 



264. 



ferlre 



amicire 



esurire 



WITHOUT PERFECT AND PARTICIPLE STEM 



ferio 



amicio — 



ici icttim 

percuss! percussum 
amietus 



strike, hit 12 



esvrrio 



Note: 



wrap about 13 
j desire to eat 
\ be hungry 
Desideratlva in urio have a present stem only 

7) quis fecerit, reperi 



1 ) refertus, full 
domusreferta rebus omnibus(aW.) J*) haec de eo comperi 

but civium or civibus 9) ad eum veniemus(461, Note) 

2) sanctus, holy 10) in urbem adveni, in the city( 527) 

3) e fonte haurire 11) in unum locum convenire 

4) unum atque idem sentire 12 ) foedus ferlre, to make a compact 

5) tibi, or tecum c5nsentio treaty 

6 ) a te, or tecum dissentio securi eum ferlre 

13) toga amietus, clad in a toga 



^ 265-266 



DEPONENTS, I AND II CONJUGATIONS 



id.; 



DEPONENT VERBS 



265. DEPONENTS OF THE 1st CONJUGATION : ari,or PASSIVE OF 

DEPONENTS(218) 

(These are all regular and follow hortarl. ) 



a r bit ran 



cunctan 

gloria rl 
gratularl 



arbitratus sum believe, deem 

Part, arbitratus, supposing 

cunctatus sum hesitate (infin.) 

gioriatus sum glory in (abl.) 

gratulatussum congratulate 



tibi hanc rem (de hac re) gratulor 
imitari imitatus sum imitate 

conspieari eonspieatus sum behold 

m I threaten (dat. ) 
morari moriitus sum 

opitulari opitulatus sum 

precari precatus sum 

versari versatus sum 



mi nan 
mini taxi 



minatua 
minitatus 



retard (tr. ) 
tarry (intr. ) 

bring help ( dat. ) 

ask, beg (ut ) 

dwell, be; 



<i Putari, exist i- 
( marl.vidurl, cen- 
seri 

Moram fieri, du - 

bitarl 

Iactarl, praedicarl 

Gratulationem 
fieri or haberi 



Imitatione expriml 

Yideri, conspici 

Minas iaci, iactarl 

Tardari, retineri 
Moram trahi 

Auxilium ferri 

Rogari, precibus 
peti 



266. DEPONENTS OF THE 2d CONJUGATION : en, eor 



Keen Hcitus sum 

pollicerl pollicitus sum 

miseren miseritus sum 

miseratus sum 
tutatus sum 



miserari 
tueri 
intueri 
vereri 

fateri 

confiteri 



a s p e x i 
veritus sum 

fassus sum \ 

confessus sum \ 

mederi (d.) sanavi (ace.) 
(reri [no pres. part-] ratus sum 



hid on ( ace . ) Licitationem fieri 

pro mise (dat.) PrdmittI 

vitv i^tn ) Misericordiam 

" - Kb '' i habere 

deplore (ace.) Miserationem 

habere 
guard, look to Custodiri 

look at (ace.); Aspici 

fear, revere (ne) Timeri, in timore 
esse 



confess 

heal 

deem, believe) 



S N6n negarl 
I prae se ferri 

Sanari 
Putari, credi 



104 DEPONENTS, III CONJUGATION 

267. DEPONENTS OF THE 3d CONJUGATION 1, or 



/ us-us sum 
)fruiturus 

perfructus sum 
functus sum 
lapsus sum 
locutus sum 

collocutus sum 
/nlxus sum 
\(nisus sum) 
amplecti amplexus sum 
querl quest us sum 

sequl secutus sum 

adsequi 
consequi 

uti 

abut! 



fruT 

perfru! 
fungi 
labi 
loqui 

colloqui 

niti 



adsecutus sum 
consecutus sum 

usus sum 

abusus sum 



enjoy (ah\.) 

enjoy fully (abl. ) 
perform (abl.) 
glide, fall 
speak, talk 
converse 

jlean 0/7 (abl.) 
\ strive (ut) 
embrace 
complain 
folio w 

S obtain by 
I exertion 

use (abl.) 

( vse up; 
} misuse 



268. 

gradl 
adg-redi 

congredi 

mori 



Present in ior 

adgressus sum 
congressus sum 

mortuus sum 



step 

attack 

meet with, fight 

die 



Part, moriturus 



pati passus sum suffer 

perpeti perpessus sum suffer patiently 

269. Inchoatives in scor: 

adipisci adeptus sum attain by effort 

nancisci nanctus or nactus sum get by accident 
expergisci experrectus sum awake (intr.) 

\suscensui 
obliYisci oblltus sum 

reminlsci(gen.) recordatus sum(de) 
nasci natus sum 

profieisci profectus sum 
ulcisei ultus sum 

vesci yTxi or altus sum 



be angry {tibi) 
forget(gen.) 



remember 



be born 

set out (for * in) 

avenge 

subsist on (abl.) 



§ 267-269 
PASSIVE (218) 

{ Fructum, vo- 
l luptatem cap! 

ex... 
Omnemf. capiex 

Administrari. ex- 
erceri 

{ Sermonem ha- 
\ beri; disseri( sci- 
entifically) 



Contend!, 

In alcus com- 
plexum venire 
Querimoniam 
haberi de.... 

Comparari. quaeri 
In usu esse 

In usu pravoesse; 
Absumi, consumi 



Vadi, incedi 
Petl. impetum 
fieri 



Ferri. tolerari 
PerferrI 



Comparari, quaeri 

Invenirl. casu 

offerri 

Excitari 
Stomachum ali- 
cui mover! or 
fieri 

In obllvionem 

adducl 

Memoria teneri 



Disced!, abirl 

Poenas alcus rei 

expetl 

( Vitam susten- 

l tdTl. all 



70 



DEl'OXENTI 



[01 



27(). DEPONENTS OF THE 4th CONJUGATION iri,ior 

DlandirT(d.) blanditns sum flutter 
adulari(acc) adulatus sum flatter=cringe 
adsentari (d . ) adsentatus sum flattcr=say yes 

bestow (on-dat. 
lie, deceive 
\ set in motion 
\set about 
share, divide 
impart 
be {come) master of 

\get by lot 
\ dra w lots 



IargTri 

mentirl 

m o It ri 

partiri 

i in per tire 
potiri (abl, 

sortiri 

adsentiri 
experiri 

opperiri 
metiri 
or din 
oriri 



largltus sum 
men tit us sum 

molTtus sum 

partltus sum 
-I vi -Itum 
potitus sum 

sortitus sum 

ad sens vis sum 
expertus sum 

oppertus sum 
mensus sum 
orsus sum 
ortus sum 



give assent to 

ftry, test 

\experience 

await, wait 

measure 

begin 

rise 



PASSIVE (218) 

Blandltias dici, 
fieri 

Adulationem fieri 
Adsentationem f. 
Largitionem fieri 

Falsa dici, falli 
Moveri 

Incipi, suscipi 
Dispertiri, dividi 
Impertiri 
( >ccupari 
Sortitione accipi 
Sortitionem fieri 

Adsenau compro- 

bari 

Temptari 

Exspectari, maneri 

Rei mensuram f. 

Incipi, initium 
fieri 



Note: Orinandits compounds except adoriri 
follow the 3d Conjugation : oreris, oritur etc. 
Fut. part.: oriturus. The only forms of the 4th 
Conjugation are: 

oriri, to rise and orirer etc. = orerer etc. 
adoriri adortus sum attack 



Peti, impel um fieri 



LABOR 
OMNIA VINCIT IMPROBUS. 



106 



IMPERSONAL 



§ 271-273 



271. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS 



(Verba impersonalia) 
A word is used impersonally, when its action is ascribed to an inde- 
terminate subject. This subject is indicated by the 3d ps. sg. neuter: 
ningit, it snows 
By usage, however, all those verbal forms of the 3dps. that do not take 
a substantive as their subject, are (less accurately) called impersonal; 
their determinate subjects may be pronouns, numeral adjectives, infinitives, 
phrases, or clauses: 

pueros decet verecundos esse 

modesty is becoming for boys 

hoc licet; vixisse eum paenitet 

fit, ut de eadem re aliud alii videatur 

FORMS OF IMPERSONAL VERBS (276) 



Present 
Imperfect 
Future I. 
Perfect 
Pluperfect 
Future II. 



paeniteat, 
paeniteret 



pae nitere 



paenituerit. 
paenituisset 



p aeni tuisse 



NOTE: 



272. 1. 

paenitere 
pigere 

pudere 

taedere 

miserere 

oportere 

referre 

273, 



paenitet, 

paenitebat, 

paenitebit 

paenituit, 

paenituerat, 

paenituerit — — 

The imperative is supplied by the subjunctive 

pudeat te, be ashamed 
Always impersonal are : 
paenitet paenituit 
piguit 
/ puduit 
\puditum est 
pertaesum est disgust 
j personal form / move to 
\ miseritus sum \ pity 
oportuit ought 

retulit l beof 

Ymoment 

2. Usually impersonal are : 

Verbs denoting operations of nature: 



piget 

pudet 

taedet 

miseret 

oportet 

refert 



repent 
annoy 
fput to 
\shame 



Bum hiiius rel 

paenitet, piget, 
pudet, taedet, 
miseret: 

He repents, 

is annoyed, etc. 
(415) 



Oportet 



fulgere 


fulg-et 


fulsit 


lighten 


tonare 


tonat 


tonuit 


thunder 


pluere 


pluit 


pluit 


rain 


ningere 


ningit 


(ninxit) 


snow- 


liicere 


lilcet 


luxit 


be light 


lucescere 


liicescit 


luxit 


grow light 


advesperascere 




(- avit ) 


grow dark 



eum ire 
or eat 
(546) 

Hoc mea nihil 

refert (459 ) 



Tonat, it th's; 

but also 
Iuppiter tonat 

Dllucescit; 

but also: 
Dies illucescic 



:;-: ; ' 



IMPERSONAL VERBS 



K»7 



6. Four other verbs : 




Ea eum deceni 


decere 


deeet 


decuit be becoming 


(416) 
Te frasci dedecet 


dedecere 


dedecet 


dedeeuit be unbecoming 


Hue mihi libet 


libere 


libet 


libuit suit 


I [aec ei licenl 


lice re 


licet 


licuit be allowed 




274. 3. Personal in 


one meaning, 




Impersonal in another are : 


Eum iuvat, it 


iuvare 


iuvat 


iuvit delight 


delights him 


fallere 
fugere 


fallit 
fugit 


fefellit escape 
fugit escape 


Hum fallit, fugit, 
praeterit, it es- 
capes him (41()) 


praeterire 


praeterit 


praeteriit escape 




apparere 
liquere 


apparet 
liquet 


apparuit be evident 
licuit be clear 


Deum esse ap- 
paret, liquet, 
patet, constat 


patere 


patet 


patuit be manifest 


(545) 


constfire 


constat 


constitit be well known 


Eum id fa- 


conducere 


conducit 


condiixil serve 


cere 


expedire 


expedit 


expedivit be useful 


ere conducit, 


convenire 


convenit 


convenit be fit 


expedit, convenit 


fieri 


fit 


factum est' 




Contigit ei ut 


aceidere 


aceidit 


aceidit 


happen 1 

► lit etc., 


patriamliberaret 
he succeeded in 


contingere 


contingit 


contigit 


ut 


freeing his 

country 


evenire 


evenit 


evenit 






restare 


restat 


restitit remain 


Restat, ut 


accedere 


accedit 


accessit be added 


Accedit ut or 

quod 
Mihi placet 


placere 


placet 


placuit please 


praestare 


praestat 


praestitit be better 


Mihi praestat 


attinere 


attinet 


attinuit concern 


Ad rne attinet 


interesse 


interest 


interfuit be of moment 


Mea eius interest 










(459) 



275. PASSIVE OF INTRANSITIVE V E R B S (466) 

Yenitur, they (impers. ) come; ventum est, they came 
pugniitur, there is fighting; pugnatum est, there was a fight 
But also: pugna pugnata est, the fight was fought 



I) Contingit is generally used of fortunate, aceidit of unfortunate, evenit of either, 
tit of anv events. 



108 IMPERSONAL AND DEFECTIVE VERBS § 276-277 

276. NOTE: Excepting the infinitive, noun-forms of impersonal verbs 
are rare : 

induci ad pudendum, ad pigendum 
tanta vis fuit paenitendi (sorrow) 
errorem corrigere paenitendo 
consilii nostri nobis paenitendum puto 

Libens, pudens, paenitens, \ are 

willing, modest, repentant, S adjectives 

277. DEFECTIVE VERBS 

(Verba defectiva) 

1. coepi, have begun (supplied by incipio) 

incipere incipio coepi {^e^tus be £ in 

Perfect System complete : coepi, coeperim... coepisse; 
Participal System has only: coeptus,coeptus sum, coeptumesse. 

NOTE: Coeptus sum, instead of coepi, is used with a passive infinitive 
which has passive meaning; the same holds good of desitus sum, instead of 
desii (deetiti ) : 

res moveri coepta est, the thing began to be moved; 

but res moveri coepit, the thing began to move itself; 

res labi coepit, the thing began to move. 

(The 1st infin. has passive, the 2d reflexive, the 3d active meaning.) 

2. memini, memento, remember 

Perfect System complete : 

memini, memineram, meminero etc., meminisse 
remember, remembered, shall remember, to rem. 

Imperative : memento, mementote, remember 
(Supplied by reminisci; recordari) 

3. odl, osurus, hate 

Perfect System\ odl, oderam, odero, etc. odisse 
complete f hate, hated, shall hate, to hate 

Partic. System: osurus, osurus sum, osurum esse 

Passive : odio esse alicui, in odio esse apud 

(Supplied by odium in aliquem habere. ) 



§ 277 DEFECTIVE VERBS 109 

4. aid, / allinu, I say yes (nego, I say no.) 

Pres. Indie: aio, ais, ait; aiunl; Perfect Indie.: ait. 
Impf. Indie: aiebam, aiebas etc. 

ain ( = aisne)? really, indeed, is it possible? 

5. inquam (inserted in direct quotations), say I, said I. 



Pres. Indie. 
Impf. Indie. 
Future Indie. 
Perfect Indie. 



inquam, inquis, inquit; inquiunt 

— — inquiebat; 

— inquies, inquiet 

— inqulstl, inquit 



video, video, inquam, non cogito solum 
(Supplied by dicere. ) 

6. fando audire, learn by hearsay. 

affari affatur, affatus sum address 

praefari praefatur, praefatus sum say beforehand 

Note: Forms of far! ( speak) and its compounds are rare. 

7. quaeso, quaesumus, /, we beg- 

NOTE: Quaeso is used especially to soften the imperative : 

quaeso attende ...; attende, quaeso 

quaeso ut attendatis; quaeso, quid hoc est? 

8. salve, sal vete; sal v ere te iubeo: hail! welcome! 

9. vale, valete; valere te i vibe 6: farewell! 

10. have (ave), havete (avere); 

havere (avere) te iubeo: hail! farewell! 

(Used at both meeting and separating. ) 

11. cedo, say, let us hear! give, out with it! 

cedo, quid postea? let us hear, what then? 
cedo, quaeso, codicem : please, hand the book. 



no 
278. 



IRREGULAR VERBS 



§ 278 



IRREGULAR VERBS 

(Verba anomala) 



esse, sum, fuT, futurus, to be 


IndicatTvus ConiunctTvus (199) 






Praesens : I am 




1. 


sum 


sumus sim 


simus 


2. 


es 


estis 


sis 


sitis 


3. 


est 


sunt sit 


sint 






Imperfectum : I was 




1. 


eram 


eramus essem 


essemus 


2. 


eras 


eratis esses 


essetis 


3. 


erat 


erant esset 


essent 






Futurum I. : I shall be 




1. 


ero 


erimus 




2. 


eris 


eritis 




3. 


erit 


erunt 








Perfectum : I was, I have been 




1. 


fuT 


fuimus 


fuerim 


fuerimus 


2. 


fuisti 


fuistis 


fueris 


fueritis 


3. 


fuit 


fuerunt 


fuerit 


fuerint 






Plusquamperfectum : / had been 




1. 


fueram 


fueramus | fuissem 


fuissemus 


2, 


fueras 


fueratis fuisses 


fuissetis 


3. 


fuerat 


fuerant fuisset 


fuissent 






Futurum II. : I shall have been 




1. 


fuero 


fuerimus 




2. 


fueris 


fu eritis 




3. 


fuerit 


fuerint 





Probus sum, improbus 11611 sum; 

Pueri probl sumus, erimus, eramus 



§ J78-2* 



ESSE AM) ITS COMPOUNDS 



111 



Imperativus praesentis: es, be thou este, be ye 

Imperatives futuri : esto, thou shalt be estote, ye shall be 

Inflnltlvus praesentis : esse to he 

f u i s s e to have been 



Inf Initi vus perfect! 
Infinitivus futfiri 
Participium futuri: 
279 



S futurum am, urn etc esse to be about to be 
I or: fore ( unchangeable) 



futiirus, a, urn 



about to be 



Instead of esto, he shall be, and sunto, they shall be 
commonly sit and sint are used (227) 



NOTE: Forem, fores, foret, forent - essem, esses, esset, essent. 
280. Compounds of esse 

1. abesse absum afui afuturus be absent 

absens absent 

, fadsum adfuJ adfuturus , 

2.adesse lassum affui affllt tirus be present 

praesens present 

3. deesse desum defui defuturus be lacking 

4-. interesse intersum interfui interfuturus be among (dat.) 

5. obesse obsum offuT offut virus hinder (dat.) 

6. praeesse praesum praefuT praefuturus have charge of 

(dat. ) 

7. prodesse prosum profui profuturus be useful 

S. superesse supersum superfuT superfutvirus be left, remain 
9. inesse insum (fui in) be in 

10. subesse subsum (fui sub) be under, near 

281. NOTE: Prodesse is a compound of prod (= pro) and esse : 
its d appears before e only : prodes, prodero. 



282. NOTE: Aburbeabest 

Prudent ia ei deest 
Tibi obsum, prosum 
Null! de inimicis supersunt 
1 n eo (in) est scientia 



A d portam adest 
Pugnae navali interest 
Exercit u I praeeet 
Spes salutis tibi superest 
I n ea re subest suspicio 



Rhenus, biems subesl 



112 IRREGULAR VERBS § 283-285 

283. Posse, possum, potui, be able, can 

Indicative Subjunctive 

{pos -sum pos-sumus pos-sim pos-slmus 

pot-es pot-estis pos -sis pos-sitis 

pot -est pos-sunt pos-sit pos-sint 

Impf. : pot - eram etc. pot - eramus etc. pos - sem etc. pos - senilis etc. 
Fut. 1. : pot-ero etc. pot-erimus etc. 
Pf. 5' in. : pot- ui, pot-uerim, pot-ueram, pot - uisseru, pot - uero 
Infinitives : posse, to be able potuisse, to have been able 
potens (adj.), mighty 
(No other forms) 

NOTE: Posse is a compound of pot (= pote, able) and esse; 
possum = pote sum; posse = pote esse; 
potui and potens are forms of a former verb potere. 

284. Edere, edo, edi, esum, eat : (regular) 

Secondary Forms 

es, est, estis - edis, edit, editis 

essem, esses, esset etc. = ederem, ederes, ederet etc. 

es, este; esto, estote = ede, edite; edito, editote 
esse = edere 

estur, essetur = editur, ederetur 

NOTE: The long e alone distinguishes the secondary forms of edere from 
the forms of sum beginning with es. 

285. Ferre, fero, tuli, latum, carry, bear 

Present Indicative 
Active Passive 

1. fero ferimus feror ferimur 

2. fers fertis ferris ferimini 

3. fert ferunt fertur feruntur 

Imperfect Subjunctive 
1. ferre m etc. ferrer etc. 



§ 286-287 IRREGULAR VERBS 113 

286. 

Prcs. Imperative: fer, carry thou ferte, carry ye 

Fut. Imperative : fer to, thou shalt carry fertote, ye shall carry 
Infinitives : fer re, to carry ferri, to be carried 

XOTE: All other forms are regular : 

feram, feras etc. feram, feres etc. 

tuli, tulerim etc. liitus sum, sim etc. 

Distinguish : feres, ferrjs; ferris. fereris, ferreris 



287. 

adferre 
anteferre 

auferre 
conferre 

deferre 



Compounds of ferre 



adfero 
antefero 

aufero 

confero 

rne 

defero 



attuli 

antetull 



alia turn 

ante] at um 



carry to, bring 

prefer 



abstuli 

contuli 



ablatum 
conlatttm 



carry away 1 

f carry together 
\compare 2 
Romam confero, I go to Rome 

detuli delatum f bear to (-ad) 

\ report 



differre 


differo 


distuli 


dilatum 


put off 3 


differre 


differo 


— 


— 


differ (from = ab) 


efferre 


effero 


extulT 


elatura 


carry out of* 


inferre 


infero 


intulT 


inlatum 


carry into 5 


offerre 


offero 


obtuli 


oblattim 


offer 


praeferre 


praefero 


praetuli 


praelatum 


prefer 


referre 


refero 


rettuli 


relatum 


carry back 6 


sutTerre 


suffero 


! KSi"* *—»*» 


suffer, endure 


tollere 


tollo 


sustull 


sublatum 


flift, raise 

\do away with 7 


cxtollere 


extollo 


extulT 


elatum 


raise, exalt 8 



Memoriam fuisse in e.~) singula rem ferunt 

It is related that he had a memory extraordinary 



1) id tibi aufero (474) 

2) tecum cum confer (464) 

3) in poeterum id defero 

4) me effero, am haughty 



6) gratiam referre pro , return 

thanks {in deed); gr.ltias agere, 
(in word) 

7 ) te de medio toilet 



lis helium inferre, make war 8) caput extollit 
upon 



114 



IRREGULAR VERBS 



§ 288-289 



288. velle, volo, volui, will, wish, want 
nolle, nolo, nolui, won't don't want 
malle, malo, malui, choose rather, prefer 



Present 
Indicative 


volo 

vis 

Vlllt 

volumus 
vultis 

volunt 


nolo 

non vis 
non visit 

nolumus 
non vultis 

nolunt 


malo 

mavis 

mavult 

malumus 
mavultis 

malunt 


Present 
Subjunctive 


velim 

veils 

velit 

v e 1 T m u s 

velitis 

velint 


nolim 

noils 

nolit 

n olimus 

nolitis 

nolint 


malim 

mails 

malit 

malim us 

malitis 

malint 


Imperfect 
Indicative 


volebam 
volebas etc. 


nolebam 
nolebas etc. 


malebam 
malebas etc. 


Imperfect 
Subjunctive 

Future I. 


vellein 

velles etc. 


nollem 
nolles etc. 


mallem 
malles etc. 


volam 
voles etc. 


nolam 
noles etc. 


malam 
males etc. 


Imperat.Pres. 
Imperat. Put. 


— 


noli nolite 
nolito nolitote 


— 


Infinit. Pres. 


velle 


nolle 


malle 


Partic. Pres. 


(eupiens) 


(invitus) 


— 


Perfect Y( ?J 
Systems no J 


ui, voluerim, ^ 
uT, noluerim, r 
ui, maluerim, r 


olueram, volui 
Lolueram, nolui 
nalueram, raalu 


ssem, voluero 
sscm, noluero 
issem, rnaluero 



NO TE: Distinguish nolles and noles, malles and males. 
Nolo is composed of ne volo; malo of mage volo. 



289. Slit ( = si vis) 

noli laudare 
nolite laudfire 

Void probus esse 
Yolo te probum esse 
Yolo tibi: ( tuii causa) 



if you please 
don' t praise 

don't praise 

I want to be honest 

I want you to be honest 

I wish vou well 



S 2C0-2U2 



HINO(il I.Aii VKKH 



290. 

Pres. Indie. 
Pres. Sub/. 



ire, eo, ii, ituni, 



to go 



eo is it | mms 
earn eas etc. 



Ttis 



emit 



Imperf. Indie. 
Imperf. Subj. 


ibamibas 
| irem ires 


etc. 
etc. 


\ 








Future I. 


ibo 


ibis 


etc. 


i 








Perfect Indie. 
Perfect Subj. 


| ierim 


IStl 

ieris 


iit 
ierit 


iimus 
ierimus 


istis 

ientis 


ierunt 
> ierint 




Plupf. Indie. 
Plupf Subj. 


ieram ieras 

|lssemisses 


etc. 
etc. 


i 
i 








Future II. 


| iero 


ieris 


etc. 


i 








Imperative Pre 
Imperative Fut 


sent I 
ure it 6 


go thou 
thou shalt go 


ite 
itote 


go ye 
ye shall 


go 



Infinitive Present | ire to go 

Infinitive Perfect | isse, to have gone 

Infinitive Future | iturum etc., esse to be about to go 



Participle Present | iens (Gen. euntis) going- 
Participle Future | ittirus, a urn about to go 

Gerund 
Supines 



I (ad) eutidum, T, o (to or for) going 
I itum, itu (585, 587) 



291. 



Pa ssive 



Ttur ibatnr Tbitur itum est etc., t/7cr(impers.)£0, wereg.etc 
eatur Tretur — itum sit etc. they shall go, would go, etc 

eundumest one must go 

mihi, tibi, el, eundum est, 7, you, he must go 



292. 



INTRANSITIVE COMPOUNDS OF Ire 



ablre abeo abii abitnm go away } 



Passive: 



prodireprodeo prodii proditum go forth J-abitur, abitum est 
redire redeo redii reditum go back ) abeundumest,etc. 



magistratu abire 
or Be abdicare 



resign office 



in publicum prodire go out in public 

in gratiam redire cum eo be reconciled to him 



116 IRREGULAR VERBS § 292-21*4 

perlre, pereo, peril, perit ur u s, perish: used as Passive 
of perdere, perdo , perdidl, perditum, ruin 
venire, veneo,venii, — be offered for sale :[Pas. 

of vendere,vend6, vendidi, veuditum sell 
Note that perditus, perdendns 
venditus. vendendus 
are the only passive forms of perdere and vend ere. 
interire, intereo, interii, interittirus, perish 

Distinguish prodimus, prodimus 

venimus, venimus, venimus, veniimus 
293. TRANSITIVE COMPOUNDS OF Tre 

a. With a complete passive: 

adire adeo adii aditum go to, approach 

praeterire - eo -ii -itirm goby, don't mention 

(adeor, aditus sum, adeundus sum, adlrl) 
b. With a passive in the 3d ps. sg. and pi : 

inire ineo inii initum enter upon (ace.) 

(consilia ineuntur, inita aestate) 

obire obeo obil obitum S travel over ) 

I engage m, die S ' 

( clvitates, legationes, mors obeuntur) 

subire subeo subil subitum \ undergo 

I pericula subeuntur 

transire -eo -ii -itum go over, cross 

Like audire: 

ambire ambio ambivi ambitum 5 ca "™ss for votes: 

I populus ambitur 

(ambiam, ambiebam, ambientis. ambitus, ambiendus) 
quire, queo, quivT, can 
nequire, nequeo, nequivi, can't 
Present System : like eo : non queam etc. 
Perfect System : regular : (usually not contracted) 
Imperative, Supine, Gerund: wanting. 



294. 



§ 2 



KHEUI I. \K VERBS 



II, 



295. fieri, fio, factus sum, become, happen, be made 



Pres. Indie. 
Prcs. Subj. 



fl6 

fiain 



fis 
fias 



fit 
fiat 



(fimus 
fiamus 



fitis) 
fiatis 



flu nt 
fiant 



Impf. Indie. 

Impf. Subj. 


fiebatn 

fierem 


fiebas fiebat 
fieres fieret 


fiebamus fiebatis fiebant 

fieremus fieretis fierent 


Future I. 

Pf Sni 


fiam 

factus 


lies flet | fiemus fietis fieri t 
sum, eram, ero, sim, essem 



Imp 


erative 


Inf. 
Inf. 

Inf. 
I. F 


Pr. 
Pf. 

Ft. 
. Pass. 


Pe. 
Pc. 
Pc. 


Pr. 
Pf 
Ft. 


Ger.Partic. 



(fi, flte) 



fieri become, happen, be made 

factum etc., esse have become, been made 

fore or futurum etc. esse [ h u e Rh u ou \ \° \ e ^ come ) 

[be about to happen 

factum TrT be about to be made 



factus etc. 
futurus etc. 



made, that has become 
about to be (come), happen 



faciendus etc. 



that must be made 



1. bonus, senex fio 
quid eo flet ? 

2. scelera faint 
ut fit 

?). consul fio 

c lipid it ate caecus fio 
opera ab ils fiebant 
certior ab eo fio 



/become good, an old man 
what will become of him ? 



crimes occur 

as it usually happens 

I am made a consul 

I am blinded by passion 

the works were being-constructed 

1 am informed bv him 



NOTE: Inchoatives (pg. 98) an- often preferred to fieri, become: 

lucescit, senesco 
With things confici, perfici are preferred to fieri, be made. 

opera perficiuntur 
NOTE: The i in tit and before er in fieri and fierem at. ) is short 



118 



286, 



PREPOSITIONS 



§ 206-203 



(Praepositiones) 
Prepositions denote : 



1. Relations of space; 

2. Relations of time; 

3. Other relations (of manner, purpose, cause etc.) 
I. PREPOSITIONS USED WITH THE ACCUSATIVE AND THE ABL. : 



297. 

1. in urbem, in Italiam 
in montem 

in vallem 

2. in multam noctem 
in annum 

in posterum diem 
in dies maior 

3. eius in patrem amor 
oratio in Catilinam 

in utramque patrem 
hunc in modum 

1. in urbe, in capite 
pontem in numine facere 

2. bis in die 



in septem sapientissimus 
in hoc homine'.' 

in gumma senectute 
(in) secunctis rebus 
(in ) adversis rebus 



298. 

1. sub iugum mittere 
sub montem succedere 

2. sub noctem 
sub vesperum 
sub haec dicta 

3. sub (in) potestatem redigere 

1. sub monte eonsidere 
sub divo 

2. sub ipsa profectione 

3. sub imperio alicuius esse 



IN 1 

; into the capital, (in) to Italy 
up the mountain, 
down into the valley 
till late in the night 
for (the space of)a year 
for the following day 
greater from day to day 
love for his lather 
speech against Catiline 

for and against 
in this manner 

in the city, on the head 
to make a bridge over the river 
| twice a day (in the course of) 
the wisest among the seven 

in the case of this man 

in spite of extreme old age 

in luck, in prosperity 
in adversity 

SUB 



to send under the yoke 

to come to the foot of the mountain 

shortly before nightfall 

toward evening 

just after these words 

subdue, bring under the power ot 

to encamp sit the foot of them. 

under the open sky 

Sit the time ol the departure 

to be in the power of someone 



1 ) In arid sub with the accusative express the place whither, with the ablative 
the place where, both literally and figuratively (Exceptions in n. 527; 518.) 



§ 299 301 



PREPOSITIONS 



119 



299. II. PREPOSITIONS USED WITH THE ABLATIVE ONLY 

A b and a ; ex, e , d e ; 

sine, cum; pro and p r a e , 

NOTE 1 : The prepositions a and e are used before consonants only, ab and ex 
before any letter; ab is rarely found before b, p, f, v, m. 

NOTE 2: Mecum, tecum, s,"cura, noblscum, vobiscum (131); 
qnocum or cum quo, quacum or cum qua etc. (146); 
in all other cases cum precedes. 



300. 

1. ab urbe venire (524) 

2. a primis temporibus 

a pueritia = a puero audivi 
a pueris littens studuimus 
ab urbe condita 
secundus, alter ab eo 

3. ab aliquo laudari 
ab aliquo fla.gita.re 

te ab eo defendo, tueor 
a te = abs te 



AB, A 

to come from the city 

from the first times 

I have heard from boyhood 

we have studied from boyhood 

af ter ( since) the building of Rome 

the second after him 

to be praised by somebody 

to demand from somebody 

I defend you against him 

by vou 



301. 

1. (ex) urbepellere (486) 
ex equo desilire 

ex equo pugnare 
e regione solis 

2. ex quo; ex quo tempore 

3. e re publicfi 
ex sen ten ti a 

ex aequo (el bono) 

ex tempore dicere 

illius ex patre nominatus est 



EX, E 

to drive out of the city 
to jump from the horse 
to fight on horseback 
exactly opposite the sun 
since, since the time that 
for the good of the state 
according to ones wish 
in accordance with fairness 

\ speak according to the circumstances 
i on the spur of the moment 

the son w;is named after his father 



120 



PREPOSITIONS 



§ 302-305 



302. 

1. de muro deicere 
de terra saxum tollere 

2. de nocte profectus est 

3. de aliqua re dicere 
qua de causa 

de sententia (See ex sententia.) 
de te bene mereor 
but: tua in me merita 

303. 



DE 



to throw down from the wall 

to lift the rock up from the ground 
he set out before the end of night 

to speak about something 
for which reason 

according to the opinion of 

I deserve well of you 
your deserts in my behalf 



3. Sine ulla spe 
304. 



SINE 

without any hope (714) 
CUM 



1. cum patre venit he came with his father 

2. cum prima luce domumvenitfoe came home with early dawn 

3. cum toga pulla sedeo I sit in the dark toga 

cum gladid in eum invasit he rushed upon him^with. a sword 

aliquid secum !.,»•* a -, 

(cum animo suo)reputare j to thmk > refLect about someth. 



305. PRO 

1. pro aede sedere 

but ante aedem 
pro suggestu 

2.— 

3. pro llbertate mori 

pro consule proficiscor 

pro vectura solvo 

pro certo hoc dico 

pro tua prudentia 

pro tempore (et re) 

pro multitudine hominum 



fto sit before the temple 
\ (i. e. the back turned towards it) 
before (i. e. facing) the temple 
on the( front part of the) tribune 



to die for liberty (in defense of) 

I set out in place of the consul 

I pay for the transportation 

1 say this for certain 

in accordance with your wisdom 

according to circumstances 

in view of their large population 



^ 306-309 PREPOSITIONS 121 

306. PRAE 

1. prae so ferre (pugionem) to carry [a dagger) before oneself 

2.— — 

3. aliquid prae se ferre to show {make a show of ) something 

prae maerore loqui non potuit foriprevented by)sadness he could not speak 
prae ceteris iustus just compared with the rest 

Zn/tpraeter ceteros iustus juster than the rest 

Note: Prae se is used with ferre, gerere, mittere, agere. 

307. Coram \ rare as preposition 

( frequent as adverb 

1. coram genero meo in the presence of my son-in-law 

Adverbially : coram adest he is present in person 

Tenus 

(Postpositive; mostly poetical) 
1. Tauro tenus regnare to rule as far as the Taurus 

308. III. PREPOSITIONS USED WITH THE ACCUSATIVE ONLY 

Apud, ad and penes; 
iuxta, prope, propter; 
ob, ad versus, erga, contra; 
infra, supra, intra, extra; 
citra, ultra, cis and trans; 
ante, post, secundum, praeter; 
circum, circa, circiter; 
super, per and inter. 

309. APUD (used chiefly with persons) 

1. apud eum sedebat he sat near him 

apud senaturn verba fecit he spoke before the senate 

2. apud maiores nostros at the time of our ancestors 

3. apud Platdnem in (the works of) Plato 
hut: in Phaedro Platonia in Plato' s Phaedrus (definite work) 

apud amicum cenavi / dined in the house of my friend 

apud me nihil valet he has no influence over me 

apud eoa mos esl among them it is customary 



122 prepositions $ 310-314 

310. AD (used chiefly with places) 

1. ad urbem esse, ad Cannas tobenesirthecity; near Cannae 
ad flumen esse to be near (on the banks of) 
ad urbem Tre to go to the city [the river 
ad amicum venire, scribere to come, write to him 

usque ad eastra accessit he approached as far as the 
ad Oceanum (versus) towards the Ocean [camp 

2. ad multam noctem till late in the night 

ad vesperum toward evening, till evening 

ad tern pus, ad diem at the right time, on the day 

3. homo ad aliquid utilis a man useful for something 
ad dicendum natus (factus) he is a born speaker 

ad quadringentos sunt they are about ( they amount to) 400 

ad unum omnes adsunt all without exception are present 
but praeter unum omnes all with the exception of one 
Sid verbum word for word 

311. PBNES(with persons only) 

3. Penes Caesarem under the control, in the power ot Caesar 

312. IUXTA, PROPE, PROPTER 

1. iuxta murum close to the wall 

propemurum=propeamuror?ear the wall 

propter murum consedimus we sat down near the wall 

NOTE: Also propior. proximus ) ^ , ^ r . ^ , ,. , 

and propius, proxime \ take the accus - ' or the datlve > 

3. propter pacem on account of the (actual) peace 

foutpacis cau sa( Position! )for the sake of (obtaining) peace 

313. OB 

1. exsilium mihi ob oculos versatur banishment is before my eyes 
3. ob earn causam for that reason 

314. AD VERSUS, ERGA, CONTRA 1 

1. adversusor contra montem opposite the mountain 
3. adversus or contra hostem against the enemy 

ad versus ilium est modestus towards him he is modest 
summus erga vos amor his great love for you 
voluntas erga Caesarem good- will for Caesar 



1) Erga is used of friendly, contra of hostile feelings. 



§ 315- 310 prepositions 1 23 

315. INFRA, SUPRA, INTRA, EXTRA 

1. Infra sldera, supra sidera below the stars, above the stars 
intra fines, extra fines within the borders, outside 

2. intra decern annos within ten years 

316. CITRA, ULTRA, CIS and TRANS 

1. citra Rhenum, ultra Rhenum on this side of, beyond the Rhine 

eis Rhenum, trans Rhenum bordering on this side, on the farther 

side 

317. ANTE, POST, SECUNDUM, PRAETER 

1 . ante eastra (See pro) before (i. e. facing) the camp 
post eastra behind the camp 

2. ante lucem before daybreak 
post proelium after the battle 

post hominum memoriam as far as records go back 

1 . iter secundum mare a march along the sea-coast 

2. secundum ludos immediately after thegames 
.">. secundum Deum parentes amandi next to God our p. are to be loved 

secundum naturam (opp. contra) in accordance with nature 

1 . praeter eastra past the camp 

3. praeter eonsuetiidinem contrary to custom 
praeter modum beyond measure 
praeter te nemo (See prae) no one except you (739) 

318. CIRCUM, CIRCA, CIRCITER 

1. circum urbem round the city 

templa circa forum the temples about the forum 

2. circiter meridiem about noon 

Sole: Circiter usually is an adverb: media circiter nocte. 

319. SUPER 

1. tectum Stlper COnclavia thc roofover (on top of ) the rooms 

but: supra conclavia above {not touching) the rooms 
(supra) £ to sail beyond Suni 



124 prepositions § 320-323 

320. PER 

1 . per urbem fluit it Bo ws through the city 
per orbem terrarum all over the globe 

2. per hiemem throughout the winter 
per noctem during" the night 

per medios hostes (Position !) through the midst of the enemies 

3 hop ner nrociiratorem factum e«t S k was done tbrov g h the agency 
6. noc per procuratorem tactum est ^ of& steward> by a steward 

per litteras eolloqui to converse by (means of) letters 

per vim pluriinum possunt they can accomplish much thru violence 

per deos rurare to swear by the gods 

per me licet as far as I am concerned, you may 

per valetudinem venire on account of ill health I cannot 

non possum come 

321. INTER 



1. inter SequanosetHelvetios between the territory of 

2. dies 45 inter binos ludos between the two games 
inter cenam during dinner 

3. inter atnlcos between (among) friends 
inter nos aniamus we love one another 

322. PLACE OF THE PREPOSITIONS 

The place of the preposition is immediately before ( sometimes after) its 
noun; if necessary, the noun must be repeated. 

De rebus in urbe gestis 
Contra legem et pro lege 
Contra legem et pro ea 
Intra munitiones et extra (adv. ) 

323. QUE and other Enclitics 

should not be appended to J *£• -». ad, ^ : a^que^ 

may be appended to ex and in ^™™ 

are (usually) appended to all other prepositions : deque Caesare. 



§ 324-326 



PREPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS 



1 25 



324. Some prepositions retain their original use as adverbs in the follow- 
ing meanings : 





1. 




2. 




3 


ante 


in front 




previously 


— 


post 


}>ehind 




after u 


r ards 


— 


supra 


above 




previo 


usly 


beyond 


Infra 


under neath 




— 




— 


coram 


in one' s presence 


— 




personally 


prope 


near 




— 




nearly 


extra 


without 




— 




— 


ultra 


on the other 


side 


— 




— 


circum : 


all around 




— 




— 


circiter : 


— 




about 




about 



325. 



CONJUNCTIONS 

(Coniunctiones) 



Conjunctions are words used to connect words, phrases, clauses, or sen- 
tences. They are of two kinds : 

Co-ordinate Conjunctions joining coordinate elements (words, 
phrases, dependent clauses having the same grammatical relation, independent 
clauses), and 

Subordinate Conjunctions joining subordinate clauses to prin- 
cipal (loading ) clauses. 



COORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS 

326 COPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS 

(Coniunctiones copulativae) 

{Denoting union) 

et and 

que (enclitic) and 

ac (only before consonants exc.c,g, q) and 

atque (before any letter) and 

etiani also, even (105) 

atque etiani and also 

quoque (postpositive) also, too 

ne-quidem (separated by the word emphasized^ j"°*^£|£ 

neque and not; nor (161) 



126 COORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS § 326-327 

USES OF THE PRECEDING CONJUNCTIONS 

1. Three or more words are connected as follows : 

avus et pater et ITlius : Polysyndeton 

avus, pater, films : Asyndeton 

avus, pater, filiusque 

Veni, vidi, vici I came, 1 saw, I conquered 

\biit except eva^it erfmit S H ^ is gone, he has left, he has escaped, 
ADut, excessit, evafcit, erupit ^ he hag rushed out 

2. Que unites things that belong to one another : 

fames sitisque, hunger and thirst 
ferro ignique, with fire and sword 

3. Atque and ac often emphasize the word following: 

Is a constantia atque a mente atque a se ipse discessit. 

4. Et - que atque 1 ex ■ and indeed 

(often with is) / J * 

summa voluptas et ( ea or quidem) sempiterna 

rnulti clari elves many famous citizens 

multi et clari elves many (and indeed) famous citizens 

5. Btiam nunc moraris ? Even now? (emphasizing) 
Qttoque joins (usually without emphasis) words only: 

Antonius quoque = Antonius etiam 

6. Ac ne illud quidem / ^dnot even this 

1 \ neither ... this 

7. neque enim (non enim ) for not 
neque tamen (non tamen) yet not 
neque vero (non autem) but not 

neque enim quisquam for nobody 

neque enim quicquam fcr nothing 

neque enim ulla causa for no cause 

neque enim umquam for never 

NOTE: Et non = ac non, et nemo, et numquam etc. emphasize the negative : 
breve et non difficile short and not difficult 



327, 



DISJUNCTIVE CONJUNCTIONS 

(Coniunctiones disiunctivae) 

(Denoting separation ) 

aut, vel, -ve, sive, or 

( Ye, enclitic, is used to join words only.) 



^ 327-328 COORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS 1U/ 

USES 

1. Auta) excludes: (hie vincendum aut moriendum 

[here you must conquer or die 

-v , Jeuncti aut raa"na pars 

b) corrects: y a ll Q r (more accurately) a great part 

2. Yel,-ve, sive permit choice (velle): 

Zeno vel Chrysippus Z. or {if you choose) Ch. 

plus minus ve wore or less 

tres quattuorve tAree or tour 

Bacchus sive Liber H. or (also called) L. 

vel potius, sive potius\ , 

seupotius, atqueadeo/ or rather 

NOTE: Vel, as adverb, = 1) even, 2) t/?e very: 

] ) id vel ex hoc cognoscl potest 
2) vel maximus (105, c). 

328 * ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS 

(Conimictiones adversativae) 

(Denot ing opp o sit ion) 

sed but 

verum (stronger than sed) but 

at (contrasting) but 

atqtu (stronger than at) but now; but anyhow 

vero (assuring) however, but... indeed 

autem but; (often = now, and) 

tamen (after a concessive) however, yet, nevertheless 

verum enitn vero but truly 

USES 

1. Sed, verum , ut , atque areplaced at the beginning 
of a sentence; vero, autem are placed after the first 
word, prepositions not counted; tamen is placed either 
before or after the first word. 

2. At is used to introduce objections ( = dices) 

3. Atqul expresses, of all adversative conjunctions, the 
weakest opposition, and may often be left untranslated : 

murl autem hac fere forma sunt, 

n o w this is usually the form of their walls. 



128 COORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS § 329-330 

329. CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS 

(Coniunctiones causales) 

(Denoting- cause) 

nam, enim (postpositive) : for 

, . / lor indeed 

namque, etenim (stronger than nam) : y an( j j n f act 

nam rex iussit, 
rex enim iussit. 

330. ILLATIVE CONJUNCTIONS 

(Coniunctiones conclusivae) 

{Denoting inference ) 

igitur (usually postpositive) {therefore 
ergo, itaque, proinde J 

USES 

1. Ergo and igitur introduce a logical conclusion: 

Nihil est praestantius Deo Nothing is more excellent than God 

Ab eo igitur necesse est mundum The world, then, must be governed by 

regi him 

Omnem ergo regit ipse naturam... He, there fore, rules all nature himself... 

Ergo utrum ignorant, an vim non Consequently, do the gods not 

habent di...? know..., or are they without power... ? 

2. Itaque introduces an actual result following from cir- 
cumstances. 

Nemo ausus est liber Phocionem No free man dared to bury Phocion. 

sepelire. Itaque a servis sepultus est. And so he was buried by slaves. 

3. Proinde introduces a command or an exhortation: 

proinde te para, hence, prepare yourself '! 

proinde quiescant, let them, therefore, be quiet ! 

NOTE: a. Ergo, igitur, itaque, proinde are not joined to any other coordinate 
conjunction ( See above example in n. 2 ) : 

t^~, ~ S h therefore 

Itaq - ue . { 2. and therefore 

b. Ergo and igitur often resume an interrupted thought : 
Died igitur provident!! deorum I affirm, then, that the universe is 

mundum administrarl governed by the providence ot the gods. 



§ 330-331 



COOKIMNATK CONJUNCTIONS 



1211 



NOTE: "Therefore" may also be expressed by 
adverbial phrases or adverbs: 

/ dually at the beginning- At any place 

oh earn rem (causam) quam ob rem ideo (quod, ut) 

hancobrem (cansam) quocirca idcirco (quod, ut) 

ea de re (causa) qufipropter propterea (quod, ut) 

NOTE: Ob earn rem ete. refer to something preceding or following (142), 
quam ob rem etc. to something preceding, 
ideo etc. to something following. 



331. 



COMBINATIONS OF CONJUNCTIONS 



et - et 

neque - neque| 
nee - nee j 

Deque aut - aut 
et neque - neque 

nemo...( ne( J ue - 1 ? ec i ue 
\aut - aut 

neque — et 
neque 



et - 

rum 



turn 



turn - turn ) 

modo- modo S 

non solum \sed etiam or 

nf>n modo jverum etiam 

non modo \ - 

or non dicam j se 

NOTE: The expression 



fboth — and; 
{-as well as — 

neither - nor 
and neither - nor 

no one neither- nor 

on the one hand not 

and on the other hand 

on the one hand — and 
on the other hand not 

both — and especially 
now - now 

not only - but also 
I won't say , but 



non mono 
non modo 



ioor 1 i - -i not onlv not, 

lonon J se(l ae-quidein but not even 



is used whan both members have the same predicate : 

Non modo extra tectum.sed ne extra lectam quidem videbatux. 

aut - aut (327) either - or 

vel - vel, (aive-slve) either-or 



130 SUBOEDINATE CONJUNCTIONS § 332 

332. SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS 

Subordinate Conjunctions are, like relative pronouns, used 
to join subordinate to leading clauses. Subordinate are : 

Clauses of Purpose and Fear, 

Clauses of Result, 

Quln - Clauses, 

Causal and Substantive Quod - Clauses, 

Temporal Clauses, 

Adversative and Concessive Clauses, 

Comparative Clauses, 

Clauses of Proviso, 

Conditional Clauses. 

The tenses employed in subordinate clauses are independent, 
when the leading and dependent clauses belong to different periods of 
time : 

quae imperavistl, faciam, 

I shall do -what you hare commanded; 

they are dependent ( folio wing rules of sequence), when both the leading 
and dependent clause belong to the same period of time : 

quae imperii ver is, faciam, 

/ shall do what you command 

i. e. what you will have commanded 

Note: The following pages contain Synopses of the principal 
rules of sequence and a list of conjunctions with their modes 
and tenses : 

Sequence in Indicative Clauses : Page 131 

Sequence in Subjunctive Clauses : Pages 132-133 

List of Conjunctions with their modes \ p ao - e s 1 34-1 9R 
and tenses (dependent and independent) / to 



* 332 



JEQUENCEIN INDICATIVE CLAUSE! 



CONGRUENT (607) 

with a main tense (.'>72) is the same dependent tense 

NOTE: Cum and quod, by, as well as quam diu, dum, quoad, as 

long- as, demand the tenses of congruent action. 

cum tacent, clamant by being silent they shout 

cum tacebant, clamabant their silence was a shout 

disces, dum vives you will learn as long as you live 

CONTEMPORANEOUS (608) 



with a main present is 

with a main tut ure is 

with a m. historical t\ 592 ) is 



a dependent present 
a dependent fut ure 
a dependent imperfect 



facio quod licet 
faciam quod licebit 
feci quod lieebat 



/ do what is lawful 

I shall do what is lawful 

I did what was lawful 



pr evious (611; 



to a main present is 

to a main future is 

to a main h is tor ic a 1 tense is 



a dependent present per feet 
a dependent future perfect 
a dependent past perfect 



facio quod iussistl 
faciam quod iusseris 
feci quod iuss eras 



...what you have commanded 
f ...what you command 
\i. e. what you will have c^ded 
what you (had) commanded 



NOTE: This sequence is especially observed in the use of the futures 
and in clauses expressing repeated action (610, 612) : 



si sapies, hoc faciei 
ut sementem feceris, ita metes 
quotiens dorai sum, serlbo 
quotiC'ns domi ero, serlbam 
quotiens domi eram, scrlbobam 
cum domum venT, seribo 
cum domum vvnero, scribam 
cum domum veneram, s("bam 



if you are wise, you will do this 

you will reap, as you sow 

as often as I am at home, 1 write 

as often as I am at home, I shall write 

as often as I was at home, I wrote 

when J come home, I write 

when 1 come home, I shall write 

when I came home, I wrote 



NOTE: Repeated action is introduced by relatives, cum, si, quotiens, ut 
quisque 



132 sequence ix SUBJUNCTIVE clauses § 332 


CONTEMPORANEOUS '617 1 


with a principal tense 


(616 ) is the present subjunctive 


with a se cond ary tense 


is the imperfect subjunctive 


video quid facias 


...what you are doing (now) 


videbo quid facias 
videro quid facias 


\ ...what you are doing (then) 
\i. e. what you will be doing 


videbam quid faceres 
vidi quid faceres 
videram quid faceres 


\ ..what you were doing (then) 

1 


PREVIOUS (.618) 


to a p rin c ip a 1 tense 


is the perfect subjunctive 


to a secondary tense 


is the pluperfect subjunctive 



video quid f ecerls 



videbo quid f ecerls | 
videro quid f ecerls/ 

videbam quid fecisses) 
vidi quid fecisses j 

videram quid fecisses j 



| ...what you have done 

I ...what you have been doing 

| ...what you did 

{...what you were doing 

j ...what you ha Ye done 

(i.e. what you will haye done 

...what you had done 
...what you had been do ins: 



"| also, but loosely 
\ ...what you we. 



r e doing before 



NOTE: Clauses dependent on subordinate clauses follow the same 
rules ( 624) : 

scio quis impediverit | n€ aolres 

abiit. quia sciebat / ■-, •- . 
non dubito quin sclverit j 1 md *»«*■ 

NOTE: Clauses dependent on a pe rie ct infinitive or participle take 
the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive; those dependent on other 
in£nitives or participles are governed by the wain finite verb '620 : 

scic eum impedivisse | 

dicebat se inipedire I n ^ abir £ s 

dixit 'se impediturum esse J 



dicit (dicet) se inipedire 



ne abeas 



S 332 sequence in SUBJUNCTIVE clauses (600) 133 



!. SUBSEQUENT (619) 

to a principal tense is the present subjunctive 

to a second ary tense is the imperfect subjunctive 

when the future character ot the dependent clause is suggested in the 
sentence; as in clauses of purpose (095 sqq., 711), fear (701), likelihood 
[056, b), deliberation {602) and expectancy {040); also in all clauses of 
result ( 705 sqq., 713) , except those enumerated in n. 004 and 019, 2: 

edo, edarn, edero \ ...that /may live 

ut vivam (695, 697) ] ...or (in order) to live 

verebar, veritus sum, eram \ ...i) that he was going 
ne ablret(701) / ...2) that he would go 

II. A. SUBSEQUENT 

to a principal tense is - virus sim 

to a secondary tense is - lirus essem, 

when the future character of the dependent clause is not suggested in the 
sentence; as in indirect questions of fact I 041), after non dubito quin 

( 710, 050), in causal ( 715), concessive {727), and comparative (731) clauses 
and in those result - clauses in which the result is to be denoted as ye t t o 
come (019) : 

video, videbo, videro \ ...what you will do 

quid iacturus sis j ...what you are going to do 

11011 dubitabam,-vi, -veram\ ...that you would do this 
quin hoc facturus esses / ...that you were g. to do this 

II. B. SUBSEQUENT 

to a principal tense is the present subjunctive ) with an adverb of a 

v . future character; as 
to a sec o nda ry tense is the imperfect subjunctive J p o s te a, aliquando, 

when the verb used in the clauses mentioned above in II. a. lacks the form 
in - firus, or is jiassive : 

non dubito quin te \ / do not doubt that you will 

fact! brevi paeniteat } (soon) he sorry for your action 

non dubitabam quin \ / did not doubt that the city 

urbs mox expugnareturj would (soon) betaken 



134 CONJUNCTIONAL INDICATIVE CLAUJEs § : 



CAUSALAND SUBSTANTIVE 

quod, quia because \ All tenses ace. 

quoniarn, slqoidem since indeed \ to sequence 



quod (introducing a subject, object the fact | that \ All tenses ace. 

or appoeitive clause) as to. if \ to sequence 

TEM PO R AL 

dum referring to any period of time | while : Present 

dum, donee, quoad, quam din ? , tenses of 

(denoting time only | => j congruent action 

dum, donee, quoad, (d. time only until (Perfect and 

antequam. priusquam | denoting ! 2d Future; 

quam after ante and prinfi 1 time °**y before | rarely the Present 

postquam, posteaqnam \ denoting a after j „ r 

ut, ubi, simulatque ( singlepastact as soon as \ 
cum tern porale et relativurn : timeonly when .723, 673) : All tenses Sequ.) 
cum coincident ( 607, a by : All {congruent) t. 

cum iterativuni 610,612) as often as : All tenses (Sequ.) 

cum inversum (724; when suddenly : Perfect 

ADVERSATIVE-CONCESSIVE 

quamquam \ although \ , „ , , c 

etii, tametei \ m fact \ lciaci W e( /"'l 



etiamsi (following the construction of si eyen if 



ut, Blent, quern ad modum 
quam (after comparative ideas 



eyen if 


: All tenses St 




COM PARATI VE 


as 

than 


j All tenses {Sequ. ) 




C LA USES OF 



CON DITIONAL 



slid credis, erras \ if you belieye... that I imply nothing as to the 
si id crcdes..., errabis... { fulfilment of the condition .you are ... mistaken 



nisi (negativing the entire protasis ) unless 
si non (negativing a single word ) if not 

sin (introducing a second condition I but it 



and modes 
qui- siquis, cum - si quando, ubi-sicubi 



§ 333 



CONJUNCTIONAL SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES 



1 35 



QUOD -CLAUSES (715-721) 

quod, quia < when introducing because 
quoniam etc. ( another's reason since indeed 



All tenses of 

the Suhj. (Sequence) 



cum, since, seeing that : All tenses (Sequence) 

quod ( introducing a substantive (the tact) that ? , 1rj _ /0 * 

clause with another's reason) as to, it \ ^ tenses (Sequence) 

CLAUSES (722-726) 



dum, donee, quoad f denoting ) .... ( Present and 

antequam, priusquam<| tim e and ] un * s \ Imperfect; 

quam after ante and prius j parpose or J before f j^^ 1 ?^ 6 ^ 

[anticipation Deiore v esp. in indir. d. 



cum historicum (d. time and situation) when, after : Impf.; Plupf. 



CLAUSES (727-72 9) 

cum adversativum 
cllmYoncessivum 
ut, ut non 
quam vis 

licet 
etiamsi 

CLAUSES 1730-739) 
quasi, tamquam, tamquam si 
velut si, p'roinde ac si 

PROVISO (740-741) 

modo, dum, dum modo (nc) 

CLAUSES (742 SQQ.) 

si id crcdtls, errcs, (err aver Is) 
si id credideriB, erres (erraveris) 

si id crederes, erriires 

bi id credidisses, erravisses 



while 1 

though 

* j + u ±( ja r All tenses (Sequence) 
granted that(not) I \ i .i 

no matter how 

may : Present; Perfect 

even if : All tenses(Sequence) 



(as it 

\as though 



j All tenses 

\ ace. to Sequence 



it only so long . A11 tenses {S equ. 
as (not) v H 



i if you should believe that ( let me 
I suppose you will), you -would go 

I wrong 



S if you believed that ( but you do 

) not) , you would go wrong 
if you had believed that ( but you 
did not ),you would ha vegone wrong 



J 36 



CONJUNCTIONAL SUBJUNCTIYB CLAUSES 



S 333 



PURPOSE AND FEAR (695-701) 



ut that, to 

ne, continued by neve that not, not to 



ne quis, ne quid, 
ne qua r3s, ne umquam 
C[ll6 ( before comparatives) 

a te peto, postulo ut 

tibi suadeo, impero ne... 

r e c u s 6 ne or quo minus 
impedio ne or quo minus 
deterreo ne or quo minus 



vereor ne 

vereor ne non(orut 



that nobody, that nothing 
that no thing, thai never 

that the ( - ut eo) 

I ask, demand from you to- 
J advise, command vou not 

to 

/ refuse to 

I hinder from 

1 deter from 



Present after 
principal tenses 



^Imperfect after 
secondary tenses 



I fear that 

I fear that not 



All tenses (701) 



RESULT (702-708) 

ut that 

ut non, ut neque-neque that not,that neither-nor 



ut nemo, ut nihil 

ut nulla res, ut numquam 

maior quam ut 

is, talis, tantus ut 

tarn or adeo bonus (bene) ut 

ita or usque eo non bonus ut so little good that 

ita, sic agit ut he so acts that 



that nobody, that nothing 
that no thing, that never 
too great to 
such, so great that 
so good (well) that 



Present alter 
piincipal tenses. 

Imperfect after 

secondary tenses; 

but 
Independent t. (604) 
to denote result as 
existing : Present 
past fact : Perfect 
pres.judgrn. : Perf. 



QU I N (709-714) 

(Used only after main clauses with negative meaning. ) 

non dubito quin I do not doubt that : Declaration! 

nemo est quin ...no one w ho. ..not \ ! 

quid est quin what... that...not ) Characteristic 

non tarn fortis est quin not so brave as not to : Result 

nihil abest quin nothing is wanting to\ 

.... -', , . f Purpose : Pres. and Impf. 

nihil praetermitto quin / leave n. undone to) ^ 

nihil facio quin... (All tenses), I do nothing without... : Compare n. 714 



$ 334-336 



INTERJECTIONS 



137 



334. 



(Interiectiones) 



J°y 


: io ! euoe! 6 ! 




hurra! huzza! o! 


Sorrow 


: heu! eheu! pro 


vae! 


alas! ah me! woe! 


Astonishment 


: en ! ecce ! pro ! vae ! 


Io! behold! o! hem! 


Disgust 


: pro ! apage ! 




tie! begone! 


Praise 


: eia! euge! 




bra vo ! well done ! 


Calling- 


: hens ! ohe ! 6 ! 




hey! ho! 


Asseveration 


fne! 
. ! me dius fidius (i. e 
1 (me) hercule ! 
^ edepol ! ecastor ! 


j. iuvet 


truly ! 

)by the God of Truth ! 
in truth ! by Hercules .' 
by Pollux ! by Castor ! 



PART III. FORMATION OF WORDS 

335. New words are formed by 

Derivation, (adding of suffixes to the stems of words) and 
Composition, (linking one word or its stem to another); 

Hence there are : 

PrlmitTva, Primitives and DerivatTva, Derivatives 
Simplicia, Simple w T ords and Composita, Compounds 



336. 



I. DERIVATIVES 

SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM VERBS 



tor, trix ( fern. ) i 


'Denoting 


victor, victrix 


conqueror 


sor 


the Agent 


defensor 


defender 


J 


Activity 


clamor 


shout 


or v 

\ Condition 


dolor 


pain 


tio 


Action 


motio 


a moving 


Bid 


as 


obsessio 


blockade 


us (gen. us) 


in process 


mot us 


a moving 


men 




nomen 


name 


mentum 




ornamentum 


ornament 


bulum 


Aleans 


vocfibulum 


vocable 


colnm 


> or 
Instrument 


gubernaculum 


helm 


ulum 


iaculum 


javelin 


crum 




sepulcrum 


grave 


trum 




a rat rum 


plo w 



38 



FORMATION OF AV0EDS 



§ 337-339 



337 



SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES 









/flosculus 
t particula 


flo were t 


cuius, a, 


urn 


Deminiitiva 


particle 


ulus, a, 


urn 


Diminutives 


[opusculum 


little work 


olus, a, 




> ( usually following the 


puerulus 


little boy 


urn 


gender of the primiti\ T e > 


filiolus 


little son 


ellus, a, 


urn 




ocellus 


little eye 


illus, a, 


um 




lapillus 


little stone, pebble 


ides 1 
ides >m 
ades J 






Priamides 


Son of Priam 


asc. 


Patronymica 


AtrldcS 


Son of Atreus 




Greek nouns 


Aenead^s 


Son of Aeneas 


eis | 




of descent or 


Nereis 


Daughter of Nereus 


is Uem. 


relationship 


Atlantis 


Daughter of Atlas 


ias ) 


> 




Thaumantias 
aerarium 


Daughter of Thaum< 
treasury 


arium 




Place Avhere things 


seminarium 


seminary 


etum 


i 


(plants, animals ) 


quercetum 


oak grove 


ile 


are kept 


ovile 


sheepfold 








fmedicina 


art ot healing 


iua 




Art or (its) place 


' ofRcina 
( piscina 


workshop 








fishpond 


atus 




Office 


consulatus 


consulate 



338. 



SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES 



tas 
tiido 
ia 
itia 



Quality 



pietas 


piety 


fortitudo 


bravery 


audacia 


boldness 


amicitia 


friendship 



339. 



ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM VERBS 



bundus 



Meaning of present 
participle increased 



moribundus dying 
furibundus raging 



cundus 


1 


iracundus 


wrathful 


ax 


\ Inclination 


mendtix 


given to lying 


ulus 


) 


credulus 


credulous 



§ 339-341 



FORMATION OF WOKDS 



L39 



idus 



(Quality 



ilia ) Capacity ('with 

bilis \ passive meaning) 



340. 

ens 

ins 
icius 
ieus 
alia 

el is 

His 

firis 

ensis 

ester 

anus 

inns 

nus 

Tvus 

timus 

osus 

lentus 

tus 
341. 

aims 
inns 

Tus (ins) 
ieus 

ieus 
ins 

anus 

inns 

as 

ins 

aeus 

ensis 



ealidus 

docilis 
mobilis 



docile 
movable 



ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM COMMON NOUNS 



Material 



Belonging to 



aureus 


golden 


patrius (amor) 


fatherly 


patricius 


patrician 


bellicus 


warlike 


regalia 


regal 


crudelis 


cruel 


puerilis 


boyish 


popularia 


popular 


eastrensis 


camp- 


cam pester 


held- 


urbanus 


city - 


divinus 


divine 


paternus ( ager ) 


fatherly 


aestivus 


summer - 


maritimus 


sea- 


artificiosus 


artistic 


Vinolentus 


drunk with wine 


$ barbatus 


bearded 


} auritus 


having ears 



Fulness 

Supplied with 
ADJECTIVES DERP 



1 

f Names of Persons 



Names of Nations 



H, 



Barnes of Places 



Sullanus 
Verrinus 
Epicureus 
Homericna 

Germanicus 
Thracius 

Th el Kin us 

Amerinus 

Arpinaa 

Cori Qt bins 

Smyrnaeus 

Cannensis 



of Sulla 
of Verres 
Epicurean 
Homeric 

German 
Thracian 

Theban 

of Ameria 
ol Arpinum 
Corinthian 
of Smyrna 
of Cannae 



140 
342. 

us 



FORMATION OF WORDS 



§ 342-347 



ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES 

Deminiitivfi 



rnisellus 
parvulus 



wretched 
little 



343. 



ernus 
ternus 
tinus 
tinus 



ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM ADVERBS 



Relating to 



hodiernus 
hesternus 
crastinus 
intestinus 



of to-day 
of yesterday 
of to-morrow 
internal 



344. 



scere 

are 

itare 
sare 
si tare 

urire 



VERBS DERIVED FROM VERBS 
Incohativa : Obdormiscere fall asleep 



~] Frequentativa cantiire 
L and intensiva : cantitare 
f repetition or inten- cursare 

J sity;usu.from pf.part.cursitare 

Desideratlva : esurire 



smg 

sing repeatedly 
) run hither 
S and thither 

desire to eat 



345. 



ere 



ire 
ere 



VERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS 



Usually transitive : 
Only intransitive : 
\ Trans, and intrans. 



^ vulnerare 

\ exsulare (intr.) 

florere (intr. ) 

saevire (intr.) 
metuere 



wouni 
live in exile 

bloom 

rage 
fear 



346. 

certatim 
separatim 
statim 
caesim 



ADVERBS DERIVED FROM VERBS 



emulously 
separately 
instantly 
by cuts 



cursim 

praesertim 

raptim 

sensim 



speedily 
especially 
hurriedly 
gradually 



347. ADVERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS 

nominatim expressly; by name antiquitus 

gradatim step by step funditus 

viritim man by man radicitus 

furtim by stealth penitus 



of old 
utterly 
radically 
thoroughly 



§ 350-351 



FORMATION OF WORDS 



141 



P re poe i t ion and Verb : 

a, ab, abs, as - away 

a.ob,obs,oa {-—L 



f together 



com, con, CO | ^ Qngly 

\ completely 
Inseparable Particle 

and V e r b : 
anib, am - around 

au - away 

dis, di, dir \ a P art , 

( asunder 



Bti 



apart 



( abdere 
} absterrere 
( asportare 

( obrepere 
•? offerre 
( ostendere 

j conferre 
{ cognoscere 

deicere 
devincere 

f ambire 
! ambiirere 
j amplecti 
( am putare 



put away, hide 
frighten away 
carry away 

approach towards 

offer 

show 

carry together 

learn to know thoroughly 

throw down 
conquer completely 



go round 
burn around 
embrace 
cut around, 



:ut off 



aufugere flee away 



dirimere 
dissolvere 



part 
dissolve 



sCcernere distinguish 



NOTE: Phonetic changes occurring in the composition of words appear 
specially in the composition of verbs; e. g. : 



Assimilation of consonants 
Elision of consonants 

Contraction of vowels 

Weakening of vowels 



aggredi from adgredi 

tradere from transdere 

cogere from coagere 

( concludere from conclaudere 

-j concidere from concaedere 

( conieere from coniacere 



351. COMPOUND ADVERBS 

eminus = e mantis at fighting distance^hands apart) 

comminus - con mantis in close contest (hands together) 

forsitan - fors sit an perhaps 

hodie = hoc die to-day 

llico = in loco instantly 

interea = inter ea meanwhile 

nudiustertius- nunc dies tertius the day before yesterday 

profecto = pro facto actually, by all means 

scilicet - sci (re) licet evidently, of course 

NOTE: The meaning of place denoted by loco and ea i 178) is changed 
into a meaning of time in ilio'i and interea. 



142 

352. 



§ 352 



APPENDIX 



1. CORRESPONDING TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS 



Transitive 


Intransitive 


Transitive 


Intransitive 


excitare 


expergisci 


caedere 


cadere 


fugare 


fugere 


occidere 


occidere 


augere 


£iccrescere 


calefacere 


calere 


minuere 


decrescere 


obstupefacere 


stupere 


accendere 


ardere 


patefacere 


patere 


comburere 


conflagrare 


assueTacere 


/ assuevisse 
\(assuescere) 


iacere 


iacere 




cogere 


convenire 


constituere 


/stare 


suspendere 


pendere 




\(consistere) 


2. ENGLISH AND LATIN 


WORDS OF SIMILAR SOUND 


convince 


persuadere 


convincere, 


convict 


digest, 


concoquere 


dlgerere, 


arrange 


discuss, 


disputare 


discutere, 


dispel 


suspect, 


suspicari 


suspicere, 


look up to 




3. LATIN R 


EFLEXIVES 




se conferre 


go 


se mergere, 


dive 


se efferre 


become haughty 


se recipere, 


retreat 


se iungere 


join 


se subducere, 


withdra w 




4. SIMILAR 


LATIN FORMS 




edere 


edere 


fissus 


fisus 


possidere 


possidere 


cepi 


coepi 


condimus 


condimus 


abscidi 


abscidi 


vincimus 


vincimus 


rettulit 


retulit 


prodimus 


prodimus 


victurus 


victurus 


addimus 


adimus 


paritiirus 


paritiirus 


reddimus 


redimus 


quaereris 


quereris 


venimus 


venimus 


educo 


educo 


venimus 


veniimus 


appello, sero 


appello, sero 


opertus 


oppertus 


fundo, mando 


fundo, mando 


oblitus 


oblitus 


consterno 


consterno 



PART IV: SYNTAX 



INTRODUCTORY DEFINITIONS 



353. Syntax (syntaxis) is the part of grammar that treats 
of the sentence and its constructions. 

THE SENTENCE AND ITS PARTS 

354. A sentence is a finite verb (184) ) - 

or a related group of words containing * used to express 
or implying a finite verb J a thou S ht 

i go 

dorm it he sleeps 

estne Deus? is there a God ? 

periculum in mora {there is) danger in delay 

355. The subject is that about which something is said 
(380, 516, 544) 

356. The predicate is that which is said of the subject {by 
means of a finite verb); thus, in the sentence 

Caesar, v ir magna v i r t u t e, i m p e r a t o r f u i t (clarus est) 

Caesar, vir magna virtute is the complete subject 

Caesar is the subject (nominative) 

imperator fuit (clarus est) is the complete predicate 

fait is the predicate verb 

imperator is the predicate substantive 

clarus is the predicate adject i v c 

imperator and clarus are predicate nominatives 

Note: There are likewise predicate participles and predicate 
pronouns. 



144 ATTRIBUTE, TRANSITIVE VERBS § 357-360 

357. An attribute in its widest meaning is any pronoun, 
adjeetive, participle, substantive or phrase, used to modify a 
noun, being added to it without a Unite verb: 

hie puer, bonus dux this hoy, a good leader 

ornatissimus adulescens an excellent young man 

Cicero consul the consul Cicero 

mores Gall 6 rum Gallic customs 

civis patriae am a ns a patriotic citizen 

vir ma^ni ingenii I r 7 

vir magna ingenioj a talented wan 

cum dignitate otium honorable leisure 

358. An attribute loosely added (an implied finite verb 
intervening) to its noun is called an appositive; it is a short- 
ened predicate : 

Cicero consul id fecit C, (he was at the time) a consul, did it 

dux noster, prudens et f ortis ... our leader, (he is) prudent and brave 
Alexander, rex M ace don urn,... Alexander, a king of Macedonia 
rex p u g n a n s cecidit the King fell, ( he was at the time) fighting 

Note: The name appositive is frequently restricted to sub- 
stantive appositives. 

359. An attribute closely added (no implied finite verb 
intervening) to its noun has no special name distinguishing it 
from the attribute in its general meaning; 

dux noster prudens et fortis our prude nt and brave leader 
urbs Konia (One idea) the city of Rome (405) 

Note: The name attribute is frequently restricted to adjective 
attributes closely attached to their nouns. 

360. Transitive verbs are verbs whose action goes over 
(transit) from the subject to an object beyond it. This object, 
when expressed, takes the accusative in the active (object ac- 
cusative) and the nominative in the passive (subject nom- 
inative) : 

video, aedifico, I see, I build ( The object is not expressed) 

dom u m video, I see a house (Domum is object accusative) 

domus videtur, a house is seen ( Domus is subject nominative) 



§ 361-365 INTRANSITIVE VERBS, OBJECTS, COMPLEMENTS 1 |.~, 

361. Intransitive verbs arc verbs whose action does not 
go over from the subject to an object beyond it. 

Deus est, vivit, cogitat God exists, lives, thinks 

puer dormic, cnrrit, cadil the hoy sleeps*, runs, falls 

avis vtilat, canit, moritur the bird flies, sings, dies 

362. The direct object is the object effected (inner object) 
or affected (outer object) by the action of the verb : 

do mum as object of video (trans.) istheobject affectc d {outer object); 
do m u m as object of a e d i f i c 6 ( tr. ) is the object e ft'c c t e d (in n c r object ) . 

Note : Only transitive verbs can have an outer object; intransi- 
tive verbs may have a direct inner object : 
puer vitam duram vi vit a boy lives a hard life 

363. The indirect object is the person to or for whom or the 
thing to or for which the action of the verb is performed. It is 
put in the dative : 

tibi librum do (transitive) I give you a book 
tibi pareo (intransitive) I obey you 

Note : The indirect object is often called an adverbial modifier 
of its verb. 

364. Transitive verbs form a passive for each of the three 
persons : they have a complete or personal passive: 

Active : magister me, te, ilium puerum laudat; 

Passive : ego laudor, tu laudaris, ille puer a magistro laudator. 

Intransitive verbs cannot form a passive for any definite 
person; however, most intransitive verbs form an impersonal 
passive, which is expressed by (the neuter of) the third person 
singular: 

Active :( homines) currant ? people are running (275) 
Passive : eurntur S ' ' 

365. A complement is a word or group of words needed to 
complete the predication of a verb (3S6) 

est be at us he is happy 

videtur callidus imperii ir he seems to be an experienced 

esse '.ender 

p u e r u m laudo 1 praise t h e h oy 



146 COMPLEMENTS, ADVERBIAL MODIFIERS § 366-368 

366. Complements completing the meaning of copulative 
verbs like be, become, remain, seem, be considered, chosen, made, 
named, are called 

1. predicate complements, because they complete the 
meaning of the predicate proper (the verb); 

or 2. subject complements, because they complete the 
meaning of the subject, with which they are connected 
by means of the copulas; 

or 3. attribute complements, because they are real mod- 
ifiers of the subject. 

Note: Such complements may be (predicate) substantives, 
adjectives, participles, phrases or clauses : 

creabitar rex: Substantive est mag no usui : Dative phrase 

fit, manet beatus: Adjective est magno ingenio: Ablative phrase 

est moritu rus : Participle videris tristisesse: Infinitive phrase 

est mag nae virtutis : Gen. phrase es, quifuisti: Clause 

367. Complements completing the predication of other (non- 
copulative) verbs (or of nouns implying verbal action) by 
denoting the object towards which the action of a verb is di- 
rected, are called objective complements. 

Note: Such complements may be (object) genitives, datives, 
accusatives, ablative phrases, infinitives and clauses : 



\ Prepositional 
j Phrases 

Infinitive 

Ace. with Infin. 



memini vestri A desperat de salute 

memoria vestri: j^Jective recordor d e t e 

memor vestri:) cupiolegere 

noceo tibi : Dative scio Deum esse 

laudo discipulum: Accusati ve novi quid facias 

utor consilio : Ablative laudo quod ve nisti : $ UD J ect clauses 

Note. Distinguish subjective from objective genitives (439). 

368. Adverbial modifiers are words, phrases and clauses 
used to modify verbs, adjectives and adverbs by denoting place, 
time, number, manner, means, degree, comparison, condition, 
concession, opposition, cause, purpose, result, assertion and 
denial : 

fortiter pugnat he tights bravely 

tarn fortis so brave 

tarn fortiter so bravely 



^ 36C-373 SIMPLE, COMPOUND A.ND COMPLEX SENTENCES 117 

SENTENCES AND CLAUSES 

369. A simple -sentence is a sentence that contains only 
one finite verb (354): 

Carolus d ortn i t Carl is asleep 

Carolus et Albertus arteet gra-\Carl and Albert are soundly 

viter in suis lectis dormiunt / asleep in their beds 

370. A compound sentence is a sentence that contains two 
or more simple sentences belonging together (See 373): 

v eni t et v T c i t he came and conquered 

v e n I , v T d T , v I c T / came, sa w and conquered 

Carolus surrexit, sed Alber-\ Carl got up, but Albert re- 
tus in suo lecto mansit / inained in his bed 

niini dnbium er at utermansu-\ was it doubtful which of the two 

rUS, titer SUrrectfirus e S S e t ? j would remain and which get up ? 

371. A clause is a simple sentence that belongs to a 
compound sentence (373). 

372. Coordinate clauses are clauses of equal rank; 

main, (principal) and subordinate \ clauses are of 
or independent(leading)and dependent) unequal rank; 

thus, surrexit and mansit (370,) and uter\ 

surrecturus and uter mansurus esset jare coordinate, 

mansurus (esset) as well as ( subordinate 

surrecturus esset are at the same time / to dubium erat 

A'ote : A dependent clause may govern another dependent 
clause : thus, in the sentence 

(1 T e a m uter surrexerit, cum \ I will tell which of the t wo got 
cos excitatum venissem } up, when I came to call them 

the dependent surrexerit governs the dependent ve- 
nissem. 

373. The term compound is frequently restricted to sentences 
that contain two or more clauses none of which is dependent, 
while sentences that contain independent and dependent clauses 
are conveniently called (also in this book) complex sentences. 



148 connectives § 374-375 

CONNECTIVES OF CLAUSES 
374. Coordinate clauses are put together 

a. without connective particles ; 

b. by coordinate conjunctions, like et, aut, sed, nam, ergo (326 sqq. ) 

c. by demonstratives and determinatives,like hie, is, idem (140 sqq.); 

d. by coordinate relatives : qui = et is, sed is, nam is : 

a. Carolus surrexit, Albertus \ Ca rl got up, Albert remained 

mansit / ° l 

b. Carolus surrexit, sed Al- \ Car lgot up, but Albert remained 

bertus mansit / 

c. T. Labienum in Treveros mittit. ) he sent T. Labienus to the Treveri 
Huic mandat Kemos adeat \ commanding him to visit the Remi 

d. statim terga verterunt. Quos 1 they took at once to their heels; but 
nostri consecuti occiderunt \ our men overtook and killed them 

relinquebatur una per Sequanos ) there was still one way left through 
via, qua (= sed ea) Sequanis > the territory of the Sequani, which 

invitis ire non poterant ) however they could not take without 

their consent 

375. Subordinate clauses are put together 

a. without connectives (377); 

b. by subordinate conjunctions, like ut, cum, quod, 
quamvis 

c. by subordinate relatives 

1. with pronominal force (674): qui with the indicative 

2. with adjectival force (674) : qui with the subjunctive 

3. with adverbial force (674) : ut ego, cum ego... 
with the subjunctive : 

a. el mandat Remos adeat he ordered him to visit the Remi 

b. quod venisti, gaudeo 1 am glad, because you came 

C; 1. hominem delegit ex eis quos ? he chose a man from the number of 
auxili causa secum nab e b a t )> his auxiliaries 

2. erant omnino itinera duo, qui- ? there were in all two ways by which 
bus itineribusdomoexirepossent $ they could march out oi their country 

3. legatos miserunt qui (=utii) ^ they sent ambassadors to sue for 
pacem pete rent S peace 



§ 376-377 classes of clauses 149 

classification of subordinate clauses 

376. Dependent clauses are classified according to their mode 
of connection with the leading clause, their contents and their 
function into 

Connected and Unconnected Clauses, 
Statements, Questions and Conditions, 
Substantive, Adjective and Adverbial Clauses. 
A. CONNECTED AND UNCONNECTED CLAUSES 

377. Connected are Relative and Conjunctional Clauses (375); 
Unconnected are 

1. Indirect Questions (See Note) : 

Bcio quid feeeris, feceris n e / know what you did, whether you did it 

2 . Ncga t ived Bern ands: 

tibi suadeo ne id facias I advise you not to do it 

3. Statements of wish, will, permission, propriety, etc. 
dependent on certain verbal forms; as, 

velim, nolim, malim eas I should like you to go (659) 

licet, oportet, necesse est eas you may, ought to, must go 

fac eas; cave eas do go; beware of going 

4. Often statements dependent on verbs of willing and 

demanding: 
visne earn ? shall I go ? 

oro, hortor, mando eas I ask, advise, order you to go 

Note: Some clauses may be dependent in thought only : 

h 6 c f e ci s 1 1 ; gaudeo you did it; I am glad of it 

veni a s ; a te peto may you come; I ask you 

A conjunction will make them dependent in form also : 

quod hoc fecisti, gandeo I am glad because you did it 

a te peto u t venidfl J l ask you t come 

also: peto vetnas S 

Dependent questions and negatived demands are uncon- 
nected clauses; for quis,-ne, ne etc. do not join, but determine 
sentences, giving them the form of word or sentence questions 
and negatived demands. 

The rules of sequence are observed, as soon as the clause 
ceases to be dependent in thought only : 
ne feceris; suadeo tibi don t do it; 1 advise you 

but: tibi suadeo ne fac i as / advise you not to do it 

tibi suas! ne fac e re s / advised you not to do it 



150 



CLASSES OF CLAUSES 



§ 378-379 



B. STATEMENTS, QUESTIONS AND CONDITIONS 
378. Statements declare something : thus, 



(dixit) ut ires 
(opto) ut eas 
(accidit) ut ires 
(es is) qui abisti 



are conjunctional 
and relative clauses 



Statements of 
| will, 
desire, 
fact, 
tact. 



Questions inquire about something : thus, 



(scisne) quis ierit ? 
(scio) quis ierit 



\ are unconnected 
j clauses containing* 



} questions. 

Conditions assume a prerequisite for something else : thus, 

si hoc dfcis, (erras) 1 are conjunctional \ 

qui hoc die at, (erret) [and relative clauses ^conditions. 

si potes, (tace) J containing ) 

NOTE: Exclamations are statements etc. expressing strong emotion. 

C. SUBSTANTIVE, ADJECTIVE AND ADVERBIAL CLAUSES 

379. Substantive (or noun) clauses are clauses that do the work of 
substantives , performing the functions of 

a. subjects, b. direct objects, c. indirect objects, 

d. predicate substantives, e. appositives: 



a. quis, ubi... f e ceri t notum est 
qui fecit laudandus est 
quod rediit mirabile videtur 

b. scimus quis, ubi... fecerit 
quae fecit laudo 

quod rediit miror 

c. quis prodest quibus potest? 

d. tu es qui nos liberasti 

e. omnibus idem faciendum est, ut 
domo emigre nt : (Appositive 
ut-clause explaining the subject. ) 
beneficia commemoro, quod 
am i c us ap pelliltus es, 

( Appos. quod-cl. expl. the object. 



non dubium est q u i n r e d i c r i t 

fieri potest ut redierit 

periculum est ne abeat 

non dubito quin redierit 

perfeci ut rediret (result) 

tibi concedo ut abeas 

pare quibus debes 

vos estis qui m e a 1 e g i t i s 

hoc u n 6 feris praestamus, 

quod colloquimur inter nos: 

(Appos. to an adverbial ablative.) 

totum in e 6 est u t tibi 

i m p e r e s : ( Appositive ut - clause 

explaining the predicate complement. ) 



§ 87 ( .l CLA8SES OP CLAUSES ! 31 

Adjective clauses are clauses that do the work of adjectives: 

domus in qua n fit us sum annas est cum hoc facia 

puer qui pan" re nesciat locus u b i parendum est 

Adverbial clauses are clauses that do the work of adverbs, mod- 
ifying verbs, adjectives and adverbs by expressing 

a. purpose, b. result, c. cause, d. time, e. place, 

f. concession, g. opposition, h. comparison, i. proviso, j. condition : 

a. csseopoitet ut vivas; f. quainquam abest a culpa, 
nc cape ret ur, fugit; tamen suspicione non caret: 

b. maior est quam ut invideat; g. mllle sunius, cum hostis non 
nemo adeo ferus est ut mitescere amplius sescentos habeat; 

non possit; h. horrent eum quasi coram adsit; 

c. quae cum ita sint, parge; ut sfjmentem feceris, ita metes; 
quod tutus non ei at, abiit; plura dixi quam volui; 

d. cum revert ere tur , dec ess it; aliud dicis ac sentis; 

non prius abii, quam venit; i. oderint, dum metuant; 

e. quo imperaveris, conveniemus; j. si hoc disces, gaudebo 

NOTE: Care should be taken to distinguish substantive and adverbial clauses 
of purpose, result, cause, time and place from one another. 



152 DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE SUBJECT § 380-384 

THE SUBJECT NOMI N ATI V E 

380. The subject of a sentence is put in the nominative (355, 
544, 516). 

381. Any word, phrase, clause or sentence may be thesubject 

of a sentence (382). 

382. Indeclinable words as well as phrases, clauses and 
sentences, are considered neuter and singular (13, 3; 271): 

tu est unius syllabae (the word) tu is monosyllabic 

apparetnos ad agendum) . , ^, 1 , 

esse n at os (Phrase) f we are ™dently born lor work 

quod v enisti,gratum ei est\ arrival is agreeable to him 

(Clause) y 

"veni, vidi, vici" illud \"I came, saw and conquered" is 
Caesaris est (Sentence) (the well-known word of Caesar 

383. As a personal pronoun is implied in every finite form of 
the verb (184, 191), it is not expressed, when used as subject, 
except for the purpose of emphasis : 

if; ito; eat I went; you, he shall go 

ego aio, tu negas I say yes, you say no 

384. The indefinite subject we, you, they, one, it, people, 
the world etc., is expressed by 

a. the personal and impersonal passive (364), 

b. the first person plural, if the speaker includes himself, 

c. the second person singular with the s u b j u n c t i v e ( 656) 

d. the third person plural, 

e. quis, aliquis, quispiam (656) : 

a. laud or, laudaris, laudatur people praise me, you, him; 
itur, itum est they are going, they have g.; 

b. quae volumus, eacredimus\we gladly believe what we 

libenter / desire 

c. die a s, dix e r l s one may say; y o u may say 

d. die u n t , trad unt, fer ant it is said, rela ted 

e. si quis clicat (dicit) if a person {one) should sav 



§ 386-387 predicate 153 

the pre dicate 

385. Any finite form (184) of an intransitive verb (361) 
may be the complete predicate of a sentence: 

est Deus God exists 

puer currit the boy is running 

386. Transitive (360) and copulative (366) verbs form com- 
plete predicates with the aid of complements (365); transitive 
verbs require a direct object (362), copulative verbs require 
nouns, phrases or clauses as their complements (366). 

387. A predicate noun (10; 365) used as complement of 
copulative verbs is put in the nominative; copulative are e. g. : 

be and seem, remain, become 
be regarded, named and made : 

sum, videor beat us I am, seem happy 

maneo beat us I remain happy 

fiunt, evadunt orator es they become orators 

putor, habeor doctus I am regarded as learned 

existimantur acuti they are considered as acute men 

dlcor, appellor rex I am called a king 

deligor, designor consul I am chosen, designated consul 

fio beatus (429) I am made happy 

Note 1.: The doubled nominative of the passive becomes a 

doubled accusative in the active : 

Passive: rex a vobis dlcor Active: regem me dicitis 

Note 2.: Esse takes adverbial modifiers both as a verb of 
complete predication (meaning exist, live, take place) and, 
though less frequently, as copula : 

fuit a n t e R 6 m a m c o n d i t a m he lived before the building ofR. 
it a sum (= talis sum) such am I 

sic est (Impersonal) so it is (= sic se res habet) 

bene est;mihi melius est (pup.)//, is well; I feel better 
recti' sunt omnia all is well 



154 AGREEMENT § 383-391 

AGREEMENT 

388. Appositives (358)always agree with their nouns in case; 
appositive communia (13,4) in number and case; 
appositive mobilia (15) in gender, number and case: 

a. Roma, caput Italiae Rome, the capital of Italy 
urbem Syracusas cepit he took the city of Syracuse 

b. sapientia, naturae comes wisdom, nature 1 s companion 

c. stilus, optimus et praestantissimus|t/?e pen, the best and preeminent 
dlcendi effect or ac magist e r j producer and teacher of eloquence 

et genus et formamregina^&otft birth and beauty the al- 
pecunia donat \ mighty dollar gives 

illae omnium doctrinarum \t he great originator of alllearn- 
inventr ices, Athenae j ing, A thens 

389. Appositives to possessive pronouns take the genitive : 
tuum discipuli officium your duty as a pupil 

390. Attributes (i. e. adjectives, pronouns and participles) 
agree with their substantives in gender, number and case (359)- 

Attributes referring to more than one noun agree with 
the first or last or, for the purpose of emphasis, with all: 

a. amicus c e r t u s a reliable friend 
e 6 d e m die on the same day 
praeteritum tempus the past time 

b. res mu 1 1 ae operae et labdris a task requiring hard work and trouble 
ingenium, studia, mores t u i your ability, studies and habits 
omnes agri et maria omnia all the lands and all the seas 

391. Predicates belonging to a simple subject agree 
with it, as much as possible (388), in person and number, gen- 
der and case: 

Themistocles veni ad vos I,Themistocles,havecometoyou 

dos est decern talenta the dowry is ten talents 

us us (vita) est magist er (magistra) experience (life) is a teacher 

tempus est magister (m. !) time is a teacher 

divitiae quasi duces sunt) wealth is, as it were, a guide 

ad voluptatem J to enjoyment 

adsentatio est vitiorum adiut r i x Battery is the helpmate of vices 



vj 392-393 AGREEMENT 155 

AGREEMENT BY ATTRACTION 

392. The verb usually agrees with predicate substantives 
that are nearer than the subject : 

non omnis 

error stultitia dicenda est \not every error should be 
error dleendus est stultitia f called folly 

contentum suis rebus esse (382) \to be content with one's 
maximae sunt dlvitiae f estate is the greatest wealth 

NOTE: The verb often agrees with appositives to names of 
cities and rivers: 

Corinthus,totiusGraeciae lumen,\Cor//7t/z, the light of all 
exstin c t u m est j Greece, has been extinguish' d 

flu m e n Rhenus al t u m est the river Rhine is deep 

393. Predicates belonging to a preceding compound subject 
whose parts are joined by a simple et,-que or atque and denote 
living beings only, 

a. are usually put in the plural number; 

and in case of difference in person or gender 

b. prefer the first parson to the other two, and the 2d to 

the 3d, 

c. and are masculine rather than feminine : 

a. pater et frater beat! sunt lather and brother are happy 
mater et soror beatae sunt mother and sister are happy 

b. ego et tu valemus you and I are well 
ego et pater valemus father and I are well 
tu et pater valetis father and you are well 

c. pater et mater beatl sunt father and mother are happy 
pavones et columbae amici s. peacocks and doves are friends 

But, the predicate sometimes agrees with the nearest subject: 
Orgetorlgis filia atque unus\ the daughter of Orgetorix and 

e f llilS oaptUS est / one of his sons were taken prisoners 

VOS ipSl et SenatUS restitit you yourselves and the senate rcsis'd 



156 AGREEMENT § 394-395 

394. In all other cases the predicate usually agrees 
with the nearest single subject, (unless the agreement by sense 
[395 Note] should be necessary) : 

a. beat u s est pater et frater ) f&ther &nd hrother are h 
beati sunt pater et frater $ ^rj 
pater beat us est et frater father is happy; so is my brother 

b. pater, mater frater beatus est ? f b mother an(J hrother are b 
(or beati sunt) ) 

et ego et vos scitis (scimus ) both you and I know 

nee tu nee ill! sciunt (scitis) neither you nor they know 

aut tu aut ill! sciunt ( scitis) either you or they know 

non tu, sed ill! sciunt not you, but they know 

c. est (sunt) in eo virtus et ? there is worth in him, and honesty and 
probitas et summum officium I the highest sense of duty 

impedimenta et omnis equitatus ) b haggage and all tbe cavalr flowed 
secutus est ) 66 J 

AGREEMENT BY SENSE 

(Constructio ad sensum) 

395. The form of the predicate is often determined by the 
meaning (not the form) of the subject: 

pars, milia, capita coniurationis ? a part, thousands, the heads of the con- 
(i. e. homines) caesisunt > spiracy were put to death 

suum q u i s q u e habea n t let every one keep his own 

senatus populusque Homanus \ *»,,„ r>«„, „„«.„„*„ „„j „,„ 7 ^ ^ 

decre v it (One idea ) } the Roman senate and peo P le decreed 

tempus necessitas q u e postulat the emergency requires 

dux cum militibus capitur (ca- ) the leader is taken prisoner with 



piuntur \ his soldiers 

Note : Abstract ideas are frequently expressed or referred to 
by neuter forms of adjectives, participles or verbs. 

triste lupus stabulis the wolf is a bane for folds 

omnium rerum mors extremum of all things death is the end 

virtus et probitas inter se iungu n t u r 1 ,, . , 

(iuncta or iunctae sunt) } worth and bonest - v are ho ™ d together 

beneficium et iniuria inter se 1 ; -j„ ace „„ A • u 

contraria sunt } kindness and insult a ™ contraries 

honores et victoriae fortuita sunt h. and v. are gifts of chance 

Similarly inanimate objects : 

murus et porta de coelo tacta sunt wall and gate were struck by lightning 



§ 396-3i)S AGREEMENT 157 

396. Pronouns used as subjects or objects agree (by 
attraction) in gender, number and case with the predicate com- 
mon noun of their clause: 

ista quidem vis est that is violence, indeed 

eum dico honorem that I call honor 

quae est llbertas ? what kind of liberty is it ? 

N„ qui est vicus N., a village 

N., quae est urbs N., a city 

N., quod est oppidura N., a town 

Belgae, quam tertiam esse\ the Belgians, who we have said 

partem GalliaedixeramusJ constitute a third part of Gaul 

397. In all other cases pronouns used as subjects or objects 
agree with their antecedents in gender and number, as predicates 
agree with their subjects (391 sqq.); their case, however, 
depends upon their relation in the clause in which they are: 

pater, qui; mater, quae the father, who; the mother, who 

pater et mater, qui father and mother, who 

usus ac discipllna, quam \the training and discipline which 

or quae a. nobis acceperant j they had received from us 

fliimen, quod appellator Rhenus a river, called the Rhine 

venl, erit id (382) el gratum come, you will oblige him 

si a. vobis, id quod or quod\if I should be deserted by you, 

non spero, deserar j which I do not hope 

virtutes, qu arum vis magna est virtue, whose power is great 

NOTE: The accusative of a relative is sometimes attracted into the ablative 
of the antecedent 

niitus eo patre, quo dixT born of the father that I said 

398. Pronouns occasionally agree with appositives or by sense: 

fliimen Rhenus qui or quod. ..\the river Rhine which 

eum or id transierunt... f they crossed it 

servili (= s e r v 6 r u m)tumultu , \ during the rebellion of the slaves 
qu 6 s usus ac discipllna sublevabant / wh o were helped by 

Distinguish quae est llbertas ? what kind of liberty ? 

from quid est llbertas ? w h a t is I the definition of) liberty ? 



158 POSITION OF ATTRIBUTES § 399-401 

POSITION OF ATTRIBUTES 

399. Possessive and indefinitive pronouns, ille in the 
sense of "that well-known ," ordinals and the adjectives 
Romanus and Latinus commonly follow; all other agree- 
ing attributes oftener precede than follow their nouns : 

a. pater tuus,puer quid am your father, a certain boy 
hora tertia at three o' clock 
populus Romanus the Roman people 
Socrates ille (403) famous Socrates 

Always res p u b 1 i c a the state, the commonwealth 

b. hie vir, is dies this man, that day 
qui rex ? q u a 1 i s rex ? what sort of king? 
dies Instat, quo die the day is near on which 
equitum tria milia three thousand horse 
Marathonia pugna) . 1 JAl riK/r . 
pugna Marathonia / the battle of Marathon 

400. Summus, medius, in fimus, primus and extremus 
highest, middle, lowermost, first and last 

often denote a part of an object and usually stand before the 
noun and after the preposition : 

summus mons { tl ? e top of the mountain 

[the highest mountain 

per mediam urbem through the middle of the city 

prlmo vere at the beginning of spring 

extrema hieme at the end of winter 

4-01. Prepositional phrases used as attributes follow 
their nouns and are usually united with them by means of 
relatives, participles or other attributes : 

a. signum exebore an ivory statue 
liber desenectute a book on old age 

mors cum (sine) gloria a glorious (inglorious) death 
iter perSequanos a jo urney thro vgh the territory of. 

reditus in patriam the return to one's native place 

b. pons qui est ad Genavam the bridge near Geneva 
pugna ad Cannas facta the battle at Cannae 
eius ad amicum epistula the letter to his friend 



*> 401-408 



POSITION OF ATTRIBUTE 



159 



Note: English prepositional phrases are usually ex- 
pressed by genitives and adjectives (See 402 and 439): 



bellum Venetorum\ 
Veneticum bellum \ 

transitus Alpium 

pax AriovistI 

victoria civilis 

via Tiburtma 

Lysander Lacedaetnonius 

maritimae civitates 

tumultus servilis 



the war against the Veneti 
the war with the Veneti 

the march across the Alps 

peace with Ariovistus 

victory over citizens 

the road to Tibur 

Lysander of Sparta 

states o n the sea 

rebellion o f the slaves 



402. Attributive genitives are preferably put after their 
nouns, or inserted : 

magnitude pecuniae the great amount of money 

magna rerum permutatio a great change of things 
virtutes animi magnae great moral virtues 

illud Plat6nis(=PlatonicurrO the well-known saying of Plato 



NOTE: Stereotyped expressions are e. g. 



ph'bis scitum 
s e n a t u s consul turn 
tribunus p 1 e b i s 
magister e qui turn 
magister in 6 r u m 



decree of the people 
decree of the senate 
tribune of the people 
chief of the cavalry 
master oi morals 



403. Praising and blaming attributes, except surnames, 
are added to their nouns with an attached ille or an ap- 
positive appellative: 



Cato ille sapiens 
fortissimus ille Hannibal 
Lucullus vir summa auctoritate 

Corinthus, urbs opulentissima ) 
ilia opulentissima Corinthus S 

but Alexander Magnus 



Cato, the famous sage 
Hannibal, the famous hero 

Lucullus, a very influential man 
Corinth, a very wealthy city 
famous and wealthy Corinth 

Alexander the Great 



160 POSITION OF APPOSITIVES § 404-408 

POSITION OF APPOSITIVES 

4-04. Appositives, especially substantives modified by at- 
tributes, are oft ener placed after than before their nouns : 

Cicero consul the consul Cicero 

Caesar imperator Caesar, the general 

C, imperator excellent! ingenio C, an eminently talented general 

dux noster, prudens et fortis our leader, prudent and brave 

Note : Imperator meaning emperor precedes its noun: 

Imperator Tiberius Emperor Tiberius 

405. Rex, king, when used without attribute, and some geographical 
names, as urbs, flu men etc. usually stand before their nouns, forming, 
as it were, one idea with them ; they are attributes rather than appositives 
(359) : 

rex Xerxes, fliimen Rhenus King Xerxes, the river Rhine 

Always urbs Roma the City of Rome 

4-06. Appositives to possessive pronouns (389) are 
inserted : 

mea ipsius opera by my efforts alone 

nostra consulum opera by our efforts as consuls 

407. Appositives ( substantives, adjectives and participles ) , 
maybe rendered by words, phrases or clauses (358; 570 sqq.): 

^. _ _,.,. _ , [C. saved the state as consul: 

Cicero rem publicam consul ) or _ in his consulship 
servavit ^ or when he was consul 

[he went first 
princeps in proelium Tbat {he was the first to go 

[he was the first who went 

408. The principal substantives used as appositives 
are personal substantives denoting 

age, as, puer, adulescens, iuvenis, senex 

or office, as, consul, leg^tus, praetor, miles, dux 

quae pueri peccavimus, senes \ the old man will expiate the 

luemus f sins of the boy 

Titus miles abiit, im-\ Titus went away a soldier, and 

perator rediit / returned as emperor 



§ 409-411 POSITION OF APPOSITIVES 161 

4.09. The principal adjectives and participles used as 
appositives are those that denote 

order or state, 
and solus, funis, totus: 

a. primus (of two prior) iit he went first (See 407) 
postremus (posterior) iit he was the last to go 
princeps, ultimus iit he went first, last 

ran, confertl proeliantur ...scattered, in compact order 

frequentes venerunt they came in great numbers 

b. vivos eos combussit he burnt them alive 
exsanguis et mortuus concidistl pale and taint you fell down 
laetus; maestus or tristis with joy; full of sadness 
(libens) or libenter, invitus gladly, reluctantly 
sciens, insciens knowingly; unwittingly 
adversus, aversus face to face, from behind 
praesens, absens in my, your, his presence, absence 

c. solus venit he came alone 

uni Sequani tristes\ the Sequanians alone gazed 

terram intuebantur J pensively upon the ground 

sum totus vester lam entirely yours 

se totos voluptatibus tradiderunt they gave themselves completely to pi. 
Distinguish prim u s ego vos docui from prim 6 s vos docui 

4-10. Appositives with ut express cause, restriction and com- 
parison : 

... S since you are only a boy, 

u t p u e r impentus rerum es \ yQU are J inexperie J ed 

plurimae in eo, u t i n puero, i for & h he ft i earn ed 

htterae sunt \ . 

, . ..... > you talk like a hoy, though you are 

ut puer loquens, cum sis adulescens \ ayoung man 

NOTE: Comparison is also expressed by quasi and tamquam : 

nostrae causae duces et quasi { they have been the leaders and as it 

8igniferi fuerunt > were the standard bearers in our cause 

tamquam serpens te intulisti you have entered like a serpent 

4,11. Appositives are often replaced by phrases: 

pro occiso ( - tamquam occisus) ? hc was Jeft fo f dead 

rel ictus est > 

pro cive se gessit he acted like a citizen 

obsidum loco, (no mi n e or > be dcmanded t t em a s hostages 

n u m e r o) eos poposcit S 



162 ACCUSATIVE OF THE INNER OBJECT § 412-414 



THE ACCUSATIVE 



412. The accusative is the case of the direct object (362). 

ACCUSATIVE OF THE INNER OBJECT 

4-13. The inner object may be 

a. a substantive differing from the verb in meaning, 

b. a substantive related to the verb in meaning, (cognate accusative, 
usually modified by an attribute), 

c. a neuter pronoun or numeral adjective : 

a. urbem condere to found a city 

b. deorum vitam vivere to live a divine life 
turpissimam servitutem servlre to serve in the most shameful slavery 
stadium currere to run a race 

longam ire via m to be on a long journey 

choc (-hac re) gaudeo I am glad of this 

id (-de ea re) dubito I doubt it 

omnia (Nom.) dubitantur everything is doubted 

id u n u m studeo this is my only aim 

nihil aliud (- null! aliirei) st. I have no other aim 

multum potest (valet) apud... he has great influence over 

pauca querar / shall make a few complaints 

cetera (=in ceteris rebus) \ I agree with you in (regard to) 
tibi assentior J all other points 

4-14.. The accusative of the inner object is often used adverbially, 
rarely attributively : 

a. quid rides ? why are you laughing ? 
id temporis (- eo tempore) venit he came at that time 
multum sunt in venatione they are much engaged in hunting 
magnam partem to a great extent 

aliquid, non nihil to some extent, somewhat 

nihil; summum not at all; at most 

b. homo id aetatis (- ea aetate) a man of that age {357) 

NOTE: The accusative of space and time is related to that of the inner object 
(531; 536; 413, b.). 



^ 415— US ACCUSATIVE OF THE OUTER OBJECT L63 

ACCUSATIVE OF THE OUTER OBJECT 

4<15. With paenitet and pi get 

pudet, taedet, miseret (272) 

the person feeling the emotion takes the accusative, 
the cause producing the emotion takes 

a. the genitive of a substantive or personal pronoun, 

b. the infinitive of a verb, 

c. the nominative of a neuter pronoun, 

a. hiiius fact! me paenitet 1 am sorry for this act 
pudet me deorum f I am ashamed of the gods; 

I sometimes, in sight of the Gods 
me tui pudet 1 am ashamed of you 

b. hoc fecisse me paenitet I am sorry for having done this 

c. hoc me paenitet I repent of this 

416. Dedecet and decet , 

iuvat and dele eta t, 
fugit, fallit, praeterit 

take the accusative of the person affected (See 271-275): 
orator em Irasci dedecet anger is unbecoming in a speaker 

quam delectiibat eum defectionem ? how pleased was he to foretell us the 
8olis et lunae nobis praedicere ) eclipse oi the sun and the moon 

non me fugit quae dicaa your words do not escape me 

4-17. Compounds of circum, praeter, trans, are transitive : 

hostes circumsistere to surround the enemy 

castra c ircumire to march around, surround the camp 

castra praeterlre to pass by the camp 

flumen transire, transgredi to cross the river 

OTHER TRANSITIVE VERBS 

418. adlreorsublre periculum to undergo a danger 

adire urbem to visit a city 

eum adeo I approach him (for aid...) 

ad eum adeo I go to him, near him 

poenam subibit he will submit to the punishment 

proelium inire to begin the battle 

in hostes invadere, incurrere to rush upon the enemy 

Italiam peragrare to travel through Italy 



164 



SPECIAL VERBS TAKING THE ACCUSATIVE 



419-422 



419. eum sequor 
eum fugio 

vox, vires me deficiunt 

But ab eo deficio 

eum omni virtute adaequat 

But ei virtute par est 

eum ulciscor pr5 iniuriis 

iniurias ulclsci, amicos 

meliora sperare 

bellum parare 

bonds iiriitarl, aemulari 

eum conveniam (274) 

pretium inter nos convenit 

mihi tecum convenit, ut... 



I go after him, follow him 
I flee before (escape) him 

my voice, my strength gives out 

I fall away from him 

he is his equal in every virtue 

he equals him in virtue 

I take revenge on him for... 

to avenge wrongs, friends 

to hope for better circumstances 

prepare for war 

to imitate, vie with the good 

I will go to see him 

we agree on the price 



we agree to... 

Note : All compounds of sequor and fugio may take the accusative; obs^quor, 
however, takes the dative : 
huic, hums voluntati obsequor I yield to him, humor his wishes 



420. eum superas, el praestas { 
eum or ei antecedis doctrina ) 



you excel him in learning 

he excels them 



inter eos excellit 

4-21. Verbs transitive in Latin, but intransitive in English are 



inire consulatum 
h or re re crudelitatem 
reformidare bellum 
ridere famae mendacia 



to enter upon the consulship 
to shudder at the cruelty 
to stand in awe of war 
to laugh at rumor's untruths 



422. Verbs expressing painful emotions take the ac- 
cusative or de with the ablative : 

d o 1 e r e casum, de casu to grieve at or tor the misfortune 

mi ra ri singularem impudentiam to wonder at the extraord" 1 y impudence 

maerere, lugere mortem patris to mourn, weep over the death of his f 



gem ere ignominiam, de i'a 
queri fatum, de suo fato 
de sperare pacem, de pace 
desperare de se or sibi 
But gaudere, laetari re 
exsultare, gloriari re 



to sigh over the disgrace 
to complain of one's fate 
to despair of peace 
to despair of oneself 
to be glad of, rejoice in 
to exult over, glory in 



^ 423-427 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE 165 

DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE (Inner and Outer) 

423. Teach and Conceal 

te artem doceo I teach you an art 

Note: The passive of docere, to teach, is usually d i s ce re , to learn : 

artem a me discis; or, arte a me erudiris 

But : calamitate doctus taught wit by misfortune 

Graecls litteria doctua versed in Greek letters 

Note : docere, to teach, is to be distinguished from docere, to inform: 

te de caede doceo J inform you of the murder 

Passive : de caede a me doceris you are informed by me of the murder 

te cladem celo /conceal the defeat from you 

te declade celo 1 keep you in the dark about the ... 

Passive only: de clade celaris you are kept in the dark about the defeat 

4-24. Transport 

Verbs denoting "transport," astraducere, traicere, trans- 
portare keep the accusative of the inner object in the passive : 

exercitum Axonam traduxit he led his army across the Axona 
exercitus Axonam traductus est the army was led across the Axona 

425. Posco, reposco, flagito 

te or a te pacem poscimus we demand peace from you 

Pass, only: pax a te poscitur peace is demanded from you 

But: 

postulo and peto aliquid ate I demand something from you 

quaero aliquid ex, ab, de te\ T 1 u , n ... 

(inter) rogo te de aliqua re / J ask y° u about something 

426. Moneo and cogo; rogo, interrogo and oro, 

take as an inner object a neuter pronoun or adjective, which 
remains in the passive : 

hoc te admoneo I give you this advice 

id COgit omnes poena he compels all to it by punishment 

Passive: istud rogatus sum this request was made to me 

427.Aliquem sententiam rogare to ask one's {official) opinion 

Passive : princeps sententiam rogaris you are the first to be asked for y. o. 



166 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE § 428-431 

428. Regard as, give and take, 

and choose and name and make 

take a double accusative (object and predicate accusative)inthe 
active, and a double nominative (subject and predicate nom- 
inative) in the passive (365) : 

te virum fortem puto, \ I regard you as ( judge 

duco, iudico, arbitror... j you to be) a man of courage 

vos obsides relinquo, do I leave {give) you as hostages 

vos nobis socios sumimus,\ we take (receive, admit) you as 

accipimus, adsciscimus j our allies 

te imperatorem deligimus, \ we choose you, appoint you as 

creamus / our leader 

te patrem patriae vocamus, \ we call (name) you, speak of you 

nominamus, dicimus j as the father of our country 

Passive: consul fis you are made consul 

vir fortis a me putaris you are regarded by me as a brave man 

NOTE: The inner object (virum fortem, obsides...) is a predicate accusative 
complement in. the active, and becomes a predicate nominative complement in 
the passive (365). 

4-29. Reddere and efficere, render, make, take only predicate 
adjectives as their complements; their passive is replaced by fieri: 

avaritia eos caecos reddit, } avarice makes them blind 

facit, efficit i avarice blinds them 

avaritia caeci fiunt they are blinded by avarice 

4-30. Habere, have, takes a predicate accusative : 

habeo te amicum I have a friend in you 

The active of habere, regard as, takes only phrase complements : 

habeo, d u c 6 , puto te p r 6 amico, ) T , - . _, 

in amicis, amicorum 1 o c 6... \ J re ff»rd you as a friend 

haberis hostis, hostium numero, you are r. as an enemy of the country 

431. Se praestare, se praebere 

fortem, virum te praesta show yourself brave, a man 

fortem, ignavum se praebuit he proved to be brave, a coward 
fortiter, ignave se gessit he acted courageously , cowardly 

Se praestare requires a praising predicate accusative, se gerere an adverb. ) 



§ 432-435 ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE If 57 

4-32. An object accusative is used in exclamations (564) : 

(heu or 6) me miseruin ! (ah) wretched man that I am! 

6 tempora, 6 mores ! the times, the ways ot men ! 

NOTE: Ec ce ! usually takes the nominative, vae ! the dative : 

ecce alius cursor ! behold, another racer ! 

vae victis ! woe to the vanquished ! 

Accusative of extent : 531-533; 536. 
Accusative with the infinitive : 544-560. 

THE GENITIVE 

433. The genitive is used as a complement of substantives, 
adjectives and verbs (357, 365, 367). 

ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATIVE GENITIVE WITH 
SU BSTANTI VES 

434. The genetivus explicatlvus (epexegeticus) is used to 
specify certain abstract and collective nouns; as, vox, nomen, 
genus, virtus, vitium, praemium, poena, periculum; classis, 
copiae, auxilia, praesidium : 

nomen Caesaris, carendi the name Caesar, the word want 

nomen or vox amlcitiae the word friendship 

virtus iustitiae, fidei the virtue of justice, honor 

classis mille navium a fleet of( consisting of) 1000 ships 

POSSESSIVE GENITIVE 

(Genetivus possess! vus) 

435. The possessive genitive denotes ownership; instead 
of the possessive genitive of personal pronouns possessives are 
used in agreement with their nouns : 

domus regis (-domus regia) the king's palace 

ad Castoris (supply aedem) at Castor's (temple) 

Flaccus Claudi (i. e. servus) Flaccus, a slave of Claudius 

But: amicus m eu s a friend of mine 

domus est regis the house belongs to the king 

domus est nostra, vestra the house is ours, yours 

domus fit eius the house becomes his property 



168 POSSESSIVE GENITIVE § 436-438 

436. The impersonal est with the genitive or a neuter 
possessive denotes a. characteristic, b. duty and c. 
requirement : 

a. stultl est or stultum est it is the part oi a fool 
stultitiae or stultitia est it is the m a rk(sign,proof) of folly 
cuiusvis hominis est errare every man is liable to error 

b. condemnare iudicis est f*°£°? d i mn . is ^ e d?M> . 

{(affair, business) of the judge 

meum, tuum, eorum est it is my, your, their duty 

c. multae operae est it requires hard work 
magni laboris est it requires great labor 

NOTE: Adjectives of one ending take the genitive only : 

prudentis est it is the mark... of a prudent man 

437. Explanatory adjectives are sometimes added to 
possessive genitives and possessives : 

amicorum sunt communia f friends own everything as their 
omnia \common property 

id est cuiusque proprium, / what a person is permitted to 
quo quisque fruitur atque utitur \ use and enjoy, is his property 

mea propria est domus the house is my own property 

insula deorum sacra est the island is a sanctuary of the gods 

Note: Communis, proprius andsacer also take the dative : 
omni a eta ti mors est communis death is common to every age 

insula dis sacra est the island is consecrated to the gods 

438. Causa, gratia, ins tar, ergo follow the possessive 
(genitive) : 

eius causa, eorum causa on his (their) account 

amici gratia for the love of the friend 

exempli gratia for example 

mea causa, nostra causa. for my (our) sake (435) 

mea ipsius causa tor my own sake (389, 406) 

nostra ipsorum causa for our own sake 

sua causa id fecit he did it for his own sake 

montis Tnstar equus a horse like a mountain 

virtiitis ergo (rare) on account of valor 



§439-440 SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVK }{\'J 

SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVE 

(Compare 367 and 402) 

4.39. A genitive depending on a substantive that contains the 
idea of an action is called 

a. genetivus subiectivus or activus, 

when it points out the object of the action : 

amor patris (=pater amat) love of the father 
But amor meus (-ego amo) my love (435) 

b. genetivus obiectlvus or passivus, 

when it points out the object of the action: 
amor patris (-patrem amat)/ove of(= toward) the father 

fiducia Del (=Deo fidit) trust in God 

amor eorum love for them 

amor mel, tui, nostrl, vestrl love for me, you, us, you 

gratia beneficil gratitude for kindness 

amicitia omnium friendship with all 

consuetudo hominum intercourse with men 

precatio Dei prayer to God 

fuga hostium fleeing from the enemy 

iudicium belli judgment about the war 

spes vincendl hope of victory 

amor sui, tuitio s 11 i self-love, se If- preservation 

cognitio sui, fiducia sui self-knowledge, self-reliance 

NOTE: The objective genitive is rarely replaced by possessives : 

, . -j . S longing for you 

desidenum vestrum \ Commonly: your longing 

440. Instead of the objective genitive, in (erga, ad versus) 
with the accusative is often used, in order to express a dis- 
position towards a person, especially when a double 
genitive would cause an ambiguity : 
odium i n hominum genus \ hatred .^ mankind 
odium generis humani J ** 

filii in patrem amor the love of the son for his father 

But only: pueri amor litterarum the love of the boy tor letters 



170 QUALITY, GENITIVE OF THE WHOLE $ 441-443 

GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY 

(Genetivus et ablativus qualitatis) 

4-41. Both the genitive and the ablative of quality are always 
accompanied by an attribute; the genitive is used to ex- 
press measure and class; the (genitive or) ablative, to 
express quality. 

a. fossa decern pedum est the trench is ten feet wide (or deep) 
puer decern annorum a boy of ten years 

b. huius generis difficultsLtesd iniculties of such a kind 
res nullius pretii things of no value 

res magnl moment! things of great importance 

c. homo hu m ill statu r a (est) (he is) a man of low stature 
praestanti priidentia vir a man of surpassing prudence 



a talented man 



virmagno ingenio\ 
vir magni ingenii / 

vir magni animi a magnanimous man 

vir magnae constantiae a man of character 

d. vicus oppidi magnitudine a Tillage, the size of a town 

clavi digit! crassitudine nails as thick as a finger 

NOTE: The adjectives commonly used with genitives are ma gnus, 
maximus, summus and tantus. Transitory qualities are expressed by the 
ablative : 
non semper bono animo est he is not always of good cheer 

GENITIVE OF THE WHOLE 

(Genetivus partitivus) 

4-42. The partitive genitives designates the whole to which a part belongs. 
It is used with substantive of quantity : 

magna vis tritici a great (indefinite) amount of wheat 

magnus numerus vini a great (measured) quantity of wine 

medimnus frumenti a medimnus of com 

(pars,) duo milia militum (a part of,) two thousand soldiers 

443. The partitive genitive of the personal pronouns are : 

Sg. : mei, nostri; tui, vestri; eius 

PL : nostrum; vestrum; eorum etc. 

Refl. 3d ps. sg. : sui 

Re£. 3d ps. pi. : Replaced by : sui generis, e suo numero : 



§443-445 GENITIVE OF THE WHOLE 171 

melior para nostrj amimus the hotter part of our being is the 

est soul 

pars n o s tr u m fugit some of us fled 

Reflexive : partem e suo nuinero ) they say that some of their number 

fugisse dlcunl f have /Jed 

444. The partitive genitive often accompanies 

a. the neuter singular (nominative and accusative) of 
pronouns and adjectives used as substantives of 
quantity; 

b. the adverbs satis, parum, ubi, nusquam, eo, used sub- 
stantively : 

a. hoc or id lab or is) , . ., r 

hie or is labor / thls de £ Tee of exertion 

But only : sine hoc labore without this exertion 

a 1 i qu i (1 ternporis ■ aliqnod tempus some time 

nihil damni = nullum damnum no loss, no harm 

mult urn, plus, plurimum damn! much, more, very much harm 

paulum, minus, minimum damni little, less, very little harm 

tantum, quantum, nimium damni so much, how much, too much harm 

b. satis eloquentiae, \ enough eloquence, 
sapient iaeparum | of wisdom too little 
ubi terrarum, ubi gentium? where in the world ? 

res eo eat loci, quo the thing is in that condition, in which... 

But satis magna pecunia enough money 

satis multi testes enough witnesses 

445. Adjectives of the second declension except aliud, 
may, when used as substantives and without any addition, be 
put in the partitive genitive : 

nihil n o v I and nihil novum nothing new 
nihil c e r t i and nihil certum nothing certain 
aliquid n 6 v i or aliquid novu m something new 

But always: 

nihil aliud, quid aliud? nothing else, what else, ? 

nihil te dignum nothing worthy of you 

nihil divin u m et caeleste nothing godlike and heavenly 

nihil grave nothing of importance 

nihil maius, nihil melius nothing greater, nothing better 



172 GENITIVE OF THE WHOLE § 446-448 

446. The genitive of the whole is also used with 

a. comparatives, superlatives and ordinals, 

b. pronouns, (6ut uterque and quisque take the parti- 
tive genitive ot other pronouns only); 

a. maior fratrum the older of the brothers 
fortissimi Gallorum the bravest of the Gauls 
primi civitatis the first men of the state 
princeps omnium the first of all 

b. quis vest rum, nostrum? who of you? who of us? 
a 1 i q u i s philosophorum one of the philosophers 
nemo eorum none of them 

quorum utrique to each one of whom 

uterque nostrum, eorum both of us, of them 
But uterque consul both consuls 

447. Numeral adjectives, cardinals (regularly unus; 
and quidam prefer ex or de, or agree with their nouns : 



men 



paucT, compmres d e nostrls \ ' 1 , 

or pauci,complures nostri / a few > several ot our 

duae ex navibus nostrls 1 r * • 

or duae naves nostrae j two of our ships 

unus ex amicis one of his friends 

quidam ex amicis a certain friend of his 

ex quibus unus, quidam one, some one of whom 

But also quorum, horumunus one of whom, one of these 

448. The English "of..." in "all of" and other prepositional 
phrases expressing no partitive relation, cannot be rendered by 
a Latin genitive, except in the phrases omnium nostrum 
and vestrum : 

nos omnes all of us = we all 

But nostr u m omnium of all of us 

hi utrique both (of) these parties 

trecenti sumus there are three hundred of us 

tarn pauci estis there are so few of you 



§ 449-450 



GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES 



173 



II. GENITIVEWITH ADJECTIVES 

449. The o b j e c t i v e genitive is used with adjectives that 
are incomplete in their meaning, and with similar present 
participles used adjectively (i.e. denoting a lasting quality): 

a. with adjectives meaning 

skilled, master of and conscious 
full, sharing and desirous, 
and their opposites : 



peritus (imperitus) iuris 
mentis compos 
impotens irae 
conscius, (nescius) sceleris 
conscius sibi est sceleris 
fons plenissimus piscium 
rationis expers 
particeps praedae 
avidus, cupidus pecuniae 
studiosus tui 
fastidiosus litterarum 



skilled, {unskilled) inlaw 

in control of one' s senses 

not master of his temper 

privy to, {not knowing of) the crime 

he is conscious of his crime 

a fountain swarming with fish 

devoid of reason 

with a share in the booty 

grasping after money 

your wellwisher 

scorning letters 



b. with present participles used adjectively : 

patriae amans, amantissimus 
veritatis diligens 
religionis colens 
neglegens officii 
laboris fugiens 
laboris patiens 
sui despiciens est 
tui observantissimus 
Distinguish 

appetens gloriae 
from appetens gloriam 



patriotic, a devoted patriot 

careful {a lover) of the truth 

religious 

forgetful of duty 

shirking exertion 

able to stand hard work 

he is humble 

respectfully yours 

ambitious {as a characteristic) 
striving (in this instance) after glory 



450. Similis and dissimilis take the genitive of the 
person, and the genitive or dative of things : 

mei similis, nostri similis like we, similar to us 

patris simillimus the counterpart of the father 



mors eomno {or somni, similis est 
veri similis 



death is the likeness of sleep 

probable 



174 GENITIVE WITH VERBS § 451-453 

III. GEN ITIVE WITH VERES 

451. Remind, be mindful and forget 

take a. their complement in the genitive , 

but b. neuter pronouns and adjectives). ,, 

used as substantive complements) 111 ttie accusative. 

( Meminisse and obliviscor take names of things in the gen- 
itive or accusative). 

a. admoneo te veteris amicitiae Iremindyou of your old friendship 
memini, obliviscor eius 1 am mindful of, forget him 
memini, obliviscor rei or rem I am mindful of, forget the thing . 

b. id unum te admoneo I remind you of one thing 

praeterita meminit he remembers the past 

Note: memini eum I recall him 

eius mihi in mentem venit ) y 1 . 

(impersonal) = eius memini f recollect him 

Admoneo often takes d e . 

Recordor usuallytakes de with persons, (de) or the accusative 
with things. 

VERBS OF JUDICIAL ACTION 

4-52. Accuse, convict, condemn, acquit 

take the genitive of the charge (genetivus c rim in is) : 

capitis aliquem accusare bring a capital charge against. . . 

proditionis arguere, 1 n s i mul a r e charge with, accuse of treason 
peciikitus aliquem reum facere indict one tor embezzlement 
ambitus coarguere, convincere convict of unla wful canvassing 
coniurationis condemnare find guilty of conspiracv 

capitis absolvere acquit ol the capital charge 

453. The penalty is usually expressed by multare with the ablative : 

pecunia m u 1 1 a t u s est he was lined a sum of money 

agris multati sunt they were mulcted of their fields 

exsilio, morte multare punish with exile, death 

capite or capitis damnare sentence to death 

dupli condemnare sentence to pay twofold 



§ 454-45] 



GENITIVE AM) ABLATIVE OF I'KICK 



175 



454.. The genitives of the charge are genetlvi expliciitiviof crimine, nomine, 
lege, iudicid; these ablatives are sometimes added : 



proditionis (crimine, nomine) 
reus accusatue est 



the defendant is charged 
with treason 



4-55. Also de vi accusare accuse of an act of violence 
d e veneficiis accusare charge with poisoning 

de(pecimiis) repetundis} 



aliquem postulare f 



accuse one of extortion 



inter sicarios accusare charge with assassination 

456. In extra- judicial language the accusative is used : 
acciiso, condemn© neglegentiam tuamjalso : in hoc te accuso. 



GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF PRICE 



(Genetivus et ablativus pretii) 



457. Be ^vorth and esteem express the value by 



magni, pluris, plurimi 
parvi, minoris, minimi 
tanti, quanti, maxim! 
permagni and pro nihilo 

magni est, plurimi est 
eum permagni aestimo, | 
duco, puto, facio / 

magni fit, magni habetur (430) 

quanti est, tanti fit 
rem pro nihilo puto 



much, more, most (very highly) 
little, less, least (very little) 
so much, how much, very much 
most highly and as naught: 

he... is of (very) great value 

I esteem him (highly) 

he is prized, highly esteemed 

his worth is duly appreciated 



1 consider the thing worthless 

Also eum non hiiius facio, \ I do not care that much (a snap) 
non flocci... J \ for him, not a lock of wool(ahg) 

But maximas dlvitias habet he is worth a great sum of money 

Note: Tanti is also used in the meaning of op era e pretium : 
est mihi tanti it is worth my while 

Note: M agni est stands for magni pre til est(441); similarly, 
the other genitives are attributes to an implied pretii. 



176 GENITIVE WITH INTEKEST § 458-459 

458. Estimate, cost, buy and sell express the value by 

a . the genitives tanti, quanti, pliiris and m i n 6 r i s ; 
h. in all other cases by the ablative : 

domum magno aestimare to rate the house high 

parvo stare, constare to cost little 

id gratis (=gratiis) stat it costs nothing (=the thanks) 

magno ^parvo) emere to buy dear {cheap) 

auro patriam v e n d i d i t he sold his country for gold 

minor is quam ceteri v end 5 I sell cheaper than the rest 

quanti habitas ? what is the rent of your lodgings? 



459. Interest 



and refert, ft is fo 5^ e interest of 
\\t ought to concern 



express thai which is for the interest of 

bv neuter pronouns, infinitives, accusatives with infinitives or indirect questions 

(271); 

the degree or extent of interest 

by accusatives, adverbs and some genitives; as, 

a. multum, plus, plurimum; paulum, minus, minimum; 
aliquid and nihil; tan turn and quantum; 

b. magno opere, magis, maxime; vehementer and minime; 

c. magni, permagni; parvi, tanti, quanti; 

the person whose interest is concerned 

by the ablatives meii, tua, nostra; sua (refl.); 

interest also by genitives of substantives or other words used as 

substantives : 

1. mea, tua, nostra, vestra, eius, eorum interest 
mea, tua, nostra, vestra, — — refert 
It is for my {thy, our, your, his, their) interest 

2. dlcit, (dicunt) sua (reflexive!) interesse or referre, 

he says {they say) that it is in his {in their) own interest 

dicit, (dicunt) eius (non-reflexive) interesse, 

he says {they say) that it is in his {another person's) interest 

3. id tua, magno opere, magnl,\ that is greatly to your interest 
multum, vehementer interest/ it ought to concern you greatly 



^ 4.")«)-4()l THK DATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS 177 

4. mea interest abire it is to my interest to go 
men. interest te abire it is... that you go 

men interest quis abeat I am concerned as to who goes 

5. elvium, reipnblieae interest it concerns the citizens, the state 

omnium nostrum interest (424) it concerns us all 

6. quid refert ? what does it matter? 
nihil refert it makes no difference 

NOTE: The thing concerned commonly takes the accusative with ad : 
ad honorem tuum interest it is lor the interest of your honor 

THE DATIVE 

4-60 . The dative is used to denote the end toward which an action is directed; 
it answers the questions 

to whom? by pointing out the indirect object of a transitive or in- 
transitive action; 

for whom? by pointing out the person interested in the action (dativus 
possessdris, auctoris, commodi et incommodi, ethicus, iudicantis); 

tor what end? by pointing out that for which the action serves or the 
purpose for which it is intended. 

NOTE: Distinguish the indirect object of a verb from the goal of a verb of 
motion; the former is expressed by the dative, the latter by the accusative 
(governed by a preposition) : 

do tibi librum / I give you a book 

(tibi is indirect object of do) S I give a book to you 

eo ad te; Rom am \ I go to you 

( te and Romam are the goals of eo) J 1 go to Rome 

461. INDIRECT OBJECT WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS 

DARE 

do tibi librum I give you a book 

litteras tibi r e d d 6 / deliver the letter to you 

litteras ad te do, scrlbo 1 write a letter to you 

aurum tibi credo / trust the gold to you 

urbl fossam circutndo\ 1 dig a trench around the city 

urbem fossa circumdo / / surround the city with a trench 

el coronam dono) I present a crown to him 

eum corona dono/ I present him with a crown 



176 



INDIRECT OBJECT 



8 461-462 



OTHER TRANSITIVE VERBS 



exercitui euni praeiicio 
sibi maims adfert, infert 
Gallis beJlum infert 
ei tiindrem i n i c i 6 
mortem ei minor, minitor 
equitatum civitati impero 



I put him in charge of the army 

he commits suicide 

he makes war on the Gauls 

I frighten him 

I threaten him with death 

I exact cavalrv of the state 



INDIRECT OBJECT WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS 

462. Help and harm; please, obey; 

medeor, persuadeo; n u b 6 , parco, studeo 
male dico, supplied; obtrecto and i n v i d e 6 



ei auxilior, opem fero 
ei subvenio, succurro 
ei adsum, prosum 
eum iuvo, adiuvo 

ei no ceo 

ei desum 

ei obsum, adversor 

eum laedo 

ei placeo, displiceo 
ei faveo, studeo 
ei indulgeo 

milites duci parent 
ei d i c 1 6 audientes sunt 
auctoritati obtemperarnus 
precibus eius obsequor (419, note j 
ei servio ; ei ministro 

mederi morbo - morbum sanare 

persuadeo eiut abeat 

persuadeo ei Deum esse (a. c. i.) 

filia alicui n u b i t 

filius virginem uxorem ducit 

victis par co = victos conservo 

huic arti studeo 

nemini male dico 

victori supplicant 



I help him, bring aid to him 
I come, run to his aid 
1 assist, am useful to him 
I help him 

I harm him, do harm to him 
J do not assist him, neglect him 
I hinder him, oppose him 
I injure him, offend him 

/please him, displease him 
I favor, am attached to him 
I am kind, indulgent to him 

the soldiers obey their leader 

they obey him promptly 

we submit to, obey authority 

I yield to his wishes 

1 am his servant, I wait upon him 

to heal a disease 

I per suade him to go 

I convince him of God's existence 

the daughter marries some one 

the son marries a girl 

I spare the conquered 

I devote myself to this art 

I speak ill of no one 

they humbly beg their conqueror 



§ 462-46(5 



PASSIVE <)!•' INTRANSITIVE VERBS 



179 



inimico o btre <t 6 
eius virtuti obtreoto 
tuae virtuti in v ideo 



/ work against my enemy 

I disparage his valor 

I begrudge, envy your valor 



463. cedere 

cedo tibi; resisto tibi I yield to you; I resist you 

-j. ,mi •- - i ,- S I give up to you the possession of my 

cedo tibi possessione hortorum ) h 

a e c e d i t tibi animus(fig. sense )your courage is growing 

aecedo ad urbem (local sense) I approach, come near to the city 

appropinquo urbl I approach the city 

ei, in eius locum succedo I am his successor 

succedo sub collem 1 approach to the foot of the hill 

4-64.. Compounds of cum commonly repeat the preposition : 

cdnferre Gallos cum Germanis to compare the Gauls with the Germans 

consentire cum aliquo (419) to agree with some one 

465. Many other verbs take the dative; as, 

exercitui praesum I am in command of the army 

tibi ignoseo, respondeo I pardon you, I answer you 

tibi alicuius rei aactoi s u m I advise you, instigate you to something 

tibi imperat ut... he commands you to... 



466. 



PASSIVE OF INTRANSITIVE VERBS (36 4): 



mini, tibi, ei invidetur 

nobis, vobis, eis obtrectdtum est 

mini persuasi - mihi persudsum est 

sibi persuasi t - ei persudsum est 

tibi persuade 

iis persuader! non potest 

lis persuaderi non posse apparet 



I, you, he is envied 

we, you, they have been envied 

1 am convinced 

he is convinced 

be convinced 

they cannot be convinced 

they evidently cannot be convinced 



NOTE: As the passive of deponents, so also that of intransitive verbs is often 
replaced by circumlocutions (218) : 

ei invidetur - in invidia est he is envied 

consuldtua invidiam habet the consulship is an object ot envy 

res in sum mam invidiam ) 



addncuntur 



the things are made objects of bitter 
en vy 



180 DATIVE OF POSSESSOR AND AGENT § 467-470 

DATIVE OF THE POSSESSOR (435) 

(Dativus possess! vus) 

467. Esse with the dative points out the possessor of 
anything except qualities (441): 

est mihi domus = habeo domum I hare, possess a house 
est mihi domi pater / ha ve a father at home 

est mihi controversia tecum I have a dispute with you 
But: est magna vi corporis he has great physical strength 
eius est eloquentia praestans ] 

in eo est eloquentia praestansL , *_-.»■ » 

, ... /*_ \_ i- )he has an extraordinary eloquence 

est eloquentia praestanti 

est eloquentissimus J 



4-68. With nomen est, the name is often put in the dative, 
by attraction to the dative of the person : 

ei nomen est Caesar I 7 . . ~ 

ei Caesari nomen est J his name is Caesar 

Note: Esse with the genitive emphasizes the owner and his 
ownership; the dative, the possessor and his actual possession, 
(See also 436.) 

DATIVE OF THE AGENT 

(Dativus auctoris) 

469. The dative is used to point out the agent: 

a. regularly with the future passive particip le (213,) 

b. often with the perfect passive participle and the forms 

compounded with it; 

c. rarely with other passive forms : 

a. sua cuique sors f e r e n d a est every one has his o xvn lot to bear 
nobis eundum est we have to go; we must go 

b. mihi el ab or a turn estl T1 . , ., 
elaboratum id habeo / 7 bave ll worked out 

c. honesta bonis quaeruntur noble ends are aims tor the good 

470. Note: Ab with the ablative is sometimes used to avoid 
confusion with an object dative or to effect a sharper contrast : 

tibi a. me respondendum est I must answer you 

te a me hortandum puto 1 think I must exhort you 



§471-475 DATIVE OK REFERENCE 181 

DATIVE OF REFERENCE 

471. The dative of reference denotes the person (or thing) whom the 
action concerns, or to whom it is referred; unlike the dative of the indirect 
object, which modifies the verb only, it qualifies the whole sentence; it 
includes the dative of advantage or disadvantage, the ethical dative, and the 
dative of the person judging. 

DATIVE OF ADVANTAGE OR DISADVANTAGE 

(Dativus commodi aut incommod!) 

472. The dative points out the person for whose advantage 
or to whose prejudice the action is performed : 

non scholae sed vitae discimus we learn for life, not for the school 

praeterita, iniurifis tuiis \ I overlook your past actions, 

f r a t r I condono J your wrongs, in deference to your brother 

4/73. consulo, timeo, moderor 

el, eius rebus consulo, ( I take care of him, consult 

pro video, prospicio j his interests 

consulite vobis ! look out for yourselves ! 

But: rem frumentariam provided, I provide for grain 

futura prospicio I foresee the future 

el timeo, metuo 1 fear for him 

eum timeo, metuo I fear him 

oration! moderari to moderate, control one's speech 

navem, equum moderor I govern a ship, a horse 

parcere, temperare victls to spare the conquered 

vinum temperare to mix wine 

ab iniuria tempero I abstain from wrong 

474. Take away 

hoc tibi adimo, aufero \ T ^ T ^ . r 

eripio, detraho, extorqueo../ 7 take thls from y° u 

ETHICAL DATIVE 

(Dativus ethicus) 

475. The ethical dative is a dative of a personal pronoun loosely attached to 
the sentence for the purpose of showing or causing an emotion. 

quid niihi Celsus agit? what is my Celsus doing? 

quid tibi vis, insane? what do you want, madman? 

quid sibi hoc vult'.' what is the meaning of this? 



182 DATIVE OF SERVICE AND PURPOSE § 476-471) 

DATIVE OF THE PERSON JUDGING 

(Dativus iudicantis) 

4-76. The dative denotes the person from whose point of view 

the statement is made : 

multis est eloquens in the eyes of m any he is eloquent 

mi hi unus est Tnstar omnium he is to me worth them all 

ei purgatus non es you are not justified in his eyes 

est urbe egressls tumulus f then is, as you lea ve the city, 

° \a mound 

DATIVE OF SERVICE AND PURPOSE 

(Dativus finalis) 

477. The dative of abstract substantives with esse and dare denotes 
that for which a thing serves; with venire aud m itte re, that for which it 
is intended to serve; this dative is often accompanied by another dative of the 
person Whom the thing serves : 

esse, dare, tribuere, vertere 

res testimonio est the fact serves as a proof 

cui bono? to whom is it of advantage ? 

suis saluti est he is the salvation of his men 

res mihi d o 1 6 r 1 est the matter is painful to me 
res mihi magno dolori est the matter is very painful to me 

id tibi laudi (vitio) do.) , /t , x r . 

duco, verto, tribuo / J P raise ( bIa ™e) you for it 

id ignaviae do, tribuo 1 interpret it as cowardice 

478. venire; mittere, arcessere, relinquere 

Nervils auxilio veniunt they come to assist the Nervii 

eos tibi s u b s i d i 6 mitto I send them to relieve you 

But: eos ad te legatos mitto I send them to you as legates 

4-79. Also a dative of concrete substantives is used in some 
phrases to express purpose; as, 

locum castris deligere to choose a site for a camp 

diem c o 1 1 o q u i 6 dicere to set a day for a conference 

receptui canere to sound a retreat 



§ 180-483 DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES | s'.i 

DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES 

4<80. Manv adjectives take the dative; as, 

n o tus, p a r sum tibi / am known, equal to you 

nihil d i ffi e i 1 e amantl nothing is hard to a lover 

i g n 6 1 u s , d i s p a r unkno wn, unequal 

481. Adjectives of inclination take the dative or in, 
e r g a , adversus with the accusative : 

amicus el or in eum es you are friendly to him 

inimicus ei or in eum es you are hostile towards him 

g r a t u s , i n g r a t u s el or in eum es you are ( un ) grateful to him 
c 6 m i s erga fratrem courteous towards your brother 

iniucundus adversus malos unpleasant towards the wicked 

482. Adjectives used as substantives commonly take 
the genitive of persons : 

amlcissimus ei est (adj.) he is very friendly to him 

amieissimus eius est he is his intimate 

inimicissimus eius est he is his greatest enemy 

Cauiiliarissimus meus, eius my, his most familiar acquaintance 

483. Adjectives of use and fitness commonly express pur- 
p o s e by a d with the accusative : 

id mi hi ad hoc ) this is useful, suitable , 

utile, idoneum, j fit , necessary to me 

aptum, necessarium est) for this purpose 

NOTE: About s i m il is sec 450; 

about propior, pro xim us see 312; 

about proprius, communis, sacer see 437 : 

omnia mihi cum amicis 1 T have everything- in common 
communia sunt ( with my friends 



184 



THE ABLATIVE & 484-485 



THE ABLATIVE D 

484. The ablative is the adverbial case (368); it expresses 
Separation, Association and Location, 

as the from- with- and in -case. 

485. The separative ablative (ablativus separativus) 

expresses, 

in a literal sense : 

separation, (after verbs, 486; adjectives: 487; prepositions: 299 
and 524); 
in a figurative sense : 

source, (ag en cy : 488; par en tage : 489; m ate rial : 490); 

comparison : 491-495. 

The sociative ablative (ablativus sociativus) expresses, 

in a literal sense : 

association: 496-497, (including quality: 441 ; manner: 498-490; a t - 
tendant circumstances : 500); 

in a figurative sense : 
means or instrument: 501-502, (including route : 523; plenty : 503; 

uti... niti... : 504; s tip at us...: 505; opus est: 506-507; 
cause (including fid ere): 508-509; 
accordance: 510; 

respect (including dignus...): 511-513; 
standard: 514; 
amount of difference: 515; 
price: 457 sqq; 
the ablative absolute: 516-517. 

The locative ablative (ablativus locativus) expresses 
in a literal sense : place: 518 sqq; 
in a figurative sense : time: 534 sqq. 



1) There are widely divergent and even contrary opinions as to the 
nature and consequent classification of some ablatives; e. g., of the ablatives 
of cause, accordance, respect, manner, time, the ablatives with opus est, ridere, 
niti, facere, and the ablative absolute; besides, ablatives that have different uses 
belong to different classes and may be placed in any or all of them. 



§ 4N() THE SEPARATIVE ABLATIVE WITH VERBS 185 

THE SEPARATIVE ABLATIVE 
4<86. Verbs of separation 

a. compounded with se and dis, ab and re; ) take the ablative 

b. protect, deter, and libero ab aliquo $with ab, (ex, de); 

c. all other verbs of separation (may) take the ablative without a 

preposition. 

a. seiungo ab, separo ab I separate from 
d i s cedo ab or ex urbe / leave the city 

d i s sentio ab or cum ceteris I differ from others in opinion 
mantis a scelere abstineo I keep my hands from crime 
hostem ab urbe repello I repel the enemies from the city 

b. vos ab iniuria defendo.'l r , , . . . . 
tueor, prohibeo J I protect you against injury 

a vobis caedem depello I ward off slaughter from you 

a proposito te deterreo I deter you from your plan 
teabeolibero I free you from him 

c. metu,(perlcul6) te libero I free you from tear, {danger) 

murum defensoribus n ii d a t he strip s the wall oi defenders 

leva me hoc onere relieve me from this burden 

canis solutus catena a dog loosened irom the chain 

privare, orbare, spo- \. - - .- . 

Hare aliquem aliqua re \ to deprive one of something 

medicina non egeo 1 do not need a remedy 

(consilio or) consilii indigeo I need advice 

domo careo, te careo I have no home; 1 must do without 

you 

culpa vac are to be free from guilt 

But h u i c ii n i negotio vaco / devote myself to this one thing 

spe d e i e c t u s deprived ot hope 

loco aliquem movere to dislodge one 

(a) commeatu te i n t e r c 1 u d 6 ) j cut off fvom supplies 

commeatum tibi intercluao) 

Gallia ei interdlxit he ordered him to quit Gaul 

aqua et igni ei interdlxit he proscribed ( banished) him 



186 ABLATIVE OF AGENT AND ORIGIN § 486-489 

(e) vita, patria cedere to die, to leave the country 

(e) castris copias educere lead the troops out of the camp 

(ab) iniuria (se) abstinere refrain from wrong 

BUt '- J&E Severe} «*«*" *». *™<* t* 6 a «/e 

487. Adjectives of separation and aversion take ab with 
persons, may take ab with things : 

liber, vacuus ab aliquo free from some one 

liber, vacuus (ab) aliqua re free from something 

tutus a periculo, calore safe from danger, heat 

urbs nuda praesidio a city without defence 

a me alienus est he is averse, unfriendly to me 

a litteris alienus est he is a stranger to letters 

(a) dignitate alienum inconsistent with his dignity 

ABLATIVE OF SOURCE 

488. The living doer (persons, things personified, personal 
collective substantives, and animals) is denoted by ab with the 
ablatlvus agentis : 

a Socrate eruditus educated by Socrates 

a. natura datum given by Nature 

ab exercitu oppressus crushed by the army 

a canibus laniatus torn by dogs 

489. The ablative of origin (ablatlvus originis) usually de- 
signates : 

a. remoter origin by ortus ab or oriundus (ab); 

b. parents by natus (ex); pr on ou ns regularly take ex; 

c. social rank by natus or ortus without a preposition : 

a. orti sunt ab Germams f (the Belgians) were descended 

{from the Germans 

b. (ex) love, (ex) Venere natus a son of Jupiter, of Venus 
ex eo, ex quo natus; ex ea natus his son; her son 

c. honesto, nobilT loco ortus of a distinguished family 
amplissimo genere natus of a very noble stock 
obscuro, humilT loco natus born of a low family 



$ 490-492 ABLATIVE OF MATERI A L AND COMPARISON 187 

4«90. Tlie ablative of material regularly takes e or ex; do with and become 
o/'are expressed by t'acere and fieri with the ablative : 

a. vas ex una gemma (401 ) a vase from a single gem 

ex animo constamus et corpore we consist of soul and body 

Figuratively denoting the c on d itio n out of which: 

dr templo career tit a prison is made out of the temple 

b. quid hoc ( huic ) facias? what is one to do with this man ? 
quid hoc flet ? what will become ot him ? 
Also: quid hoc futurum est ? what will become of him ? 

ABLATIVE OF COMPARISON 

(Ablativus comparationis) 
4-91. The ablative instead of qua m with a n y nominative or accusative 

a. may be used, if no ambiguity arises, 

b. is preferred in sentences with negative meaning, 

c. must be used with relatives : 

a. films maior est quam pater \thesonis greater themthe father; 
films patre maior est fi.e. compared with the father 
scio eum patre maiorem esse I know he is greater than the father 
longius tridui via abest he is farther a. than a three days' march 
But te magis quam ilium amo : / love you more than him 

for ill 6 would be ambiguous : / love you more than he or him 
melle duleior, luce clarior honey-sweet, clear as light 

b. lacrima nihil citiua aroscit nothing dries more quickly than a tear 

c. amicitia, qua nihil melius friendship than which we have 
habemus nothing better 

4-92. Some ablatives are used for brevity in place of clauses 
of comparison : 

opinifme celerius - \ festef tb&Q Qnc wQm thjnk 

celerms quam opinio lint ) 

aequo plus = p. quam par est more than is fair 

necessario longius farther than was necessary 



188 



ACCOMPANIMENT 



§ 493-497 



493. Plus, amplius, longius, more than, and minus, 
less than, are inserted before words of number or measure 
without effect upon the case : 

more than ten years 

more than a year 

a space of more than ten feet 



plus decern anni 

plus annum in urbe est (536) 

spatium plus decern pedum 



4-94. With annos natus, however, maior and minor are commonly used : 



maior decern annos natus (536 )~] 
maior decern annis (491 ) }> 

plus decern annos natus (493) J 



more than ten years old 



495. Substantives compared are not as in English represented 
by pronouns : 



horum fortiina gravior est \ 
quam ceterorum { 

horum oratio cum perfugis\ 
(or perfugarum) con venit f 



their lot is harder than 
that of the rest 
this report agrees with 
that of the deserters 



THE SOCIATIVE ABLATIVE (303) 
(Ablativus sociativus) 

496. Accompaniment of persons or things is expressed by 
cum with the ablative : 



cum aliquo esse (299) 

cum imperio esse 

cum telo esse 

cum febri domum rediit 

cum aliquo se coniungere 

cum rege pacem conflrmare 

prudentiam cum eloquentia iungere 



to be in one's company 
to be commander-in-chief 
to go armed, carry a weapon 
he came home with a fever 
to unite onesell with someone 
to make peace with the king 

to join prudence with eloquence 



497. In military language cum may be omitted, if the 
substantive has any modifier except a definite numeral : 

cum equitatu eum mitto I send him with the cavalry 

cum duabus legionibus eo I go with two legions 

(cum) omnibus copiis eo I go with all the troops 

(cum) pedestribus copiis eo I go with the infantry 



§ 498-500 ABLATIVE OP MANNEJR AND ATTENDANT CIRCUMSTANCES 

ABLATIVE OF MANNER 

(Ablativus modi) 
498. The manner of the action is expressed by the ablative, as follows : 

a. with cum, if the ablative is not modified; 

b. with or without cuin, if the ablative is modified by an adjective 

c. without cum, if the ablative is modified by hoc, eo, quo ; 

if it expresses a mental or bodily state; 
if it is m od 6 , ra t i 6 n e or o r d i n e : 



IS!) 



a. cum virtu te vivere 

cum gravitate loqui 
h. (cum) magna gravitate loqui 
c. hac mente, eo consilio 
pedi bus pugnare 
n u d 6 corpore p ugna re 
aequo animo morl 
pari modo, simili modo 
alio modo, nullo modo 
aliquo modo, aliqua ratione 
6 r d i n e 



to live virtuously 

to speak with dignity 

to speak with great dignity 
with this intention 

to light on foot 

to f with the body unprotected 

to die with a calm mind 

in like manner, in a similar way 

in another way, nowise 

in some way or other 

in an orderly way 



499. The ablative modi) may not be connected with such adjectives as ex- 
press definite qualities : 



turpiter, or cum ignominia 



in a disgraceful m an ne r 



ABLATIVE OF ATTENDANT CIRCUMSTANCES 

500. Circumstances accompanying an action are preferably expressed 
by the ablative without cum, except when it has no modifier; 

circumstances following, preferably by the ablative with cum : 



a. bonis auspicils proficisci 
maxim o imbri Ire 
magno eomitatti adesse 
longo intervallo sequT 
eius ductu deleti sunt 

Also: silentio 

But : cum clamore 

b. cum tua pernicie proficiscere 
magno cum periculd fugit 

cum commodo civitatis 



to set out under good auspices 
to go in a heavy shower 
to be present with a great retinue 
to follow at a great distance 

thcv were annihilated under his leader- 
ship 

i n silence 
with shouting 

set out to your ruin 

he fled in the face of great danger 

with advantage to the state 



190 ABLATIVE OF MEANS OB INSTBUMENT § 501-503 

ABLATIVE OF MEANSOR INSTRUMENT 

(Ablativus Instrument!) 

501. The ablati ve without a preposition is used to denote persons or things 
as means or instruments; (per denotes persons as agents of others, and 
things as weans) : 

fossam ea legione ducit he digs a trench with that legion 

a me seciiri occisua est he was killed by me with an axe 

a me per te occisus est he was killed by me through your agency 

urbem per vim cepit he took the city by (means of) force 

urbem vl cvpit he took it by storm (an act of violence) 

per fraudem, per litteras through fraud, by means of letters 

502. The idea of instrument in Latin does not always 
correspond to a similar idea in English : 

lingua Latina loqui to speak Latin 

proelio lacessere to provoke to a battle 

proelio vincere, vine! to win, lose a battle 

tibiis, fidibus canere to play the Bute, upon the lyre 

pila, alea. ludere to play ball, with dice 

curru, equo vehi to ride in a chariot, on horseback 

pedibus, navi redire to return on foot, by boat 

bello exereitatus trained in warfare 

labore assuetus, assuefactus accustomed to hardship 

But laboris Tnsuetus not used to hard work 

omnes laetitia afficit (254 note) he gladdens all 

donare, circumdare re (451) present, surround with 

503. Pill and abound, furnish, instruct 

montemhominibus complet he covers the mountain with men 
navem militibus complet he mans the ship with soldiers 

navem lapidibus onerat he freights the ship with stone 

villa a b U n d a t haedo et agnd the farm abounds with kid and lamb 
redundare, affluere re to be full of, overflow with 

6rn are, ins true re rebus I ,^ f . .. •,, ... 

omnibus \ t0 furmsh Wlth earthing 

instituere, imbuere artibus to teach, instruct in arts 

ornatus, praeditus, ? • ■, -, , , , 

onustus re \ e ^PPed, endowed, laden with 

refertus rebus omnibus filled with everything 

refertus homin i b u s or homin u m tilled with men 

But plenus rerum, hominum full of things, of men 



§ 504-aOr ABLATIVE WITH Qtl, llTtT, OpUS 6Bt l'JL 

504. uti, frui, fungi; vesci and potiri; 

niti, contineri 

vestra opera iitar 1 will use your services 

Isdem ducibus usus est he used the same men as guides 

utitur me facili patre he has in me an indulgent father 

frueris vita you are enjoying life 

officio, mimere fungiraur we perform a duty 

lacte et carne vescuntur they live on milk and meat 

magna praeda p o t T t u s est he obtained great booty 

But rerum potiri to get control ot affairs 

totius Galliae potiri to become master of Gaul 

hasta, (in) virtute n I 1 1 to re st on a spear, depend upon virtue 

nostra salus virtute continetur our safety depends on bravery 

505. stipattis, comitatus 

stipatus sicariis surrounded by assassins 

pueris comitatus (219) attended by boys 

506. opus est, there is need of, use for 
The impersonal opus est takes 

a. the ablative of the person or thing needed, 

b. the ablative of the pass. perf. part. \ of the action 

c. the (accusative with the) infinitive / needed : 

a. duce nobis opus est we need a leader 
pecunia mihi opus est I need money 

b. properato opus est there is need of haste 
quid opus est facto ? ) 

c. quid opus est fieri? J what must be done ? 
quid opus est facere? ) 

507. The personal opus est and opus sunt take the sub- 
ject nominative of neuter pronouns and adjectives: 

h o c mihi opus est / need this 

mu 1 1 a mihi opus sunt / am in need of many things 



192 ABLATIVE OF CAUSE § 508-509 

ABLATIVE OF CAUSE 

(Ablativus causae) 

508. Cause, especially with adjectives and verbs denot- 
ing a mental state, is expressed by the ablative (422) : 

a. laetus, tristis nuntio glad, sad at the news 

contentus suis rebus content, satisfied with his estate 

fret us virtute, vobis relying on valor, on you 

fessus labore diei tired oat from the toil of the day 

h. gaudere, laetari re to rejoice in 

exsultare, gloriari re to exult over, glory in 

maerere, dolere re or rem to mourn over, be afflicted at 

c. (con) fido virtute (virtuti) I trust in valor 
But only: confido tibi 1 rely on you 

diffido t ibi,( virtuti tuae ) I distrust you, (your valor) 

d. ci vitas luxuria 1 ab 6 r a t the state suffers from luxury 
(ex) invidia, (ex) inscitia of envy, from ignorance 

Note: Ex is also used to denote the seat of suffering: 
ex capite, ex dentibus laborat he has a headache, a toothache 

509. The ablative of cause may be strengthened by a passive 
perfect participle: 

ira in census, inflammatus hot with wrath 

inopia adductus, coactusin his want 

metu, timore perterritus out of tear 

nuntio commotus at this news 

cupiditate obcaecatus in his passion 

amore im pulsus, out of love 

luctu pressus bo wed do wn w i th grief 

Note: Cause is also expressed by 

a. propter, causa, gratia : 312; ob : 313; 

b. prae Tin sentences with an expressed or implied negative): 

vivere non quit prae made he cannot live on account of his leanness 

vix sibimet ipsi prae necopi-\ they barely believe themselves 
nato gaudio credunt j because of their unexpected joy 

silentium prae metu \there was silence for fear of the 

ceterorum fuit f rest 



§ 510-513 



ACCORDANCE, RESPECT, SPECIFICATION 



L93 



510. The ablative of accordance is a variety of the ablative 
of cause, inasmuch as it denotes that according to and 
influenced by which one acts : 



mea sponte (76, c.) 
tu6 iudicio, tua sententia 
iussu (76 c.),iniussfi regis 
eius consilio, impulsu 
nostro admonitu, rogatu 
more, consuetudine 
fat 6, casu 
lege, iure, iniuria 
omnium consensu 
ea condicione 



of my own accord 

according to your judgment, opinion 

by, without command of the king 

on his advice, at his instigation 

by our advice, request 

according to custom, from habit 

by late, by accident 

by law, by right, unjustly 

unanimously 

on these terms 



ABLATIVE OF RESPECT OR SPECIFICATION 

(Ablatlvus respeetus, llmitationis) 

511. The ablative of respect limits the application of the 
predicate or attribute : 



nomine, re (vera) 

genere, natione Gallus 

specie, lingua 

claudus altero pede 

difficile dictu (587) 

tufi sententia hoc, illud mea 
faciendum est (485 foot note) 



in name, reality, truth 

a native Gaul 

in appearance, in language 

lame of (in) one foot 

difficult to tell 

in your opinion, this must be done, 
in my opinion tha t {510) 



512. Respect may also be expressed by a, ex, ad and de 



a pecunia parati sumus 
ex omni parte perfectus 
ad hanc rem, dc hac re 



as far as money is concerned, 
perfect in every respect 
in regard to this affair 



513. summa laude dignus most praiseworthy (677, b.) 

honore indignissimus most unworthy of honor 

me, te, eo indignus unworthy of me, you, him 

suis maioribus dignus est he is worthy of his ancestors 



194 STANDARD, DIFFERENCE, ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE, §514-516 

514. The standard of measure with verbs of measuring 
and judging is put in the ablative (with ex): 

virtute metiri to measure by merit 

fort una iudicare to judge by success 

ex opmione aestimare to value by opinion 

ABLATIVE OF THE AMOUNT OF DIFFERENCE 

(Ablativus discrlminis) 

515. The amount of difference is put in the ablative : 

mensis uno die longior est the month is one day longer 

duo bus pedibus minor two feet smaller 

di mid i 6 minor smaller by a half 

multo, aliquanto maior m uch, considerably larger 

paulo post (537) a little afterwards 

paucis ante diebus a few days before 

quo melius, eo rarius the better, the rarer 

quant 6 plus, tanto peius the more, the worse 

NOTE: This ablative is also used with a b e s s e and distare, anteponere 
and praest are, infra, supra, ultra, and any other words implying a 
comparative. 

ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE 

(Ablativus absolutus) 

516. The ablative absolute is an ablative limited hy a 
predicate participle (substantive or adjective), and used ad- 
verbially without any grammatical dependence on the rest 
of the sentence. 

It expresses 

time, situation, cause, opposition, 

condition, means and manner; 

it is translated by 

a. English nominatives absolute, 

b. active participles ( with their objects) , 

c. co- and subordinate conjunctional clauses, 

d. prepositional phrases. 



$ 516-517 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE [95 

Dared regnante 

Subject Ablative Predicate 

D a re o regnante j when DaHus was rcigning 

(-cum D. regnabat: Tune \ in the reign of Darius... 

or cum I), regnaret : T. andsituat'n) I T) a r i U S reigning 
hfx> factum est J 6 s " 

dux u r be captii rediit ) after he had taken the city... 

( - postquam urbs capta esl : Time, \ niter the city had been taken... 

or cum urbs capta esset : T. and sit. rafter (the) taking- (of)the city... 

or ut urbem cepit, cum... cepisset I having taken the city... 

or qui urbem ceperat etc. ) j he took the city and... 

ins cien te d o ra i n 6 iit : Situation w i thou t the master's knowledge 

te auctore proficiscar \ since you ad vise it... 
( = cum tu auctor sis:Ca«se) / upon your advice... 

u u 1 1 6 p r o h i b e n t e effugit \ he escaped, because there was 
(-quod nemo prohibebat : Cause) f nobody to prevent him 

te invito abibo \ I will go, although yo u 
(-quamquamnon vis: Opposition) f object; or: in spite of. 

te invito non abibo ] I will not go, if you should 

(=S1 noliS : Condition) \ be displeased; or against your wish 

lint ri bus iunctis flu men \ they were crossing the river on 
transibant : Means ) (=by means of )a bridge of boats 

n u 1 1 6 n e g 6 1 i 6 id facere \ you can do that without any 
potes (facillime: Manner) J difficulty : i. e. very easily 

NOTE: The ablative absolute is used only when its subject is not referred 
t o by any other word of the sentence. (573.) 

517. Rule for rendering English phrases and clauses expressing 
time, situation, cause, opposition, condition, means ormanner (416) into Latin 
ablatives absolute : 

1. Change the English expression, if necessary, into an adverbial clause 
whose subject does not occur in tbe main clause. 

2. Omit the conjunction of the dependent clause. 

3. Change the finite verb into the corresponding participle iSee page 196). 

4. Put the subject and the predicative term in the ablative. 



]% ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE, RELATIONS OF SPACE §517-519 

EXAMPLES ( compare 573): 

1. This happened in the reign of Darius: 

1. The phrase "in the reign of Darius " is equivalent to the clause "when 
Darius was reigning or reigned." 

2. Omitting '-when" we get the clause "Darius reigned." 

3. The verb "reigned " denotes action contemporaneous with the action 
of the main verb "happened''' and must therefore be rendered by the participle 
of contemporaneous action (539) : the present participle. 

4. Therefore " in the reign of Darius" = Dared regnante. 

2. The leader returned after he had taken the city : 

1. The clause " after he.. ." whose subject is the same as that of the main 
clause, is equivalent to "after the city had been taken [b y h i in is understood], 
whose subject does not occur in the main clause. 

2. Omitting "after" we get "the city (had been) taken." 

3. "Had been taken" is previous to " returned '\ demanding the participle 
of previous action (539) : the perfect participle. 

4. Therefore the dependent clause = urbe c apt a . 

CONSTRUCTIONS OF SPACE AND TIME 
INCLUDING THE LOCATIVE ABLATIVE 

RELATIONS OF SPACE 

518. The Question "Where?" 

is answered by in with the ablative (297); names of towns and small 
islands, however, take, if they are singulars of the 1st and 2d declensions, the 
genitives (locatives) ae and I, in all other cases the ablative without 
preposition : 

Natus est 

in Graecia, in Creta, in Euboea, in urbe, in castris; 
But Romae, Corinthi, Cyprl, Athenis, Carthagine (or-i); 

519. Appositive substantives, when modified, stand after the 
name of the town, when not modified, before (404, 405): 

in urbe Roma in the city of Rome 

(in) ipsa Roma in Rome itself 

Romae (in) urbe maxima in the great city of Rome 

Athenis in foro on the market place of Athens 

Lutetiae, (in) urbe Galliae at Paris, a city of Gaul 



§•520-523 RELATIONS OP SPACE l«l7 

520. Locus in all its meanings, and names of places with 
totus usually take the ablative without a preposition: 

hoc loco in this place 

aequo loco, iniquo loco in a favorable, unfavorable place 

(in) loco, suo loco at the right place or time 

tot a urbe, tota Graecia in the whole city, throughout Greece 

521. Place, fix and write 

Verbs of placing except imponere, take in with the 
ablative or adverbs answering* the question where?(178): 

pond, loco, eollocd rem h l c I pu t the thing here 

statuo eonstituo euni in muro 1 place him on the wall 

R 6 m a e praesidium colloco 1 station the garrison in Rome 

consisto, consido ibi 1 place myself, sit down there 

oculos in terra defigo / fix my eyes upon the ground 

studium in u na re consiimo I put my energy to one thing 

in sapientibns numeratur (4.'i0) he is reckoned am o ng the wise men 

spem i n De 6 pono I p lace my hope in God 

in statua inscrlbo It^tue * ** inscription upon the 

But alicui legem imponere to impose a law upon one 

exerciturn in naves imponere to embark the army 

522. stare, abide by 

decreto stare to abide by , submit to the decree 

meo promisso stabo / will keep, fulfil my promise 

eo stabitur consilio that plan will he adhered to 

523. Route and place are often considered as instruments 
and aecordingh r put in the ablative : 

a. terra , marl, tiumine by land, by sea, by river 

terra, manque on or by land and by sea 

porta introlre, erumpere to enter by, break out of a gate 

eos hoc ponte mitto I send them over this bridge 

Appia via proficiscT to travel by the Appian road 

recta via straightway, right on 

adverso colle uj) the hill 

secundo (adverso) flu mine down (against the) stream 



19S 



RELATIONS OF SPACE 



§ 523-526 



b. castris se tenere 

do mo aliquem invitare 
tecto te recipio 

But (i n ) secundo libro agitur de... 

in secundo libro 



524. 



to remain in camp 

to invite a person to one's house 

I receive you into my house 

the second b o o k treats of 

in a passage of the second book 



The Question "Whence?" 

is answered by the ablative with ab, ex, de (300, 301, 302); 
names of towns and small islands, however, take the ablative 
without preposition: 

Venit 

ab urbe (from), ex urbe (out of), de coelo (down from); 
But Roma, Corintho, Athenis, Delphis, Carthagine 



ex urbe Roma (519) 
Roma, ex urbe maxima 
Roma ex ford 
Carthagine, ex urbe Africae 

525. Latin whence? 

ex equo pugnare 

ex itinere 

ex utraque parte 

ex omni parte, undique } 

ex or ab omnibus partibus / 

a fronte, a tergo, a latere 

collis erat a septentrionibus 

a SequanTs 

a mllibus passuum tribus 

(a) dextra, (a) sinistra 



out of the city of Rome 
out of the great city of Rome 
from the forum in (of) Rome 
from Carthage, a city of Africa 



English where? 



to fight on horseback 
on the way 
at each side 

on all sides 

in front, behind, on the Rank 
there was a hill on the North 
on the side of the Sequani 
at a distance of three miles 
on the right, on the left 



526, 



Hang-, begin and side with 



ab, ex in arbore pendet . 
ab, de arbore se suspendere 
unde oriar ? unde incipiam ? 
a. flumine initium capit 
Rhenus ex Lepontils oritur 



he is hanging (intr.) on a tree 
to hang oneself on a tree 
where shall 1 begin ? 
it begins at the river 
it rises in the territory of the L. 
Roma (hinc) navemconscendo I board the ship at Rome (here) 
Roma KalendTs Ianuariis Rome, January 1st. (Date) 

ab aliquo stare to side with one 



§527-630 RELATIONS OF SPACE 19<J 

527. The Question " Whither ?" 

is answered by in with the accusative (2 ( .>7); names of towns ami small 
islands, however, take the accusative without preposition : 

ProficTscitur 

in Graeciara, in provinciam, in regnum patrium; 
But: Romam, Corinthum, Cyprum, Delphos, Carthaginem. 

in urbem Romam (519) into the city of Rome 

Romam, (in) urbem maximam into the great city of Rome 
Romam, in Italiam to Rome in Italy 

Tarquinios, in urbem Etrurifie to Tarquinii, a city of Etruria 

528. Latin whither? English where? 

Assemble, arrive; land and hide 

Romam convenimus we assembled (i.) at Rome 

copias in unum locum cogere to collect the troops in one place 

quo pervenit? ed, in urbem where did he arrive ? there, in the city 

ad Delum (navem) appellere to land at Delos 

in silvas se abdere \ , t . - . ^ , 

(in) silvis se occultare J to hlde m the woods 

in silvis abditi latebant they were lying hidden in the woods 

nocturnus in urbem adventus arrival in the city by night 

529. PECULIARITIES 

hum I, humo, hutni on, from, to the ground 

rurl, rure, rus (53) in, from, to the country 

domi, domo, donium at, from, (towards) home 

domi militiaeque ) hj and m war 

domi bellique S ^ 

in pace, in bello in peace, in war 

donium revertimur we return home 

donium reditio return home 

530. Domi, domo, donium, take possessive attributes: 

domi meae, tuae, eius in my, your, his house 

domi Ca esar is (in domo Caesaris) at Caesar's 

domi alienae (in domo aliena) in another's house 

domos suas revertuiuur they return to their homes 

But: in no va domo in a new house 



200 ABLATIVE OF SPACE AND TIME § 531-534 

531. The questions 

"How long? how wide? how deep? how high?" 

are answered by the accusative of extent (441, a. ) : 

fossa ducentos pedes longa a trench 200 feet long 

fossa quindecim pedes lata a trench 15 feet broad 

fossa quindecim pedes alta a trench 15 feet deep 

murus quindecim pedes altus a wall 15 feet high 

532. The questions "How thick? how large?" are answered by the 
ablatives of quality crassitudine and magnitudine (441, d. ): 

paries sex pedum crassitudine a wall six feet thick 

533. The question "How far?" is answered by the accusative of extent or 
the ablative of difference (followed by a, from): 

urbs mille passus a Roma distat \ . 

urbs mille passibus a Roma abest j the clt 7 1S one mi1 ^ f™m Rome 

rex mille passus (longe) or mille passibus a Roma consedit 

rex mille passuum spatio or intervallo a Roma consedit 

the king pitched his camp at a distance of one mile from Rome 

RELATIONS OF TIME 

534. The question " When ?" or " Within what time ?" is answered by 

the ablative without preposition (215, 2; 321, 2): 

initio, prlncipio at the beginning 

die, interdiu, luce by day 

noctii by night 

illo die, ea nocte on that day, on that night 

multo die, multa nocte late in the day, late in the night 

poster 6 die on the following day 

vespere, vesperi in the evening 

prima luce, mane at daybreak, in the morning 

hora decima (121) at 10 o'clock 

meridie at noon 

proximo anno last year, or next year 

Tnsequenti anno in the following year 

superiore anno in the preceding year 

autumno, aestate in fall, in summer 

ineunte or primo vere at the beginning of spring 

media, extrema hieme in the middle, at the end of winter 

ortu, occasu solis at sunrise, at sunset 



§ 584-580 



RELATIONS OF TIME 



201 



ocmitiis (consularibus) 
hulls, spectaculis 
Liberalibtts 

antiquis temporibus 
temporibus Lycurgi 
patrum memoria. (309, 2) 

advent u meo, (cum adveniseem) 
eius discessu, (cum discessisset) 

prima (extrema) pueritia 
summa senectute 
prim 6 Punico bello 
quarto consul atu 

biduo scicmus 

hoc biennio id facies 

triennio eo nun venit 

(in) diebus proximia decern 



at the (consular) election 
at the games, at the shows 
on the festival of Liber 

in ancient times 

at the time of Lycurgus 

at the time of our fathers 

at my arrival 
at his departure 

at the beginning (end of) boyhood 

in extreme old age 

in the first Punic war 

in his fourth consulship 

we shall know "within two days 
you... within the next two years 
he... for three years 
within the next ten days 



535. Other ideas rather than the time at or within which 
are denoted by in with the ablative : 



in pueritia 

in consulate (nostro) 

in bello, in pace 

in summa senectute 

in illo tempore 

in tali tempore 

in tempore, (suo) tempore 

in hora saepc id fecit (297) 

bis in die, ter in anno 



in boyhood 

in my consulship 

U2 war, in peace 

in spite of old age 

at that crisis 

in such a state of affairs 

at the right time 

he often did it in one hour 

twice a day, thrice every year 



536. The Question "How long?" is answered by the 

accusative : 

when he had marched three days 
for ten days together (in succession) 



cum triduuin iter fecisset 
dies continuos decern 
Also: per triennium regnavit (320) 
ea tota nocte ierunt (534 ) 
qulnquc horis pugnaverunt 



he reigned three years 

the whole of that night 
they fought for five hours 



202 EELATIONS OF TIME § 536-539 

tertium iam diem abest he has been absent for two days 

non ultra, duos dies aberat ...not longer than two days 

abhinc decern annos fuit ^| 

abhinc decern annis fuit (515) \he lived ten years ago 

ante hos decern annos fuit J 

decern annos natus ten years old ( 104) 

decimum annum agens in his tenth year 

puer decern annorum (441) a boy of ten years 

537. How long before or after? 

(Compare 298, 300-302, 317) 

paulo ante, multo post (515) shortly before, long after 

decern annis ante "| 

ante decern annos I 1 r 

decimo anno ante f ten y ears before 

decimo ante anno J 

anno post, triennio post one, three years after 

anno post Christum natum one year after the birth of Christ 

anno ante quam natus est a year before his birth 

pridie quam natus est the day before his birth 

anno post quam natus erat a year after his birth ( 736) 

postridie quam natus erat the day after his birth 

NOUN FORMS OF THE VERB 

538. The infinitive, participle, gerund and supine are called noun forms (184, 
186) of the verb, because they have some properties of the noun and some 
qualities of the verb : 

As nouns 

a. the participle and gerund are declined (03; 200) ; 

b. the infinitive and supine have the endings of individual cases; the infinitive 
in e of an old locative, that in l of a dative; the supine in um is an ac- 
cusative, that in u an ablative; 

c. the infinitive may be modified by a neuter pronoun or adjective (382) : 

totum hoc laudare all this praising 



§ 538-539 



TENSES OF THE NOUN FORMS 

As verbal forms 



203 



d. all are modified by adverbs (not by adjectives except the case mentioned 
in c. ): 



prudenter laudare 
priidenter laudans 
facete dictum 
recti" facta 



prudent praising 
prudently praising 
a witty remark 
right actions 
e. they may govern a da ti ve , accusative, or ablative 



fidere Deo, fldcns Deo, but f Idiicia Dei (439) 
amare Deum, amans Deum, but amor Dei 
uti ratione, utens ratione, but u s u s rationie 

NOTE: The participle takes the genitive when used as adjective (449, b. ) 
f. they have some properties of voice and tense (186; 539) : 

laudare, laudarl; laudans, laudatus...; 
laudavisse, laudaturum esse, laudatum Iri...; 



TENSES OF THE NOUN FORMS(620 SQQ.) 

539. The tenses of the verbum infinitum denote relative time; i. e., they ex 
press the act as 

in progress, yet to come, or completed; 
and as contemporaneous with, subsequent or prior 
the time of the verbum finitum on which they depend (589 sqq): 



to 



Act in Progress 



Act completed 



Act yet to come 



r £ ., . f scribere 
Infinitives: [ 8crihi 


scripsisse 
scriptum esse 


scripturum esee 
scriptum iri 


D . . , S scribens 
Participles: _ 


cohortatus 
scriptus 


scripturus 
scribendus 


Supine: 




questum 


Gerund: 




querendi causa 



Contemporaneous Action 



Real Time (608) 



elicit se scribere, he says that he is writing (now) : scribit 

dicet se scribere, he will say that he is writing (then): scribet 

dixit se scribere, he said that he was writing (then): scribebat 

scribit sedens, he writes (while) sitting: sedet 

scribet sedens, he will write while sitting: sedebit 

scrlpsit sedens he wrote while sitting: sedebat 



204 



TENSES OF THE VERBUM INFINITUM 



§ 539-540 



Subsequent Action 



Real Time (615) 



( will write 
dicit se script ururn esse, ... that he \ will be writing est script u r us 

( is ah o nt to write 

dicet se s crlptii rum esse, ...that he will write, etc. erit script ur us 

( would write 
dixit se scrip tu rum esse, ... that he -j would he writing erat script u r u s 

( was about to writ*? 

mitto te questum, 1 send you to complain es questurus 

mitto ta querendl causa, I send you to complain es questurus 

Previous Action Real Time (611) 



( wro te 

dicit se scrlpsisse, ...that he < has written 

(has been writing 



dicet se scrlpsisse 



that he wrote, etc. 



scripsit 
scrlpserit 



(had written 
dixit se scrlpsisse, ...that he}had been writing scripserat 

( wrote {before) 



, - , --,., S having spoken he ?its down 

loc u t u s considit, \ he h £ s ^ poken a n d s . tg dQwn 



JOC 



lociitus est 



- , -•, , S having spoken he will sit down i -, ., 

utus considet, ] ^ w Jj / speak{=will havesp .)... ^utus erit 



ic ii t n s ponsedit $ havin S spoken he took his seat 

< he had spoken and took his seat 



locutus erat 



USES OF THE INFINITIVE 

54-0. The infinitive is used as subject 

a. with est accompanied by a predic ate noun, 

b. with impersonal expressions : 

a. mos (or moris) est hoc facer e it is customary to do this 

b. err are humanum est (382)to err is human 

praestat tacere it is better to be silent 

dulce et -decorum est pro) it is sweet and noble to die for 
patria mori / one's country 



§ 541-543 INFINITIVE AH OBJECT 206 

541. The infinitive implies an indefinite accusative subject; its predicate 
noun complement (387) is put in the same case : 

a. errare = (a Fiquem) errare to err* that a person should err 

b. rcgem esse, bonutn esse to be king, to be good 
laudaturum esse (200) to be about to praise 
neglegentem esse turpe est to be careless is a disgrace 

54-2. When licet (and sometimes other impersonals) are accompanied by a 
dative, the complement of the infinitive is usually attracted into the same 



mihi neglegentT esse n6n licet I am not allowed to be careless 

But: neglegentem esse non licet it is not allowed to be careless 

medios esse iam non licebit it is not lawful any more to be neutral 

543. The infinitive is used as an objective comp lenient of 
many verbs (367): 

can and must and will; intend, prepare and dare; 
begin, continue, cease; am accustomed, know: 

possum Tre, ire non possum/ can go, I cannot go 

But valeo ad luctandum I am in condition to wrestle 

valeo ad rem ( faciendam ) I have the power of doing it 

Tre debeo, Ire non debeo I am (not) obliged to go 

volo, nolo, ma.16 Tre I will, will not, prefer to go 

But praefero al i q u i d i" prefer something 

cupio, aveo, studeo, contend 6 1 wish, crave, am eager, strive 

But non opto ut lauder I do not desire to be praised 

neglego, omitto,praetermitto I neglect, omit, fail to 
Caesarem non euro legere / don't care to read Caesar 

coerito, mihi est in animo) T . , 

meditor, habeo in animo f I purpose, intend 

constitu6,(in) animuminduco I decide, resolve 

par6, paratus sum proficTscT I prepare, am prepared to set out 

audeo,cunctor, vereor,timeo I dare, delay, fear 

non dubito ablre / do not hesitate to go away 

conor Ire, (si Ire possim : 646) I try to go 

incipio (277), Instituo I begin 

contendo, festino, propero, maturo I hasten 

pergo, perse vero I continue, pers'st 

desino, (277), desisto I cease 



206 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE § 543-546 

qui mentlri solet, peierare\ he who is wont to lie, is ac- 
consuevit \ customed to swear falsely 

vincere scls, Hannibal; ) how to win, Hannibal, you know; 

Victoria titl nesciS j how to use victory, you know not 

parere didicisti you have learned to obey 

INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT ACCUSATIVE 

(Accusativus cum lnfmitivo) 
Deum esse constat Deum esse scio 

Subject of constat Object of scio 

544. In each of the two above sentences the accusative Deum is regarded as 
the subject of the indefinite form esse (541). The accusative with the infinitive 
Deum esse is however no sentence, because esse is no finite verb (354); 
in the first of the two sentences Deum esse is subject, in the second 
object. Translated into English, however, it may appear as a complete clause 
(371): 

It is certain that God exists I know that God exists 

A. c. 1. as Subject 

545. The accusative with the infinitive is used as subject (5 44) 
with impersonal expressions (271) : 

par, aequum, iustum est it is right, fair, just 

utile est, prodest, expedit(274) it is useful 

turpe est, indignum est it is a disgrace, intolerable 

convenit (274), decet (273) it is fit, becoming 

veri simile est, apparet (274) it is probable, clear 

fama est, rumor est there is a rumor 

spes est, opinio est there is hope, an opinion 

fas est, nefas est it is lawful, unlawful 

mos est, consuetudo est it is customary 

NOTE: See opus est n. 506, interest n.459. 

546. Nee esse est and op or tet may also take the subjunctive with- 
o u t ut : 

legem brevem esse oportet ( n » m „„„*,. . u , . 

lex brevis sit oportet \ a law ou - ht to he short 

hominem (homini) necesse est mori ) ^ n „ ^ Y . ,. 
homo moriatur necesse est \ man mvst die 



§ 547-548 A.CCUSA1IVE with infinitive 207 

A. c. I. as Object 

547. The accusative with the infinitive is used as object (544) 
with many classes of verbs : 

Perceive and say 

(Verba sentiendi et dicendi) 

sentio, video, audio, disco I perceive, see, hear, learn 

cognosco / become acquainted 

reperio, comperio I find out, ascertain 

nuntium accipio, scio 1 ) I receive word, know 

Tgnoro, credo I do not know, believe 

putat animos interlre he thinks that the souls perish 

n 6 n p u 1 6 eos interlre I think that they do not perish 

spero, confldo (553) I hope, trust 

dico, adf irmo I say, affirm 

nego animos interlre / affirm that the souls do not perish 

tibi responded, ad te scribo I answer you, write you 

nuntio, nuntium adfero I announce, bring word 

ducem certiorem facio 1 inform the leader 

fateor, simulo, dissimulo 1 confess, pretend, disguise 

iuro, minor, polliceor (553) I swear, threaten, promise 

548. Rule : With the verbs of perceiving and saying 

a statement is expressed by the accusative with the infinitive, 
a question is expressed by the subjunctive, 

purpose is expressed by the subjunctive with or without ut : 

el dlxl Marcum scripsisse / told him that Mark had written 

ei dlxi quis scripsisset / told him who had written 

el dico (ut) serlbat I tell him to write 

el dlxl ne scriberet I told him not to write 



1 ) Distinguish novisse, scire and a c ce p is Be, know : 

eos n 6 v I / know, (am acquainted with) them 

probe or plane s cio qui Bint / well know who they are 

hoc ex me sc it he knows this from me 

Latino so it he knows (u nder s t an ds) Latin 

accepimns or memoriae } we know 

(memorial trfiditum est S (used of h ist or ic al facts) 



208 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE § 548-551 

Distinguish: 

me monet ut ad se scribam he urges me to write him 

me monuit ne proficiscerer he war ne d me not to set out 

me monet adesse hostem he reminds me that the enemy is near 

tibi concedo ut librum legiis I perm it you to read the book 

tibi concedo beatum esse Deum I ac kn o w le dge that God is happy 

el p e r s u a s i t ut sibi parceret he persuaded him to spare him 

sibi persuasit ita rem se habere he is convinced that th<t case is so 

549. Iubere, vetare, sinere, pati, 

order, forbid, allow, permit, 

take the accusative with the pres ent infinitive : 

eos pontem facere iubet ( 561) he orders them to build a bridge 

But pontem fieri iubet { b u e ha % a hr j d Z e £f\ .. 

\ht orders to build a bridge 

Note: When the person ordered... is not mentioned in 
English, the accusative with the infinitive of the passive 
must be used in Latin (Second example.) 

550. Velle, nolle, malle, cupere 

take the accusative with the present infinitive, when the two 
verbs have different subjects, the infinitive, when they have 
the same subject: 

volo eum hoc facere I want him to do this 

But volo hoc facere I want to do it 

NOTE: Exceptions occur especially with esse or a passive infinitive: 

me clementem esse cupio I wish to be kind 

se amari quam timer! mavult he wishes to be loved rather than feared 

hoc factum volo (557 ) I want this done 

void ut hoc facias I wish that you do this 

velim mihi dicas please tell me 

551. Co go, assuefacio te parere \ T „^ 7 , , 
(SQL) >1 compel, accustom you to obey 

do c eo te parvo contentum esse I teach you to be satisfied with little 

p r o h i b e 6 te Tre I prevent you from going 

arguo, insimulo te fugisse I accuse you of having fled 
But accusat te quod fugeris (666) he accuses you of having fled 



>j 552-554 u < i rsATiVB with ixfimtivk 209 

Verbs of Emotion 

552. Verbs of emotion take the accusative with the infinitive; 
(sometimes, a quod-clause, if the cause of the emotion is to be 
emphasized as a fact) : 

gaudeo, laetor; doleo I rejoice, grieve 

indignor, queror I am indignant, complain 

aegre, graviter fero I am annoyed, distressed 

iniquo animo fero / take amiss 

aequo animo fero I bear calmly 

miror te abisse | 

miror quod abisti / I wonder that you left 

Hope and promise, swear and threaten 

553. Subsequent action (539), especially after verbs of hoping, 
promising, swearing and threatening, is expressed by 

a) the future infinitive, 

b) posse, debere, velle... with the present infinitive : 

Bp5ro, iuro Die it ft rum esse I hope, swear to go 

polliceris te venturum esse you promise to come 

miiiatur so id facturum esse (130) he threatens to do that 

cdnfidit se hoc facere posse he feels sure he can do this 

die-it se hoc facturum esse ) he he m do tMs 

(licit se hoc tacere veiled J 

putat sibi hoc faciendum esse ) he thinks he ht tQ do tMs 

putat se hoc tacere dcbere(211)$ to 

But spero earn suspicionem falsam esse , I hope = I wish 

spero me tibi causam probavisse, I hope - I think 
NOTE: About iubeo and veto see 549, about void etc. see 550. 

554. Instead of the future infinitive of the verb, fore ut or futurum esse 
ut with the present and imperfect subjunctive of the verb may be used; it must 
be used with verbs that have no participial stem : 

Bcio te laudatum TrT or scio fore ut lauderis 
Bcivi te laudatum Irl or bcIvI fore ut laudareris 

But only spero fore ut discus, litteris studeas 



210 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE § 555-560 

555. The infinitive of the second future is formed by 
fore ut with the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive in the active, 
by fore with the perfect participle in the deponent and pas- 
sive : 

credo fore u t librurn scrips e r I s I believe you will have written the book 
credebam fore ut librum scrips is ses I believed you would have written the b. 
credo librum scriptum fore I believe the book will have been written 

credebam te profectam fore I believed you would have set out 

556. To avoid ambiguity, the infinitive passive is often used : 

"dico te eum vincere posse" is ambiguous, 
" dico eum a te vinci posse " excludes doubt. 

557. In the a. c. i. - constructions the governing verb, the subject accusative 
and the infinitive esse are sometimes omitted, when they are implied in or 
can be easily understood from the context. 

558. Infinitives of impersonal constructions have no subject accusative: 

video pluere I see that it is raining 

putat vinci posse he thinks victory possible 

scit sibi moriendum esse he knows that he must die 

559. Nouns compared with a subject accusative take the same case, when the 
verb implied is the same : 

constat me prius hue venisse quam te (=quam tu venisti) 
ait me idem facere quod ilium ( = quod ille faciat) 

Translation of the a. c. i. into Knglish 

560. The Latin accusative with the infinitive may be rendered 
by a substantive, an infinitive, an accusative with an infinitive, 
a dependent clause, or a leading clause : 

a. Deum esse constat God's existence is certain 

b. dicit se scire (oth. ex. 583) he affirms to kno w 
gaudet se hie esse he is glad to be here 

c. audio eum loqui I hear him speak 

d. puto eum hoc fecisse I believe (that) he did it 
rumor est eum fugisse they say of him that he tied 

e. constat hoc factum esse this is an evident fact 
constat hoc factum esse this, evidently , is a fact 
puto hoc factum esse this, I think, is a fact 

puto hoc factum esse this, in my opinion, is a fact 



§ 560-561 NOMINATIVE WITH INFINITIVE 211 

f. non p u to, / do not think... or, / believe that... not 

nego, I deny... or, I affirm that. ..not 

nolo, I do not wish... or, I desire that. ..not 

veto, I forbid... or, I command that. ..not 

INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT NOMINATIVE 

(Infmitivus cum nominativo : 365) 

561. The personal construction of the nominativewith 
the infinitive is used 

a. with all passive forms of 

iuberl, vetiiri, viderl, 

and cogl, sini, prohiberi; 
existimari, putari, 
and dici, iudicari; 

b. with traditur, traduntur, 

fertur and feruntur : 

iussT, vetitl sunt abire they were told (not) to leave 

cogeris bell! socius esse you are forced to be our ally 

lege prohibemur haec facere we are forbidden by la w to do this 

videmur hoc facere we are seen doing this 

videmini hoc facere you seem to be doing this 

videntur hoc facere it seems, appears, as though they... 

videbantur victum Irl they seemed likely to lose the battle 

videor (mihi) recte fecisse I believe to have acted rightly 

visus est sibi beatus esse he believed himself happy 

But visum est el hoc facere\ he saw £t p l ease d to do this 

= placuit ei hoc facere J 
beatus esse dicor,putor(562) 1 am said, thought to be happy 
iustus esse dictus est he was said to be just 

caecus fuisse traditur, fertur he is said to have been blind 

But traditum est poetam\ it is related that the poet was 
caecum fuisse j blind 



212 INFINITIVE, PARTICIPLE § 562-566 

562. The accusative with the infinite, however, is used 
with the following impersonal expressions: 

traditum est, dicendum est it is related, it must be said 

mi hi dlcitur eum discessisse/aizz told hat he- has left 
tibi, ei, nobis, vobis, els dicitur vow, he, we, you, they are told 
dici potest, vere dicitur it can be said, it is truly said 
recte, non sine causa dicitur it is not said without reason 
recte dicitur te deeeptum esse it is rightly said that you h. b. d. 
But diceris deceptus esse you are said to have been deceived 

563. Many other verbs occasionally take the nominative with the infinitive; 
as, argui, audlrl, cognosci, demonstrarl, intellegi, niintiarl, ostendi, perspici, 
reperiri, scribi... 

The a. c. I. in Bxclamations 

564. A simple infinitive or an accusative with an infinitive is 
used in exclamations of surprise, indignation and regret (4-32): 

hoc dicer e the idea of saying this! 

te (or tene) hoc dicere ! ^| 

tu (or tune) ut hoc dicas ! } you to say this! 

tu hoc dicas J 

mene incepto desistere ! I to give up my plan! 

565. The infinitive is also used as a predicate or appositive 
noun (356, 358): 

ei vivere est cogitare to him living is thinking 

hoc eum delectat, cogitare this is a pleasure to him, to think 

NOTE: For the historical infinitive see n. 595, note. 

USESOFTHE PARTICIPLES 

(Study 538, 539; Compare 186, 2(K>, 211, 214, 219, 221-223) 

566. Participles are used as attributes (359) or in place of 
relative clauses; those in firus, however, except fu turns and 
venturus, are commonly united with a form of esse (211): 

civis bene merens a well-deserving citizen 

consentiens laus unanimous praise 

m al a opinata (219) imaginary evils 

victoria parta a victory gained 

signa rerum futurarum sighs of future events 

libri legend! books worth reading 






§ 5(57-570 PARTICIPLE L>13 

567. Some participles have become complete adjectives 
(see 449 a) or substantives : 

a mans amicus, vir sapiens a fond friend, a wise man 

vir doctus, homo eruditissimus a learned man, a most accomplished man 

Q5men invictl imperiitoris the name of the invincible leader 

Insectantes depello I drive off my pursuers 

eonsuetudo valentis the habit of a healthy man 

male parta male dlbabuntur ill got, ill spent 

568. The English participles entitled, above-mentioned, 
so-called are expressed b}' relative clauses in Latin ( 691): 

liber qui iuscribitur Laelius ) ., , , . ■ , , , u T ,. ,, 

••I H - T i. - -, . > the book entitled Laelius 

liber qui Laelius inseriptus est S ^^hia. 

copiae quas supra commemoravl the above - mentioned troops 

vestra quae dicitur vita your so-called life 

Ilermae qu5s vocant the so-called Hermes-pillars 

569. Participles are also used as predicates (356): 

fuit temporibus mserviens he was a time-server 

Gallia est divisa Gaul is divided 

est moriturus (211) he is about to die 

ea iniuria ferenda non est that wrong is intolerable 

570. Participles are chiefly used as appositives (short- 
ened predicates: 358); the present participle is employed 
mainly with 

verbs signifying represent or denoting an action of the 
senses; as, 

fa cere, inducere; videre, audlre, 
represent, introduce; sse, hear: 

faeit Socratem disputan tern he represents Socrates discussing 

inducit Socratem loque'ntem he introduces S. as speaking 
video eos pugn antes I see them fig h t i ng 

video eos pugn are / sec them figh t 

Bat lor lack of a perfect active participle and a present passive participle 
the corresponding infinitives must be used with those verbs: 

,. ., ,. ,- - • <s he represented Yerrcs as having leceived 

fecit \ errem plus accepisse I wor ' c * ra 

construi a Deo mundum facit be r. the world as being built by God 

video legiones premi / see the legions hard pressed 



214 PARTICIPIUM COXIUNCTUM § 571-572 

571. The perfect participle is employed 

a) with habere, have; tenere, h old, \to denote the action as 

and the perfect S3^stem of esse j lasting in its results: 

f idem tuam spectatam h a b e 6 I have tested your fidelity 

cohortes constitutes habeo / have my cohorts stationed 

cognitum, constituturn habeo I know, have decreed 

eos cornprehensos teneo 1 hold them under arrest 

Ianus bis... clausus fuit the temple of J. was twice (kept) closed 

b) with facere, make, and velle, wish, to express an action 
energetically: 

fac eos m i s s 6 s discharge them 

m i s s a haec fac let this pass 

me probatum volui 1 wished myself well approved 

c) in dependence on a preposition, substantive or verb, and also 
in the nominative, in order to express an idea more important 
than the noun to which it is added : 

de homine occiso quaeritur the murder of a man is investigated 

ante conditam urbem before the founding of the city 

post natos homines since the creation of man 

gloria patriae liberatae the glory of liberating the country 

recuperatarn libertatem ei ? I congratulate him on the reco v ery 

gratulor S °f his liberty 

Sicilia a m i s s a eum angit the loss of Sicily worries him 

Note: Also the gerundive (579) expresses an idea more im- 
portant than the noun to which it is added : 

occasio Caesaris o e c i d e n d i { clefar^ ^ 7 *" ^ mUrder ot 

572. The appositive participle is often equivalent to 

coordinate clauses ( plus et or sed ) , or to 

subordinate / time a n d situation, 

> cause, opposition, condition, 
clauses expressing ) means r manner: 

It may be translated by 

coordinate clauses (plus and or but), or by 

subordinate clauses, prepositional phrases or participles; 

(a negatived participle may also be rendered by " without ...ing"): 



§ 672-573 participium coniukctum 215 

Plato scribens mortuus est\ Plato died, as he was writing; 
(-cum scriberet: T. and Situ.) f Plato died while writing 

< larthagine expulsus Ephesum ve- ) ( a f t c r he jj ad been ^ driven from C, 

nit exsul; (cum expulsus esset : Time > 

and Sic nation) ) ' ie came an exile to Ephesus 

urbem cap tarn delevit, or 1 he took and destroyed the city; 
urbem cepit, captam delevit \he took the city and'destroyed it; 
( Time and Situation) J h a ring taken.., wh e n he had.. 



interdiii Stellas non conspici- ) we cannot see i 
mussolislfice obscuratas; \because they are darkened 



the stars by day, 

iiiuaauiiaiiiLL uuat ui tticio, /"nvv»w«.woi» i,ii\~y ar£ 

(=quiaobscuratae sunt '.Cause) J by the light of the sun 



visum cupientes tenere nequimus; ) in spite of our efforts we cannot 
(-quamquarn c: Opposition) ) restrain our laughter 

miserum est niliil p r o f i c i e n t e m {it is pitiful to worry without ac- 
angi; ( = cum nihil proficias: Opp. ) \ complishing anything 

... i ,-, - •- ,u-<..,-, ) t hough acquitted of the capital 

capitis absolutns pecunia multatus L A f Ae was £ned a sum £ m 

est; (- cum absolutus esset: Oppos. ) \ orh % \ vas acquitted< b u t W ... 

d a m n a t u m poenam sequl oporte- ) if condemned, punishment had to over- 
bat; ("Si damnatus esset: Condition) \ take him 

sol or i ens diem eonficit; \the sun by its rising makes the 
( = cum oritur or oriendo : fday 

Means) 

haec proper antes scrip- U- written this hastilv 

simus; (= propere : Manner) j l ha " e " ntten tIns lmstll f 

573. Almost any English clause whose subject is identical with a word of a 
leading or coordinate clause may be rendered by a Latin appositive participle in 
agreement with that word (participium coniunctirm ; see 516, Xote, 
and 517). 

Rule for rendering English phrases or clauses by Latin appositive 
participles: 

1. Change the English subordinate clause, phrase, or preceding coordinate 
clause into any clause whose subject is identical with a word of a leading or co- 
ordinate clause. 

2. Omit the introductory relative or conjunction. 

;-5. Change the finite verb into the corresponding active, deponent or passive 

participle I See page 216) . 

4. Put the participle in agreement with the word it modifies. 



216 PAR1ICIPIUM CONIUNCTUM § 573 

EXAM PLES (COM PARE 517) 

1. a. Whenthe soldiers saw the enemy, they attacked them: 

"Saw" denotes action previous to "attacked"; hence either of two parti- 
ciples may serve in translating, a deponent with active meaning, or a pas- 
si ve participle.) 

milites hostem conspicati petiverunt; or \" them " must re. 

milites hostem conspectum adgressisuntjma/n untranslated. 

(In the first translation the participle refers to and agrees with the subject, 
in the second with the object of the sentence. ) 

1. b. The soldiers take delight in the leader who is well 
deserving of them : 

milites duce bene de se rnerito delectantur (130); 

But duce, qui bene de iis meritus est, delectantur. 

(The participle agrees with duce, the object of the verb.) 

2. I met your friend on his way home: 

(The phrase "on his way home" is equivalent to the clause "while he 
was going home, or as he was returning home"; it denotes action contempora- 
neous with ' ' met " . ) 

ami co tuo domum redeunti obviam factus sum; 
(The participle agrees with amico, the indirect object of the verb.) 

3. a. The Germans attacked and defeated the legions; 

or the Germans attacked the legions and defeated them: 

(According to the rule, the clause to be expressed by a participle is the first 
one: the Germans attacked [the legions] ; and, as "attacked" is previous 
to "defeated", either a deponent participle in agreement with the subject or a 
passive participle agreeing with the object may be employed in translating.) 

German! legiones adgressi devicer , unt;|' : ' t he m" re mains un- 
or GermanT legiones petitas devicernnt ) translated. 

3. b. We saw them flee, but did not pursue them (570) : 
fugientes conspicati non persecutl sumus 
or fugientes conspectos persecutl non sumus. 



§ 674— 571i PARTICIPLE, GERUND, GERUNDIVE 217 

574. The lacking Perfect Active Participle 

is supplied by synoti3 r mous deponents, ablatives absolute, parti- 

eipia coniuncta, cum-, ubi-, postquam- or relative clauses: 

calon.es caedem cons pi cat! \ seeing- (/. e. having seen, 539) the 

or e ae (1 e CO n spec t a fugerunt S slaughter, the camp-followers fled 

ur hrni cap tarn diripuerunt having taken the city, they plundered it 

e6 cum pervenisset, (ubi pervenit, ) having arrived there {when..., after...,) 



postquam pervenit) castra posuit $ he pitched his camp 

mllites, qui fortiter pugnav erant. having fought bravely, the soldiers... 

575. The lacking Present Passive Participle 

is supplied by synonymous present active participles, cum-, 
dum -, or relative clauses : 

. i , - , . v -. S he sent help to his hard pressed 

suis laborantibus succumt j ( . e he{ ^ g hard pres £ d} 539) meQ 

hostes, cum obsiderentur (- qui or ) being besieged (during the siege) 

dum obsidebantur), magna inopia > 

premebantur ) tne enem J suffered great want 

qui obsidentur, premuntur being besieged they suffer (539) 

qui obsidebuutur, prementur being besieged they will suffer 

THE GERUND AND THE GERUNDIVE 

576. The gerund supplies the lacking oblique cases of the 
present active infinitive (200); but in the accusative it is not 
used as an object of a verb, but only after prepositions : 

legere est ars reading is an art 

ars legend! the art of reading 

operam dat 1 e g e n d 6 he devotes himself to reading 

propensus est ad legend um he is given to reading 

But cupio legere / desire to read 

diseimus 1 e g e n d 6 we learn by reading 

577. The gerund may govern a genitive, dative or ablative; 
also an accusative of a neuter pronoun or adjective used sub- 
stantively, but rarely an accusative of a substantive (578): 

officium obliviscendi i n u riarum the duty of forgetting wrongs 

consilium parcendi hos t i the plan of sparing the enemy 

mos Vivendi la cte et c a rn e the custom of living on milk and meat 

. , , ,..- ,. ,- S the art of distinguishing truth from 

ars vera et l alsa dnudicandi ^ falsehood 

cupidus sum id discendi I am desirous to learn that 



218 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE § 578-580 

578. Instead of the oblique cases of the gerund with an accusative 
of a substantive (578). the construction of the gerundive is commonly em- 
ployed, i. e. the substantive is put in the case of the gerund, and modified by a 
gerundive (186) : 

ars scribendi epistulam ") . , 

ars scribendae epistulae J the art of wntm S a ktter 

operam dat discendo littenis ^ he devotes himself to the study 

operamdat discendislitterisj of letters 

urbem tradit ad dlripiendum \ ^ .^ ^ q{ ±q j under 

urbem tradit dinpiendam J 

delectamur discendo litteras ) -, r . , , . , r * /-r^. 

-_, , _ ,. -,_,•,, . we delw'ht m the study of letters 

delectamur discendis littens j 

579. The gerundive, like the future passive participle, is future in meaning, 
expressing an act as yet to come (539) : 

Caesar occide n d u s est (Participle) Caesar is to be murdered 

occasio Caesaris o cci d end i (G. ) \ *™^ ortolu ^ /or the ™" rder of 

However, while the future passive participle is passive in form and meaning 
and denotes necessity, the gerundive (and gerund) are passive in form, but 
rather active in meaning, and do not denote necessity (See 571, note): 

epistula scribenda est (Partic.) the letter must be written 

ars scribendae epistulae (G've) the art of writing- a letter 

ars scribendi (Gerund) the art of writing 

USES OF THE GERUND AND THE GERUNDIVE 

580. In general, 

the gerund is necessary with 

a. intransitive verbs (577), 

b. transitive verbs followed by an accusative of a pronoun or adjective 

(577); 

the gerundive is necessary with 

a. curare, dare, suscipere (583), 

b. transitive verbs followed by an accusative of a substantive, 
if the gerund would be a dative (582) 

or depend upon a preposition (583, 584); 
the gerundive is the usual construction, 

a. if the gerund would be a genitive or an ablative (578), 

b. with uti, frui, fungi, potiri, vesci (581). 



§681-582 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 219 

581. The genitive of the gerund and the gerundive is used with 
a. substantives, especially causa and gratia; 

/>. adjectives incomplete in their meaning (449); 

NOTE: The genitives me I, tui, sui, nostri and vestri always take 
the gerundive in T without regard to the gender or number of the substantives 
referred to : 

a. fin em facere dicendi to finish speaking 

spes patriae llberandae the hope of freeing the country 
patriae llberandae causa for the sake of freeing the country 
praedandl causa for the sake of plundering 

nostri liberandi causa (443) for the sake of freeing ourselves 
eae sui purgandi causa emit they go in order to clear themselves 

b. peiitus belli gerendl skilled in waging war 
cnpidus vestrl videndi desirous of seeing you 

Distinguish: 

sp.'s potiundorum eastrorum (G'dive) the hope of taking the camp 

castris potiendum est (Partic.) the camp must be taken 

582. The dative of the gerund and the gerundive is used with 

a) co mitla, election, -viri, -men, 

b) par, equal, accom odatus, suitable 

c) pr a eesse and praeficere, be or put in charge of, diem dice re, 
appoint a day, locum cape re, choose a place, operam dare, studere, 
labor em im per tire, give attention to 

d) some other expressions : 

a. comitia consulibus rogandis comitia for the election of consuls 
comitia decemviris creandis election for the nomination ot decemvirs 
d e ce m viri legibus scribendis decemvirs for the preparation of laws 

b. tempora dCMiietendis \seasons suitable for gathering 
frugibus aceomodata j fruits 

C.praeesse naviaedificandae tobeincharge of the building of the fleet 
1 o cu m c a p e r e castns \ to choose a place for the pitch- 

numiendis \ ing of a camp 

legibus cognoscendis f 1 give my attention to the study 

s t u d e o \ of la ws 

d. solvcndo non sum I am not solvent, cannot pay 

scribendo ad sum I sign a decree of the senate 



220 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE § 583-5S4 

583. The accusative of the gerund and the gerundive is used with 

a. prepositions, especially ad, (in, inter, ob) ; 

b. verbs denoting 

care for; as, curare, 
undertake; as, suscipere, conducere, 

give; as, dare, trader®, hand over; locare, let a contract; 

inittere, send; relinquere, leave; etc. 

a. ad pugnandum paratus sum / am prepared to fight 

ad pacem petendam veniunt they come to ask peace 
inter ludendum during play 

b. pontem faciendum euro f I provide for (see to .attend to) 

{the building of a bridge 

puerum educandum suscipio I undertake the training of the boy 

signum Iovis collocandum (I let (take) the contract of 
loco, (condiico) \erecting the statue of Jupiter 

tibi aurum servandum do I give you the gold to keep 

NOTE: The passive has the double nominative : 

urbs diripienda conceditur the city is given up to plunder 

584. The ablative of the gerund and the gerundive is used 

a. as an ablative of instrument; 

b. with a, de, in, (ex, pro): 

a. mens alitur discendo the mind is nourished by learning 

loquendi elegantia augetur j elegance in speech is increased by 

legendis oratoribus et poetis ( reading orators and poets 



b. deterrere a pugnando to deter from fighting 

de bene beateque vivendo (to debate on the art 

disputare \ and happy life 

celeritas in re gerenda swiltness in execution 



§ 685-">S7 SUPINES IN I'M AM) u 221 

TH E SU PINE 

(Compare 186, 200, 511, 538, 529) 

585. The supine in um is used to express purpose of acting after verbs 
<-f motion (ire, venire, pronclsci, convenlre, mittere...), but not after verbs of 
hastening (543): 

sessum it he is going to take his scat 

cenatus cubitum iit after dinner, he went to bed 

patriam defensum revocfitus est he was called home to defend the country 

Also nuptum dare or collocare to give in marriage 
But ad vos venire properoi hasten to come to you 
filios Athenas mlserunt {they sent their sons to Athens 

erudiendos or uterudirentur/ for education (to be educated) 

586. Purpose is regularly expressed by 

a. ut or qui with the present and imperfect subjunctive; 

b. ad with the accusative of a substantive, gerund or gerundive; 

c. causa followed by the genitive of a substantive, gerund or gerundive; 

d. sometimes by de, the supine in-um, or the participle in- virus : 

a. adduco te ut abeas / induce you to go 

legatos mlserunt qui eum\ they sent legates to accuse him 
absentem accusarent j in his absence 

b. ad pacem hortor I exhort to peace 
adperseverandumlnflammoi'rowse to perseverance 
ad pficem petendam venerunt they came to sue for peace 

c. rel publicae causa (gratia) for the interest of the state 
animl causa for the sake of amusement 
agendi causa (581) for the sake of acting 
ingenil acuendi causa to sharpen the intellect 

d. legates de pace mitto J Z send ambassadors to treat of 

° r {peace 

587. The supine in u is used as an ablative of respect (511) with 
adjectives and fas; it never takes an object. 

The supines in u commonly occurring are 
dictii, factii, visu, auditu, cognitu, inventu. 

The adjectives commonly used with supines in ft are : 

facilis, ditlicilis; mirabilis and utilis; 
optimus, honestus and turpis; iucundus, incredibilis : 



222 SUPINE IN 11, TENSE $ 587-690 

m i r a b i 1 e visu wonderful to behold 

id dictu quam re faciliu s est it is easier said than done 

hoc est optimum factu this is best to do 

si hoc fas est dictu if this is right to say 

With dictu: nefas dictu it is a sin to say 

588. After facilis, difficilis and iucundus other con- 
structions are preferred; as, 

res facilis est ad cognoscendum; 

facile est rem cognoscere; 

rei cognitio facilis est; 

res facile cognoscitur, (cognoscetur); 

rem facile cognosces or cognosces. 



THE TENSES 

589. The tenses are verbal forms used to represent an aot in 
its relation to time, pointing out either 

the period of time to which the act belongs (absolute time), 
or the stage of advancement at a time which is in mind {relative time), 
or both the period of time and the stage of advancement. 

AORISTIC TENSES 

590. The historical perfect or perfectumhistoricum (always) 
and frequently the present and the first future tenses 
represent the act merely as belonging to the past, present 
or future period of time; the tenses thus used are said to be 
aoristic or indefinite; they are merely narrative, representing 
the act as act : 

scrlbo scrips! scribam 

I write I wrote I shall write 



§ 691-592 



TENSES 



223 



DESCRIPTIVE TENSES 

591. The present, imperfect and future, 

the present perfect, past perfect (pluperfcct)and f. perfect, 
the present, imperfect and future of the periphrastic 
conjugation 

may (590) represent the act not only as present, past or future, 
but also as going on, completed, or yet to come at a time which 
is in mind; the tenses thus used are said to be definite or de- 
scriptive, pointing out the period of the act and its stage of 
advancement at a time which is in mind : 



Stage 

of Act 



Going on: 



Period of Act 

Present Past Future 



scribo scribe bam 

I am writing I was writing 

it the present time, at a past tense 



ser IpsKPres. Perf. ) scripseram 
Completed: \I have done writing] I had done writing 
at the present time \ at a pa st time 



script virus sumacripturus eram 
Yet to come : I am going to write I was going to write 
\at the present time \ at a pas t time 



scribam 
/ shall be writing 
at a future time 



scrip sero 

I shall h. done writing 

at a fut u re time 

sc rip tu rus er 6 

I shall be going to w. 

at a future time 



Note: The beginning of an action is expressed by 

a. inchoatives: 255 sqq. ; 

b. incipio, coepi, inci piain (scribere) : 277; 

c. the aoristic tenses, (if no ambiguity arises) : 590. 



592. PRI NCI PAL AN D SECON DARY TENSES 

Principal tenses are 

the present, present perfect and the two futures. 

Secondary or historical tenses are 

the imperfect, historical perfect and pluperfect. 



224 USES OF THE TENSES § 593-595 

593. The tenses of the verbum infinitum (539) and of most 
of the dependent clauses (600 sqq.) represent the act as in 
progress, completed or yet to come and at the same 
time as contemporaneous with, previous or subsequent to the 
time of the verbum fimtum on which they depend; the period 
of time, therefore, to which they belong, is determined by the 
verbum fimtum (See 539). 

OTHER USES OF THE TENSES 

594. The Present Tense (590, 591) 

a. The gnomic present is used to denote a permanent truth; 

b. the conative present expresses an attempted act of the present; 

c. the historical present, used in vivid narration, represents a past act 
as present (repraesentfitio); 

d. the present with iam, iamdiu, iam diiduin, iam pridem. or 
adhuc , denotes an act begun in the past and continuing in the present : 

a. Veritas odium parit truth begets hatred 

b. dum vi t ant stulti vitia,) while fools try to shun a vice, 
in contraria currunt / they rush into its opposite 

c. aedificia i nee ndunt, f rumen -) they tire d their buidings, burnt their 
turn com burun t,iubent. ] corn, commanded.... 

d. annum iam audis Cra.-\you have been a hearer of 
t i p p u m J Cratippus for a year 

iam pridem cupio I have long been desiring 

iam dudum hoc facio I h. b. doing this for a short time 

595. The Imperfect Tense (591 ) 

The imperfect is used 

a. to denote customary or repeated action; 

b. to express attempted or intended past action; 

c. to describe places, things, actions, opinions, feelings or character; 

d. with iam etc. (594, d.), to denote acts begun and still going on in the past; 

e. with negatives, as an equivalent of could or would with the infinitive : 

a. epulabatur more Persa-1 . ■ . 
rum = saepe or semper eo ) h J w ? s ^o tit to feast m the 
more epulatus est j Persmn s ^ /e 

b. Porsennaeumterrebat [Porsenna attempted to 

{frighten him 



§ 595-597 USE8 OP THE TENSES L'2. r ) 

c. mdns i m ]) e n d e bat a mountain overhung 

I ba in forte via sacra / happened to go along the via sacra 

memoria tetfebat.ptrtabat he remembered, thought 
(I. i a m diu lecto tenc b at ur he had long been bedridden 
e. noil ferebat laborem he could not endure the exertion 

NOTE: In vivid descriptions the descriptive infinitive (infTnitivushistoricus 
or descriptivus) is used instead of the imperfect (Caes. I. 16; III. 5), but only in 
leading clauses. 

596. The Present Perfect (591, 571) 

The present perfect, which corresponds to the English perfect with "have" 
denotes an act as past wit h reference to the present time (perfeetum 
praesens) : 

a) as n o w completed : 

scrips! I have do ne writing 

d I x I I have finished speaking 

b) as now lasting in its results: 

abii t , excessit, evasit, \he is gone, he has left, he has 
erupit \escaped, he has broken away 

fuimus Troes, fuit i\ mm f^ have ceased to be Trojans 

yihum is no more 
de me actum est I am undone 

constiti = st6 / have placed myself = I stand 

consuevi - soleo { \ 1mve foT ; me <* **?* hahit = 

^ I am in the habit 

cognovi = scio 1 have found out = I know 

statin = mihi in animo est I have resolved = I intend to 

c) as no w judged upon or estimated : 

hoc bene fecit he has done this well 

linns homo nobis cimctando ( o/7c man has raised our cause 

restituitrem f aga in bj r lingering 

597. The Historical Perfect (590, 594) 

The historical perfect, which corresponds to the English "past tense'' and 
the ( rreek " aorist" denotes an act as pasl without any reference to the present 
time, merely answering the question, "what happened at that time?" 

scrips! / wrote 

veni, vTdT, vici I came and s;iw and conquered 



226 USES OF THE TENSES § 597-600 

NOTE: The historical perfect is often accompanied by the imperfect, the 
former going on in narrating the main facts which happened and followed 
one another in the past, the latter stopping to describe the scene and 
the circumstances of the action, the character, opinions and 
motives of the acting persons (595) ("Perfecto procedit, imperfecto 
i n s is tit oratio") : 

in fines Ambianorum pervenit; ) he advanced into the territory of the 
qui se sine morii dediderunt. >■ Ambiani, who submitted immediately 

Eorum fines Nervii attingebant ) Adjoining to them were the Nervians 

598. The historical perfect is sometimes used to express a u n i ve rsal truth 
(gnomic perfect, corresponding to the gnomic aorist in Greek) : 

omne tulit punctum qui miscuit J " he who precept with amusement blends, 
utile dulci \ wins every suffrage" 

599. Bpistolary Tenses 

In letters the writer, when referring to the time of com- 
posing them, often uses those terms which he would employ, 
if he were to arrive himself instead of the letter; e. g., 

the imperfect and pluperfect instead of the present and perfect; 
eo die, pridie, postridie instead of hodie, heri, eras: 

nihil habebam, quod scri-/7 ha ve nothing to write: 
berem (595) ^nihil habeo quod scribam 

ad omnes tuas epistulas re- \l answered your letters yesterday : 

scripseram pridie (611) \ad... epistulas rescripsi heri 

erat tamen rumor comi- jbut there is a rumor that the 
t i a diiatum Tri \ election will be postponed 

haec scrips! ante lucem / 1 have written, I wrote or I writs 
(597) \(scribo) this before daybreak 

scribebam 1 am writing (scribo) 

TENSES IN DEPEN DENT CLAUSES 

600. The tenses in dependent clauses are either grammatically 
independent of or dependent on (i. e. determined by) 
those of the main clauses; they are 1. independent, 

a) when by the nature of the thought conveyed by them they express absolute 
time only (589, 590); (always, when the two tenses belong to different periods, 
and in inserted clauses 601, 606) 



§ 600-1)03 INDEPENDENT TENSB8 227 

b) when they are fixed by usage, although they express both absolute and re- 
lative time ( (502, 622, 623.). 

c) in single instances, when the writer, for reasons of his own, chooses to make 
an exception from the rule (608); 

2 dependent, 

when the act expressed by them belongs to the same period as that of the main 
clause and is either 

a) (coincident), congruent or contemporaneous with (607, 608, 617, 622), 

b) previous to (611, 618) or 

c) subsequent to (615, 619) that same main act. 
NOTE: See exceptions n. 600 : 1, b and c. 

INDEPENDENT TENSES IN INDICATIVE CLAUSES 

601. Independent by nature (600, a) are those tenses which 
express absolute (589) time only: 

quod v e r i t u s sum fact u m est : tenses of the same period 

quod dicam factum est \ 

quae imperavisti fac i am \ tenses of different periods 

si ita est, perlbunt ) 

illT,ut diximus, reverterunt : tense in an inserted clause 

602. Independent by usage (600, b) is 

a. the present taken by dum, while; 

b. the perfect taken by 

postquam or posteaquam; after, 

ut, ubi, simul atque, ) as SO on as, {when denoting a single 

ut primum, ubi prlmum, > 

cum primum, ) P ast act: see 610 >' 73b ) 

a. dura in his locis m o r a t u r ^ while he tarried in these regions, 

legati ad eum venerunt j legates came to him 

dum haec (orea) jreruntur, ^ while this was going on (meanwhile ), 
Caesarinuntiatum est fit was announced to Caesar 

b. eopostquam per venit, \after Caesar arrived there, 
obsides poposcit \ he demanded hostages 

id u t a u d I v i t , abiit as soon as he heard that, he left 

603. Independent by exception is e. g. Caes. de bello Gall. 1, 28 : 

id fecit, quod n 6 1 u i t (instead of { he did this, because he did not want 
nolebat : 595 earn locum vacare S that land to be left vacant 



228 INDEPENDENT TENSES § 604-606 

INDEPENDENT TENSES IN SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES 

604. Clauses of result take the subjunctive of the 

a. present, to denote the result as existing at the time of the speaker, 

b. historical perfect, to denote it as a past fact, 

c. present perfect, to denote it as a present judgment on a past fact : 

a. Siciliam ita vexavit, ut\ he harried Sicily so thoroughly 
restitm nonpossit / that it cannot be restored 



ut 



36 excellebat abstinentia, ) he so excelled in self-control 

lustus sit appellatus ) that he was called the Just 



c. ardebat dicendi cupiditate sic, ut ) he was so hot with desire of speaking 
nagrantiusstudiuninon viderim S that I have not seen a more burn' g ardor 

605. Indirect questions take the subjunctive of the present perfect in order 
to denote the past act with reference to the time of the speaker (596) ; in all other 
cases they usually follow the rules of sequence, often contrary to the English 
idiom : 

Atheniensiumclassis quantae] how much the Athenian Beet has 
saluti fuerit universae \contributed to the welfare of 

Graeciae bello cognitum est Persico J Greece was seen in the Persian war 

But quanta conscientiae \ he showed how great the power 
esset(rarelysit) vis ostendil / of conscience is 

606. The tenses of 

a. inserted or introductory clauses, 

b. conditional clauses contrary to fact, 

c. clauses expressing surprise, deliberation or indignation, obligation, possi' 
bility or likelihood are not influenced by the govering verb : 656, 657, 662, 619: 

a. ne ignores, cecidit (M^° W be ^ norant of the fact > 

° \he fell 

b. vereor ne peccarem, si irem I fear I should sin, if I went 

c. quaero ex te ) I ask you 

quid responderem? >what I should have answered P 
cureumnondefenderempj why Is. not have defended him? 

veri simile non est, ut religioni ) it is not likely that he would (have) set 
suae pecuniam anteponeret > money above his conscience 

NOTE: Independent tenses occasionally occur in all other (except final) clauses. 



§ 607-608 COKGBUENT AND CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION 229 

SEQUENCE OF TENSES 

in Dependent Indicative Clauses 

(Study n. 600) 
G07. CONGRUENT ACTION 

(Covering the time of the main action) 

Rule: Dependent clauses expressing congruent action take the tenses of the 

main verb. 

Dependent clauses expressing congruent action are either 

a. coincident in thought with the main clauses, 

aid introduced by cum, (bene... facio) quod, si or relatives; 

b. congruent in time with the main clause, 

and introduced by quam diii, dum, donee, quoad, as long- as; 

or c. have the same object as the main clause, 

and as predicate a, form of posse, velle, clebere with an infinitive of the 

main verb : 

a. cum tacent, clamant by being' silent they shout 
cumt acebant ,elamabant their silence was a shout 
bene fecit , quod tacuit he did well by being silent 

b. quam din caedes facta\ as long as the slaughter lasted, 
est, domi se tenuit / he stayed at home 

disces, dum vives |V ou wiU !ear "< as lon S as y°» 

{live 

c. quos (adiuvare) p o t ui , \ I helped those whom I was able, 
volui, debui, adiuvl / willing, obliged to help 

608. CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION 

(Going on at the same time as the main action ) 

Rule: CONTEMPORANEOUS 

with a main present is a dependent present 

with a main future is a dependent future 

with a main historical tense I 592) is n dependent imperfect: 

facio, quod licet / do what is lawful 

faciam, quod licebit / shall do what is lawful 

feci etc. qnod licebat 1 did... what was lawful 



230 CONTEMPORANEOUS AND PREVIOUS ACTION § 60P-612 

609. Equivalent to a future is any other expression whichis future in meaning; 
as, the future imperative, the future passive participle, the hortative, jussive or 
optative subjunctive, oportet, opus est, posse, velle, debere &c. : 

cum relaxareanimos vole nt,"| when they wish to easethem- 
caveant intemperantiam or ) selves, let them beware of excess; 
cavenda est intemperantiaj excess must be guarded against 

610. The sequence of tenses is especially observed in the use of the futur es 
and in clauses expressing repeated action, introduced by relatives; cum, si 
quotiens, as often as, whenever; ut quisque, as often as one; ubi, 
simul atque, as soon as; (see 502. ) : 

a. naturam, sisequemur \ifwe follow nature as our 
ducem numquam aberrabimus f guide, we shall never stray 

si sapies, hoc facies if you are wise, you will do this 

b. quotiens domi sum (am), adte litteras do (write) 
quotiens domi ero (am), ad te litteras dabo (shall write) 
quotiensdomi eram(was),ad telitteras dabam ( wrote:595) 

611. PREVIOUS ACTION 
(Completed before the main act begins) 

Rule : PREVIOUS 

to a main present is a dependent present perfect 

to a main future is a dependent future perfect 

to a main historical tense [592) is a dependent past perfect {pluperfect) 

facio quod iussistl what you have commanded 

faciam quod iusseris what you command 

feci quod iusseras what you (had) commanded 

612. Also the sequence for previous action is especially observed in the 
use of the futures and in clauses expressing repeated action (609; 610): 

si me assequi potueris, \if you are able to find me, bury 

sepelito jme 

ut semen tern f e ce r i s , ita metes as you sow, you will reap 

quidquid acciderit. feramus, ) no matter what happens, let us bear 

ferendum est, fortiter ferto S it; we must bear it; bear it bravely 

quod Deus fecerit, appro- \ whatever God does, we will, 
bare volumus, debemus ]we must think it well 



§ 712-616 SEQUENCE OP TEN8E8 2'M 

cum domutn veni, scribd when I come home, I write 

cum domum venero, scribam when I come home, I shall write 

cum domum veneram, serlbebam when I came home, I wrote 

613. Repeated contemporaneous and previous action is some- 
times expressed by the imperfect and pluperfect of the sub- 
junctive, especially after cum and si; (cf. Caesar I, 25.)- 

614. A future perfect in both clauses denotes both the main 
and dependent action as completed at the same future time : 

qui Antonium oppresserit, \ he who crushes Antony, 
is bellum confecerit / will have finished the war 

615. SU BSEQU ENT ACTION 

(Following the main act ) 

Rule : SUBSEQUENT 

to a main present is a dependent sum with a future part, 

to a main future is a dependent ero with a future part, 

to a main historical tense is a dependent era m with a future part. 

paro bellum, quod gesturus sum, ...which I am going to wage 
parabo bellum, quod gesturus ero ...which I am goingto wage 
paravi bellum, quod gesturus eram ...which I was going to w. 

Sequence of Tenses 

in Dependent Subjunctive Clauses 

(Study n. 600) 

616. For this sequence the following tenses are considered 
as principal and secondary : 

Principal tenses are : 

a. the present and the two futures; 

b. the independent (potential and prohibitive) perfect subjunctives; 
only a few present perfects, which are v equivalent to a present; especially 
novi, oblitus sum, memini: 

c. usually the historical present and the present of q uo tatio n : 

Secondary tenses are : 

a. the imperfect, historical perfect and pluperfect; 

b. the historical infinitive and, usually, the present perfect; 

c. sometimes the historical present {always with cum narrfitlvum) 
and the present used in quotations. 



232 CONTEMPORANEOUS AND PREVIOUS ACTION 

617. Rule: CO N T E M PO R A N EO U S (600, 60 8) 



§ 617-618 



with the principal tense(616) is the present subjunctive; 

is the imperfect subjunctive: 



with a seco nd ary tense 

video quid facias 

videbo quid facias! 
videro quid facias / 

videbam quid faceres 
vidi quid faceres 

videram quid faceres 

quis dubitaverit (ne dubitaveris) 
quin in virtute divitiae sint? 



...what you are doing (now) 

...what you are doing, (then) 
i. e. what you will be doing 



what you were doing (then) 



who doubts (don't doubt) that there 
are riches in virtue 



novi (= scio) quis sit (616; 
618. Rule: 



I know who he is 
PREVIOUS 1600, 611) 



to a p rin cip al tense 
to a secondary tense 



video quid fecerls 
Direct : 
quid faci ebas? 
or quid fecisti ? 



videbo quid fecerls \ 
videro quid fecerls/ 

videbam quid fecisses 
vidT quid fecisses 

videram quid fecisses 



oblltus sum (= nescio ) quid \ 
f ece r is S 

cognovi ( = scio ) quid fecerls 

multi et sunt et fuerunt qui "| 
tranquillitatem expetentes a ! 

negotiis publicis se remo v e r i n t | 
ad otiumque perfug e r i n t J 



is the perfect subjunctive 

is the pluperfect subjunctive: 

...what you have done 
...what you have been doing 
...what you did 
. . . wh at you wers do ing 

...what you have done 

i. e. what you will have done 

...what you had done 
...what you had been doing 
Also, but loosely: 
. . . wha t you were doing( before ) 

I have forgotten (=■ I do not know) what 
you did... 

I have iound out (= 1 know...) 

there are many and there have been 
many who longing for retirement have 
withdrawn from public life and sought 
leisure 



NOTE: About independent tenses expressing previous action, see 604-606. 



$ 619 SUBSEQUENT ACTION 233 

619. Rule: I. SUBSEQUENT(600;615) 

to a principal tense is the present subjunctive 

to a secondary tense is the imperfect subjunctive, 

when the future (/. e. subsequent) character of the dependent clause is sug- 
gested in the sentence; as in 

a. clauses of purpose (695 sqq., 711) and fear (701, a. and b.); 

b. clauses of likelihood. .., deliberation..., and expectancy (See note and 040); 

c. clauses of result, except those mentioned in n. 604 and 019, II. : 

a. edo, edam,eder6utvivam| /ea fv that /may live, 

\or: (m order) to live 

verebar, veritus sum, \ 1 )1 feared... that Bewas going, 

veritus cram ne ablret \ 2 ) I feared... that he would go 

b. quaero cur ille id faciat ... why he is likely to do that 

quaerebam cur id faceret .{ ^hyhe^BM likely to do that 

\i. e. at the time of the asking 

consultum it quid faciat ...what he is to (shall) do 
consul turn iit quid faceret ...what he was to (should) do 

exspectabat quid facerent J ^ V V f s J vaitin ^(J° see ) 

\ what they would to 

exspecto si eant J 7 «™ ™ ak J" g to .ff e 

1 \ whether they will go 

c. itavivit ut iis sit cams ...that he is dear to them 
el conti«it ut nos Hberaret he succeeded in freeing us 
accidit ut esset luna plena it happened to be full moon 

NOTE 1. The imperfect subjunctive expressing past or previous 

likelihood, possibility or propriety, deliberation, surprise or indignation, when 
made dependent on any tense, remains unchanged (656, 057, 662, 606) : 

- . - n • i r * W ask why he was likely to do that, 

quaero cur ille id faceret j . c a[ ;itjmc pre vious totheas £ ing 

quaerebam cur ille id faceret s I asked u/irkhad been likely to dot. 

[See 619, b: Second example) \ i. c. at a time previous to the asking 



quaero qui 



is illud negaret I ask who could ha vc denied that 



234 



SUBSEQUENT ACTION § 619 



Rule: "■ A - SUBSEQUENT 

to a principal tense is «ms sim 

to a secondary tense is urns essem, 

when the fntnre (/. e. subsequent) character of the dependent clause is not 

suggested in the sentence; as in 

a. indirect questions of fact (641) andafter n6n dubito quin 
(710,650); 

b. causal (715), concessive (727) andco/nparariVeclauses(731); 

c. those consecutfre clauses in which the result is to be denoted 
as yet to come: 

a video, videbo, videro quid \...what you will do, i. e. what 
facturus sis Syou are going to do 

non dubitabam, -vl.veraml [...that you would do this 
quin hoc facturus esses (...that you were g. to do this 

. (since {or though)he is going 
b. cum venturus sit, mane > tQ come> rema in 

ita se eessit quasi num- \he behaved in such a manner as 
q uamfeusfuturusesset/f/-Ae were never to be indeed 

e. ita vtvit ut omnibus cfirnslfe fives in ******* tbat he 
futurussit J will be dear to all 

Rule: "" S - SUBSEQUENT 

when tie verb used in the Causes mentioned in II. A. lacks the form in 
iirus or is passive: 

NOTE 2, Subsequent action may also be expressed bj the subjunctive of posse, 
velle, debere with present infinitives. 



§ 620-621 BEQUENCE AFTER A VEKBUM INFINITUM 23o 

SEQUENCE IN SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES 

Dependent on a Verbum infinitum 

620. ( Practical )H.tile: A perfect infinitive or participle 
is followed by an imperfect or pluperfect; in all other cases 
the leading finite verb determines the sequence. 

NOTE: After m emini (present perfect) a past fact is denoted by a present 
infinitive; by a perfect infinitive only when the past time of the fact is to be 
emphasized. 

The perfect participles ausus, gavisue, (cdn)flsus, diffisus; arbitratus, 
ratns, veritus; iisus, complexus, secutus, have present meaning. 

Study n. 539; 608, 611, 615; 617-619 

dicis te scribere = scribis ] quid agas, 

video te scribentem = scribis [ egeris, acturus sis; 

dices te scribere = scribes [quid agatur, 

dicis te script u rum = scriptiirusesj actum sit, (brevi) agatur 



quid ageres, 
egisses, acturus esses; 



dicebas te scribere = scribebas 

videbam te scribentem - scribebas 

dicebas te scripturum = scripturus eras v 

scio tescripsisse = scripsisti ^quia ageretur, 

scivT te scripsisse = scripseras | actum esset, 

memini te scribere = scripsisti J (brevi) ageretur 

BJgni fer eoa cohortatus - postquam eos cohortatus est < ne cunct a r e n t u r , 
signifer iis a d m o n it I s = cum eos admonuisset \ in mare ee proiecit, 

cognoscendi quid fie ret potestatem non rellquit, (- nun poterant cognoscere) 

cognoscendi quid fiat potestatem n r >n relinquit, (=non possunt cognoscere) 

questum eos mittit, quod adversum Be bellum geratur, (-ut querantur) 

621. More accurately, when a subordinate clause depends on a verbum 
Infinitum, it takes that tense which it would have, it the verbum infinitum 
were the corresponding finite iorm (620); the sequence after a perfect 
infinitive or participle, however, is usually secondary, also after a leading 
future: 

viator bene vestitus causa ) the fine dress of the traveler will 
grassatori fuisse dice tur, } he reported as having been the 
cur ab eo spoliaretur J cause for the footpad to rob him 



236 SEQUENCE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES § 622-624 

Sequence in Dependent 
Congruent, postquam- and simulac- Clauses 

622. Postquam- and ut-, ubi-, simulac- clauses denoting a 
single past act, and also coincident and congruent clauses 
take 

a. the tense of the governing finite verb, 
or, when depending on a verbum Infinitum, 

b. the tense of the finite verb that would be equivalent 
to the verbum infinitum (as explained in n. 620 and 621) : 

bene facit (faciebat), cum tacet (tacebat), becomes: 
scit (sciebat), quam bene facia t (faceret), cum t ace at (taceret) 
scit (sciebat) se bene facere, cum taceat (taceret) 

bene fecit (fecerat), quod tacuit (tacuerat), becomes : 
scit (sciebat), quam bene f ecerit (fecisset), quod tacuerit (tacuisset) 
scit (sciebat) se bene fecisse, quod tacuerit ( tacuisset ) 

bene faciet, qui tacebit, becomes (554): 
scit (sciebat), quam bene facturus sit (esset), qui taceat (taceret) 
scit (sciebat) \ eum bene facturum esse, qui taceat (taceret) 

or ( fore ut bene faciat (faceret), qui taceat (taceret) 

mentitus erit, qui neg-averit, becomes (555): 
scit (sciebat), quam aperte mentitus sit (esset), qui negaverit (negasset) 
scit (sciebat) eum aperte mentitum fore, qui negaverit (negasset) 

bene f ecerit, qui fassus erit, becomes (555) : 
scit (sciebat), quam bene fecerit (fecisset), qui fassus sit (essrt) 
scit (sciebat), fore ut bene fecerit (fecisset), qui fassus sit (esset) 

623. Clauses dependent on an irrealis, (743, III.) take the 
imperfect (pluperfect): 

si dicerem, quid ageretur,\ If 1 told what is going on, 
mlrareris / you would be astonished 

Sequence in clauses 
Dependent on Dependent Clauses 

624. NOTE: The rules of sequence, as explained in 616 sqq. with the ex- 
ceptions mentioned in 622 and 623, are the same for clauses dependent on main 
or on subordinate clauses of any kind : 



§ 624-625 SEQUENCE-MODES 237 

veniam ubi cogno ve ro , quid agas, egeris, acturus sis 
veni ubi cogn 6 v I , quid agerC-s, egisses, acturus esses 

video (videbam), quid imped i at (impediret) ne abeas (abires) 
video (videbam), quid impediveri t (impedlvisset) ne abires 

facies, quod conducet, becomes: 
opto (optabam) ut facias (faceres), quod conducat (condiiceret) 
ndn dubito ('bam) quln facturus sis (esses), quod conducat (condiiceret) 

facies, quae imperaverd, becomes : 
postulo ('bam) ut facias (faceres). quae imperii verira (imperassem ) 
ndn dubito ('bam) quin facturus sis (esses) quae imperaverim (imperassem) 

THE MODES OF THE VERB 

625. The modes express the different relations of the predicate 
to reality ; 

the indicative (modus indicatives) represents the predicate 
as real or existing in the present, past or future (626 sqq); 

the subjunctive (modus subiunctivus or coniu nctivus, 
so called, because it is largely used in subordinate clauses,) re- 
presents the predicate 

as ideal (655 sqq.); e. g. as possible or desired, as a cause, 
result, condition, etc.; at the same time 

either excluding reality, as in some conditional clauses (749), 

or abstracting from reality, as in other conditional clauses 
(744), 

or implicitly affirming reality, as in some clauses of result, cause, 
time, characteristic, &c; 

the imperative (modus impera tivus) represents the pre- 
dicate 
asxcommanded (651 sqq.) 



238 indicative fc 626-628 

THE INDICATIVE MODE 

(Negative non) 

626. The indicative is commonly used, as in English, to re- 
present the predicate as real or existing (625). 

Special attention is due to some of its uses in 

a. independent declarative clauses (627); 

b. dependent declarative clauses (629); 

c. direct questions (630 sqq.) 

I N DICATIVE I N 
INDEPENDENT DECLARATIVE CLAUSES 

627. The English might, ought, should, would with an infinitive, 
when expressing real ability, duty, or propriety, (often implying that the act 
denoted by the infinitive does or did not take place), is represented by the Latin 
indicative : 

possum dicere 1 1 might say {though I do not), i.e. 

r \7ani able to say 

poteram dicere fl mighthave said (though I did not), 
(potui, potueram) \i. e., /was able to say 

debes tacere you ought to be silent = it is your duty 

eundum f u i t they should have gone = it was proper 

opmor I should think = I do think 

hoc non putavT (/should not (never) have thought so, 

numquam putaram \i. e., I did not believe 

lor.giim est it would be (too) tedious 

difficile est it would be too difficult 

par est, aequum est it would be right, fair 

melius er a t , satius e r a t it would have been better 

lieu it videre one (you) might have seen 

tuum erat it would have been your duty 

stulti erat it would have been folly 

628. The imperfect may also relate to actions not performed 
in the present : 

Hrtirttiici 7^ f*)y° u ought to have gone (though you did no' c ) 
debebas ire \2 )you ougn t to go (though you do n Q t) 



§ 6:19-633 questions 239 

INDICATIVE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES 

629. Clauses with general relatives (quisquis, quotquot, utut 
quicumque, quotienseumque, qualiscumque, quantuscumque), 
sive-sive or nisi forte, nisi v e r 6 , take the indicative : 

, • ^ . „„•-„„ S no matter who he is, or, whoever he 

quisquis est, is est sapiens ) may be> he . g ^ 

quidquid vult, valde vult whatever he wants, he wants mightily 

quoquo modo se res habet no matter how things are 

veniet tempus mortis, sive \ the time of death will come, whether 



retractiibis sive properfibis f you be reluctant or in haste 

nemo fere saltat apud Romanos j hardly anybody dances at Rome, 



nisi forte insfinit ( unless perchance he be deranged 

INTERROGATIVE CLAUSES 1 ) 

630. Questions are divided into 

a. real and rhetorical questions: 631; 

b. word and sentence questions: 633; 634; 

c. simple and alternative questions: 635; 637; 

d. direct and indirect questions: 640. 

REAL AND RHETORICAL QUESTIONS 

631. Questions in both form and meaning, calling for infor- 
mation, are called real questions; as, 

quid fecisti ? what did you do ? 

632. Questions in form, but vivid assertions or commands 
in meaning, are called rhetorical questions (656, 657; 662): 

a. n u m haec oblivisci possum ? -non possum 
quis dubitat? quis dubitet? -nemo dubitat 

qu am caeca fortuna est ! -caeca est etdubia 

b. v i s n e fateri ? - sine mora f a t e re 

WORD QUESTIONS 

633. Questions which ask for information concerning a part 
of the sentence are called word questions: the} r are introduced 
by interrogative pronouns (151 sqq.) or adverbs (175 sqq.) : 



1) For practical reasons also indirect subjunctive questions are treated here. 



240 questions § 633-636 

a. quis tandem fecit? who in the world did it ? 
quae tandem causa est? what possible cause is it ? 

b. ubi, quando fecit? where, when did he do it? 

SENTENCE QUE ST IONS 

634. Questions asking for information as to the reality of the 
predicate, i. e. for a "yes" or "no" as an answer to the whole 
interrogative sentence, are called predicate or sentence 
questions. 

Simple Sentence Questions 

635. Simple sentence questions are introduced by 

nonne, implying the answer "yes" 
num, implying the answer "no" 

-{5^3. asking « y es ? » or «no ? » 

no particle, expressing indignation, surprise etc. 

636. The answer is expressed by 

a. repeating the verb or the emphatic word,) 

or &jita,etiam, sane, certe, vero ( y es 

b. repeating the verb with a negative, \ 

or 6jnon ita,n6nver6, mini me... j no 

c. immo, {correcting) : on the contrary 
immo, (strengthening): y es , indeed 

a. nonne fecisti ? you did it, did you not ? 

feci, feci vero; sane quidemjes; certainly 

b. num fecisti ? you did not do it, did you ? 

non feci;minime vero no; not at all 

fecistlne ? did you do it ? yes or no ? 

feci; (non feci) yes; (no) 

solusne fecisti? did you do it alone ? 

solus; (non solus) yes, alone;(no, not alone) 

c. fatetur? (with indignation) does he confess ? 

immo pernegat on the contrary, he denies flatly 

causa bona est? (with surprise) is the cause good? 

immo optima yes, indee d , very good 



§ 637-640 questions 241 

Compound Sentence Questions 

637. Compound {alternative, disjunctive) questions are in- 
troduced by 



a. - ne an. 



9 



b an ? 

c. utrum an ? 

a. verane sunt an falsa ? 

vera sunt an falsa ? . 
utrum vera sunt an falsa? \ 



falsa ? ) 
b. vera sunt an falsa ? J- are these things true or false ? 



c. 

quis vestrum fecit, tii(ne) an / who of you did it: you ? 
Gaius an Marcus an Aulus? > or Gains ? or Mark ? or Aulus ? 

638. "Or not" in a direct question is rendered by an non; (rarely by 
necne): 

isne est quern quaero an non? is he the one whom I seek or not? 

639. When the first member of a compound question is not expressed, but 
only implied, the second number introduced by 

an, or; can it be that ; perhaps 

is used a. to prove, h. to illustrate something preceding, (often with a tone of 

irony, surprise, indignation or other emotion: 

a. hoc fecisti; ? you did this; 

an non vidi? ) or, did I not see it? 

h. quid ad me venitis? ) why do you come to me? 

an speculandi causa ? S can it be that you are spies ? 

NOTE: Distinguish an, or ( which of the two'.') 

from aut, or ( e i t he r of the two) : 

iust'im an iniustum est? is it just or unjust? 

iniustum aut iniquum est it is unjust or (at least) unfair 



DIRECT AND INDIRECT QUESTIONS 

640. Direct questions are independent sentences (631-639)! 
they take their modes according to n. 626 and 656, 657, 662. 
Indirect questions are dependent substantive clauses(379); 

their mode is the subjunctive (64-1 ). 



242 questions § 641-643 

INDIRECT QUESTIONS 

64.1. Indirect questions 640) are orginally direct (indicative 
or subjunctive) questions, but subordinated to 

verba inter rogandi, 
sentiendl et dlcendl, 
interest and refert. 

Rule: All indirect questions take the subjunctive accordingto 
the rules of sequence: 616-624; 619, Note 1; 606; 646. 

EXAMPLES 
Direct: quid agis, egisti, ages ? 

Indirect ■ ' W u a e r 5 <l uid a & 1 * 5 egeris, acturus sis > 6 . ,,, , 9 

Isciebam quid ageres, egisses, acturus esses \ 

Direct: quid dem? quid darem? (662) 

T ,. quaero quid dem, quid darem /. in vr^*^ i 

Indirect: ^ • - 1 • j j • i j 619 iNote J. 

nesciebam quid darem, quid darem 

642. I N Dl RECT WORD QUESTIONS 

are introduced by the same interrogative pronouns and ad- 
verbs as direct word questions (633): 

scio quid factum sit I know what has happened 

cognovit quae gererentur he ascertained what was going on 
nescio ubi sit 1 don't know where he is 

scio quis quo mo d 6 fecerit I know who did it, and how he did it 

643. Distinguish 

relative clauses, which refer to an expressed or implied an- 
tecedent (379), from indirect questions, which depend on 
certain verbs (640): 

effugere nemo id potest \ no one can escape what is 
quod futurum est; J destined to come to pass; 

saepe autem ne utile quidem \ but often it is not even useful 
est scire quid futurum sit;/ to know what is coming to pass; 

Note: The quod-clausemodifies id; it is a relative, (adjective) 
clause; the quid-clause depends on and is the object of scire; 
it is an interrogative, (substantive) clause. 



$ 644-646 questions 24:} 

644. Who-, which- and what- clauses 

arc relati ve, when intended to be statements of fact (378); 
but interrogative, when intended to be answers to ques- 
tions: 
Thus, " / will tell you what / think''' may be 

a. a statement: 

I will tell you that which 1 think: dlcam (id) quod sentio 

b. an answer to the questions: 

I'. ^4 H f™ do you think? \ *»» *«" ->«~» 

645. INDIRECT SIMPLE SENTENCE QUESTIONS 

are introduced by 

-ne t *) wne th er > 2 ) whether not 

( used onlv after\ 1 J , 
nonne,j quaerere / : whether not 

quaerit velisne s i b i respondere ) he asks whether you will {not) answer 

quaerit num veils si b i respondere ) him (cf. 666) 

quaes! vit salvusne (or num \ he asked whether his shield 
salvus) esset clipeus f was safe 

quaero nonne hoc verum sit I ask whether this is not true . 

Wait and try 

646. Indirect questions dependent on 

a. exspectare, wait 

b. experiri, temptare, conari , try 
are introduced by si, if, whether: 

a Pvsnertr, si ouid dicftt \ 7 a . ,n waitin S (to see) whether he is 

a. exspecto, s i quia an at j gojng tQ SRy anything 

Also: 
exspecto quid dicat (619] s I wait (to find out) what he will 

(exspecto quid dicturussit] / say 

But exspecto ut eat I expect (/. e. desire) him to go 

b. *"&*» si perrumpere possint } fay trjr wbetber they can break through 



244 questions § 647-650 

647. haud scio an, probably, likely 

(Negatived by non, nemo, nihil, nullus, numquam) 
haud scio an ita sit ) / ^are S av j t is so 



II dare say it h 
I don't know I 



nescioan ita sit j don , t ^^ hut h h SQ 

dubito an ita sit f _ . ,. ry , ,. . . . 

incertum est an ita sit j J am *™hned to think it is so 

haud scio an nemo ei par sit probably no one is his equal 
nescio quis, somebody 

648. Interrogative pronouns and adverbs after nescio areoften equivalent 
to the corresponding indefinites, and without influence on the mode of their 
clauses : 

nescio quis = aliquis nescio quo modo ) somehow 

nescio quid =aliquid nescio quo pacto ) unfortunately 

minim quantum = plurimum nescio quando, some time 

nescio quis venit somebody came 

649. INDIRECT COMPOUND SENTENCE QUESTIONS 

are usually introduced by the same interrogative particles as 
the corresponding direct questions; "or not" however, is ren- 
dered by necne, (rarely by an non): 

quaero utrum verum an falsum sit ) 

quaero verumne an falsum sit > / ask whether it is true or false 

quaero verum an falsum sit ) 

quaero verumne sit necne / ask whether it is true or not 

650. Dubitare, doubt, is followed, 

a. when affirmatiVc, by an indirect question,(rare/j num); 

b. when negative, by an indirect question or quln: 

a. dubitasne quis fecerit? do you doubt who did it? 

b. quis dubitat quid futurum sit? who doubts what will happen? 
nemo dubitat quin verum sit 220 one doubts that it is true 

NOTE: D u b i t a r e , hesitate, takes the infinitive (543). 



$ 651-654 THE IMPERATIVE 245 

THE IMPERATIVE 

{Supplemented by the subjunctive: 661) 

651. The imperative is used to express commands and en- 
treaties, concessions and conditions. 

652. The present imperative demands immediate (and 
continual) fulfilment: 

patent portae; pro fie is cere i ^ Z ates f re °P en: ^P art: 

^ f [Special command) 

iustitiam c o 1 e et piet&tem ] c ,^ tivate J» stice ^d piety: 

1 ((General command) 

lacesse; (iam) videbis furentem ] provoke him and you'll (soon) see 

' v ' ( him frantic (Condition) 

653. The future imperative demands future fulfilment. 
It is used 

a. with expressions denoting a definite future time; 

b. to supply lacking forms of the present imperative, in familiar 
language and urgent requests; 

c. the third person, except e s 1 6 , is only used in legal language : 

a. eras petito, dabitur ask to-morrow and it shall be given 
rem vobia pro p on a in ; vos earn S I will put the matter before you; you 
penditote } shall consider it 

cum valetudini consulueris, S when you have attended to your healths 
turn consulito navigation! \ then look to your sailing 

b. sic habeto, habetote be convinced 
scitd. scitote you must know 
memento, mementote bear in mind 
hoc facito this do 

caelestia Bemper spectato always meditate on heavenly things 

c. esto; at... (Concession) granted, be it so; yet... 

regio impend duo sunto two shall have the royal power 

NOTE: The negative no is only used with the future in laws and precepts. 

654. The imperative is often followed by quaes o, please, s is, (sodes), if 
you please; it is sometimes preceded by q u i n , pray : 

abi quaes."., abi s i s please go ( Entrea ty ) 

q u i n abi please, ( pray, ) do go 



246 DECLARATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE § 655-656 

• THE SUBJUNCTIVE 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES 
\ 

655. The independent subjunctive is either declarative or 
volitive. 

a . The declarative 1 ) subjunctive expresses or inquires about 

(representing the predicate in a softened tone 
a view | as certa j n ^ likely, possible or proper (656; 657), 

b. The volitive \) subjunctive expresses or inquires about 

a wish /representing the predicate in a polite manner 
or will (as desired, proposed, demanded or granted '(658 sqq. ) 

THE DECLARATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 

656. CERTAINTY, LIKELIHOOD, POSSIBILITY (655) 

a. Certainty is expressed in a modest manner by the 

present and perfect subjunctive for the present (and future), 
imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive for the past. 
The negative is non. 

This subjunctive is used 

1. in subjunctive conclusions (746; 749) ; also, when the protasis is omitted; 

2. in forms lite v e 1 i m , veil em, nolim, malim(659): 

1. si hoc dlcam, e r rem /f 1 * boa , 1 <j f -^ ***•- , 

\I should be mistaken 

si hoc diceres, errares (*>°? SH j d this > - yow would 

{be mistaken 

(he would not have said this; 
ille hoc non dixisset <[( Supply an omitted protasis, 

[e.g., if he had been called upon) 

2. velim eas I should like you to go 

v el i s n e me discedere ? would it be your wish t. I leave ? 



\) The name declarative has been preferred to the less comprehensive and mis- 
leading term potential; volitive has been considered sufficiently descriptive 
of the subjunctive of wish and will. 



& 656 DECLARATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 247 

b. Likelihood, (representing an act as reasonably to be expected,) is ex- 
pressed by the 

pre.se«tandper/ectsubjunctiveforthepresent and future, 
and the imperfect subjunctive for the past. 

The negative is n 6 n . 

This subj uncti ve is mainly used in questions with quid, cur..., 
why ? 

cur ille id faciat? why s ho u Id he (be likely to) do that ? 

quid hoc face ret? why s h o u 1 d he have done this? 

nemo sapiens id tibi co need at no wise man would grant this 

c. Possibility and capacity is expressed by the 

present and perfect subjunctive for the present and future, 
and the imperfect subjunctive for the past. 

The negative is non. 
This subjunctive is mostly restricted to the 

1. first person singular (esp. of the perfect); 

2. second person singular indefinite; 

:i. third person singular with quis, aliquis, quispiam, quisquam: 

1 . haud facile d l x e r i tri I should {could) not readily say 
pace tua d I x e r i m by your leave I should say 
paene (or prope) die am I should almost say 

with the perfect indicative) $ J a & 

2. dicas, dlxerls you (indefinite) may say 

fortunam citius reperifis ? fortune may be sooner 

quam retineas \ found than kept 

diceres,putares,crederes|o/]e (or you) might have said, 
cerneres, vide res \ thought, believed, perceived, seen 

maesti, crederee victos, in ) so sullen they returned to the camp 



castra red iC runt ) you might have thought them beaten 

) you 

} you \ 



But forsitan quaeratis (351) ) you (definite) may say, 

or fortasse quaeritis 



fortasse quaeretis ) you will perhaps inquire 



248 DECLARATIVE AND VOLITIVE SUBJUNCTIVES § 656-658 

3. hie quaerat quispiam here somebody may ask 

dicat quis, dicat aliquis) 

dlxerit quispiam ( some one wa - v sa ^ 

fortasse dlxerit quis one may perhaps say 

quisneget or possitnegare?) , , 1 , N 1 , 

quisrieiatorpotestnelare?)^ ^^ (or could) deny? 

quis negaret, quis negavit? who could have denied ? (662) 

vix quisquam crederet one could not have believed it 

NOTE: The lacking forms of the potential subjunctive (656 c.) are supplied 
by other constructions: 

vide n e mea coniectura vera sit my conjecture m ay b e is true 

vereor ne res sic se habeat I am a fra i d it is true 

v i d e t ur res sic se habere so it seems to be 

haud s c i 6 an res sic se habeat so it probably is 

n u m res ita se habet? shouldn't this be true? 

f o r s i t a n with subjunctive pres . ) ■ , , 

and perfect \possibly 

fortasse (not used in questions) probably, perhaps 

(For f orte with ne, si, nisi, see n. 695 and 751.) 

657. Propriety and Obligation (cf. 627; 628) 

is sometimes expressed by the 

present subjunctive for the present, 
imperfect subjunctive for the past. 

The negative i? non, (rarely he): 
quid tandem vereamini? what, pray, should you fear? 

quid tandem vereremini? (662) what, pray, should you have feared? 

a legibus non recedamus we should not swerve fom the laws 

But a legibus n e recedamus (660) let us not swerve from the laws 

The Volitive Subjunctive (65?.) 

658. The volitive subjunctive represents the predicate as 

desired, proposed, demanded, deliberated on or granted; 
it includes the 

optative, hortative, jussive, deliberative and concessive subjunctives. 



§ 659-660 volitive subjunctive 249 

OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 

(Coniunctlvus optativus) 

659. The present (and perfect) express a wish without in- 
timating whether it is attainable or not; it may be introduced 
by ntinam (ne), velim, nolim, malim (656): 

( velim or utinam) a b e a t may he go ! 

di f a x i n t (= fecerint ) may the gods grant ! 

peream, si mentior may I perish, if I lie I 

ne vivam, si seio may I not live, if I know I 

ita vivam, ut nescio as true as I live, I don't know 

The imperfect and pluperfect express regret over a hopeless 
wish; it is regularly introduced by utinam (ne), or vellera, nol- 
lem, mallem : 

utinam abiret JO that he would leave! 

vellem abiret \(But he will not) 

utinam abisset f would he had left ! 

vellem abisset {(But he did not) 

utinam ego tertius vobis ) ' 

amicus a d s c r i b c r e r ! O that 1 could be enrolled 

(Dionysius to Damon and Phintias) Wlth -^ OU aS the thlrd fnend! 

HORTATORY SUBJUNCTIVE 

(Coniunctlvus hortativus) 

660. The hortatory subjunctive is used in proposals and ex- 
hortations ;it is confined to the first person (singular and)plural 
of the present. 

The negative ne is usually continued by neve : 

ea m si nHcet ! \ will go, if you please; i. e., 

e a m , si placet ^ /e t me gQ 

age, eamus well! let us go 

- r rr ••,• .- j let us not desire what is (too) 

ne dimciha o p t e m u s j difficult 

mortem ne timeamus neve \ let us not fear death nor even 
fugiamus I trv to evade it 



250 VOLITIVE SUBJUNCTIVE § 661 

JUSSIVE AND PROHIBITIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 

(Coniunctivus iussivus et prohibitivus) 

661. Commands and prohibitions are expressed as follows : 
Commands Prohibitions 

addressed to are expressed by 

. , . . , , , the imperative noli with pres . i nf in. 

a. individual ) (subju £ ct i ve c f or 

second persons S i mpers onal verbs) ne with perf . subj. 

b. a general > S nS with the present 
second person; S present subjunctive ub . * . 

c. third persons ) - J 

a. 1; Ite (651 sqq.) go 
pudeat te, pudeat vos(271)be ashamed 

noli ire; nolite ire do not go (Polite form) 

ne ierls; ne ierltis do not go (Emphatic form) 

ne transieris Hiberum do not cross the Ehro 

ne te paeniteat eonsilii let your intention not rue you 

b. isto bono utare (225), dum ( enjoy this blessing, while it is here; 
adsit; cum absit, ne requires ( when it is gone, don't pine for it 

c. eat; eant let him go; they shall go 
ne eat; ne eant he, (they) shall not go 

NOTE 1. Noli is continued by neque, ne by neve or aut: 

noli fugere neque timere \ , , „ . 

ne fugeris neve (aut) timueris \ do not Bee > nor even teaT 

de me nihil timueris tear not for me 

NOTE 2. Remember also the following expressions : 

c u r a ut valeas take good care ot yourself 

cave festines don't be in a hurry 

nuntius ibis you will go as a messenger 

f ac ( ut) eas; fac ne eas do go; do not go, don't 

quid agatis fac sciam let me know what you are doing 



$ 662-664 VOLITIVB SUBJUNCTIVE 25J 

662. DELIBERATION, SURPRISE AND INDIGNATION 

are expressed by the 

present subjunctive for the present, 
imperfect subjunctive for the past. 
The negative is non. See 619, Note. 

quo me vertam? whither shall I turn ? 

quid agerem, iudices ? what was I to do, judges? 

quid faceret aliud ? what else should he have done? 

hunc ego non admirer ? shall I not admire this man ? 

huic cedamus ? are we to yield to this man ? 

NOTE: Questions and exclamations of surprise and indignation may be in- 
troduced by ut (564 ): 
tu (u t) uniquam to corrigae ? how should yo u ever reform ? 

CONCESSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 

(Coniunctivus concessivus) 

663. Concession for the sake of argument is expressed by the 

present subjunctive for the present, 
perfect subjunctive for the past. 

The negative is ne: 

n e ait Bane Bummum malum dolor; I gr a nt that pain is not the greatest 
malum certe est | evil; an evil it certainly is 

f e c e r i t ; esto he may have done it; be it so 

NOTE: These concessive clauses are dependent in thought, not in form. 
i ( lompare 377, Note. ) 

664. nodum, (rarely ne), still less 

takes the tenses of the subjunctive; the verb however 
is often omitted after this particle : 

eum non aspicit, nedum \ he does not look at him, still 

a m e t I less love him 

id iuvenem non movet, \ that makes no impression on a 

ned u m sen em \ vouth, still less on an old man 



252 DEPENDENT CLAUSES § 665-666 

THE INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE 
IN DEPEN DENT CLAUSES 

665. The dependent indicative is mainly used to re- 
present the predicate, in the opinion of the speaker, as a fact: 
332; 672; 675; 715 sqq.; 722 sqq.; 732; see also 743 and 744. 

The dependent subjunctive is mainly used to represent 
the predicate as 

a. a mere view, wish or will of any person (in all kinds of 
dependent clauses); 

b. a fact in the opinion of another person than the speaker : 

666, c. 

c. sl complement of the thought conveyed by a dependent 

subjunctive or infinitive: 670. 

Subjunctive expressing Another's Thought 

666. Dependent clauses intended by the speaker to express the 
thought of another, (usually of the main subject,) take 

1. the subjunctive, 

2. the reflexive, when referring to that person. 
NOTE: Such clauses are 

a. all indirect questions and quin-clauses after a negatived dubitiire; 

b. all clauses expressing purpose (including temporal and relative clauses with 
final meaning. 

c. all other dependent (except consecutive) clauses, whenever they are 
intended by the speaker to express a fact or anything else a s the thought 
ot another. 

d. all dependent clauses of formal indirect discourse: 758. 

a. nescit quid sui cives de ( he does not know what his 
se cogitent I fellow-citizens think about him 

non dubitat quln se f he does not doubt that they 
am e n t \ love him 



§ 666-669 SUBJUNCTIVE EXPRESSING ANOTHER'S THOUGHT 253 

h. petunt ut se conservet (Purpose) they entreat him to spare them 

c. But ita petiverunt ut eos| they entreat him in such a manner 
conservaret (Result) f that he spared them 

Paetus libros quos frater ( Paetus gave me those books 
suns reliquisset mihi I which, (he said, )his brother had 

donavit (left; or: which "his brother had left" 

But P. libros, quos frater \ P. gave me those books which 
eius reliquerat, mihi donavit {(I say) his brother had left 

gaudet mater, quod f your mother is glad, because 

redieris \(she said) you have returned 

aCaesare invitor si b i ut sim ) j am invited by Caesar (i. e. Caesar 

legatus,(s/6i refers to the logical } . . 

subject) ) mvl tes me) to be his lieutenant 



667. Non quod, non quia, non quo, introducing a reason rejected by 
the writer or speaker, are followed by the subjunctive : 

id facio, non quod put em... I do this, not because I think... 

id feci, non quo put a r e m... I did this, not because I thought 

NOTE: Non quo non = non quin. 

668. Q uo d or quia introducing a thought felt or expressed by the speaker 
on another occasion, may take the subjunctive : 

laeta visa sum. quia soror ) I seemed (in my dream) glad, because 

(venerat or) v eniss et S m 7 sister had come 

669. Verbs of saying and thinking are (by a confusion of ideas) often 
put in the subjunctive, as if they, not the accusative with the infinitive fol- 
lowing expressed the thought of another (cf. 758): 

gaudet quod te venisse di cer e t t he is glad because (he said) you had 
(- gaudet quod veneris : 666, c) \ arrived 

.... sive quod Romanes discedere ) either because (in their opinion) 
ex ieti m aren t, sive eo quod (e6s) ! the Romans were retreating or 
re frumentaria intercludi posse f because they felt sure they could be 

conflderent, { Caesar B. G. 1. 23) J cut off from supplies 



254 SUBJUNCTIVE BY ATTRACTION § 670-672 

Subjunctive by Attraction 

670. Clauses conceived as completing the thought con- 
veyed by a dependent subjunctive or infinitive to 
which they are attached, are put in the subjunctive : 

mos est Athenis, ut laudentur j it is custom at Athens to eulogize pub- 
in contione ii (or 1 a u d a r I eos ), - licly those who have fallen in battle: 
qui sint in proeliis interfecti ) ( The ut- and qui- clauses form one thought) 

But Athenis laudantur..., qui sunt... j (The indicative is used, because qui... 
and ... quod ibi laudantur.., qui su n t.. (. is attached to a main or dep. indie. 

vereor n3, dum minuere velim ) I am afraid, Til increase the labor while 
labdrem, augeam <> trying to diminish it 

Note: Clauses dependent on conditional clauses contrary to 
fact, take the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive (623). 

671. If the clause is a mere circumlocution, (as i! qui prae- 
sunt for magistrates or duces, ii qui post nos futuri 
sunt for poster!, ea quae gesserat for res eius gestae,) it 
is usually put in the indicative: 

orator efheit ut ii, qui ) the orator brings it about that 

audiunt (or audiant), ita ad- )■ his hearers are affected as he 
ficiantur, ut orator velit J wishes 

672. If the clause contains an independent, explanatory re- 
mark, or states a fact, it is put in the indicative: 

A^eretur ne ii, quod multum } he fears that they, owing to 

pOSSUnt, id efriciant / their great power, will bring it about 



$ 673—674 RELATIVE CLAUSES 255 

RELATIVE CLAUSES 

(About the agreement of relatives see 396-398) 

673. Relative clauses are introduced by 

a. relative pronouns; as, qui, qualis, quantus, quot,... 

b. relative adverbs; as, ubi, cur, cum (when), ut (as),... 

The negative is non. 

Note: The introductory relative is never omitted, as it often 
is in English; (see however 687): 

vir quern vldl I the man whom I saw 

{the man I saw 
pecunia qua egemus the money (which) we need 

The antecedent of the relative is sometimes 

a. entirely omitted (147); 

b. omitted in the leading, but incorporated in the dependent clause (684); 

c. repeated: 

a. qui legionis aquilam ferebat((^ S °/^ r) W *l° b °^ t ^ eea ^ e 

{of the legion; the eagle-bearer 

sunt qui putent there are (some men) who think 

b. quam quisque norit \ let everyone practice the art 
art em, in hac se exerceat \ which he knows 

c. dies Tnstat quo die... the day is at hand on which... 
loci natura, quern locum (the nature of the ground which 
nostri delegerant \our men had chosen 

duo itinera quibus itineribus there were two routes by which... 

674. The force of the Latin relative clauses may be 
pronominal, determining what individual person, thing, time, 

place... is meant (675), 

adverbial, denoting purpose or condition (675-676), 
adjectival, describing a characteristic of the antecedent, 

often with an accessory idea of cause, concession, 

restriction or result (677). 



256 RELATIVE INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES § 675-676 

RELATIVE INDICATIVE CLAUSES 

675. Relatives clauses used to state or assume facts are put 
in the indicative (625, 665): 

est genus quoddamhominum}t/2ere is a class of men which is „ 
quod HTlotae vocatur j called the Helots 

quisquis est, is est sapiens (62?) whoever he is; he is wise 

vicensimus annus est, cum \it is the twentieth year that they 
me unum petunt jhave been attacking- we alone 

ita faciam, ut tu voles / will do as you wish 

quo (= si quo) voles , sequar whithersoever you wish, I'll follow 

(The first four relative clauses are pronominal (674), the last iis adverbial.) 

NOTE: Qui- clauses sometimes admit either mode; the indicative, in order to 
represent the statement as a fact, the subjunctive, in order to denote it as a 
characteristic, cause or concession (677 sqq. ) : 

habed senectuti gratiam, quae ) I feel grateful to old age, which has 

mihi sermonis aviditatem a u x i t > increased my love of con versation; 
But... quae aviditatem auxerit ) ...because or since it has increased .. 

RELATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES 

(See 666; 670-672) 

676. Relative clauses expressing purpose are put in the sub- 
junctive. They are adverbial in sense. 

Purpose: qui = ut ego, tu, is...; ubi = ut ibi 

cuius - ut eius unde= ut inde 

cui = ut ei quo = ut eo 

quern = ut eum qua = ut ea 

legatos miserunt, they sent ambassadors 

qui (-ut ii) pacem peterent to sue for peace 
But qui (=et ii) pacem petierunt who sued tor peace (374) 
habebat quo ( - ut eo) confugeret he had a retreat whither he wight flee 

NOTE: Also a condition may be expressed by a relative clause: 
Condition: qui = si quis or si qui; cum-siquando; ubi = sicubi 

qui hoc dicat, erret \ f Person who should say this, would 

I be mistaken 



§ 677 CLAUSES OF CHARACTERISTIC 257 

CLAUSES OF CHARACTER I STIC (712) 

677. Relative clauses used to describe the character of the 
antecedent (clauses of characteristic), are put in the subjunctive. 
They are adjectival in sense (379). These clauses are found 

a. after substantives: 

. . I a bov who does not know how 

puer qui parere nesciat < ^ Q ooev 

fuit temp us cum Germanos\ there was a time when the Gauls 
Galll virtute superarent / surpassed the Germans in courage 

b. after the adjectives dignus, indignus, 

aptus, idoneus, 
unus and solus : 

dignus es qui imperes you are worthy to rule 

indignus eras cui fides) VQU did not deserve tobe trusted 
haberetur J 

idoneus est quern prae- \ he is a man whom I can place in 

f i ciam J command 

c. after comparatives followed by quam (705): 

in a i o r est quam qui in- \ he h tQQ t tQ e e 

vidiam enugere possit ) 

n 6 n 1 o n g i u s aberant quam/ they were not farther a way than 
quo telum adigl possit \a javelin could be thrown 

d. after determinatives; as, is, eius modi, talis, tarn, 
adeo... (702): 

is cs qui t err ear is you are the man to be scared 

But i* ee= qui tcrritns es you are the one who was scared 

ea est Romana gens \ the Roman race is one that 

quae victa quiescere nesciat / knows not how to rest when conquered 

e. after general expressions of existence; as, sunt, inveninntur : 

sunt qui put en t there are some who think 

non deerunt qui meminerint there'll be some who remember 
quis est qui nesciat? who in the world does not k.P 

nemo estqulhocfaeereaudeatno one ventures to do this 
quotus quisque est qui sciat how few there are who know 
nihil est quod minus deceat nothing is less becoming 



258 CLAUSES OF CHARACTERISTIC § 677-681 

f u i t cum arbitrager there was a time when I thought 

erit cum desideres / ^ tir ? e mttcotoe when you will 

{long lor... 

NOTE: After general affirmatives like sunt qui the indicative is sometimes 
used; similarly after partially defined antecedents like quidam, non nulli, multi 
sunt qui, if the writer wishes to state a fact (675). 

f. after est quod or h a be 6 quod, there is reason: 

est quod (or cur, qua re) time a s you have reason to fear 

non habent quod gaudeant they have no reason to rejoice 

quid est quod suscenseas? what is the reason of your wrath ? 

nihil est (habes) quod e as you have no reason to go 

But non habeo quid dicam I do not know what to say 

CLAUSES OF CHARACTERISTIC 
expressing- Cause, Concession, Restriction or Result 

678. Cause: introduced by qui = cum ego, tu, is... 

or by quippe (ut, utpote, praesertim) qui (as, in fact): 

me miserum, qui haec non \alas for me, that I have not seen 
viderim (this 

6 fortunate adulescens, qui ] happy youth! to have found a 
tuae virtutis Homerum }Homer as the herald of thy 

praeconem in veneris J valor! 

679. Concession or opposition: qui = cum ego, tu, is... : 

egomet qui leviter Graecas litteras ) although I had studied Greek but 

a 1 1 i gi s se m , tamen Athenls com- > superficially, I stayed at Athens several 

plures dies sum commoratus ) days 

680. Restriction ; introduced by qui or qui quidem: 

quod s c i a m {or quantum s c i 6) as far as I kno w 

quod meminerim (quantum memini)as far as I remember 

orationes ejus quas quidem (his speeches, as far as 1 have 
ego legerim {read them 

681. Result: qui = ut ego, tu, is (cf. 712) : 

secutae sunt tempestates quae f storms arose that kept our men 
nostros in castris continerent \in camp 



$ 682-6S3 CORRELATIVE CLAUSES 259 

CORRELATIVE CLAUSES 

( Regarding their modes see 730 and 732) 

682. Correlative clauses are clauses of a complex sentence 
containing corresponding determinatives and relatives (175- 
185.) Their negative is non. 

In such complex sentences 

a) the member containing the determinative often follows, almost always, 

when it is to be emphasize d ; 

b) the relative is commonly rendered by as; {But is qul=he who); 
quo-eo =quan to-ta n t 6 by the -the : 

idem es, qui semper fuistl( 738) f/° u are l he sawe as y° u have 
1 r [always been 

servT moribus Tsdem sunt,\ the servants have the same man- 
quibus dominus j ners as their master 

talis est, quale m te esse video he is such a man as 1 see you are 

quot homines, tot sententiae as many minds as men 

ut sunt, ita nominantur they are called what they are 

quo delictum maius est, \ the greater the crime is, 

eo poena est tardior (515) \ the slower is the punishment 

quo quisque est sollertior et) the more keenwitted and gifted a 
ingeniosior, hocdocetlracun- V man is, the more provoking and 
dins et laboriosius (164) ) wearisome is teaching for him 

quant 6 diutius cdnsidero, tan 1 6 ( the more I reflect, the darker 
mini res videtur obscurior \ Jt appears to me 

683. Q u 6 -e 6 followed by a double comparative is equiv- 
alent tout q u i s q u e - i t a followed by a double superlative: 

quo quid que est melius, eo)t he more excellent a thing is, 
est rarius \t he rarer it is; 



ut q u i d q u e est optimum, 
ita est rarissimum 
optimum quidque rarissimum est 



in pro p or t ion to a thing's 
excellence is its rareness; 

the most excellent things arc the rarest 



2{)0 INCORPORATION § 684-685 

INCORPORATION 

of antecedents and quisque 

684. a. Antecedent appositives and superlatives, 

b. antecedents of relative clauses standing 
first in a complex sentence (682), 

c. quisque (164), 

are incorporated in the relative clause, (transposed from the main into the 
dependent clause), the antecedents in agreement with the relative, 
quisque as subject or object: 

a. Cicero, cui viro nihil {Cicero, a man that lacked 
defuit j nothing 

firm! et constantes amici, cuius ) steadfast and enduring friends, a kin d 
generis est magna penuria \ of w hie h there is great dearth 

Cato, qui unus restitit Cato,theonly one who resisted 

de servis suis, quam habuit fi- ? Themistocles sent the most trusty 
delissimum,ad Xerxem misit ) slave he had to Xerxes 

b. qua n octe natus Alexander est, ) in the same night in which Alexander 
eadem Dianae templum deflagravit ) was born, the temple of Diana burnt d. 

quam quisque norit \let every one practice the art 

ar t e m, in hac se exerceat (603) f which he knows 

c. quod quisque potest, id \is a person allowed to do what 
el licet ? j is in his power ? 

quod c u ique obtigit, teneat let every one keep what he has got 

The Relative in Inserted Clauses 

685. In inserted clauses the relative with an abstract sub- 
stantive may be used to characterize a person: 

quae tua prudentia est, ) nothing will elude you, 

or qua es prudentia, such is your judgment; 

or pr 5 tua prudentia, \ or, 

or ut es prudens, with your characteristic judg- 

nihil te fugiet ) ment, nothing will elude you 



§ <i v <> INVOLUTION OF THE RELATIVE 261 

COMBINATION OFCLAUSES 
by Involution of the Relative 

686. A simple relative clause frequently becomes compound 
by involving its relative in the construction of the interrog- 
ative, conjunctional or relative clause subordinated to and com- 
bined with it. 

EXAM PLE: 
1 . Relative Clause: (si quid est in me ingenl, ) cuius exiguitatem sentio 
2- Interrogative CI. replacing "exiguitatem ": or e. g. "quod exiguum esse" 
of another relative clause; qua m sit (id) exiguum (sentio) 

3. Relative involved in the ) f The stemqu connects with ingenl; 

eonstr notion of both clauses } quod : £ e n VY " **{ V V l\i ' ■ g * ° d ™ 
and replacing "cuius" demanded as subject of the interrog- 

1 ° Native clause quam sitexiguum.' 

4. Compound relative clause resulting from the combination: 

{quod sentio qnam sit exiguum 
- quod quam sit exiguum sentio 

Object of sentio 

Note: The original simple relative or the inserted dependent 
clause (with an appropriate conjunction; may serve in the 

Translation : 

a. whatever talents I have, the ins u flic i en c y ol which I feel; 

1 >. whatever talents I have, alt ho u gh I fee 1 ho w 1 i m ited th cy arc 

OTHER EXAMPLES: 



Epicurus non satis politus est 
ils artibus quas quitenent 
eruditi appellantur: (quas 
qui tenent is s u bj e c t ; quas 
is governed by tenent) 



Epicurus is not sufficiently refined 
by those accomplishments the 
possessors of which are 
called scholars; or: ... which 
mark their possessors as cultivated 



laudanda philosophia est cni\philosophv deserves to hepraiscd^ 
qui p a r e a t befitus esse possit j s i nc c he who obeys her can be happy 

laudanda philosophia est cui\...; for if one obeys her, he has 
s I p a rea s , beatus esse possia j it in his power to be happy 

laudanda philosophia est cui\ philosophy deserves to be praised, 
(utinam) pareas optamus j which we wish you would give heed to 



262 RELATIVES AS CONNECTIVES § 687-689 

COORDINATION A N D S U BO R D I N AT I O N 
OF RELATIVE CLAUSES 

687. Incoordinate relative clauses the second relative 
(nominative or accusative) is often omitted, or is, hie, ille 
substituted for it: 

B. cum peditibus, quosV. adduxerat, ) Bacchus with the infantry whom Volux 
(quique in priore pugna nou *&: I had brought up, and who had not been 
fuerant, or) neque in priore pugna ? r . 
adfuerant... J engaged m the first skirmish 



Virialhus. quam Laelius fregit, ) Viriathus, whom Laelius crushed and 

(ciiiu^que ferocitiitem repressit, or) > 

ferocitltemque eius repressit,... ) ™+ose ferocity he curbed, 

688. Relative clauses are subordinated without et or que: 

Belgae proxirni sunt Germanis qui "| t £ e Belgians are nearest to the Germans 
trans Rhenum incolunt, (= Germanis ^ b H h d the Rhine with whom 

transrhenanis,) qui bus cum con- [ • „ -, ■ 

tinenter bellum gerunt J lhe 7 aie continually engaged m war 

RELATIVES AS CONNECTIVES 

689. Relatives are frequently used as connectives instead of 
determinatives with conjunctions (374-375): 

j = /et is, nam is or is enim; 
" (is igitur, is autem, is tamen 

quare, quam ob rem therefore (330) 

qua re audita or nuntiata at this news 

quae dum geruntur while this was going on (602) 

quae cum ita sint (now) since this is so 

quo facto hereupon, this done 

quo factum est ut... the result was that... 

quo cumvenisset and when he had come there 

quibus rebus COgtlitlS sinee these things became known 

perutilesXenophontislibrlsunt; Xenophon's books are very useful; 
quos legite quaeso, studiose re ^ t1 them ' tberefore > I ask you, dili- 



$ 600-692 RELATIVE CLAUSES REPLACING SUBSTANTIVES 263 

quod si, but if (cf. 751; 752) 

690. Quod before si, nisi, etsT, cum, quia, quoniam, utinam, 
ne, is translated hy but, now, so, whereas, as to that a. s. f. : 

tyrannl coluntur simulatione ad "\ tyrants are honored by adulation for a 

tempus; quod si forte ceciderint, ! time; but if th»y happen to fall, it will 

turn intellegitnr, quam fuerint \ be evident how lacking in friends they 

inopes amicorum ) have been 

691. Relative Clauses replacing Substantives 

Relative clauses often take the place of substantives, parti- 
ciples (568) or prepositional phrases: 

qui legit, qui mea legunt a reader, my readers 

is a quo accusatus sum my accuser 

qui ante me dixit the speaker before me 

qui hominem occTdit the murderer 

qui Romulo successit the successor of Romulus 

id quod cogito, sentio my thought, my opinion 

quae (animo) cogitamus our thoughts 

leges quae nunc sunt the existing laws 

pons qui est ad Genavam the bridge at Geneva (401) 

692. However, doers of habitual or notable acts are prefer- 
ably denoted by substantives in -tor and -sor (336): 

cantor, orator singer, speaker (by profession) 

omnium gentium victor conqueror of all nations 

Caesaris interfectores the murderers of Caesar 



264 CONJUNCTIONAL CLAUSES § 693-695 

CONJUNCTIONAL CLAUSES 

{Study 375; 376-379) 

I. Clauses of Purpose 

(About the Reflexive in Final Clauses see 666) 

693. There are two kinds of filial clauses : 

Clauses expressing purpose indicated by the main verb are called 

Substantive or Complementary Final Clauses (379); 

(See 702, note 1, and 707, 1.) 

Clauses expressing purpose indicated only by the context and the particle 

(ut...) are called Adverbial or Pure Final Clauses. 

694. Position. Substantive clauses of purpose commonly follow 
their main clause; adverbial clauses of purpose follow, when empha- 
sized; but precede, when the main clauses are to be emphasized. 

695. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF PU RPOSE 
Tenses: Present and Imperfect Subjunctive according to 619. 
Introductory Particles: 

ut (uti), that; to; in order to 

atto ( = uteo) /with comparatives: that the... 

| without comparatives: that thereby 

ne (ut ne), that not: lest; not to (156) 

ut non, (used to negative a word), that not 

Demonstrative expressions often contained in the main clause: 

i d c i rco (630), therefore eadere, for that reason 

eo, ideo, to that end ea uondieione with that condition 

eoconsilio with that design propterea, on that account 

Remember especially : 

ne quis, that nobody ne quod verbum, tha tno word 

ne quid, that nothing neumquam, \ that never 

^ ° ne quando j 

neuUus...,that no... G ! ^ uam » I thatnowhere 

necubi } 

ne qua res, that no thing ne forte, lest perhaps 



$ 695-697 clauses of purpose 2'io 

EXAM PLES: 

ideo esse oportet, ut vivas, \ you must eat in order to live, not 
no n vivere, ut edas I live in order to eat 

Dionysius, ne tonsori collum) Dionysius taught his daughters 
committeret, tondere filias )to shave in order that he might 
suas docuit J not entrust his neck to a barber 

medico aliquid dandum est, \something should be given to the 
quo sit studiosior f physician that he be m. attentive 

Continuation of Negatives 

696. After at, a negative is added by neve, (nen) or neque; 
after ne, a negative is added by neve, aut or atque: 

Eugio n? capiar neve interfieiar \ I flee that I may not be captured or 

fugio ne capiar aut (or atque) i 'iar \ killed 

fugio ut server neve interfieiar 1 / flee that 1 may be saved and not be 

fugio ut server neque interfieiar J killed 



SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF PUR POSE (6 93) 
(Tenses: Present and Imperfect according to 619) 

697. Substantive clauses of purpose follow several classes of 
verbs: 

Permit and demand, 
urge and endeavor 

are followed by 
ut, to be rendered by to or that 
ne (continued by neve), not to 

tibi concedo ut abeas (54-8) I permit you to depart 

tibi permisi ut abires I permitted you to go away 

optd ut maneas / wish you would stay 

te oro, rogo, obsecro ut / ask, entreat you to... 

te or 6 atque obsecro Ut 1 earnestly beg you to... 

te precor, obtestor ut I beseech, implore you to... 

a te peto, postulo, flagito ut 1 ask you, demand from you 

tibi impero, praecipio ut 1 command you to... 



266 SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE § 697-698 

tibi suadeo ne abeas I advise you not to go 

tibi auctor sum ne eas I advise you not to go 

te adduxi ne abires I induced you not to go 

te hortatus sum ne maneres I admonished you not to stay 

cur a ut valeas take care of yourself 

v i d e a n t consules ne quid \ let the consuls give heed that 
res publica detrimenti capiat] the republic may suffer no harm 

provide ut fiat see to it that it he done 

nit ere ut vincas strive to conquer 

contendo et laboro ut... 1 use every effort to... 

id a g i t ut praestet his aim is to excel 

(maxime) operam do ut I take (grea t) pains to 

facio libenter ut ad te scribain it h a pleasure for me to write you 

NOTE: Facio ut in the last example is a mere periphrasis. 

NOTE: Imperare may also take an accusative with a passive or deponent 

infinitive : 

pontem fieri imperavit he had a bridge built 

The impersonal concedit ur ( = licet) tak e s the infinitive; the 
personal concedo and permitto with a dative may take the infinitive. 

NOTE: Regarding \o\o, nolo, cupio see 550 and 543; 

iubeo, veto, sino, patior see 549; 
cogo (551); posco (425). 

698. Statuo, constituo, decerno, I resolve, am of opinion, 

take a. the infinitive, when the verbs have the same subject; 

b. u t with the subjunctive, when the subjects differ: 

statuo proficisci (543) I resolve to set out {myself) 

statuo ut proficiscaris I resolve that you should set out 

censet ut urbs deleatur t he is of opinion (proposes) 

censet urbem dele n dam \ that the city should be destroyed 

NOTE: Mihi placet, I resolve, takes the infinitive or ut: 

mihi placet _ ) I resolve to do that; 

id tacere or id fieri > 

ut id faciam or ut id fiat ) J decide that this be done 



§ 699-700 CLAUSES OP PURPOSE AND FEAB 267 

699. Refuse to, hinder, deter from 

take ne or quominus ( = ut eo minus) 

sententiam ne dicam recti so I refuse to pronounce an opinion 
plura ne dicam impedior I am hindered from saying more 
quid obstat quominus eas ? what is in the way of your going? 
non deterret me mors ne earn death deters me not from going 
per me stetit quominus... it was my fault that.., not... 

Note: When negatived , the above verbs ma} r also take quin; 
(non) rectisare may take the infinitive; 
prohibere, prevent, usually takes the a. c. T. (551). 

700. interdldere, cavere 

ei interdixi ut pareret I. enjoined him to obey 

ei interdixi ne abiret] I forbade him to go 

eum abire vetui J 

cave ut librum el tradas be sure to hand him the book 

cave ne pecces beware of doing a wrong 

cave eas (Prohibitive, 661) don't go 

SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF FEAR 

a. The Present expresses a present fear about the present or future; 

b. the Imperfect expresses a pas t fear about the present or future; 

c. the Perfect expresses a present fear about the past: 

d. the P/upc j r/ect expresses a past fear about the past. 

ne, that; lest 
ne non or ut, that not 

f / fear that somebody is coming 

a. vereor ne quis veniat \I tear that somebody will come 

\ I fear lest somebody come 

penculum est ne non fiat' there { s a da "S er that * «/»' 
^ {come to pass 

b. timul ne nemo venlret 1 fear' d that nobody wou Idc.&c. 

c. metuo ne quid accident 1 f. that something has happened 

d. in metu eram ne nihil \ / was afraid that nothing had 
profuisset } availed 

NOTE: V e r e ri with the infinitive expresses a dread of. doing something: 

vereor eum a dire Z feel reluctant to approach him 

non vereor- non dubito ire / do not hesitate to go 



26.3 CLAUSES OF RESULT § 702-705 

II. Clauses of Result 

(Sequence: 619; 604.) 

702. There are two kinds of consecutive clauses : 

clauses expressing result indicated by the leading verb, are called 

Substantive or Complementary Consecutive Clauses; 
clauses expressing result indicated only by the particle and the context 
are called 

Adverbial or Pure Consecutive Clauses (379). 

NOTE 1: When the leading verb or the particle may refer to either a final or a 
consecutive clause, the thought conveyed by the whole sentence will determine 
the nature of the clause. 

NOTE 2: Those clauses of result which explain the meaning of a preced- 
ing substantive, demonstrative, adjective or adverb, share in the nature of 
clauses of characteristic. 

703. Position. Both adverbial and substantive clauses of result follow 
their main clauses. 

704. The negatives used in clauses of result differ from 
those used in clauses of purpose : 

ut nemo, that nobody ut numquam, that never 

ut nihil, that nothing ut nusquam, that nowhere 

ut nullus, that no ut neque-neque, that neither-nor 

ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF RESULT 

705. Adverbial consecutive clauses may follow any main 
clause with a comparative or demonstrative (expressed 
or implied): 

maior quam ut too great to... 

ut that, so that, as to 

ut non that not, so that not, as not to... 

Before substantives: 

talis; is, hie such a 

tantus so great a 

Before adjectives or adverbs: 

tam, ita, adeo so 

Before verbs: 

adeo, usque eo, tantopere so, to such a degree 

ita, sic so 

adeo non, usque eo non, ita non so little, far from... 



$705-706 ADVERBIAL RESULT CLAUSES 269 



1. urbs est miinitior quam ut ) the city is too strongly fortified to be 

primo impetu cap! posset (677, c, ) taken at the first attack 

Note: Ut is sometimes omitted, especially after prius quam and 
potius quam: 

imponebat amplius quam)/ie imposed more than they were 
fcrre possent \ able to bear 

moriar potius quam peccem; ) I w m rather die than sin; {he says he 

(dicit so mori velle potius quam > 

peccare or peccet) ) will die rather than sin) 

2 mons altissimus impendebat, u t I a very high mountain hung over, so 
perpauci prohilvre possent ( that a very few could block the way 

3. tantavisprobitatisest, ut\ so great is the power of j>robity 
earn in hoste diligamus fthat we love it even in an enemy 

ea, haec, talis viseiusest, ut... such is its power that... 

nemo adeo ferus est, ut \no one is so fierce that he cannot 
non mlteseere possit j become gentle 

ita petivit ut ei ignoscerem (666) he so asked that I forgave him 
NOTE: ita ut, on condition that, is restrictive : 

i t a tibi abire concC'do, ut eras / I permit you to go on condition that 

redire te velle promittas s you promise to return to-morrow 

tantum abest ut..., ut 

706. The impersonal tantum abest ut commonly takes two ut- 

clauses; one is substantive, the subject of abest; the other is adverbial, 
modifying tantum : 

tantum abest ut lander, ut vituperer ) far from being praised, I am 
adeo non laudor, ut vituperer -blamed; so far am I from... that 

non mo do non laudor, sed vituperor ) ...; s o 1 it tie do people p. me that... 

tantum abest ut nostra min'mur, ^ fa r from admiring myself, I am so 
ut usque eo difliciles ac moroei I hard to please and so particular that 

slmus, ut nobis non satis faciat ipse f Demosthenes himself does not satisfy 
Prmosthencs ) tne 



270 CLAUSES OF EESULT § 707 

SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF RESULT 

(Sequence: 619; 604) 
707. Substantive Clauses of Result may follow 

1. verbs of effecting and attaining as objects 

2. impersonal verbs of happening as subjects 

3. substantives and demonstratives as appositives : 

1. perfecit he brought it about 
ut nem 6 veniret (Result) that no one came 

ne quis veniret (Purpose) that no one might come 

non committam ut hoc faciam I will not allow my sell to do this 

non committam ut me accusare ) I will not give you any cause to 
de epistularum neglegentia possls ] {actso that you can ) accuse me 

sol ef f icit ut omnia fldreant the sun causes all things to Nourish 

ut consul fieret as secut us est he succeeded in being made consul 

2. fit ut, accidit ut &c(274)f£ happens that... 

fit ut alius aliud sentiat opinions sometimes differ 

quo factum est ut the result was that... 

futurum est ut the result will be that... 

fieri potest ut errdverim (604) I may have been mistaken 

fieri non potest ut fallar 1 cannot be mistaken 

ei contigit ut nos liberaret he succeeded in freeing us 

est ut it is the case that... 

relinquitur ut earn nothing is left but to go 

3. poenam sequi oportebat,\£/ze penalty of death by fire was 
utigni cremaretur (to folio w 

omnibus idem est facien- \all must do the same, namely 
dum, ut domo emigrent f leave their homes 

ius ( or iuris) est ut imperent the right o f command, to command 
mos (or moris) est ut laudent the custom o f praising, to praise 

totum in eo est, (im- \ all depends upon this one thing, 

personal)ut tibi imperes / your self-command 

in eo erat (impers.) ut ircmus we were on the point ot going 



§ r08— 710 QUIN - CLAUSES 271 

708. Note some standing phrases of transition and 
conclusion : 

sequitur ut dicam de... 1 now proceed to speak about... 

proximum est ut doceam my next task is to show- 
rest at ut, reliquum est ut lastly I must... 
sequitur ut, or ace. c. inf.; "| 

hi ne or ex quo efficitur ^ hence it follows that... 
ut or ace. c. Inf. J 

III. QUIN = CLAUSES 

A. QUIN IN MAIN CLAUSES 

709. quln, why not? 

Qui n (= qui ne) with the indicative is used in indignant ques- 
tions with imperative or hortative meaning: 

quln aseendimus equos ? why not mount our horses? 
quln continetis vocem? why do you not keep quiet ? 
quln t u a b I s ? go ; why don't yo u ? 

NOTE: Q u T n e t i a m = nay even: 

die legit, quln etiam noctibus he reads by day, nay, even by night 

B. QUIN IN DEPEN DENT CLAUSES 
{Only after main clauses with negative meaning.) 

710. quln, ( = a. c. I.) that 

(.4// tenses of the subjunctive) 

After negatived verbs of doubt or anxiety a subject or 

object quin-clause is used instead of an ace. c. inf. to ex- 
press a s t a t e m e n t : 

non dubium est quln... there is no doubt that... 

nemo dubitat quln... no one doubts that... 

quis dubitat quln... ? who doubts that..:*. 

non a best suspleio qiiin \ there is no lack of ground to sus- 

mortem sibi consciverit / j)ect that he commitcd suicide 

NOTE: About the different constructions of dubitare, doubt, and dubitfire, 
hesitate, see 650 and 647. 



272 QUIN - CLAUSES §711-713 

711. quiti = ne or quominus, from, to 

(Present and Imperfect Subjunctive) 
After nonabest and negatived verbs of hindering 
(699) refraining from, subject and object quin- clauses may be 
used to express purpose : 

nihil abest quin SIS beatus nothing is wanting to make you happy 

paulum ornon multum\ you came near (you just missed) 

afuit quin me interficeres/ killing me 

nihil praetermisl quin... I left nothing undone to... 

mini non tempero quin... 1 cannot forbear to... 

nonse tenet quin... he does not refrain from 

retinen non potest quin he cannot be kept from 

712. quin -■ qui non, who... not 

(Ail tenses of the subjunctive) 

After any negative the nominatives qui non, quae non, 
quod non, may be replaced by quin, in order to introduce a 
clause of characteristic (677): 

nemo est quin sciat \ there is no one who does not 
nemo est qui non sciat J know 

quid est quin intereat ? \ what is there that does not 
quid est quod non intereat ? f perish ? 

But only: 

nemo est there is no one 

cuius non meminerit whom he does not remember 

cui non fidat whom he does not trust 

quern non laudaverit whom he did not praise 

de quo non bene meritus sit of whom he did not deserve well 

NOTE: Quin is sometimes equivalent to an ablative quo non. 

713. quin = ut non, as not to, but 

(All tenses ol the subjunctive) 

After any negative quin (=ut non or qui non) may be used 
to introduce a substantive ( subject or object) or adverbial clause 
of result: 

numquam tarn male est "| it is never so bad with the Sici- 

Siculls, quin aliquid facete \lians that they do not make a 
et commode dlcant J witty and timelv remark 



^ 7 1 .' >— 7 1 4 QUIN - CLAUSES 273 

nihil tarn difficile est quin \ nothing is so hard but search 
quaerendo investigari possit jean find it out 

nemo adeo fortis est quin... no one is so brave as not to... 

Distinguish: 

facere non possum ut earn) 

fieri non potest uteara/ I cannot (possibly) go 

facere non possum quin earn \I cannot avoid (help) going 
fieri non potest quin earn / / cannot but go, must go 

714. The English "without" is rendered by 

1. neque; 

2. ut non, quin, nisi, cum, quamquam; 

3. negatived adjectives and participles; 

4. sine: 

1. laudat neque blanditur ) r . ' ^ „ ^ . 

. , , . t . U1 ,.., the praises without nattering 

2. it;i laudat ut non blandiatur J ^ » 

non laudat quin probet..)/7e c/oes not praise without 
non laudat nisi probat ...f appro ving (what he praises) 

laudat cum non probet...\ T . ., , 

, , , . , .{he praises without approving 

laudat quamquam non probat J ^ rr & 

3. invitus feci 1 did it without intention 
non rogatus veni 1 came without invitation 



-&- 



nullo rogante veni / c. with out anyone's request 

nulla mora interposita w it h out delay 

re infecta abii I went away without result 

causa indicta or incognita without trial 

angitur nihil proficiens he worries without avail 

4. sine iniuria perfccit\ he brought it about without in- 

sine armis perfecitj Meting harm, w. recourse to arms 

sine ullo labore without any effort 

But non sine aliqno\ not without {nnv) cfTort 

labore j 



274 CAUSAL AND QUOD- CLAUSES § 715-717 

IV. CAUSAL CLAUSES 

715. Cause is expressed by 

a. cum, since, seeing that, with any tense of the subjunctive 

b. quod, quia, because 1 1) with the indicative, to represent 
quoniam ) I the reason as that of the s p eak er 
siquidem > since indeed j 2) with the subjunctive, to represent 
quandoquidem) j the reason as that of an o th er 

( 666 sqq. ) 

c. qui (678): 

quae cum ita sint, perge since this is so, proceed 

praesertim cum or cum praesertim especially Since 
utpote cum, quippe cum as in fact 

quod tutus non e ra t, discessit he departed, because he was not safe 

quod tutus non esset, discessit he d., because {he said) he was not safe 

eo magis quod (330, Note) the wore so, because 

NOTE: About non quod, non quo etc,, see 667. 

V. SUBSTANTIVE QUOD = CLAUSES 

716. Substantive quod -clauses are used to state facts; 
their mode is the indicative (666); they never depend on 
verba sentiendi et dlcendl : 

accedit quod caecus est ) add to this {the fact) that he is blind 
(Subject-Clause) j add to this {the fact of) his blindness 

praetereo quod discessistI\jT pass over the fact of your 

(Object-Clause ^departure, that you departed 

beneficia commemoro, \ I mention those favors, 
quod...; quod...; Appositive CI. (that , that 

But illud die 5, eum for- \I make this assertion, that he 
tern esse fis brave 

NOTE: After accedit, also ut consecutivuin may be used : 

accedit ut caecus sit ? ,, , ... ,, r , iL , , . ,,• , 

- accedit caecitas J add to thls the fact tbat be 1S bhnd 

717. Est with a predicate noun may have different contractions ; 
laude dignum illud est this is something praiseworthy; 
quod elves inter se parcunt I mean the fact that... 

ut cives inter se parcant I speak of the demand that... 

elves inter separcere $ I think of mutual forbearance 

among fellow-citizens 



§ 718-721 SUBSTANTIVE QUOD CLAUSES 275 

SPECIAL USES 
OF SUBJUNCTIVE QUOD- CLAUSES 

718. At the beginning of the sentence a quod-clause re- 
fers to something preceding: 

quod rediit, nobis mirabile \that he returned (or his return) 
videtur / seems wonderful to us 

quod sen bis eum redlsse, \as to your writing- that he 
falleris / returned, (I think that) you are mistaken 

quod putas..., fallens if you think..., you are mistaken 

719. A quod-clause may be used after 

a. bene facio I do well 

b. gratum facio I do a favor 

c. bene, op port uncjit is fortunate, 

fit, accidit, evenit \(or a fortunate occurrence) 

d. similar other expressions employed to pass a judg- 
ment on the fact contained in the main clause: 

opportune accidit quod fit was fortunate that he came; 
venit \his com ing was fortunate 

But accidit ut veniret \ , , 1 J 

(without qualifying adverb) f he happened to come 

pergratum mihi facis quod \ you do me a great favor by 
ma nes J remaining 

{About the tenses see 607 and 604, note) 

720. A quod -clause is used to explain demonstratives 
and appellatives (716 and 717): 

hoe uno praestamus vel ) in this one respect are we espe- 

maxime fens, q u o d con- ) daily superior to brutes, that 

loquimur inter nos j we have the power of speech 

hoc verum esse hinc intel- ) the truth of the statement may 

legitur, or ex eo intellegi j be concluded from the fact 

potest, quod ) that... 

721. Verbs of praising, blaming and congratulating 
may take a substantive -or an adverbial quod -clause (716): 

laudo, tibi laud! do, q u o d... / commend, praise you for... 
reprehendo,tibi vitio do, q nod/ blame, find fault with you 
tibi gratulor, quod... I congratulate you 



276 TEMPORAL CLAUSES S 721-724 

Distinguish: 
q U O d ilS pepercistl laudo I P- your forbearance towards them 

quod ilS pepercistl, te laudo I commend you because of your f. 

(The first clause is substantive, the second adverbial.) 

Also tibi gratias ago, quod... I thank you for..., because... 

NOTE: Regarding quod with accusare see 551 ; 

regarding quod with verbs of emotion see 552. 

VI. TEMPORAL CLAUSES 

(The negative is non.) 

722. Position. 

a. The temporal clause usually precedes the main clause. 

b. The subject precedes, if itis common to both clauses, 
(unless the sentence begins with a connective: see n. 725.) 

INDICATIVE CUM- CLAUSES 

723. Cum temporale, when, merely defines the time of 
the main action; it takes all the tenses of the indicative: 

cum Caesar inGalliam venit , [when Caesar arrived in Gaul, 
altenus factionis principes { (/. e. at the time of his arrival) 
erant Haedui, alterius SequanT[t/7e leaders of one party were... 

V24. Cum temporale inversion, when; when suddenly; then 

introduces the dependent clause with the leading thought; the preceding 
main clause {often with iam, nondum, vix, aegre) takes the Imperfect and 
Pluperfect; the following cum - clause, the historical perfect or present: 

iam scalis subibat miiros, ) already was he scaling the walls, when 

cum repente erumpunt Komani $ suddenly forth sallied the Romans 

NOTE: Inverted are the order of the clauses, their tenses and importance: 

Usual order : cum muros subibat, erumpunt Romani. 

NOTE: Sec cum coincidens orexplicativum n. 607, a; 
cum iterativum n. 610; 612; 
cum relatlvum n. 673; 675; 677, a. 



$ 725-72(i TEMPORAL CLAUSES 277 

SUBJUNCTIVE CUM -CLAUSE 

725. Cum historicum, when, as, after, describes the 
situation under which the main act took place; it takes the im- 
perfect to denote contemporaneous action; the pluperfect, 

to denote previous action (617, 618); besides situation it fre- 
quently expresses an accessory idea of cause (or opposition) : 

Ag-esiltlus,cumex A egy pt 6 \Agesila us died as he was return- 
revert eretur, decessit ( 722 ) / ing from Egypt 

cum d II u c esceret, profectl sunt they set out as day was breaking 

eo cum venisset, Caesar (722) when he (had) arrived there... 

cum taetraprodigianuntiatalwhen (and because) frightful 
essent, decemviri libros \signsw. announced, the decemviri 

Sybilllnos adlre iuSSl sunt J w . commissioned to consult theS. books 

accusavit eum cum diceret he accus'd him saying(i.e. adding) 

726. OTH ER TEM PORAL CLAUSES 

a. quam diu, dum,\ fC n^\ 

quoad, donee, ^s long as (60<), 

take all the tenses of the indicative to express congruent 
action. 

h. dum, while (602), 

takes the present indicative in order to express action 
(situation) contemporaneous with any main action. 

c. postquam,posteaquam, after (602), 
ut , ubi , simul at que, ) 
ut prlmum, ubi prlmum, \as soon as, 
cum primum J 

when expressing a single past act, take the perfect of the 
indicative. 

Note: Postquam, (ut and ubi) sometimes take the pres- 
ent, imperfect and pluperfect indicative to express past 
situation (736). 

About the iterative tenses see n. 610. 



278 TEMPORAL CLAUSES § 726 

d. dum, donee, quoad, until 

antequam, priusquam, \- f 

quam after ante and priusj belore 

take 1. the perfect and second future of the indicative, in order to 
denote the act as a past or future fact: 

2. the present and imperfect of the subjunctive, in order to denote 
the act as 

looked forward to by the main subject, (with the intention to bring it 
about, prevent or evade it): 

[The adverbs ante and prius modify the main verb; the relative 
quam introduces the temporal clause.] 



1. mansi quoad venit I remained until he came 
non prius abii quam venit / did not go before he came 

membris utimur priusquam ) we use our jj moS) hefore we have learned 

didicimus cuius ea causa > 

utilitatia habeamus ) for what purpose we have them 

manebo dum venerit I will remain till he comes 

nihil contra disputabo \ / shall say nothing in opposition 

priusquam dixer it J until he speaks 



2. dum veniat exspecto 1 wait for him to come 

moramne adferemus dum j are you going to delay action till they 

proficisc antur? J shall set out ? 

tempestas minatur antequam ) ,, 1 Y ,. 

s u rg a t ( t e storm threatens before it rises 

priusquam se ex terrore ] hefore they could recover from 
recipe rent, (recipere p o s - [their fright, he led his army 
sent), exercitum in fines {into the territory oi the Sues- 
Suessionum duxit J siones 

pleriqueinterfectieunt, priusquam ) very many were killed before they could 
occultum hostem viderent \ see the hidden enemv 



$ 726-728 ADVERSATIVE AND CONCESSIVE CLAUSES 271) 

NOTE 1. Other tenses, e. g. the present indicative (to denote a present 
fact) are rare. 

NOTE 2. The pluperfect subjunctive is sometimes used in indirect 
discourse to represent a direct second future (624. ) 

NOTE 3. In anteqaam- and priusquam- clauses 

a. the ores, indie, and pres. subj. ) ,. - . ,. . . , , 

b. the perf. indie, and impt. subj. \ are sometimes used indiscriminately: 

a. priusquam respondeo,(respon- ) before I answer, I shall make a few 
deam), pauca dicam... s remarks... 

b o solem beatissimum, qui ante- ) ~ , , - . - , 

quam se a bd ere t, (abdidit), \ ° A jessed sun, who before it set saw 
fugientem vidit Antonium Antony Bee 



VII. CONCESSIVE AND ADVERSATIVE CLAUSES (663) 

727. Concessive clauses contain an admission in spite of 
which the main statement is true; 

A dversative { cum-) clauses merely contrast their statement 
with the main assertion for the sake of comparison. 

The negative in these clauses is n 6 n. 

Tarn en, yet, still, is often inserted in the main clause to 
mark the contrast. 

728. The introductory conjunctions are the following: 

a. cum, though, while ) 

ut, granting that >take the subjunctive of all tenses 

quamvis, no matter how) 

(takes the present and per- 
h. licet, may <! feet subj.; it is sometimes ac- 

companied b3 r quamvis 

c. quamquamj although take the indicative of all tenses 
etsi, tametsi/ m fact 

(takes the subjunctive or indica- 

d. etiamsi even if ■! tive, following the construction 

I of si 

nostrorum erat quinque milium "j -while the number of our horse (was) 

numerus, cum hostis non amplius >five thousand, the enemy had only eight 
OCtingentos haberet (Adversative) ) hundred 



280 CONCESSIVE AND COMPARATIVE CLAUSES § 728-730 

Phocion fuit perpetuo pauper, cum/ Phocion was always poor, though he 
divitissimus esse posset (Concessive) V might have been very rich 

cu m ea ita sint, t amen vdblscum ) though this is so, I am ready to make 
pacem faciam (Concessive) \ peace with you 

u t desint vires, tamen est laudanda ^granted that strength be lacking, 
voluntas ) yet you must praise my good will 

quamvis sit magna exspec- {however great expectations 
tatio, tamen earn vinces f are, you will surpass them 

quod turpe est, id quam v is oc- ) whatever is base, hide it as much as 
cultetur, tamen honestum fieri nullo \you w ill, it cannot be made respect- 
modo potest ) able 

fremant omnes licet, dicam \may the whole world gro wl at 
quod sentio (644) fme, I shall say what I think 

quamquam abest a culpa, \£ A ough in fact he is not guilty, 
suspicione tamen non caret f still he is not free from suspicion 

729. Quamquam and etsi may be used as correctives: 
quamquam quid loquor ! and yet, why am I talking ! 

Quam vis with a positive (without verb) is equivalent to a superlative : 

quamvis multi ( - plurimi) as many as you will {very many) 

quamvis audacter (=audiicissime) however bold [very bold) 

NOTE 1. Quamvis is rarely used with a superlative. 

NOTE 2. Also si is sometimes used as a concessive conjunction. 

VIII. CLAUSES OF COMPARISON 

{Compare 682, 683, 559, 705) 

TSO. Clauses of Comparison express the relation of the de- 
pendent to the main predicate as to quality or quantity. 
If the clause contains a mere supposition, ("as if, " or li as 
though "), it takes the subjunctive according to the rules ol 
Sequence; all other comparative clauses take the indicative. 
The main clause may contain ita, sic or item. 



§ 731-733 CLAUSES OP COMPARISON 281 

731. SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES OF COM PAR I SON 

are introduced by 

quasi, tamquam (si) (as if, 
velut si, proinde ac si /as though 

quid ego his testibus utor, \ why do I employ these witnesses, 
quasi res dubia sit! fas if the case were doubtful! 

absentis Ariovisti crudelita- 1 they shuddered at his cruelty, 
tem, velut si coram ades-ythough he was absent, as if he 
set, horrebant j stood before them 

ita loquor quasi ego illud \ / am talking' as if I had done 
fecerim jthat 

.Titer se impil elves, quasi vicis- } tbose ""dutiful citizens congratulated 
i > one another, as though they had been 

sent, grJtulubantur ) victorious 

NOTE: Occasional exceptions from the rule of sequence are made in order to 
emphasize that the supposition is contrary to fact : 

eius negotium sic velim suscipias u t ) I wish you would take up his business 
si e s s e t res mea ) as though it were mine 

NOTE: Quasi ( vero) is often used ironically: 

quasi ego id curem ! as if I cared for that ! 

732 INDICATIVE CLAUSES OF COMPARISON 

are introduced by 

a. ut, sicut, quern ad modum, \ 

or any other correlative (682-683) ) as 

b. quam after comparatives, than 

c. atque or ac (326) after adjectives) 
and adverbs of (un) likeness | as 

d. nisi after a negatived alius, than 
733. Ut, sicut, quern ad modum, as (732) 

u t viro fort! dignum fuit, \hc contemned his calumny, as it 
ita calumniam eius obtrl vit \ was becoming to a strong man 

haee, sicu t exposuT, ita \ these matters came to pass just 

gesta sunt J as / have explained 



282 CLAUSES OF COMPARISON § 733-735 

quern adraodum vita ) as a happy life is due to virtue, 

beata virtuteconficitur,ita } vT . 7 ," . , 

nihil est nisi virtus bonum J \ so nothing is good except virtue 

quid est tarn" populare qua nil what is so acceptable to the 
pax ? (people as peace ? 

734-. Ut with the indicative is also used to introduce 
concessions, restrictions, parenthetical ideas and illustrations: 

ut fortasse vere, ita parum \though his answer wasprobahly 
utiliter respondit (Con.) ftrue, yet it was little to the point 

ita me dl iuvent, (ut) verum \may the gods help me (as much) 
dlco (Restriction) j as I tell the truth 

civitas ampla et rl5rens, ut \a large and nourishing state, 
est captus Germanorum (R.)jthat is according to G. notions 

ut erat furiosus, respondit (Restr. ) faming with rage as he was, he answered 

fuit scriptor, ut temporibus \he was a writer of distinction 
illis, luculentus (Restriction) j for those times (at least) 

sed, ut plerumque fit (601), ) but, as it commonly happens, the 
maior pars meliorem vicit } stronger party overcame the bet- 
( Parenthetical) J ter side 

data est quibusdam bestiis } even a certain power of design 
etiam machinatio quaedam, \has been given to some animals, 
u t araneolis (Illustration ) j as for example to the lit tie spiders 

735. Quam after comparative ideas (732) 

(Compare 677, c and 705) 

a. plura dixi quam voluT I said more than 1 intended 

perpetl quam conquerl malo I prefer suffering to complaining 

tacere praestat quam nocere it is better to be silent than to do harm 

b. non magis quam as little as 

non minus quam as much as 

illas litteraa non plus quam ) I thought that letter would become a s 
has existimabam exituras S H ttle public as the present one 

c. fortior est quam felici o r, } he has more courage than good 
magis fortis est quam felix/ fortune 



§ 736-738 clauses op comparison 283 

736. Quam after post with an ablativus discriminis (515) or another 
expression denoting an interval of time usually takes the pluperfect or 
second future (602, 611,537, 726, c. ) : 

d i e quint 6 post or post d i em ) fi ve davs after their unfortunate tight 

quintum, quam inale pugna > 

verant, legatos nilscrunt ) the Y sent legates 

737. Q u a m or q u a m possum may be added to a superlative (607, c) : 

quam (possum) maxima voce with as loud a voice as I can 

quam brevissime (potui ) as briefly as I could 

738. atque and ac (632) 

a. idem atque the same as 
par atque equal to 
similis ac similar to 

b. alius ac other than, different from 
contrarius ac the opposite of 

c. pariter, similiter, aequeac,] . 

proinde, perinde, proeoac, \l US / h aS, 
non alia (si mill) ratione ac,) 111 the same 



manner as 



d. aliter atque, secus atque otherwise than 
contra ac contrary to 

virtus eadem in homine a c\ virtue is the same in man as in 

in deo est fg OCl 

a 1 i ud dlxisti a c (or et) sentiebas ) you spoke otherwise than you 
a 1 i u d dlxisti, a 1 i u d sentiebas s thought 

pari atque antea ratione Tgit he acted in the same manner as before 

potest aliter mihi ac tibi\ I may have another view than 

viderl / you have 

aliter loqueris, aliter vivis your speech differs from your life 

con t ra faciunt ac pollicentur they act in violation of their promises 

NOTE: Alius and aliter , instend of taking a comparative clause, are of ten 

repeated in a coordinate clause: See 3d and 6th examples. 



284 clauses of peoviso § 739-740 

739. nisi (732) 

nemo alius nisi no one else than 
nihil aliud nisi nothing else than 
quid aliud nisi? what else than or but? 

Sparta nulla re alia nisi \ Sparta will not perish through 
avaritia est peritura / anything except avarice 

nihi aliud est discere nisi \to learn is nothing else than to 
recordari j remember 

NOTE: "To do nothing else but" is expressed as follows : 

nihil aliud egistl nisi ut reprehenderes ) have done nothivg else but 

nihil (aliud) fecisti nisi reprehendisti ( cr j t j c j ze 
nihil aliud nisi reprehendisti ) 

IX. CLAUSES OF PROVISO 

74-0. A proviso is expressed by 

dum, modo,)so long as, if only, 
dummodo f provided only 

with the subjunctive. The negative is ne: 

a. A proviso expressing a demand or purpose takes the present and im- 
perfect subjunctive according to the rules of sequence. 

b. A proviso expressing a wish (or a statement of propriety) takes the in- 
dependent tenses of the subjunctive of wish ((559) and propriety (657): 

a. manent ingenia senibus, m o d o ? old men preserve their mental vigor, if 
perman eat studium et industria \ only their interest and industry r. active 

omnia postposui, dummodo ) I disregarded everything else, so long as 
praeceptis patris par erem ] I could obey the injunctions of my father 

b. oderint, dum metu ant let them hate, so long as they fear 

summas laudes merentur } the Athenians deserve the highest 
Athenienses, dum m o d o }praises, if only they had not been 
non tarn leves fu i s"s e n t J so light-minded 

mediocritas PeripateticTs )the Peripatetics rightly commend 
recte placet, modo ne ^moderation, but they ought not 

laud a rent iracundiam J to have praised anger 



$ 741-744 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 285 

741. A proviso may be expressed by modo with an adjective, adverb or 
ablative absolute: 

quam pliirimismodo d i gn I s( -modo ) let him prove himself useful to as many 
digni sint) se utilem praebeat £ as possible, provided they are worthy 

deeerne, modo r e c te ( id facias) decide; but in the right way 

fariam, modo ad in to re te (-modo I I'll do it, provided only that you help 
adiutor sis) i me 

X. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 

74?2,. The conditional sentence is a complex sentence made 
np of two clauses, 

the protasis, which contains the condition, 
and the apodosis, which contains the conclusion . 

The protasis is the dependent , the apodosis the prin- 
cipal clause, 

74-3. There are three clauses of conditional sentences according to the 
character of the condition : 

I. In the first class the speaker assumes the condition as a mere ground 
for inference, as nothing else than a necessary prerequisite for the truth of 
the conclusion without implying anything as to its fulfilment in reality. 

II. In the second class the speaker both assumes the condition as a pre- 
mise for the conclusion and implies its actual fulfilment as contingent. 

III. In the third class the speaker again assumes the condition as a premise 
and implies at the same time that it is or was not fulfilled in reality. 

74.4,. FIRST CLASS 

(Nothing implied as to the fulfilment of the condition: 743) 

The protasis takes the indicative of all tenses; 

the apodosis takes mode and tense required by the sense: 

a. si id credis (credes), \if you (will) believe this, 

erras, (errabis) \you are (will be) mistaken 

si id credebas (credidisti), \ If you (have) believed this, 
errabas, (erravisti) )y° u "'ere (have been) mistaken 



286 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES § 744-746 

si dies est, lucet if it is day, it is light 

si spiritum ducit, vivit if he is breathing, he is living 

b. redargue me, si mentior refute, me, if I lie 

p ere am, si mentior may 1 die, if 1 lie 

tu v el i m , si quid forte novi I I wish you would write to me, 
habes, scribas ad me \ if you have any news 

quid timeam, si post mortem ) what should I fear, it I am going 
beatus futurus sum ? S to be happy after death? 

745. The indefinite second person singular of the 
present or perfect subjunctive has the force of an indicative 
(384): 

memoria minuitur, nisi QSom\the memory grows weak, unless 
exerceas ( = nisi exercetur) jyou exercise it 

nulla est exciisatio peccati, si f {* is no excu P e f ° r .your sin, to 
_ _ < nave committed it for the sake 

amici causa peccavens \ f your friend 

NOTE: Regarding repeated action see 610 and 613. 

746. SECOND CLASS 

{Fulfilment of the condition implied as Contingent: {743) 

Both the protasis and the apodosis take the subjunctive of the 
present or perfect : 

SI id credas, erres ( if you should believe that, — {let me 

. .. _ ., _ _ < suppose you will), — , you would be 

si id credas, erraverls ( mistaken. 

s! id crediderls, erres f if you should (have)helieve (d) 

si id crediderls, erraverls \that, you would (h.) be (en) m. 

dies me d e f i c i a t , si v e 1 i m V the day would tail me, if I should wish 
paupertatis causam dtfendere J to defend the cause of poverty 

NOTE: This subjunctive is frequently used in exemplifications: 

si pater fana expilet, indicetne (supposea father is plundering tem- 
. _,., ,.,. {pies, would the son report it to the 

magistratibus films ? ) magistrates ? 

si gladium quis apud te sana mente (suppose a man in sound mind were 

deposuerit, repetat insanicns, ! to have deposited a sword with vou, 
reddere peccatum sit, officicium f and reclaim it when raving, it w"ould 
non reddere [ be a sin to return it, and duty not to 

return it 



§ 747-749 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 287 

T^T. The apodosis of the second class often has the indica- 
tive, especially of the present and future in order to ex- 
press the conclusion with greater positiveness : 

nisi hoc dicat, non habet / unless he should say this, he 
defensionem \has no defense 

si hoc dlcere cupias, non f if you should wish to say this, 
licebit \it will not be allowed 

748. The protasis takes occasionally the imperfect sub- 
junctive in order to express the fulfilment of the condition as 
contingent in the past: 

Caesar si peteret, non feven if Caesar had asked, he 

quicquam proficeret \ would not have succeeded 

THIRD CLASS 

749. (Condition implied as not fulfilled: 743) 

Both the protasis and the apodosis take the subjunctive of 
the imperfect for the present time, 
the pluperfect for the past time: 

(if you believed that, 

a. si id crcdercs,errares ■{ — (but you do not) — , 

[ you would be mistaken 

(if you had believed that, 
si id credidisses,erravisses{ — (but you did not — , 

[you would have been mistaken 

b. istaquoque coniuratio (also that conspiracy would be 
facile opprimeretur, si < easily suppressed, if Antonius 
recta saperet Antonius [knew what is right 

Philippus si diiitius v T x i s - / if Philip had lived longer, he 
set, id bellum gessiset \ would have waged that war 

si meum consilium v a 1 u i s- J if my counsel had been heeded, 
set, liberl esse m us \we would be free 

Hectora quis nSsset, / who would know of Hector, 
felix si Troia f u i s s e t ! \ had Troja been fortunate ! 

NOTE: The i m perfect is often used instead of the pluperfect. 



288 CONDITIONAL PARTICLES § 750-751 

750. Also expression of ability, obligation etc., and 
forms of the periphrastic conjugations occurring in the apo- 
dosis are commonly put in the subjunctive (627); they may, 
however, take the indicative; (757, Note): 

quidfacere potuissem, (potui,) what could 1 have done, had 
poteram), nisi turn consul }I not been consul at that 
fuissem ? j time ? 

facturi fuimus (=fecissemus),\ we would have done it, if our 
si aedes nostrae deiiagrassent j houses had burned down 



751. Conditional Particles 

(Uses of si, nisi, si non, sin) 

1. si if 

si forte if perchance, if perhaps 

quod si, sed si (See 752) but if ( = and if) 

2. nisi, {negativing the \ 

whole protasis j unless 

parvi foris sunt arma, J arms are ol little value abroad, 

nisi est consilium domi \ unless there is wisdom at home 

nisi forte /always with the in d ica- f unless perchance 
nisi vero \ t i v e; often ironcial \ unless indeed 

nisi (after a negatived apodosis) except, but, only (739) 

nisi inter bonds amicitia esse [ friendship cannot exist except 

non potest j" among the good 

n e ga . t iucunde posse vivi I he holds that life cannot be pleasant, 

nisi cum virtute vivatur { except it be virtuous 

NOTE: ni - nisi is rare; nisi and nl are always separated from non. 

3. siti6n(negativingasingle{ ._ 

word) f lf no* 

si non, or ) .... at, certe. tamen, ) if not..., but, vet, 

si minus $ at certe, at tamen (, but surely, at 'least 

si non virtute,at ser- f if you cannot delight in his virtue, 

mone eius delectamini <you are at least charmed by his 

( language 



§ 752-753 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 289 

752. Particles in Coordinate Conditional Sentences 
81...; sin (autem) or si if...; but if (in contrast) 

hunc mihi timorem eripe; ( relieve me of this fear; if it is founded, 

a I virus est, ne opprimar, 1 that I may not be overcome; it it is 

sin falsus, ut timere desinam ( groundless, that I may cease to fear 

/si non or si minus, \ , f . 
sl -5 \ followed by verb only/ lf - ; lf not 

si . . . ; si minus ( witbou t a ddition ) J£ mm ; if not 

si feceris id quod ostendis, ( if you do what you propose, 

magnam habebo gratiam; < I shall be very grateful; if you do 

si non feceris, ignoscam; ( not do it, I shall pardon you; 
(81 minus, ignoscam) (if not, I shall pardon you) 

NOTE: About si with verbs of waiting and trying, see 646; about 
sive- slve, see 629. 

DE PEN DENT CON DITIONAL SENTENCES 

FIRST CLASS (744) 

753. Conditional sentences of the first class are subordinated according to the 
rules of sequence, esp. n. 620 and 624. * 

EXAM PLES : 

a. si id credis, err as, 

6. si id eredes, err a bis; 
c. si id credebas, errabas: 
Dependent: 1. dico te dicebam te 

a. si id credas, errare si id crederes, errare 

b. si id credas, erraturum esse si id crederes, erraturum esse 

c. si id crederes, erravisse si id crederes, erravisse 

2. non dubito quin non dubitabam quin 

or quaero num or quaerebam num 

a. si id credas, errcs si id crederes, errares 

b. si id credas, erraturus sis si id crederes, erratiirus esses 

c. si id crederes, erraverls si id crederes, erravisses 



290 DEPENDENT CONDITIONAL SENTENCES § 754-755 

SECOND CLASS (746) 

754. The protasis takes the tenses according to the rules of sequence, esp. 
n. 624. 

The apodosis is changed according to the same rules; but when dependent 
on a verbuni sentiendi ordicendi, the present as well as the perfect sub- 
junctive are changed into the infinitive of the future. 

EXAM PLES : 

a. si id credas, erres; 

b. si id crediderls, erraveris : 

Dependent: 1. dlcote, dicebamte, 

a. si id credas, erraturum esse si id crederes, erraturum esse 

b. si id crediderls, erraturum esse si id credidisses, erraturum esse 

2. non dubito quin, non dubitabam quin, 

or quaeronum, or quaerebamnum, 

a. si id credas, erres si id crederes, errares 

b. si id credideris, erraveris si id credidisses, erravisses 

THIRD CLASS (749) 

755. The protasis always remains unchanged. 

The apodosis, when dependent on verba sentiendi or dicendi, is 
changed as follows : 

1. The imperfect subjunctive becomes -drum esse and - ndum esse, 
the pluperfect subjunctive becomes - urum f u i s s e and -ndum fuisse 

2. Verbs lacking the form in virus take instead the forms 

fu tii rum esse ut and fut urum fuisse ut with the imperfect 
subjunctive. 

3. The verbs "can and ought to" are put in the present and perfect 
infinitive. 

4. The forms with futurum esse and posse are occasionally used for the 
passive of any verbs. 

EXAMPLES FOR THE ACTIVE: 

a. si id faceres, vinceres (vincere posses): 
b- si id faceres, te puderet; 

c. si id fecisses, vie is ses( vincere potuisses or potuisti: 
727, Note); 

d. si id fecisses, te puditum esset; 



§7- r )5-7. r )7 DEPENDENT CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 291 

Dependent: dlco or dicebam te, 

a. si id faceres, victurum esse, (vineere posse); 

b. si id faceres, f u t u r u m esse u t te puderet; 

c si id fecisses. victurum fuisse, (vincere potuisse); 
i. si id fecisses, futurum fuisse at te puderet. 

EXAMPLES FOR THE PASSIVE : 

a, si id faceres, vincereris, (vinci posses); 

b. si id fecisses, victus esses, (vinci potuisses or potuisti): 

Dependent: dlco or dicebam te, 

a si id facer's S vincendum esse, (vinci posse), 
' ' ( or futurum esse ut vincereris; 

h qi id fpHsaPfi > vincendum fuisse, (vinci potuisse), 
o. si m ieusses ^ or fQtaram f u i s g e ut vincereris. 

756. When the apodosis is introduced by a conjunction or an inter- 
rogative, and contains an active or passive imperfect subjunctive or a 
passive pluperfect subjunctive, it usually remains unchanged: 

exam ples: 

a. si id faceres, vinceres; 

b. si id faceres, vincereris; 

c. si id fecisses, victus esses: 

Dependent: 

non d ubit abam quin, 

or qu aero, quaerebam num, 

. ., , - i a. v i nee res (vincere posses, te puderet); 
si id raceres, J ^ vincereris, (vinci posses, vincendus esses) ; 
slid fecisses, c. victus esses (vinci potuisses, te puditum esset). 

757. But when the apod os i s contains an active pluperfect subjunc- 
tive, and is 

introduced by fit takes urns fuerim (and potuerim, debuerim with 
a conjunction, \ the present infinitive) after any tense; 
introduced by \ it takes urus fueri m and urns fuissem according 
nu interrogative, ) to the rules of sequence: 



292 INDIRECT DISCOURSE § 757-759 

EXAMPLES : 

si id fecisses, vicisses; (See note) 
si id fecisses, vincere potuisses: 

Dependent : 

non dubito or dubitabam quin, si id fecisses, victurus fueris; 
non dubito or dubitabam quin, si id fecisses, vincere potueris; 

quaero, num, si id fecisses, victurus fueris, (vincere potueris); 
But quaerebam, num, si id fecisses, victurus fuisses, (vincere potuis se s). 

NOTE: The change of the pluperfect subjunctive to (i'rus fuerim &c. is 
based upon its equivalent indicative forms (750) : 

vicisses = victurus fuisti; 

vincere potuisses = vincere potuisti; 
vincere debuisses = vincere debuisti. 



INDIRECT DISCOURSE 

758. Direct discourse (oratio recta) is a quotation which gives the exact 
words of the speaker. It is cited by an inserted i nqui t (277, 5) or by u t ait : 

"solus sapiens", inquit Zeno, ) " A wise man alone" , says Zeno, "is 
"beatus est". S happy". 

Indirect discourse (oratio obi iqu a) is a quotation of words in an oblique 
form, depending on verbs of saying or thinking (547): 

solum sapient e m ait Zeno beat urn ) Zeno says that only a wise man is 
esse S happy 

NOTE: Direct as well as indirect discourse has its own pronouns and adverbs, 
modes and tenses (759 sqq. ) 

7T>9. Corresponding- Pronouns and Adverbs 

Direct Discourse Indirect Discourse 

1. ego and nos; meus and noster ) se, sui, sibi; suus : 

{Referring to the speaker or> (In contrast with other persons 

first person) ) also ipse is used: 767) 

tu, iste, ( Second person) ille or is 

is, ille, (Third person) is or ille 

reflexives of a n y person reflexives of the third person 

2. hodie, heri. eras eo die, pridie, postero die 
nunc, adhuc turn (or nunc), ad id tempus 
hie (here) ; hie (this) ibi; is ( or hie) 



§ 759-76] 



INDIRECT DISC0UB8E 



293 



NOTE 1. The nominative of a pronoun is not expressed in indirect 
discourse, except for the sake of emphasis, esp. in contrast with other persons. 

NOTE 2. Pronouns of the first and second person are excluded 
from indirect discourse, unless the author quotes his own speech or that of the 
person addressed. 

NOTE 3. Nos and noster are sometimes used, when the author refers to his 
own party; e. g. Caes. B. G., I. 44. 

Corresponding Modes and Tenses 

760. First Rule : Main declarative clauses go into the accusative with 

the infinitive (544 ) : 



Direct Discourse 
ego, i nqu i t , tibi providebo 

eras me Rom am conferam 



Indirect Discourse 

a i t se ill! provisurum esse 

dixit se postero die Romam iturum or 
ire velle (Double reflexives are avoided 
by change of construction) 

S dixit neminem e suo numero id 
I ignorare (443) 

se arbitrari eum profectum esse 



nemo nostrum hoc ignorat 

arbitror eum profectum esse 

NOTE: See other examples n. 544-560; 620; 622. 

761. Also the following classes of clauses are declarative : 

a. all coordinate relative clauses: 374; 

b. all rhetorical questions of the first and third persons: 632; 

c. all indicative and subjunctive conclusions: 753; 

d. the other statements and questions of the declarative subjunctive (656 sqq. ), 



which however sometimes are not changed into the a. c. i. 
mode : 



but retain their 



a. rex appellatus es..., quae I = ea 

autem ) res panels contigit ... 

b. num possum Ire? i - non 
possum ire I 

quid est Libertate dulcius? 
I - nihil est libertate dulcius) 

c. See examples n. 753 sqq. 

d. quis neget ? ( ■ quia negat '.') 
quis negare possit (- potest ?) 



ilium esse regem appel latum; 
quam rem paucis contigisse 

num Be posse Ire? 

quid esse libertate dulcius? 

quern negare ? 
quern negare posse? 



294 



INDIRECT DISCOURSE 



§ 762 



762. Second Rule : All other main and all dependent clauses 
take the tenses of the subjunctive according to the Rules oi 
Sequence (616 sqq.); i. e. : 

a. the imperatives : 651 sqq.; 

b. rhetorical questions of the second person: 632; 

c. real indicative questions : 631; 

d. the deliberative subjunctive (662) and all other statements and 
questions of the volitive subjunctive : 658; 

e. all kinds of dependent clauses : 



Direct Discourse 

a. I, (Ito,) mi fill 
ne ieris, noli Ire 

b. visne ire ? 

c. quid tibi vis ? 

quid ad me venis ? 

ciir in meas possessionem venis ? 

quid fecisti ? 

d. quid faciam ? 

e. dicam quid sentiam 
dicam quod sentio 
quod iusseris, faciam 
quod iusseras, fecit 
quod iussistl, facio 
dum poterit, adiuvabit 

si ego populo Romano "| 

non praescribo..., non oportet ! 
me a populo Romano in \ 

meo hire impediri J 



Indirect Discourse 

dixit (or dicit) 
filius iret, (eat) 
ne Iret, (ne eat) 
num vellet ire 

(quid sibi vellet; 
\ ( Direct reflexive : ) 
f quid ad se venlret, 
^ ciir in suiis possessiones veniret; 
( (Se and suiis are indirect reflexives) 
quid fecisset, (fecerit) 

quid faceret 

se dicturum quid sentlret 
se dicturum quod sentlret 
quod iusvsisset, se facturum 
quod iussisset, eum fecisse 
quod iussisset, se facere 
dum posset, eum adiuturum 

si ipse (Contrast: 759) p. R. 
non praesciiberet, non oportere 
se a populo R. in suo 
(Ariovisti) iure impediri 



NOTE 1. After historical tenses or the present used in quotations (616), the 
tenses used in indirect discourse are often determined by the point of view of 
the speaker (repraesen tat io, representation); they are sometimes shifted 
in the same sentence. 



§ 762-763 CHANGE OF INDIRECT 10 DIRECT DISCOURSE 205 

NOTE 'J. Explanations of the narrator, which are no parts of the indirect dis- 
course, keep their modes, tenses, pronouns and adverbs (cf. 670): 

Vesontionem, quod est oppidum ) dixit eum Vein, quod est oppidum 
Sequanorum, contendit i Scquanorum, contendisse 

763. Change of Indirect to Direct Discourse 

Rule : First determine the independent tenses in accord- 
ance with the point of view of the speaker; then the 
dependent tenses by applying the rules of sequence : 

FIRST EXAMPLE (CAESAR B. G. I. 44): 

a. si stlpendium remittitur (remitteretur),: Dependent tense. 

b. sese nun minus libentur r e c u s a t (i ru m ) . Independent tense in the 
populi Roman i amicitiam S ' original direct main clause. 

c. quam appetierit : Independent tense in a subordinate clause. 

1. re c lis at u ru m, which denotes an independent action belonging to the 
future of the speaker, becomes re c (i s a b 6 ; 

appetierit (Perfect), which denotes an independent action belonging 
to the past of the speaker, becomes ap p e t i v i ; 

2. remittitur, which denotes a dependent action that is contemporaneous 
with the future of the governing clause, becomes remittitur (608) : 

Direct: ST stlpendium remittitur, non minus libenter re- 
cusabo populi Roman! amicitiam quam appetlvl. 

SECOND EXAMPLE: 

a. quodsi eum inter fecrit, (interfecisset),: Dependent tense. 

b. multis sese gratum esse fact u rum, : Independent tense. 

1. sese f a c t ii r um esse becomes f a c i a m ; 

2. interf ecerit, denoting an action that is previous to a governing future, 
becomes interfecero (611): 

Direct: OuodsT te (759) interfecero, multis gratum faciam. 



2i)i 



REFLEXIVES 



§ 764-765 



DIRECT AND INDIRECT REFLEXIVES 

764. Sin, sibi, se and suns are direct reflexives, when 
referring to the subject (a. expressed, b. implied, or c. logical) 
of the clause, (respectively phrase) in which they stand: 



a. oblitus sui est 

quo se reciperent, non \ 
habebant / 

suos amat 

sentit animus se sua vi ? 
moverl ) 

patet eum sibi temperare 
legatum ad s e missum interfecit 
dux cummilitibus suis fugit 



he was forgetful of himself 

they had no place of refuge 

\he loves his friends, soldiers, 
[equals, followers, family... 

the soul perceives that it is 
moved by its own power 

he evidently restrains himself 

he put the legate who was sent to him 
to death 

the leader fled with his soldiers 



But dux e t milites eius f 'unt the leader and his soldiers fled 
Deum agnosces ex operibus eius you'll know God from his works 

b. deforme est de se ipsum \ it is disgraceful to brag 

praedicare, (i. e. aliquem: 541) ( about oneself 



amor s u i , ( 439 ) 
c. pudet eum neglegentiae suae 



self-lo ve 

he is ashamed of his carelessness 



Note: Direct reflexives may refer to different persons in 
the same clause, when no ambiguity arises : 



Anovistus ait neminem se cum (i. e. ) , . . . -j^r^ , ir 

A11U \ • .-n •„ __ - (^f":„rr (Ariovistussaid that no one had fought 
cum Ariovisto) sme sua (referring > .,, ,. .., ... , • . » fc 

tuuiiiituMo^; _ _ v . » C with him without his destruction 

to neminem) pernicie contendisse ) 

765. Suus is often used to refer to an oblique case of its 
clause; always, when emphasized, (meaning his... own,) and 
with quisque: 



Caesar Fabium cum sua (Fabii ) le- 
gione remittit in hiberna 



Caesar sent Fabius back with his 
legion to his winter-quarters 



$ 765-767 REFLEXIVES '2\> , 

- . - S for the sake of your friends, 

conservatuisBuoa \ spare theirs y 

sul caique mores fingunt fortunam every man' s character shapes his lot 

NOTE: Also the personal reflexive sometimes refers to object cases, 
especially with per, propter and in: 

, ... , - .• S we strive after probity for its own 

honestatem propter se expetimus < , * 

766. Sul, sibi, se and suus are indirect reflectives, 
when not referring to the subject of their clause (or phrase 
respectively), but to another subject: 

elicit Carolum sibi temperasse,\/7e says that Charles controlled 
(sibi referring to Carolum) ) himself (Direct reflexive) 

elicit Carolum sibi temperasse, {he says that Charles spared 
(sibi r. to the subject of dlcit) fhim (Indirect reflexive) 

respondit sibi (Direct) mlrum f Ariovistus replied that he was 



videri. quid in sua (Indirect) J wondering what business the 
Gallia populo Romano negotl ) Romans i 
esset [own Gaul 



si quid ille se (Indirect) velit, (if Caesar wished anything 
ilium ad se (Indirect) venire \ from him, he ought to come 
oportere (to him 

(See other examples n. 666. ) 
Ipse and is Replacing the Reflexive 

767. Ipse is used as an indirect reflexive in contrast 
with other reflexives, and for the sake of emphasis: 

Caesar ex militibus quaesivit, Curde ) Caesar asked his soldiers, why they 
s ua (mllitum) virtute ant de i psl u b > should despair of their own valor or 
(Caesaris) diligentia desperarent ) bis vigilance 

Without contrast: 

cur de sua diligentia desperarent why should they despair of his vigilance 

Ariovistus respondit, si quid ipsi \ A. answered that, if he himself (Em - 
(Ariovisto) a Caesare opus esset, - p h a sis) had wanted anything from 

- - \ ad euin venturuui fuisse ) Caesar, he would have come to him 



298 REFLEXIVES AND RECIPROCALS § 768-769 

768. The determinative is is sometimes used instead of a reflexive in 
order to avoid ambiguity or to denote the depen dent clause as an explan- 
ation of the author or from carelessness: 

persmident Rauracls uti oppidis ] the Helvetiaus persuaded the Rauraci to 
s u i s exustis una cum eis pro- [■ burn their towns and set out with 
flclscantur J them 

Solo, quo tutior e i us vita esset, j Solon feigned madness that his life might 

furere se simuliivit ( he the safer: {Explanation given by Cic ) 

RECIPROCALS 

769. A proper pronoun for the reciprocal ideas one another 
and each other is wanting in Latin. These ideas are ex- 
pressed by 

a. inter nos, inter vos, inter se in any case relation, 

the reflexive object cases being omitted. ( With reference to 
oblique cases inter ipsos is sometimes used) ; 

b. alter alterum, uterque utrumque, &c. (for two); 
alius aliim, alii alios (for more than two); 

c. repetition of the substantive; 

d. sui, sibi, se with ipsi; 

a. inter nos amamus we love one another ; (each other) 
inter vos invidetis you envy one another 

inter se prosunt they are useful to one another 

sancta sit avium inter \ inviolate be the mutual bond of 
ipsos (-inter se) societas/ fellow-citizens! 

b. accidit ut alter alterum) we happened to see each other 
necopinato videremus j unexpectedly 

uterque utri que cordi est they are dear to one another 

ali sl virtus a b alia sepa-) virtues' cannot be separated from 

ran non potest fone another 

c. manus manum lavat fone accomplice whitewashes the 

{other; or one hand washes a. 

ova ovorum simillima one egg is like another 

d. milites sibi ipsi ad pug- \the soldiers hinder one another in 
nam impedimento sunt jthe fight 



$ 770 NEGATIVE PARTICLES 299 

NEGATIVES 

(Study n. 32(5, 6 and 7; 331; 647.) 

770. Remember the following combinations: 

a. neque quisquam, and nobody 

neque quidquam, and nothing 

neque ullus vir, and no man 

neque usquam, and nowhere 

neque umquam, and never 

6. nemo umquam, no one ever = never... anyone 
nihil umquam, nothing ever - ne ver. . . a ny thing 
nemo usquam, no one anywhere - nowhere... anyone 
nihil usquam, nothing anywhere = no where. . . anything 

c. nemo non, everybody non nemo, some 

. , , - , , S n 6 n n li 1 1 u s , some ( sg. ) 

nullus non everbody | n5n n(illi> ' soxae ^ 

.,..- . , . - -u-i^i something; 

nihil non, everything non n ih 1 1 ,} sowewh £ {adv) 

n umquam non, always non numquam, sometimes 

non possum non confiterl I must confess (= can't help...) 



d. non iam, not any more iam non, no more, no longer 
non i t a , 
nemo iam, no one any longer nihil iam, nothing any more 



not very; i t a non, so little ( 705) 

not particularly quam non, how little 



e. non ign 6 r 6 , / well kno w non multum, little ( cf. 735, b) 
non facile, with difficulty non semel, often enough 

f. nulla spes, no hope n 6 n est spes, there is no hope 

NOTE: Non is used to negative clauses and 3ingle wo rd s in any 
clause; its usual place is before the verb or the word it negatives (695). 

N e is used to negative clauses only; its usual place is at the beginning 
of the clause. 



300 WORD - ORDER § 771-773 

WORD - ORDER 

771. The word-order is either grammatical or rhetorical; the 
grammatical order is an arrangement of words intended 
for the mere purpose of conveying" the thought of the author 
with clearness; the rhetorical order has for its object not 
only clear expression of thought, but also emphasis of 
certain parts of the sentence. 

772/, The grammatical (or normal) order of words is this: 

1. the subject; 

2 \ the modifiers of the subject, 

I (following or grouped about it); 

o j the modifiers of the verb, 

) (the indirect preceding the direct object); 

4. the verb: 

Antonius collegae diadema \ Antony placed a diadem 
imposuit j on the head of his colleague 

773. Words or phrases referring to something preceding, 

stand first in dependent clauses (689): 

e 6 cum venisset when he came there 

qua re nuntiata at this news 

alterodie on the following day 

NOTE: Special principles regarding the position of certain parts of the 
sentence will be found in the following paragraphs : 

Form of Address; 35, Note. 
Attributes : 399-403. 
Appositives : 404-406. 
Prepositions : 322; 330, Note. 
Conjunctions : 326-330 
Negatives : 77^, Note. 

NOTE: The grammatical word -order is comparatively rare, since the speaker 
generally wishes to emphasize some words of the sentence. 



§ 774-77"> word - order 301 

774. The rhetorical order of words is especially (771) 
intended for the purpose of emphasis. This is obtained espe- 
cially by 

a. reversing the grammatical order; 

b. chiasmus or cross - order; X - Chi; 

c. anap h ora or parallel order : 

a. a pud Helvetios longe nobi-) Orgetorix was by far the most 
lissimus fuit et ditissimus ^illustrious and richest man of 
Orgetorix J the Helvetia ns 

si sunt di, benefici in \if there are gods, they are 

homines sunt f beneficent towards man 

b.non video quo modo sedare ) j do not see how past 

possint [pleasures can assuage 

mala praesentia ( rr . ° 

praeteritae voluptates present sufferings 

c. male parta, male dilabuntur i 11 gotten, ill spent 

d e f e n d i multos, \ / have defended many, 

1 a e s i neminem j 1 have injured no one 

775. While certain cadences were avoided, rhythm (numerus) 
often governed the choice of words, especially at the (beginning 
and) end of a sentence: 



Preferred 



esse possit 
esse videatur 



AVOI DED : 

esse potest 
esse videtur 



NOTE: Pronouns were often put together, modifiers frequently sepa- 
rated from their substantives : 

a. idem ego died I say the same 

b. aliud iter habemus nullum we have no other way 
multis cum lacrimis with many tears 

e a maxime r a t i 6 n e principally for this reason 



302 



SENTENCE - STRUCTURE 



§ 775-776 



SENTENCE - STRUCTURE 
775. First Rule: 

a. A subject or object that is common 
to both the main and the dependent clause, 

b. the main subject that is at the same 
time the object of the dependent clause, 

c. the dependent subject that is also the 
object of the main clause, 



stand before 

) both clauses : 



a. Caesar, cum hoc cognovisset, ) when Caesar learned this, he 

discessit y departed 

Caesarem, lit viderunt, se- ) as soon as they saw Caesar, they fol- 

quuntur ) lowed him 



b. Caesar, cum eum adgredi ) Caesar remained in camp, though they 
vellent, in castris manebat \ wished to give battle 

Caesar, cum einuntiiltum ) w hen it was announced to Caesar that 

esset..., discessit; (orCaesari) 

cum nuntiatum esset. .. discessit) ) •••> he departed 

(Observe that the object is indicated in the dependent clause by a pronoun.) 



c. Caesarem, cum iis faculta- 
tem pugnandi daret, adgredi 
non audebant 



they dared not attack Caesar, though 
he gave them an opportunity to fight 



NOTE: In such sentences the following combinations of conjunctions are 
common : 

Sed cum (= cum auteni), but when... 
nam cum (- cum enim), for when... 

itaque cum( = cum igitur) , accordingly, when.. . 



776. Second Rule: In general, 

a. temporal (722) and causal (715), ) 

concessive and adversative (727), j 

comparative (730), conditional (742), f 
and adverbial final (694) clauses ) 



precede; 



$ </<i-777 PECULIARITIES IN SENTENCE - STRUCTURE H03 

I), final substantive clauses (694), j 

consecutive clauses (703; exception n. 706), ( 
qiun - clauses (709), clauses of proviso (740), follow; 
coordinate clauses (326 sqq.) j 

c. substantive quod - clauses partly precede, partly follow 

(716 sqq.); 

d. indirect quest ions (precede or) fol 1 o w (641 sqq.); 

e. relative clauses are attached to their antecedent, and 

precede or follow the main clause; see however n. 682, 684, 
686. 

NOTE I. Dependent clauses are frequently combined or i n serted : 686; 
685; 606. 

2. The ablative absolute (517) and the appositive participle 
(573) are inserted without any conjunction or relative; see also n. 574 and 575. 

PECU LI ARITI ES 

777. In Latin 

a. a governing clause may be placed within its dependent 
clause; 

b. two subordinate clauses, onedependent on the other ornot, 
may precede their main clause : 

a. ipsi animl, in a g n I re Eert quail I as to the souls, it matters much in what 
in corpore locati sint i kind of body they are 

b. qualis esset natura montis qui ) he sent out a party to examine the 
cogn 6s c e re n t nilsit j nature of the hill 

cur iiolint, etiatnsi tacent. \ they show the reason of their unwilling- 

dicunt { ness, though they are silent 

ubi red i ero, Bi lice bit, j / shall write to you after my return, if 

ad te scrlbam j / can 

NOTE: One of these dependent clauses preceding the main clause may often 
be best rendered by a substantive (first and second example in b. ) or a 
ph rase (last example). 



304 PERIODS S "o 

THE LATIN PERIOD 

787. The period (ambitus verborum or circum- 
scriptio) is a (long and) carefully constructed complex sen- 
tence in which completion of sense is suspended till the 
close. 

The historical period is one in which unity ofsubject 
is preserved in the variety of constructions. 

The rhetorical period consists of a complex protasis 
and apodosis whose members are grouped according to the 
laws of oratory (e. g. symmetry, rhythm etc.). 

NOTE : As the English language often prefers coordination to 
subordination, Latin periods frequently require to be broken up into several 
sentences: 

Caesar primum suo, deinde ") Caesar had all the horses, his own first, 

omnium ex conspectu remotis | removed from sight. He did this to make 
equia, ut aequatn periculo }• the danger equal and thus take away all 
spem fugae to lie ret, cohort a tus ' hope of flight. A cheering address to 
suos proelium commlsit J his soldiers, and the battle began. 



» 77V-7S1 (QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES 3Q5 



APPENDIX 

I. PROSODY 

{Quantity and Versification) 

QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES 

(Study n. 3-9.) 

779. The quantity of syllables is the relative time taken in 
sounding them, a long syllable requiring about twice the time 
of a short one. 

NOTE: H has no in fl uence on quantity : 5, 6; 
qu is considered as a simple consonant; 

i between two vowels or at the beginning of a word before a 
vowel, is a consonant; 5, 10. 

780. A syllable is long- by nature, if it contains 

a. a long vowel : fid us, maior, (see Preface, second page); 

b. a diphthong : foedus, aurum, caelum; 

c. a vowel produced by 

contraction of vowels : cogere from coagere; 
or weakening of di p h t h o n g s : occldere from oc - caedere 

781. A syllable is long- by position, if it contains a 
(short or long) vowel 

a. before x and z): fax, nex, pix, nox. dux; 

b. before two consonants ] annus, altus, fert, 

of which one Y vinco, in nova, 

belongs to the syllable : j nee quicquam; 

NOTE: The combination p, c, t, (b, g, d) with 1; n, (m uta c um liquida : 
n. 3), 

a. when belonging to two words or two parts of a compound word, effects 
length of quantity by position : 

ob rem, obruo 



306 QUANTITY OF VOWELS § 781-783 

b. when helonging to one simple word, 

does not effect it in prose : vo - lu - cris (5, 7); 

may effect it in poetry i vo - lu - cris or vo - luc - ris, 
(syllaba anceps) $ te - ne - brae or te - neb - rae; 

<<Et primo similis volu - cri, mox vera voluc - ris." 

782. A syllable is short, if it contains a short vowel 

a. before a vowel or h : dea, deae, traho; 

, . . -. , S facio, coquo; 

b. before a single consonant : } et ^ alm l a ^- ter . 

c . before a muta c. liquida : volu - cris (781; Note) 

d. before any two or three con- { splendida stella; 
sonants of the following word : \ stella splendida. 

QUANTITY OF VOWELS 

783. The quantity of vowels is either apparent. or hidden. 

It is hidden, if it does not show its value in poetry: namely, wherever the 
vowel stands before a group of two consonants that do not belong to the com- 
binations formed by mutae followed by 1 iqui d ae (781); 
it is apparent in all other cases; thus, in the verse 

in nova | fert ani- | mus mil- | tatas | dicere | formas 
corpora..., ^ 

the quantities of the full - faced vowels become apparent by applying the 
laws of the dactylic hexameter (7 99), while those of the other vowels remain hid- 
den; the quantities of the vowels in in, -mus, -t as, -mas, however, appear 
from other verses; the value of e in fert, 6 in for-, o in cor- cannot ap. 
pear in poetry at all, because the syllables in which these vowels occur are 
long by position (7S1) without regard to the quantity of the vowels. 

Such hidden quantities can be shown (in some cases with probability 
only) from other sources: e. g... from the statements of Roman grammarians, the 
laws of etymology, and Greex transcriptions of Latin words. 



b. e before I in the fifth declen- ) .... , ... 

> diei, faciei 



§781-785 QUANTITIES OF VOWELS 3Q7 

Rules for the Quantities of Vowels 

784. First Rule: Vowels before vowels, h, nt, nd and 
ss are short : 

facio, praeacutus, dehinc, prohibeo; 
frontis, frondis, lassus, fessus. 

Exceptions 

a. the vocatives of proper nouns in ? ,.. n 

-aiue and -eius (35, 36) \ Ga1 ' Pom P ei 5 

before I in the fi ft h declen- 
sion, except fidei, rel,spel(70) 

c. I in the genitive in -ius 1 alterius, illius etc., 

( 1(59) : i but also alterius a. s. f. ; 

d. I in the forms of fid, except in \ fid, fis; 

f i t and before e r ( 295 ) : i but fit, lieri, fierem; 

e. dius for dlvus; sometimes Diana, ohe, eheu; Aeneas, Da reus, etc. 

f. quint- q u I n d - and u n d - in numerals (115) ; besides, 
nuntius, contio, nundinae, prendo, vendo; 

g. the contracted perfect- forms and the forms of esse : 
laudasse, essem; (225, 2S4); 

NOTE 1: The vowel o is short in pro heiore f followed by a vowel: 

profanus, profecto, protiteor, profor, profugus; 
Exceptions: profero, proficio- 

NOTE 2: Pro- and n e - are short in 

procul, prope, probus; 
nefas and nefandus, 
nescio, uescius, nequeo. 

785. Vowels are long before 

a. nf, ns, nx, net: Tnfans, vinxi, vinctus; 

h. - sco (begin): cresco; exc. disco, posco, compesco; 

c. gn in stagnum, regnum, segnis. 

d. consonantal i: eius; except : the compounds of iugum : 
quadriiugus, quadriiugis. 

NOTE : The 6 of noun -ate ins in - on - an 1 - or - is long : 

BcipiO, scipionis; labor, laboris; 

Exceptions; arbor, arboris; lepus, leporis; or in neuters: corpus, corporis. 



308 QUANTITY OF VOWELS § 786-787 

786. Second Rule: Compounds and derivatives (335) 
usually keep the quantities of the corresponding simple and 
primitive words : 

comparo, paro (9, b.) flos, floreo, florui 

occido, cado fur, furax, furtim 

improbus, probus credo, credulus 

persuadeo, suadeo amicus, amlcitia 

inlquus, aequus moneo, monuT, monitum 

NOTE: Related words sometimes have different quantities : 

dux, duco lex, lego 

odium, ddi notio, noto 

fides, fido rex, rego 

fidelis, fidus sedes, sedeo 

perfidus, infidus vox, voco 

homo, humanus acer, acuo 

787. a. All forms of verbs with perfects in ui (vi) 
except pono have a short stem - vowel; study n. 232, 236, 242, 
249,251, 260, 280: 

cubare, cubo, cubuT, cubitum 

b. The verbs in -ere, -io have a short vowel in the 
present : 

cupere, facere, iacere etc. (251) 

c. The following dissyllabic perfects and perfect passive 
participles have a short vowel : 

Pf. : dedi, stetl, — stiti; bibl; fid!, scidi, tulT, il. 
Ppp. : datum, statum (from sisto), satum, ratum; 

itum, citum, litum, quitum (from queo), situm, rutum. 

Note: All other dissyllabic perfects and perfect passive parti- 
ciples have a long penult, 

either by nature: vldl, visum; laesi, laesum; 
or by position : coxT, coctum; vexi, vectum; 
or by both nature /texi, tectum; rexi, rectum; 
and position |fixi, flxum; c6mpsT;comptum. 



^ 788-789 QUANTITY OF VOWELS 30 ( J 

788. Third Rule: Final vowels are long; but final e 
is short. 

EXCEPTION S: 

1. Fi n a 1 e is long in 

a. mon os y Hables : e, de; me, te, se; ne [lest, verily ); 
except enclitics : - que, - ve, - ne; - ce, - te, - pte; 

b. in the ablative of the fifth declension : re. fide; 

c. in the imperative of the second conjugation: dele; 

d. in the adver bs derived from adjectives of the second declension : 
recte; and in valde, fere, ferme. 

2. Final a is short in the nominative, accusative and form of address: 
mensa, bella, regina. 

3. The ultima is short in some dissyllables with a short penult : 

ita, quia, nisi, quasi, cito; 
bene, male, ego, duo, mo do; 
sometimes in homo, leo, peto, puto, volo... 
and in ave, cave, vale, vide... 

NOTE: The quantity is common (short or long) in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, ubi, 
(ubinam, ubivls), but only alibi, ibidem, ubique. 

789. Fourth Rule: 

1. Before finals, (a, e and 6 are long: - as, - es, - 6s; 

( l and u are snort: - is, - us. 

2. Before other final consonants all vowels are short. 

EXC EPTION S: 

(Examples in n. 46 - 54) 

1. a. as (47), anas (51), es oi esse, penes, compos, 
- es (- it is, - idis, - etis), os (bone), impos. 
But abics, arics, paries, 

b. -Is as plural case -ending: mensis, servis, nobis, artls(42); 

as singular verb-form ") audis, is, f is : Present indicative; 
of the second person. ! sis, veils etc. : Present subjunctive; 

when the 1 pa. pi. Is— l m us; flaudaveris(aleo-ia): Perfect subjunctive; 
besides, v Is and - vis : J (l'is), usually laudaveris : Second future. 

as nominative singular in : vis, Quirls, Samnifi 
NOTE: Sanguis and p u 1 v i s have - Is or - is. 

c. - us as nominative singular with genitives in - fi t i s , - u d is, u r is . 



310 VERSIFICATION § 789-797 

2 a. The following monosyllables: 

die, due, sic, and hoc ( Preface, second page) ; 
nil, sol, sal (47); en, non, quin, and sin; 
Lar, par, (dispar, impar: -13), ver, cur; 

b. the adverbs of place in c: illic etc. (178, 180) 

c. the contracted forms of the perfect in - ivi : audit, 

790. Greek words keep their quantity'; as, aer; but final 

— or is always short; as, Hector (82 - 85). 

VERSI FICATIO N 

791. Poems are composed of verses; verses, of feet; feet of syllables. 

792. Rhythm is the regular recurrence of groups of syllables 
(musical sound - groups) that take the same amount of 
time. 

793. A foot is a rhythmically recurring group of syllables. 

NOTE: The unit of length is one short syllable, called mora, delay; a 
long syllable contains two morae. 

794. The principal feet are 

— — or Trochee (Trochaeus); — — — or Dactyl (Dactylus), 

,_ — or Iambus (Iambus); — — — or Anapaest (Anapaestus); 

— — or Spondee (Spondeus); — — — or Tribrach (Tribrachys). 

795. A verse is a succession of feet arranged in a fixed order. 

796. Meter is 1) a measure in the composition of a verse, 
consisting of either one foot (the dactylus), or a combina- 
tion of two feet, called dipody; (two trochees, iambi or 
anapaests); and 2) a particular system of measuring; e. g., 
the dactylic meter. 

797. Ictus or metrical accent (') is the stress of voice 
given to the same place in a foot. It is naturally caused by 
the regular recurrence of the same group of sjdlables. 

NOTE 1. Sense- and word -accent is the stress of voice given to 
the syllable that is most prominent by its meaning, (e. g., to the root : porta) 
or by its inflexion; (e. g., portarum). 

NOTE 2. When word - accent and ictus fall upon different syllables, both 
exert their inherent power, the accent being stronger in one place, the 
ictus in another. 



§ 798-800 DACTYLIC HEXAMETEH $\l 

798. The thesis is the syllable of a loot that receives the 
ictus; the arsis, the part o( the syllable that remains without 
a metrical accent. 

NOTE 1. The terms thesis and arsis are here defined according t<. their 
original meaning. 

NOTE 2. In the thesis, short final syllables, especially the enclitic - que 
may be lengthened, (Diastole, drawing out). 

define plura, puer, et quod nunc Instat, agamus. 

THE DACTYLIC HEXAMETER 

(Versus herous) 
799. The dactylic hexameter is made up of six feet: 

the first four are dactyls or spondees; 

the fifth generally is a dactyl, (rarely a spondee: spondaic 

verse, versus spondlacus); 
the sixth is a spondee or a trochee: 



NOTE: Dactyls are chosen to express rapidity of action or joyous emotions; 
spondees, to express slowness, majesty, power, grief, sadness etc. 

quadrupe | dante pu I trem soni | tu quatit | ungula | campum 
( Verse depicting a courser at full speed. ) 

illi in ; ter se | se mag | na vi | brachia | tollunt (cf. 5, 13) 
(Verse depicting the heavy strokes of the Cyclopes in forging thunderbolts.) 

800. Caesura (marked l|) is the cutting of a verse in 
two (or more) parts by ending a word within a measure. 

Diaeresis is the ending of a word with the foot. 

NOTE 1. Caesura and diaeresis have opposi te effects. While the beauty 
of a verse i> created by well -chosen caesuras, it is made impossible by too great 
a number of diaeres 

Note 2. The caesura is called masculine (from its strong 
effect), when it falls after the first syllable of a foot; femi- 
nine, when its falls after the second; the caesura, when it 
falls at a natural pause, made for the sake of the sense or the 
sound. 



3 i 2 PENTAMETER AND ELEGIAC STANZA § 80 -802 

NOTE 3. a. The most frequent caesura is after the thesis of the third foot; 
it is called pen them i m eral (penthemimer^s), because it falls after the 

f if th h a 1 f measure : 

donee eris felix, || multos numerabis amicos; 

b next conies the caesura after the thesis of the fourth foot (heph- 
themi meral , hephthemimeivs), which is commonly united with the tri - 
the m i meral : 

clamores || simul horrendos || ad sidera tollit; 

c. then the feminine caesura that falls after the first short syllable of the 
third foot : 

6 passi graviora, jj dabit deus his quoque finem. 

NOTE 4. Bucolic diaeresis is a diaeresis at the end of the fourth foot, 
coincident with a sense - pause; it was often used by the bucolic (pastoral) poets; 
hence its name : 

soJstitium pecori defendite; || iam venit aestfts. 
THE DACTYLIC PENTAMETER 

801. The dactylic pentameter is a hexameter whose third 
and sixth arses are replaced by pauses. 

Spondees may be used instead of dactyls in the first half, 
but not in the second. The first half ends with a long final 
syllable, the second with one that is anceps : 

- I - l_ A ! ! I~ A 



NOTE 1. The wrong name pentameter is due to the formerly prevailing mis- 
conception that the verse consisted of two dactyls or spondees, a spondee, and 
two anapaests. 

NOTE 2. The pentameter is regularly used in alternation with the hexameter 

(802). 

THE ELEGIAC STANZA 

802. The elegiac stanza or distich is a hexameter followed by 
a pentameter : 

omnia sunt hominum tenui pendentia filo; 
et subito casu, quae valuere ruunt. 



$ 808-804 scanning \ m» hi: \i)i.\(. 313 

SCANNING AND READING 

803. Scanning is the dividing of a verse into its feet, 
(wit h o u t regard to sense or accent). 

Reading- verse is the recital of the poetical production 
wit h due regard to sense, word - accent, meter (and ictus). 

PECU LI ARITI ES 

804-. In scanning and reading verse attention must be paid to 
the following peculiarities; to 

a. slurring (synaloepha or elision); see 5, 13; 

b. hiatus (omission of slurring), which is regular before and 
after interjections, permitted at the end of a verse, anexception 
in other cases : 

6 et | do Lati \ a, 6 | et de | gcnte Sa | bina; 
[Hiatus is sometimes incomplete, a long final vowel becoming short.] 

c. contraction of two vowels within a word into one long 
vowel (synizesis or synaeresis) : scio, deesse, anteire,proindeetc. 

d. pronouncing of consonantal i and u as vowels, and 
of the vowels i and u as consonants: 

silvae - siluae; Troia - Tro - i - a; 

tenuis - tenvis; abies - ab - yes. 

e. tmesis (cutting of compounds into their parts) : 

quo me cumque (- quocumque me) rapit tempestas, deferor hospes; 

f. syncope (omission of a short, unaccented vowel in a 
word) : 

templorum positor teinplorum sancte repostor; 

g. s y s t o 1 e ( shortening oi long syllables) : 

obstupui steteruntque comae, vox faucibus haesit; 
h. diastole: see 798. 

NOTE: Some ot the above-mentioned peculiarities, especially slurring, 
hiatus and syncope were common to both daily speech and poetry. 



314 



THE ROMAN CALENDAR 



S 805-806 



805. 



II. THE ROMAN CALENDAR 

(Fasti, 6 rum, m.) 
month s 



Ianuarius, Februarius, Martius, Aprilis, Mains, Iunius, 
Quinctilis or Iulius, (in honor of Caesar), 
Sextilis or Augustus, (in honor of Augustus), 
September, October, November, December. 

NOTE 1. The names of months usually are adj ecti ves (49, 60). 

NOTE 2. Before 153 B. C. , the Roman year began with March; 
hence Quinctilis, Sextilis etc., the fifth, sixth... month. 



806. 

Three 
fixed 

points : j 



DATES 



Kalendae : 

Nonae : 



lldu 



the first of the month; 

/the fifth of the month; 

) but the seventh in March, \ 



Mav. Julv, October; 
/the 13th of the month; 
\butthz 15th in MILMO 



MILMO 



From these three points dates were reckoned backward, both ends of 
the series being counted : 



Kalendis Ianuarils 

prldie Kalendas Ianuarias 

ante diem tertium KalendAs ) 
Ianuarias, (a. d. III. K. Ian.), > 
or tertio (die ante) Kal. Ian. ) 

a. d. IV., V:,... XIX. K, Ian. 

I d i b u s Decembribus 

prldie Idtis Decernbres 

a, d. III., IV.,... VIII. Id. Dec. 

Nonis Decembribus 

prldie Nonas Decernbres 

a. d. III., IV. Nonas Dec. 



on the first of January 

( on) the 31st of December 

ion) the 30th of December 

(on) the 29th, 28th,... 14th of Dec. 

on the 13th of December 

{on) the 12th of December 

{on) the 11th, 10th,... 6th of December 

on the 5th of December 

[on) the 4th of December 

{on) the 3d, 2d of December 



§ 806-811 THE BOMAN CALENDAB 315 

NOTE: The expressions with a. d. and prldu" are unchangeable : 

ex a. (1. III. K. Ian. usque ad prldu" Non. Apr., from Dec. c.Oth to April 4th... 

807. The Intercalary day in Leap Year 

was counted between a. d. VII. K. Mart, (our Feb. 23d of the 
ordinary year) and a. d. VI. K. Mart, (our Febr. 22d)and\vas 
called a. d. bis VI. K. Mart. 

808. To turn Roman Dates into English 

1. Add one to the date of nones (5 or 7) and ides (13 or 
15), and subtract the given Roman number; 

2. Add two to the days of the month preceding the calends 
and subtract the given Roman number : 

1. a. d. IV. Non. Sep.: 5+1-4 = Sep. 2d; 
a. d. VIII. Id. Iul.: 15+1-8 = July 8th; 

2. a. d. XV. K. Oct. : 30+2-15 = Sep. 17th. 

809. To turn English Dates into Roman 

Apply the same rules as above, but subtract the given 
English number: 

Sept. 2d: 5+1— 2 = a. d. IV. Non. Sep.;- 
July 8th : 15+1-8 = a. d. VIII. Id. Iul.; 

Sep. 17th: 30+2-17= a. d. XV. K. Oct. 

810. To turn Roman Years ( anni urbis conditae ), 

into years B. ('., subtract from 75 J; into A. D., subtract 753. 

811. HOURS 

The day was divided into two sets of twelve hours each, 
differing in length at different times in the year. The first set 
began with sunrise, the second with sunset. 

hora n 6 a a may mean „ ? , ,ll .!^ , „ ^ ^ * 

\ 2 ) between 2 P. M. and 3 P.M. 

NOTE: In c a in p the night was divided into f o u r watches of three hours 
each, likewise varying in length at different times in the year ; vigilia prima, 
secunda, tertia, qu'trta. 



316 



ABBREVIATIONS 



§ 812-814 



812. 



III. ABBREVIATIONS 
Roman Praenomina 



A. 


= Aulus 


L. 


= Lucius 


Q- 


= Quint us 


App. 


= Appius 


M. 


= Marcus 


Sex. 


= Sextus 


C. 


= Gaius 


M\ 


= Manius 


Ser. 


= Servius 


Cn. 


= Gnaeus 


Mam. 


- Mamercus 


Sp. 


= Spurius 


D. 


= Decimus 


N. 


= Numerius 


T. 


= Titus 


K. 


= Kaeso 


P. 


= Publius 


Ti. 


- Tiberius 



NOTE 1. The Roman had regularly three names: 
Marcus Tullius Cicero: 

1. The praenomen, or personal name : Marcus; 

2. the no men (always in - ius), or principal name, indicating the gens, and 
corresponding to our last name : Tullius; 

3. the cognomen, or family name, indicating the smaller circle of related 
persons: Cicero. 

NOTE 2. Women were called only by the name of their gens : 

T e r e n t i a , the wife of Cicero, T u 1 1 i a , his daughter. 

813. Roman Money 

1 sestertius = 2^ asses(about4cents) --HS = IIS =as+as+semis; 
1 sestertium=1000sestertii(about$42.50)=HS(thesame sign). 

Below 2000 the reckoning was by sestertii and cardinals, 
below 1,000,000 by sestertia and distributives (or ordinals), 
from 1,000,00 J by sestertium and numeral adverbs ; 

H S X = sestertii decern = 10 

H S X = sestertia den a or decima (= decern milia sestertium) 

= 10,000 
H S fxj = sestertium deciens (i. e. centena milia) = 1,000,000 



814. 

S. C. 

S. P. Q. R. 

A, U. C. 

q. b. f. f. q. s. 

S. 

S. D. P. 

S. V. B. E. V. 



Other Abbreviations 



senatus consultum 

senatus populusque Romanus 

ab urbe condita 

quod bonum, felix,faustumque sit 

salutem (i. e. dico or dlcit) 

salutem dico (dicit) plurimam 

si vales, benest, ego valeo 



INDEX 



( Written by Mr. A. C. Cotter, S. /., and Mr. D. E. Hammer, S. J.) 



ABBREVIATIONS 



cl. 


= clause; 


im. 


= imperative; 


CO. 


- construction; 


n. 


- note; 


cpd. 


= compound; 


w. 


- with. 



a, ab299n. 1, 300, 32.3, 470, 488, 

612, 524, 584 
abbreviated forms 225 
abdo 244, co. 528 
abeo 292 
abest, non 711 
abhinc 536 
abhorreo 236 
abicio 254 
abide, co. 521 
abigo 247 
ablative 18, 26 ;syntax 484 

- of separation 4H5 sqq. 

- of source 488 sqq. 

- oi origin 489 

- of material 491) 

- ot comparison 491, sqq. 

- sociative a. 496 sqq. 

- of manner 498 sqq. 

- of attend, circumst. 500 

- of means or instrum. 501 sqq. 
-of cause 508 sqq. 

- of accordance 510 

- of respect or specif. 51 1 sqq. 

- ot amount of ditf. 515 

- of quality 441 

- with multo 453 



- absolute 516 sqq. 
able, be a. 283; co. 627 
abluo, 249 

abnuo 249 

abound, co. 503 

above - mentioned 568 

absens 280 

absent, be a. 280 

absolute time 589, 500, 601 

absolvo, co. 452 

abstain 230 

absterged 237 

abstineo 236, co. 486 

absum 280, co. 282, 515 n. 

abundantia, sub^t. 77 sqq.; 

- adj. 100 sqq. 
abundo, co. 503 

- abua instead of - \a 77 
abator 267 

ac, see atque 
acc:dit274, 7 Kin. 
ace "do 243, co. 4';:> 
accendo 248 
accent 9, 220 
accepl 547 n. 
accer^o 241 
acci lit 274 



II 



aceio 235 

accipio 254 

accomodatus, co. 582 

accompaniment 496, 407, 500 

accomplish 254 

accost 244 

accurro 244 

accusative 18, 25, syntax 412 sqq. 

- of inner object 413 sq. 

- cognate a. 413 

- of neuter pron. or num. adj. 413 

- of outer object 415 sqq. 

- w. verbs of painful emotion 422 

- double a. 423 sqq. 

- in exclam. 432 

- of extent 531 sqq., 536 

- w. inf. 544 sqq. 
accuse, co., 452 sqq., 551 
accuse, co. 452, sqq., 551. 
accustom 254, co. 551, 502, 543 
acknowledge 256 

acquit co. 452 

act 247 

acuo 249 

ad 310, 323, 483, 512, 583 

adaequo, co. 419 

add 244 

address 244 

address, form of, 19, 24, 35 

adduco, co. 697 

adeo 293, co. 418, 677, 705 

adfero 287. co. 461 

adflrmo, co. 547 

adgredior 268 

adhibeo 236 

adhuc 180, 594 

adimo 247, co. 474 

adipiscor 269 

adiuvo 234, w. ace. 462 

adjectives 32 sqq., 55 sqq. 

- expr. prep, phrases 401 n. 

- w. gen. 449 

- of use and fitness 483 



- participles as adj. 567 

- w. supine 587 
adlicio 252 
admodum 105 
admoned 236, co. 451 
admonish 236 
adnuo 249 
adolesco 257 
adorior 270 

adorn 247 

adsentior, adsentor 270 
adsequor 267 

adsum 280, w. dat. 282, 462 
aduleecens as appos. 408 
adiilor 270 
adultus 223 
advenio 263 

adverbs 106, 114, 128, 129, 346, 347 
351, 357 

- of place 178 sq. 

- of time 180 sq. 

- of manner and degree 182 sqq. 

- in indir. discourse 759 
adverbial modifiers 368 
adversative conj. 328 
adversor w. dat. 462 

ad versus 314, 440, 481 

advesperascit 273 

advise 237 

aemulor, co. 419 

aequo plus 492 

aer, 84 

aestirno, co. 457, 458, 514 

aether 84 

affect 254 

afficio 254, co, 502 

affirm 277 

affligo 243 

affluo, co. 503 

agnosco 256 

ago 267, id ago ut 697 

agree 244, 249, 261 



INDEX 



III 



agreement of adj. 34, synt. 388 sqq. 

- ot appos. 388, 389, 392 n. 

- of attributes 390 

- ot predicate 391; 393 sqq. 

- by attraction 392 sqq. 

- by sense 395 

- ofpred. subst. 392 

- ofpron. 149, 396 
aid 277 

algeo 237 

alia 178 

alias 180 

alibi 178 

alicubi 178 

alicunde 178 

alienus, co. 487 

alio 178 

aliqua 178 

aliquamdiu 180 

aliquando 180 

aliquanto 515 

aliquantum 175 

aliqui 15() 

aliquid 414 

aliquis 15(5, 175, 048, 050 

aliquo 178 

aliquot 175 

aliquotiens 180 

aliunde 178 

alius 109, 170 

all of 448 

allido 243 

allow 241; be all. 273 

allure 252 

alo 242 

alter 118, 169, 170, 172 

alteruter 172 

ambigo 217 

ambio 293 

ambo 117, 167 

aunbiiro 213 

amicio 2(14 

amicus, co. 481 

ami t to 243 



among, be a. 280 

amplector 267 

am pi i us 493 

an 037, 639, 649; an non 038, 649 

anaphora 774 

and 326, 3:j0 n. 

an go 248 

angry, be a. 236, 209 

animadverto 248 

Anio 80 

announce 243 

annoy 272 

annul 240 

annuo 249 

anoint 250 

answer, to 238 

answers 636 

ante 305, 317, 357; as adv. 324 

antea 180 

antecedent 147, 673, 684 

antecedo, co. 419 

antecello 246 

antefero 287 

antehac 180 

antepono 242, co. 515 

antequam 333, 720 

aoristic tenses 590, 591 n. 

apage 334 

aperio 200 

apiece 126 

apodosis 742, 744, 746, 749 

appareo 236; apparet 274, 545 

appear 236 

appellatives 60 

appello 244, co. 528, appellor, co. 387 

applaud 243 

appositive 358 

- agreement of a. 388 sqq. 

- to possess, pron. 389, 405 

- position of a. 404 sqq. 

- subst. used as a. 408 

- adj. and part, used as a. 409, 570 

- expr. cause etc. 410 



IV 



appositive replaced by phrases 411 

- participle, 572 sqq. 

approach 213, 293 

appropinquo w. dat. 463 

aptus, co. 483, 677 

apud 309, 323 

arbitror 265, 620 n. 

arced 23fi 

arcesso 241, co. 478 

ardeo 237 

arguo 249, co. 452. 551, 562 

arrange 243 

arrideo 237 

arrive 263, co. 528 

article 22 n. 

as 333; as it were 410 n. 

ascendo 248 

ascertain 262 

ask 241, 265 

aspergo 243 

assemble, co. 528 

assent 270 

assuefacio 254, co. 551 

assuef actus, co. 502 

assuesco 256 

as«uetus 223, co. 502 

astounded, be a. 236 

at 328 

atque, ac 326, 696, 732, 738 

atqui 328 

attack 268, 270 

attain 269, 697; co. 707 

attempted action 591, 595 

attend 244 

attendo 244 

attinet 274 

attingo 244 

attribute 357 sqq. 

- complement 366 

- agreement of a. 390 

- position of a. 399 sqq. 

- praising and blaming a. 403 

- participles as a. 566 
auctor sum, co. 465, 697 



audeo 220, co. 543, 620 n. 

audio, co. 547, 562, 570 

auditu 587 

aufero 287, co. 474 

augeo 237 

aut 327, 639., 661, 696; aut-aut 331 

auteni 328; is autem = qui 689 

auxilior w. dat. 462 

avenge 269 

aveo 236, w. inf. 543 

avidus, w. gen. 449 

B. 

banish 254 

beam 237 

bear 285 

beat 244 

become 243, 294, co. 387; 

- a boy again 258 

- burdensome 258 

- fixed 257 

- inflamed 257 

- insensible 258 

- master 270 

- of 490 

becoming, be b. 273 
beg 265, 277 
beget 242 

begin 270, 277. co. 526, 543 

- to dread 257 

- to flourish 257 

- to shudder 257 
behold 265 
believe 244, 265 
bend 243 
besiege 239 
besprinkle 243 
bestow 270 
betray 244 

better, be b.. Ill, 112, 274 
bewail 237 
beware 239 
bibo 245 



V 



bid on 266 

bind 26] 

bite 238 

blame 721 ; blaming attr. 403 

blandior 270 

Woom 2:5(5 

ft/uo£ 24(5 

border 244 

fcor/7, 6e 6. 269 

bos 80 

ftotA 117, 173 

break one's word 248 

break to pieces 247 

breakfast 239 

ftr/'fte 247 

bring 287; ft. /or (A 253; ft. Ae/p 265; 

ft. op 243 
bruise 240 
fto/7a* 250 
ftorn 24*5 
ftors/ 247 
bury 254, 259 
ftosr, to 236 
ftoj 247, co. 458; ft. up 217 



cado 244 

caedo 244 

caleo 2:5(5 

calfacio 22(5 

can 2S3, 294, co. 543 

cano 244, co. 502; receptui c. 47 ( .» 

canvass 203 

capesso 21 1 

capio 254; locum c. 582 

capitals 2 

cardinals 114 sqq. ; w. ex, de 447 

care Cor, CO. 583 

cared 23(5, co. 4S(j 

carp at 243 

carpo 243 

carry 243, 285; c. on 248; c. thru 247 

carve 243 



case, defined 18 

- end of nouns 23, 29 sqq., 41 sqq., 

85, 69 

- end of adj. 32 sqq. 59 

- end of part. 63 

cfisus rectus & obliquus 18 n. 

causa 312, 509 n. 581, 586; position 

438 
causal conj. 329, claus. 715 
caveo 289, 661 n. ? co. 700 
cease 241, co. 548; c. speaking 257 
cedo 277 

cedo 243, co, 463, 486 
celo, co. 423 
cenatus 222 
censeo 236, co. 698 
cerno 241 

certe, certo 110, 030 
certiorem facio, co.- 547 
characters 1 

charge with 249; have ch. 280 
cheat 254 
cherish 239 
chiasmus 774 
chisel 243 

choose 247, co. 428; ch. rather 288 
cieo 235 
cingo 243 

circa, circum, circiter 318; as adv. 324 
circum in cpds. 417 
circumdo 233, co. 461 
circumlocution 218, 460, 671 
eircumsedeo 239, co. 417 
circumsisto 245. co. 417 
circumsto 283, co. 417 
cis, citrfi 316 
claudo 24:5 
clauses defined 371, 372 

- coordinate cl. 372, 374 

- subordinate cl. 372, 375 sqq. 

- connected and unconn. cl. 377 

- snbst., adj., adverb, cl. 379 

- interrogative cl. 630 sqq. 

- relative cl. 673 sqq. 



YI 



- correlative cl. 682 

- combination of cl. 686 

- conjunctional cl. 693 sqq. 

- of result 604, 619, 702 sqq. 

- ot characteristic 677 sqq., 702 n. 

- of purpose 619, 666 n., 676, 693 sqq. 
-of iear 619, 701 

- quin cl. 709 sqq. 

- subst. quod cl, 716 sqq. 

- temporal cl. 722 sqq. 

- concessive and advers. cl. 619, 727 

sqq. 

- of comparison 619, 730 sqq, 

- of pro viso 740 sqq. 

- conditional cl. 742 sqq. 
clear, be cl. 274 

cleave asunder 246 

climb 248 

clip 238 

close 243 

coalesco 257 

coargud 249, co. 452 

coemo 247 

coepi 277 

coerced 236 

cogito w. inf. 543 

cognate ace. 413 

cognitu 587 

cognoscd 256, co. 547, 562 

cognovi 256, 596 

cogo 247, co. 426, 528, 551, 561 

coincident action 607 

cold, be c. feel, c. 237 

collect 247 

collective nouns 16 

colligo 247 

colloco, co. 521 

colloquor 267 

colo 242 

combination of cl. 6S6 

comburo 243 

come, c. to assist, c. together 263 

comis, co. 481 

comitiitus 219, co. 505 



comitia, co. 582 

comminus 351 

commit suicide 257, 461 

committo 243 

common nouns 13, 14, 388 

communis 437 

como 247 

comparative 86 sqq. 

- w. gen. 447 

- followed by quam qui 677 

- followed by quam ut 705 
compare 287 
comparison of adj. 86 sqq. 

- of adv. Ill sqq. 

- irregular c. 9<> sqq., 112 

- defective c. 102 sqq, 

- expr. by ut 410, 

by quasi and tamquam 410 n. 
comperio 262, co. 547 
complain 267 
complement 365 sqq. 

- predicate c. 366, 386 

- subject, c. 366 

- attribute c. 36G 

- object c. 367 
compleo 235, co. 503 
complete 254 
complexus 620 n. 
compos w. gen. 449 
composition of words 335 
compungo 244 

conative present 594 

conceal, co. 423 

conceditur 697 n. 

concedo, co. 548, 697 

concern 274 

concessive cl. 727 sqq.; c. subj. 663 

concido 244 

concino 244 

conclusion, phrases of 708 

concoquo 243 

concupisco 257 

concutio 252 

condemn co. 452, 453 



VII 



condition, defined 378 

conditional cl. 676 n., 74:2 sqq. 

conducit 274 

conduce 243, co. 583 

conecto 243 

confero 2S7, co. 464 

confess 266 

conricio 254, 205 n. 

confido 220, 620 n. f co. 508, 547, 558 

conriteor 266 

confligo 243 

confodio 254 

confringo 247 

confngio 254 

congratulate 265, co. 721 

congredior 268 

congruent action 600, 607 

congrad 249 

coniungo 24:5 

coniveo 236 

conjugations 184 sqq. 

conjunctions 325 sqq. 

- coordinate c. 326 sqq. 

- subordinate 332 sqq. 
connect 243 

conor, co. 548, 646 
conquer 2-17 
conquiro 241 
conscious w. gen. 440 
consclsco 257 
conscius W. een. 449 
conscribo 243 
eonseeutio tempoFum, see 

sequence of tenses 
consenesco 257 
consentio 261, co. -161 
conseqaor 267 
consero 241, 242 
conservo w. ace. 4(i2 
consido 248, co. 521 
consist 233 
oonsisto 245, co. 521 
conspicio 251 
conspicor 265 



constat 274, co. 544 

constituo 240, co. 521, 543, 698 

consto 238, co. 458 

constructio ad aensum 395 

consuesco 256 

consuevi 256, 596, w. inf. 543 

consul as appos. 408 

consulo 242, w. dat. 473 

consult ^42 

consumo, co. 521 

contemno 243 

contemporaneous action 539, 600 

608, 617 
contendo 244, w. inf. 543 
contentus, co. 508 
conticesco 257 
contineo 236, co. 504 
contingit 274 

continuation of negatives 696 
continue, co. 543 

contra 314: c. ac, contriirius ac 738 
contract, make a. c. 220 
contundo 246 
convalesco 257 

convenio 263, co. 419, 528, 585 
convenit 274, 419, 545 
converse 267 

convict 247, 24'.), co, 452 sqq. 
convince 237 
convince") 247, co. 452 
cook 243 
coordinate cl. 372, 374; c. conj. 

325 sqq. 
copulative conj. 326; 

c. verbs 366, 386, 387 
coquo 243 

coram 307, as adv. 324 
correlative pron. and adv. 1 74 sqq. 

c. cl. 682 sq. 
corrigo 243 
corrumpo 247 
cost 233, co, 458 
could 595 
cover 241, 243, 260 



VIII 



covet 257 

credo 214, co. 461, 547 

creep 243 

creo, co. 428 

cresco 256 

cringe 270 

cross 248, 293 

crush 246 

cubo 232 

cultivate 242 

cum (prep) 299 n.; 304, 496, 497, 498 

- position of c. 131, 146, 148 

- cpds. of c. 464 
cum (conj.) 715 

- coincidens 607 

- iterativuin 610, 613 

- narratlvum 616 

- relativum 180, 673, 675, 677 

- quod cum 690 

- temporale 723, 724 

- historicum 725 

- concessivuni 728 
cum prlmum 602 
cum -turn 180, 331 
cumque 150, 178, 180, 183 
cunctor 265, w. inf. 543 
cupidus w. gen. 449 
cupio 251, co. 543, 550 
cur 673 

curb 236 

euro, co. 543, 580, 583, 661 n. 697 

curro 244 

cut 232; c. off 213; c. into 244 



D. 



damno, co. 452 sqq. 

dare, co. 543 

dash against 243; d. to pieces 247 

dates 121 

dative 18, syntax 460 sqq. 

- as indirect obj. 363, 461 sqq. 

- of the possessor 467 sqq. 



- of the ag<?nt 469 sqq. 

- of reference 471 

- of advant. or disadvant. 472 sqq. 

- ethical d. 475 

- of person judging 476 

- of service and purpose 477 sqq. 

- w. adj. 480 sqq. 

- w. participle in ndus 213 
daub over 241 

de 302, 422, 447, 451, -155, 512, 524, 

580, 584, 5S6 
dea 77 

debeo 236, co. 513, 553, 619 n. 
deceive 244, 270 
decerno 241, co. 698 
decerpo 243 
decet 273, co. 416, 545 
decide 219 
decipio 251 
declare war 243 
declension, defined 11, 17 sqq., 23. 

29, 41 sqq. 64, 69 

- of adj. and part. 32 sqq. 55 sqq. 

- of defect, and abund. 76 sqq. 

- of Greek words 81 sqq. 

- of comparative 90 

- of numeral adj. 116 
decree 239. 257 
dedecet 273, co. 416 
dedisco 256 

dedo 244 

deem 261, 265 

defective nouns 72 sqq. 102 

- verbs 277 sqq. 
defend 248 
defendo 248, co. 486 
defero 287 

deficio 254, co. 419 

defigo, co. 521 

defied 235 

dego 247 

delectat, co. 416 

deleo 235 

delight 274 

deligo 247, co. 428, 387 



IX 



demand 256, co. 425, 697 
demergo 243 
demeto 243 
demo 247 

demolish 2J9 

demonstrative pron. 140 sqq. ; 

- followed by consec. cl. 705; 

- explained by a. cl. 721) 
depello, co. 486 

dependent cl. tenses in. 600 sqq. 
dependent tenses 600 sqq. 
deplore 266 

deponents 214 sqq.; passive ol d. 

218, 265 sqq. 
depopulates 219 
deposco 256 
deprehendo 248 
derigo 243 

derivation ol words 335 
descend 248 
descendo 248 
descisco 257 

descriptive tenses 591, 595 
desero 242 
desert 242 
deserve '220 
desideratives 264 
designer, co. 387 
desilio 260 

desino 241, w. inf. 543 
desire 251 ; d. to eat 264 
desirous w. gen. 449 
desisto 245, w. inf. 513 
desperd, co. 422 
destroy 235, 248 
desum 280, w. dat. 282, 462 
detain 236 

deter 236, co. 486, 699 
determinative pron. 142 seq.; 677, 669 
determine 249 
deterreo 236, co. 48G, 699 
detineo 236 
detondeo 238 
detraho, co. 474 
dens 37, 78 



devertor 220, 221 

diaeresis 5, 6, 7 

(dicio) 76 

dico 243, co. 479, 547; pres. im. 226 

- diem d. 582; dlcor 387, 561 

dicto audiens w. dat. 462 

dicta 587 

die 244, 268, 293 

differ 261, 287 

differd 2'87 

difficilis 587, 58S 

diffido 220, 221, 620 n., co. 508 

diffindo 246 

dig 254 

digero 243 

digest 243 

dig-nus co. 513, 677 

diligo 247 

dlmicd 232 

diminish 249 

dimitto 243 

dip 243 

direct 243 

dTriuad 247 

diripio 251 

diruo 249 

discedo, co. 486 

discern 239 

disco 256, 423, 543, 547 

discourse 242 

disgust 272 

disiungo 243 

disjoin 243 

disjunctive conj. 327 

d. questions 637 sqq., 649 

dismiss 243 

dismount 259 

displease 236 

displiceo 236, w. dat. 4S2 

disprove 244 

dispute 247 

dissentio 261, co. 486 

dissen. 242 

dissimilis, co. 450 

dissimulo, co. 547 



X 



distant, be d. 233 

distineo 236 

distinguish 250 

distinguo 250 

disto 233, co. 515 n. 

distributives 114 sqq., US, 123 

distrust 220 

dive 243 

divide 236, 243, 270 

divido 243 

do 233, co. 461, 477, 5S3, operam 

do 582, 697 
do 247, 254; do away w. 287, do 

nothing but 739 n.; do with 490 
doceo 236, co. 423, 551 
doleo 236, co. 422, 508, 1 52 
donms 66, 67, 529, 530 
do mo 232 
donee 607, 726 
dono, co. 461 

draw 243, 261; d. lots 270 
dress 247 
drink 231, 245 
drive 247, d. away 247; 

d. back, out, toward 241 
dubito, co. 543, 650; non d. quin 

619, 650, 710 
dilco 243; pres. im. 22^>; w. double 

ace. 428; w. gen. 457; w. dat. 477 

uxorem d. 462 
dum 602, 607, 726, 740 
dum modo 740 
duo 116, 119 
dux as appos. 408 
dwell 265 
dye 243 

E. 

e, see ex 

ea 178 

each 164; e. apiece 123 

eadem 178 

eat 284 

ecastor 334 



ecce331, co. 432 n. 

ecquis 160 

edepol 334 

edo (give out) 244 

edo (eat) 284 

ediico 243, co. 486 

effect (to) 254, co. 707 

effero 287 

efficio 254, co. 429 

effloresco 257 

egeo 236, co. 4 C 6 

eheu 334 

eia 834 

eius 134, 13G, 138 

elicio 251 

elude 243 

eliido 243 

embark 242, 248 

embrace 267 

emerge 243 

emergo 243 

emiueo 236 

eminus 351 

emo 247, co. 458 

emotion, verbs of, co. 422, 552 

empty (to) 254 

en 334 

enclitics 9, 323 

end (to) 247 

endeavor, co. 697 

endure 236, 287 

engage in 293; be e. in 265 

engrave 243 

enim 329; is enim = qui 689 

enjoy 267 

enroll 243 

enter upon 293 

entitled 568 

envy 239 

eo (v. ) 290, 291, 585 

eo (adv. ) 178, w. gen. 444; 695 

eodem 178 

epistolary tenses 599 



INDEX 



XI 



erga 314, 440, 481 

ergo 330, position 438 

eripio, co. 474 

escape 248, 274 

est 717, w. gen. 436 

esteem, co. 457; e. highly 247, 457 

estimate 236, co. 45 8 

esurio 264 

et 119, 326; et-et 331; et is=qui 689 

etenim 329 

etiam 105, 326, 636 

etiamsi, etsi 728, 729 

euge 334 

euoe 334 

evad6 2l3. co. 387 

evanesco 258 

evenit 274; bene, opportune e. quod 

719 
everto 248 

evident, to be e. 274 
ex, e 301, 323, 447, 508 n. 512, 514 

524, 584 
ex quo erhcitur ut 708 
exalt 287 
exardesco 257 
excel 2m, 246 
excello 2415, co. 420 
exclamation 378 n., 432, 564, 6152 n. 
excolo 242 
excudo 248 
exerceo 236, co. 502 
exert 244 
exile 244 

existimor, co. 387, 5(51 
expedit 274, co. 545 
expend 244 
experglscor 269 
experience {to) 27(> 
experior 270. co. 64(5 
expers w. gen. 440 
expiate 219 
explain 242 

explanatory adj. 437; e. remarks 672 
explodo 243 
expono 242 



express 243 
exprimo 243 
exspecto co. (546 
exstinguo 250 
exsulto, co. 422, 508 
extend 23(5, 244 
extendo 244 
extollo 287 
extorqueo, co. 474 
extort 243 

extra 315, as adv. 324 
extremua 100, 400 
exuo 249 



fac at, ne 661 n. 

facilis 587, 5S8 

facio 254; pres. im. 226; accent of 
cpds. 9; co. 429, 457, 490, 570, 
571; facio ut 697; facere non 
possum ut 713; f. n. p. quin 713 

factu 587 

fail 254 

fall 244,249, 267; f. asleep, away, into 
disuse 257 

fallit 274, co. 416 

fallo 244 

familia 77 

fando audio 277 

farewell 277 

fas, co. 587 

fasten 243 

Eastidiosns w. gen. 449 

fateor 266, co. 547 

faveo 239., w. dat. 462 

favor 239 

fear 23(5, 249, 2(56; cl. oft. (509, 701 

feci 261, /. cold 237; f. pain 236 

fell 244 

- fer, cpds. in, 31, 32 

ferio 264 

fero 285, 28(5; pres. im. 226 

fertur, feruntur 561 



XII 



f ess us, co. 508 

festind, w. inf. 543 

fetter 261 

fidd 220, 221, 620 n., co. 508 

fight 232, 268 

figo 243 

filia, filius 27, 35 

fill 235, 261, co. 503 

final cl. 693 sqq. 

find 263; t out 262 

findo 246 

fingo 243 

finite verb 181 sqq. 

f io 224, 295, co. 387, 429, 435, 490 

fieri non potest ut 713; -quin 713 

fire, be on f. 237; set on f. 248 

first 102, 409 

fisus 221 

fit] be f. 274; to f 242 

fix 243, co. 521 

flagito, co. 425 

flash 237 

fiatter 270 

flecto 243 

fiee 254 

fled 235 

fling away 254 

floreo 236 

fiow 250 

fliimen, position 405 

fluo 250 

fodio 254 

follow 267 

for = in 297; - pro 305; - prae 306; 

= ad 310; = ergfi 314; ut 410, 411; 

- dat, 460 
forbid 232 
force 247 
fore ut 554, 555 
forem 279 n. 
forsee 239 
fortell 243 
form 243 



form of address 19, 35; pos. 35 n. 
formation of words 335 sqq. 
forget 256, 269, co 451 
forgive 256 
fors 76 

forsitan 351, 656 
fortasse 656 
found 244 
foveo 239 
fractions 122 
frango 247 
freino 242 
fretus, co. 508 
frigeo 236 
frighten 236 
fruor 237, co. 504, 580 
fugio 254, co. 419 
fugit 274, co. 41 G 
fulcio 261 
fulfil 233 
fulgeo 237 
fulget 273 
full w. gen. 449 
fundo 247 

fungor 267, co. 504, 580 
furious, be f 248 
furnish, co. 503 
furo 218 

future tense 5H0, 591, 592, 010, 612, 
616 

- im. 227 
-perfect 591, 611 
futiiruin esse ut 554 

G. 

gain ground 258 

gather 2 47 

gaudeo 220, 221, 620 n., co. J22, 508, 

552 
gemo 242, co. 122 
general relatives 150, co. 629 
gender 12; general rules 13; partic. 

rules 28, 38, 40, 46, 67, 71 

- of adj. and part, used as subst. 49 



XIII 



genitive IS; gen. pi. in um 78 

- syntax 433 sqq. 

- explicativua 434 

- possess. 435 sqq. 

- of quality 441 

- of the whole (partit. ) 442 sqq. 

- w. adj. 449 sqq. 

- w. verbs 451 sqq. 

- of price 457 

- expr. prep, phrases 401 n. 

- ger, cpds. in 31, 32 
gero 2 13, me gero 431 
gerund 538, 576 sqq. 
gerundive 212, 213. 578 sqq. 
get 251, 269; g. by lot 270. 

- sight of 251 
gigno 242 
gird 243 

give 233, co. 4.8, 461, 583; 

- back 244; g. out 244; 

- place 243; 

- up 244 
gleam 232 
glide 267 

glorior 265, co. 422, 508 

glory 265 

gnaw 2-13 

gnomic present 59 I; perfect 598 

go 213, 290; ^o awaj 202; 

- 6ac& 292; go by 293; 

- down 241; ^o /brtA 292; 

- ;n quest oi "241 ; 

- to 293; oo orer 293 
gradior 268 

grant 23'!, "49 

gratiii 438, 509 n., 5-1 

gratis 458 

irrfitulor •265 

gratus, co. M 

graze 243, 256 

Greek words 81 sqq. 

grind 2-12 

groan 212 

grow 256; #. GfarA- 273; 



- c/«/n6 258; g. light 273; 

- old 257; g\ r/pe 258; 

- together 257; g\ «p 257: 

- weak 257 
growl 242 
grus 80 
guard 266 
guide 243 

H. 

habeo 236, co. 430, 457, 571; 

- quod 677; habeor, co, 387, 430, 457 
hue 178 

haereo 237 

hail 277 

half close the eyes 236 

halt 245 

hammer out 248 

hang 238, co. 526; 

- over 236; 

- up 244 

happen 274, 295; co. 707 

harass 236 

Aar^ 236, co. 462 

hasten to aid 244 

Aaie 277 

haud scio an 647 

Aaa/ 243 

haurio 261 

have 236, h. charge 289 

have, ave 277 

heal 266 

hedge in 261 

help -I'M, co. 462 

hercule 33 1 

hesitate 265 

heu, heus 33 I 

fcew 244 

hie (pron.) 140; w. cowsec. cl. 705 

hie (adv.) 178 

hidden, be b. 236 

A/cfe 244, co. 528 

high 100, 101, 531 

hinc 178: h. ellicitur ut 708 



XIY 



hinder 280, co. 699, 711 

hire 243 

historical tenses 592 

h. perfect 590, 592, 597, 604, 616 

h. present 594. 616 
hit 264 

hodie 351, 599 
hold23Q;h. forth 243 

h. together 236 
honestus, co. 587 
honor 242 
hoot off 24a 
hop 260 
i2ope, co. 553 
horreo 236, co. 421 
hortatory subj. 660 
hortor, co. 697 
hours 121 
how deep, high, long, wide, 531 

- large, thick 532, tar 533 
how long before or after 537 
hue 178 

humus 38, 529 
hungry, be h. 264 

I. 

iaceo 236 
iacio 254 
iam, i. diu, i. dudum, 59.1, 595, 724 

- i. pridem 594, 595 
ibi, ibidem 178 
idcireo 330 n., 695 

idem 143, 145: i. atque 738 
ideo 330 n., 695 
idoneus, co. 483, 677 
igitur 330; is igitur-qui 680 
ignoro, co. 547 
ignosco 256, w. dat. 465 
ilico 351 
iliac 178 



illative conj. 330 

ille 140, 403; position 399 

illic 141, 178 

illinc 178 

illuc 178 

imbuo 249, co. 503 

imitate 265 

imitor 265, co. 419 

immineo 236 

immo 636 

imparisyllables 41 

impart 249, 270 

impedio, co. 699 

impendeo 238 

impendo 244 

imperative 195, 226, 661 

- future i. 227, 653 

- ot impers. verbs 271 n., 661 

- defined 625; syntax 651 sqq. 
imperator, position 404 
imperfect 591, 592, 595, 597 n., 

599, 613, 616, 628 
imperltus w. gen. 449 
impero, co. 697, w. dat. 461, 465 
impersonal verbs 271 sqq. 

- i. expressions, co. 540, 545, 558, 562 

- i. passive 364, 466 
impertio 270; laborem i. 582 
implant 241 

impono 242, co. 521 
impotens w. gen. 449 
improve 243 

in 297, 323, 518, sqq. 440, 481, 583, 

584 
incendo 248 

inchoatives 255 sqq. 295 n., 591 n. 
incido, incido 244 
ineipio 277, co. 526, 543, 591 n. 
includo 243 
incold 242 



XV 



incorporation of anteced. and 

quisque 684 
increase 237 
Incredibilis, co. 5S7 
ixicrepo 2:52 
incumbo 242 
inde 178 

indeclinables 13, 14, 53, 72, 175 n.,382 
indefinite pron. 156 sqq , 648; 

- position of i. p. 399; /. subject 3S4 
independent tenses GO ) sqq. 
indicative defined 625; 

- uses 626 sqq.; 

~ in declar. el. 627 sqq. ; 

- in dir. quest. 630 sqq. : 

- independent clauses 665, /. cl. 601 
indico, indico 24:5 

indidem 178 

indigeo 236. co. 486 

indignor, co. 552 

indignus, co. 513, 677 

indirect question 548, 605. 6(56 n. 

I. discourse 758 sqq., 666 n.; 

- change ot i. disc, to direct d. 763 
induce 2:57 

indueo, co. 570 
indulgent, be i. 237 
indulged 237, w. dat. 462 
induo 249 

ineo 293, co. 418, 420 
infero 287. co. 461 
Infimus 100, 400 
infinite number 120 
infinitive 538, 540 sqq. 

- as subject 540 sqq. ; 
-as object 543; 

- w. subj. ace. 544 sqq.; 

- u-. subj. nom. 561 sqq.; 

- as prcd. noun 5(55; 

- historical and descript. 595 n. 
inflect ion 10 sqq. 

infra 315; as adv. 321, c<>. 515 
ingratus, co, 481 
ingravrsro 258 
inhabit 212 



initio, co, 461 

ininiieus, co. 481 

iniucundus, co. 481 

iniussu 76, 510 

inlicio 252 

inquam 277 

Inscribo, co, 521 

insculpo 243, co. 521 

insero 241, 242 

insert 242 

inserted cl. 606 

Insimulo, co. 452, 551 

instar, position 438 

instituo, co. 503, 543 

instruct, co. 503 

insuetus, co. 502 

insum 280, co. 282 

intellego 247, 563 

intend, co. 543 

inter 321, 455, 583 

intercludo 243, co. 486 

interdlc6, co. 486, 700 

interea 351 

intereo 292 

interest 274; co. 459, 641 

interficio 254 

interjections 334 

interrogative pron. 151 sqq. 

633, 642, 649 
interrogo. co. 425, 426 
intersum 280, co. 282 
intra 315 

intransitive verbs 212, 229, 352, 
385, 462, 580 

- passive 275, 406 

- defined 361 sqq. 
introductory cl. 606 
intrust 243 
intueor 266 
invade 243 
invado 213, co. 418 
inveigle 252 
invenio 2(53 
inventu 587 



XVI 



INDEX 



invest 239 

inveteraseo 257 

inveteratus 223 

invideo 239, co. 462 

io 334 

iocus 78 

ipse 143, 144; as indir. reflex. 7(37 

irascor 269 

irrepo 243 

irrldeo 237 

is 142, 143, 133, 326, 677, 705 

- instead of reflexive 768 

islands, co. 518, 524, 527 

iste 140, 141 

istac, ietlc, istinc, istuc 178 

it (indef. subj.) 384 

ita 182, 636; i. ut 705 

ita non 770 

itaque 330 

item, itidem 182 

iubeo 237, co. 549, 561 

iucundus, co. 587, 588 

iudico, co. 514, 561 

iugerum 78 

iungo 243 

Iuppiter 80 

iuro 222, co. 547, 553 

iussu 76, 510 

iuvat 274, co. 416 

iuvenis, as appos. 408 

iuniores 104 

iuvo 234, co. 462 

iuxta 312 

J 

jeer 243 

join 242, 243; j. battle 243 

jussive subj. 661 



K. 

keep off 236; k. secret 236 
kill 244, 254 
kindle 248 
knock down 246 
know 256, 259, co. 543 

L. 
labor 267 
laboro, co. 508 
lacesso 241, co. 502 
lacking, be 1. 280 
lacking participles 674 sqq. 
laedo 243; w. ace. 4G2 
laetor, co. 422, 508, 552 
laetus, co. 60S 
land 242, 244, co. 528 
largior 270 

last 100, 102, 103, 400 
lateo 236, co. 528 
Latlnus, position 399 
laugh 237 
lavo 234 

/ay 242, /. hold 248; 
-/. oneself 242 
lead 243; 1. forth 243 
lean 267 
leap 260 

learn 256; /. by hearsay Til 
leave off 245; 1. behind 247 
left, be 1. 280 
legatus as appos. 408 
lego 247 
let 241 

letters, tenses in 599 
levo, co. 486 
levy 243 
liber, co. 487 
Hbero, co. 486 
libet 273 
liceor 266 



INDEX 



XVII 



licet 273, co. 542, 728 

lie = recline 236; - tell a lie 270 

lift 287 

light, be 1. 237 

like - ut 410; = Instar 438 

- similis 450 
likely G47 
liquet 274 
Jive 250 

locative 66, 518 
loco, co. 521, 583 
locus 78, co. 520 
lodge 220 

long for 236, 251 
longe w. superl. 105 
longius 493 
look at 266; /. for 241; 

- /. to 266; /. up to 251 
loose 249 

loquor267, co. 502 
lose 243, i. courage 244 
luceo 237 

lucescil, liicet 273 
ludo 243, co. 502 
lugeo 237, co. 422 
luo 249 
lure forth 251 
luxuria 77 

M. 

maereo 236, co. 422, 508 

magis 94, 95, 112, 113 

magnam partem 414 

magnus, used w. gen. of qual. 441 n. 

mfiior 104, 494 

make 254, co. 428 

- be made 295, co. 387 

- tn. war 287; m. a contract 220 
male died, co. 462 

malim, mallem 656, 659 
mfilo 288, 289, co 543, 550 
maneo 237, co. 387 
manifest, be m. 274 
marry 243 



master w. gen, 449 

materia 77 

maturesco 258 

matiiro w. inf. 543 

maxime91, 112, 113 

measure 270 

txiedeor 266, co. 462 

meditor 219, w. inf. 543 

medius 400 

me dius fidius 334 

meet 268 

memini 287, co. 451, 616, 620 n. 

mend 2G1 

mentior 270 

mereor 220 

- met 135 

metior 270, co. 514 

meto 243 

metuo 249, co. 473, 701 

meus 35, 136, 436 

mico 232 

might 627 

miles as appos. 408 

milia 116, co. 117 

millensimus, milliena 120 

mindful, co. 451 

minime 636 

miaistro, w. dat. 462 

minitor, minor 265, co. 461, 547, 553 

minor (natu) 104, 494 

minuo 249 

minus 493 

mirabilis 587 

miror, co. 422, 552 

misceo 236 

misereor 266 

miseret 272, co. 415 

miseror 266 

misuse 267 

mitto 243, co. 478, 583, 585 

mix 236 

mobilia 15, 388 

mock 243 

moderor, co. 473 



XVIII 



INDEX 



modes of verb 625 sqq. 

- in indir. discourse 760 sqq. 

modo 498, 499 

modo 331, 740, 741; m. - m. 331 

moisten 249 

rnolior 270 

mold 242 

moneo, co. 426, 548 

months 60 

mordeo 238 

more, most 87, 105, 111, 112 

more 510 

morior 268 

moror 265 

mould 243 

mount 248 

mourn 236, 237 

move 239 

moved 239, loco m. 486 

mow 243 

multiplication table 126 

multiplications 127 

multo (v.), co. 453 

multo (adv.), 105, 515, 537 

multus 98 

must, co. 543 



N. 



nam, namque 329 

name, co. 428, be n. 387 

nanciscor 269 

narrative tenses 590, 594 

nascor 269 

natu 76 

natus, co. 489, 494 

- ne 9, 141, 635, 645, 649; 

- ne - an 637 

ne 657, 660, 661, 663, 695, 697, 699, 

701, 740, 770; ne non 701 
ne (interj,) 334 
nee - nee 331 
necesario longius 492 
necessitous ad 483 



necesse est, co. 546 
necne 638, 649 
nedum 664 
need 236 

negatives 770: non, ne, nemo, 
n. non, nihil &c. 

- w. haud scio an 647; 

- w. fut. im. 653; 

- in. declar. subj. 656, 657; 

- in volit. subj. 659, 6G0, 662, 663; 

- in rel. cl 673; 

- in correl. cl. 6S2; 

- continuation of neg. 696, 697; 

- in cl. of result 704; See 722, 727, 740 
neglect 247 

neglego 247, w. inf. 543 

nego, co. 547, 560 

nemo 161, 162, 647 

nemo non 770 

neo 235 

neque 326, 661 n., 696 n. - n. 331; 

n. quisquam 770 
nequeo 294 
ne - quidem 326 
nescio 259; n. quis 648 
nescius, w. gen. 449 
'neuter 5, 161, 169. 172 
neuter pron. as obj. 413; 

- as subj. 415 

neutral passive verbs 224 

neve 660, 661, 696. 697 

ni 751; nihil 161, 414, 647, 661 n. 

nihil non 770; n. umquam &c. 770 

ningit 273 

nisi 156, 732, 739, 751; 

- n. forte 629; n. after alius 732 

- n, vero 629; quod nisi 690 
niteo 236 

nitor 267, co. 504, 697 

noceo 236, w. dat. 462 

nod assent 249 

noli 661 

nolim, nollem 656, 659 

nolo 288, 289, 543, 550, 5G0 



INDEX 



XIX 



nomen est, co. 468 

nominative 18, 24; syntax 380 sqq. 

- double n. 387, 428, 583 n. 

- w. inf. 561 sqq. 
nomine 454, 511 

non 647, 656, 657, 6(52, 673, 727; 

n. nihil 770, 414; 

n. quia, n. quo, n. quod 667; 

n. iam, n. nemo, n. ita, n. niillus 

etc. 770 
nondum 724 
nonne 635, 615 
nos omnes 132, 448 
nosco 2~>6 
noun 10 

noun forms of verb 538 sqq. 
nourish 212 
novi 256, 616, 517 n. 
nubo 243, co. 462 
nudo, co. 486 
niidiustertius 351 
nudus, co. 487 
niillus 161, 169, 647 
niillus non 770 
num 156, 160, 635, 645, 650 

n. quis 160 
numbers of deal. 17 
numerals 114 sqq. 
numeral adj. w. ex, do 447 
- as inner obj. 413 
numeral adv. 114 sqq. 
numero 41 1 
numero (v.), co. 521 
numquam 180, 647, 770 

n. non 770 
nunc 180 

niintio, co. 547, 563 
nupta 223 
nusquam 178, w. gen. 444 



O. 



ob 313, 323, 509 n., 583 
obdormisco 257 
obdurosco 258 
obeo 293 



obey 236, co, 462 
object 360 sqq. 

- direct o. 362, 386, 412 

- indir. o. 363, 460 sqq. 

- inner o. 362, 413, 414 

- outer o. 362, 415 sqq. 
objective genitive 439 

- complement 367 
oblino 241 

oblivlscor 269, co. 451, 616 

obmiitesco 258 

obruo 249 

obsecro, co. 697 

obsequor, co. 419 n., 462 

observe 248 

obsideo 239 

obsolesco 257; obsoletus 223 

obsto, co. 699 . 

obsum 280, co. 282, 462 

obtain 267 

obtemperd, w. dat. 462 

obtestor, co. 697 

obtineo 236 

obtrecto, co. 462 

obtundo 246 

occido, occido 244 

occulto, co. 528 

occupy 248 

o'clock 121 

odi 277 

offend 243 

offer 236, 243, 287 

offero 287 

ohe 334 

old 104, 494, 536 

oleo 236 

olim 181 

omitto, \v. inf. 543 

one, indef. subj. 384 

onerd, co. 503 

opem ferd, w. dat. 462 

open 254, 260 

operio 260, 352 



XX 



opinatus 219 

opinione celerius 492 

opitulor 265 

oportet 272, co. 546 

opperior 270 

opprimo 243 

(ops) 76 

optative subj. 659 

oplimus 587; o. quisque 164 

optd, co. 543, 697 

opus est, co. 506, 507 

or 639 

ordtio obliqua, see indirect disc. 

or not 638, 649 

orbo, co. 486 

ordinals 114 sqq., 118, 121 

- w. gen. 446 

- position 399 
6rdior270, 526 
orior 270, co. 526 
orno, co. 503 
6ro, co. 426, 697 
ortus, co. 489 
ostendo 244, 563 
ought 236, 272, 627 
outlaw 243 
overhang 238 
overturn 248 
overwhelm 248 
owe 236 



paciscor 220 
paenitet 272, co, 415 
paint 243 
pando 248 
par, w. ger. 582 
- atque 738 
paratus, co. 543, 583 
parco 244, co. 462, 473 
pared 236, w. dat. 462 
pario 253 
parisyllables 41 
paro, co. 419, 543 
part 243 



particeps w. gen. 449 
particip. coniunctum, 572 sqq. 
participles deel. 63; 

- compared 88; 

- used as subst. 49; 

- used as adj. 223; 

- w. gen. 449; 

- fut. pass p. 469 sqq. ; 

- perf. pass. p. 469 sqq. ; 

- p. a noun form 538; 

- uses 566 sqq. ; lacking p. 574 sq. 

- appos. p. 570, 572 sqq.; 

- transl. of p. 572 sqq 
particles 10 
partior270, 219 
partitive gen. 442 sqq. 
parum w. gen. 444 
pasco 256 

passive of deponents 218, 265 sqq. 

- of intrans. v. 364, 466, 275; 

- impersonal p. 364; 

- personal p. 364; 

- p. of doceo 423; 

- p. of transport 424; 

- p. part. 222, 223, 575 
past perfect 591 
patefacio 254 

pateo 236 

paret 274 

patior 268, co. 549 

paulo 105, 515, 537 

paulum 111 

pay 244, 249 

pellicio 252 

pello 244 

pendeo 238, co. 526 

pendo 244 

penes 311 

people, indef. subj. 384 

per 320, 501 

perago 247 

peragro, co. 418 

perceive, co. 547, 548 

percello 216 

percrebresco 258 



XXI 



percutio 252 

perdo 292 

pereo 224, 292 

perfect {to) 242 

perfect (tense) 596 sqq., 574 

perficio 254, 295 n. 

perform 267 

perfruor 267 

pergo 243, w. inf. 543 

perhaps 639 

perhorresco 257 

perlculum est, co. 701 

perinde ac 736 

period 778 

periphrastic conj. 211, 591 

perish 292 

peritus w. gen. 449 

perlego 247 

permit, co. 697 

permittd, co. 697 

perm ul ceo 237 

perpetior 268 

persevere, w. inf. 543 

persolvo 249 

personal pron. 130 sqq. ; 

- partitive gen. ot p. p. 443; 

- possess, gen. 435; 

- not expressed 383 
persufideo 237, co. 462, 548; 

- passive 466 
pertimesco 257 
pertineo 23H 
pervenio 263, co. 528 
peto 2U, co. 425, 697 
phonetic changes 347 n. 
phonology 1 sqq. 
pierce 252 

piget 272. co. 415 
pingd 24:] 
pity 26(5, 272 
place 242, CO. 51 S sqq. 

- p in authority 2">4; 

- p. oneself 245; p. upon 242 
placeo 230, w. dat. 462 
placet 274, co. 698 



plant 241 

plaudo 243 

play 243 

please 236, 274; w. dat. 462 

plebs 79 

plenus w. gen. 449, 503 

plerique 99 

- plex, adj. in, 127 
pluck 243, 248 
pluit 273 
plunder 251 

pluperfect 591, 592, 599, 613, 616 

plural 17, 70 n. 

pliiralia tantum 74, 75, 123, 173 

plus 99, 493 

point out 243 

polled 233 

polliceor 266, co. 547, 553 

polysyndeton 326 

pono 242, co. 521 

porrigo 243 

portray 243 

posco 256, co. 425 

position of prep. 322 

- of enclit. h23 

- of attrib. 399 sqq. 

- of possess, pron. 399 

- of apos. 404 sqq. 

- of clauses 776 

t - See word - order and sentence - 
structure) 
possess 239 
possessive gen. 435 sqq. 
possessive pron. 136 sqq. 

- appos. to p. p. 389, 406 
possideo 239 

poesido 248 
possum 283 

- expr. subsequ. act. 553, co. 543, 
619 n. 

post 317, 324, 537, 736 
postea 180 

posteaquam €02, 726 
posthac 180 
postquam 602, 622, 720 



XXII 



postulo co. 425, 455, 697 
potent, be p. 236 
potior 270, co. 504, 580 
poto 231; potus 222 
potius quam 705 n. 
pour 247 
prae 306, 509 
praebeo 236, co. 431 
praecipio, co. 697 
praedico, praedico 243 
praeditus, co. 503 
praefero 287. co. 543 
praeficid '254, co. 461, 582 
praesens 280 
praesertim cum 715 
praestat 274 

praestd 233, co. 420, 431, 515 
praesum 280. co. 252, 465, 582 
praeter 306, 317, in cpds. 417 
praetereo 293 
praeterit 274, co. 416 
praeteritus 223 
praetermitto, w. inf. 543 
praetor as appos. 408 
praise 721, praising attr. 403 
prandeo 240, pransus 222 
precor 265, co. 697 
predicate 356, 385 sqq. 

- agreem. 391, S93. 394; p. noun 387 

- part, used as p. 569 
prefer 242, 287, 288 
prehendo 248 
premo 243 
prepare, co. 543 
prepositions 296 sqq. 

- place of p. 322, 299 n. 

- used as adv. 324 
prepositional phrases as attr. 401 
present, be p. 280 

present tense 590 sqq. 604, 616. 
present perfect 591, 592, 596, 604, 

605, 616 
press 237, 243 
prevent, co. 699 n. 
previous action 539, 600, 610, 618 
(prex) 76 



primo, prlinuru 129; primus 400 

principal parts 192, 193 

principal tenses 592, 616 sqq. 

priusquam 726 

privo. co. 486 

pro (prep.) 305, 411, 430, 584 

pro ( inter j. ) 334 

pro nihilo 457 

probably 647 

proceed 243 

proclaim 243 

procumbo 242 

prodeo 292 

pro eo ac 738 

profecto 351 

proficiscor 269, co. 585 

profligo 243 

prohibeo 236, co. 486, 551, 561, 699 n. 

prohibitive subj. 661 

proicio 254 

proinde 330, p. ac 728; p. ac si 731 

promise 238, 266, co. 553 

promo 247 

pronominal adj. 169 sqq.; - p. adv. 

178 sqq. 
pronouns 130 sqq. 

- personal p. 130 sqq. 

- possessive p. 13ii sqq. 

- demonstrative p. 140 sqq. 

- determinative p. 142 sqq. 

- relative p. 146 sqq , 673 

- interrogative p. 151 sqq. 

- indefinite p. 156 sqq. 

- correlative p. 175 sqq. 

- p. as subj. or obj. 396, 397 

- agreem. of p. 397, 398 

- ace. of neuter p. 413 

- neuter sing. w. gen. 444 

- in indir. discourse 759 
pronunciation 4, 5 
prop) up 261 

prope 312; as adv. 324 
propero, co. 543, 585 
propior 312 
proprius 437 



XXJII 



propter 312, 509 n. 
propterea 330 q., 695 
prosody 771) sqq. 
prospicio, co. 473 

prosterno 241 

prostrate 241; p. oneself 242 

prosum 280, 281; 

- w. dat. 282, 462 
protasis 742, 744, 74(5, 749 
protect 243, co. 486 
prove 219 

provide 239 

provided 239, co. 473, 5i>7 
provoke 24 L 
proximus 312 
proxitnum est ut 708 

- pte 190 
puclet272, co. 415 
puer as appos. 408 
puncture 244 
pungo 244 
punish 248 

purpose 199, 460, 483, 548, 585, 586, 

619, 693 sqq. 711 
push 244 
put 2-12; p. away 244; p. into 242; 

p. off 249, 287; p. on 249; p. out 

250;p. to shame 272 
puto, co. 457, 547, 560 
putor, co. 387, 561 

Q. 

qua 178, 676 

quaero 241, co. 425, 645 

quaeso 277, 654 

quabis 175, 673 

qualiscumque, co. 629 

quality, gen. and ahl. ot 441 

quam 105, 182, 732, 735 sqq. ; 

- abl. instead of quam 491 
quam din 180, 607, 72(3 
quam mm 770 

quam ob rem 330 n. 
quam possum 737 



quamquam 728, 729 

quamvis 728, 729 

quando 180 

quandoquidem 715 

quantity of syll. and vowels 8, 779 

sqq. 
qua n to - tan to 682 
quantum 175, 177 
quantus 175, 673 
quantuscumque, co. 629 
quapropter 330 n. 
quasi 410 n., 731 

- que 9, 323, 326 

quern ad modum 732, 733 
queo 294 

queror267, co. 422, 552 
questions 378, 630 sqq. 

- direct qu. 631 sqq ; 

- real 631; rhetorical 632; 

- word qu. 633; sentence qu. 634 sqq.; 

- mode 626, 656, 657, 662 

- indirect qu. 377, 548, 640 sqq. 

- word qu. 642 sqq.; sentence qu. 645; 

- after dubito 650; 

- tenses 605, 619; mode 641: 

- relat. cl. and indir. qu. 643 
qui (rel.) 146, 673 

- in cl. of purpose 586; 

- is qui, sunt qui 677 
qui (interr. ) 151, 152 
qui (indef.) 150, 715 
qui 155 

quia 66S, 715; quod qu. 690 
quicquam 162 n. 
quicumque 150, co. 629 
quidam 163; w. ex, dc 447; 677 
quiesco 256 
quln, after n5n dubito 650; 

- pray 654; 

- after neg. refuse etc. 699 n. ; 

- why not 709; = that 710; 
= nc or quominus 711; 

= qui nun 712; - ut non 713 
quin - clauses 666, 709 sqq. 



XXIV 



quinam 154 

quippe curn 715; qu. qui 678 

quis (interr.) 151 

(indef.) 156, 656; (correl.) 175 
quisnam 154 
quispiam 159, 656 
quisquam 161, 656 

quisque 164, 167, 684, w. gen. 446. 
quisquis 150, co. 629 
quiver 232 
quivis 168 
quo 178,676, 695 

quo-eo 515, 682, 683 
quoad 607, 726 
quocirca 330 n. 
quocumque 178 
quod {correl.) 175 
quod {conj.) 607, 715 

- w. subj. 608 

- est quod 677 

- quod sciam 680 

- quod si 690, 751 
quominus 699 
quondam 181 

quoniam 715; quod qu. 690 
quoquam 178 
quoque 326 
quot 175, 673 
quotiens 180, 610 
quotienscumque, co. 629 
quotquot 176, co. 629 
quotus quisque 164 



rado 243 
rain 273 
raise 287 
rapid 251 
rather 89, 
ratify 261 
reach 244, 
read 247 
reap 243 
rebuke 232 
rebut 244 
receive 254 
recido 244 



R. 



327 



263 



reciprocals 7(59 

recline 232 

recordor 277, co. 45 L 

recurro 244 

recuso, co. 699 

redarguo 249 

reddo 244, co. 429,461 

redeo 292, co. 502 

redundo, co. 503 

refello 244 

refercio 261 

refero 287 

refert 272, co 459, 641 

refertus, co. 503 

reficio 264 

reflexive pron. 130, L38, 144 

- verbs 352 

- direct & indirect reflexives 764 sqq. 

- ipse and is instead of r. 768 
reform ido. co. 421 

refrain 239; co. 711 

refuse 249, co. 699 

refute 249 

regain health 257 

regard, co. 428, 430; be r. 387 

rego 243 

reject 249 

rejoice 220 

relative cl. 673 sqq. 

- force of r. cl. 674 

- indicative cl. 675 

- subj. cl. 676 

- conditional r. cl. 676 n. 

- expr. cause 678 

- expr. concession, opposition 679 

- expr. restriction 680 

- result 681 

- combination of r. cl. 686 

- coordination 6S7 

- subordination 688 

- replacing sub st., part., phrases 691 

- r. cl. and indir. questions 643 
relative pron. 146 sqq., 607, 610 

- in inserted cl. 685 

- as connectives 374, 689 
relative time 589 



XXV 



relinquo 247, co. 478, j*:\ 

rely 220 

remain 237, co. 274, 280, 387 

remember 269, 277 

remind 236, co. 4M 

reminiscor 269, 277 

rencf 247 

render 243 

rent 243 

reor 266, 620 n. 

repair 261 

repeated act/on 595. 610, 612, 613 

repello 244, co. 486 

repent 272 

reperio 262, co. 547, 563 

report 287 

reposed 256, co. 425 

repose 250 

represent, co. 570 

repneriisco 258 

requies 79 

resign 292 

resist 245 

resisto 245, w. dat. 403 

rescindo 246 

responded 238, co. 465, 547 

respuo 249 

restat27J; r. ut 708 

restore 254 

result, cl. ofr. 199, 604, 619, 681, 

702 
retain 236 
retard 265 
reticeo 236 
retineo 236 
retundo 246 

return 220; r. thanks 287 
re vera 511 
revere 266 
revertor 220, 221 
revive 257 
revivisco 257 
reward 254 
rex, position 465 
rhetorical word - order 774 
rhetorical question 632 



rhythm 775 

r/tfe 243 

rideo 237, co. 421 

rise 243, 270 

rivers in a, gender 16 n. 

rob 251 

rodo 243 

rogd, co. 425, 426, 697 

- sententiam r. 427 

roll 249 

Romanus, position, 399 

rouse 235 

rout 245 

route, co. 523 

rub 241 

rw/n 292 

rule 243 

rules of gender 12, 13, 28, 38, 46, 

67, 71 
rumble 242 
run 244 
ruo 249 
rus 529 
rush 249 

S. 
sacer, co. 437 
saepid 261 
salio 260 
salve 277 
sancio 261 
sane 6S(j 
sapio 251 
sarcio 261 
satis w. gen. 444 
savor of 2b\ 
say 243, co. 547, 548 
scalpd 243 
scando 248 
scilicet 351 
scindo 246 
scio 259; im. 227; co. 543, 547; 

haud scio an 647 
ecisco 257 
scorch 243 
scrape 243 



XXYI 



scribo 243; co. 461, 547, 563 

seed 232 

secondary tenses 592, 616 sqq. 

secundum 317 

secure possession 236 

secus atque 738 

sed 328; sed si 751 

sedeo 239 

seduce 252 

see 239; see into 247 

seek 241 

seem, co. 387 

seiungo, co. 486 

seize 241, 254 

self 141 

se//292, co. 458 

semideponents 220, 221 

send 243; send for 241 

senex as appos. 408 

senior ]04 

sentence, syntax 354 sqq. 

- simple s. 369 

- cpd. s. 370; complex s. 373 

- s. question 634 sqq. 

- structure 775 sqq. 
sentio 261, co. 547 
separate 243, 247 
separation of syllables 7 
separo, co. 486 

sepelid 259 

sequence of tenses 607 sqq. 

- in depend, indie, cl. 607 sqq. 

- in depend, subj. el. 616 sqq. 

- after inf. 620 sqq. 

- in depend, congr. , postquam - and 

simulac - cl. 622 sqq. 

- in cl. depend, on depend, cl. 624 sqq. 
sequitur ut 708 

sequor 267, 620 n., co. 419 

sero 241 

serpo 243 

serve 274 

servio, w. dat. 462 

sescenti = infinite 120 



set 242; set about 270; 

- set in motion 270; set on tire '248 

- set on shore 242; set out 269 

- set sail 250; set straight 243 

- set up 249 
shake 2"2 
share 270 

sharing, w. gen. 449 
sharpen 249 
shave 238, 243 
shine 236 

should 627 

shove 243 

show 244 

shudder 236 

shut up 243 

si 607, 610, 613, 646, 690, 729, 751, 752 

- si forte 751; si minus 751, 752 

- si non 751, 752 

sic 182, 730; w. consec. cl. 705 

sicut 732, 733 

side with, co. 526 

sigh 242 

silent, be s. 236 

sileo 236 

similis, c. 450; s. ac 738 

simulac, simul atque 602, 610, 622, 726 

simulo, co. 547 

sin 752 

since 410 

sine 303 

sing 244 

singular 17 

singularia tantum 73 

singuli 124 

sink 243 

sino 241, co. 549, 561 

siquidem 715 

sis 289, 654 

sit 239; sit down 248 

sive 327; s. - s. 331, co. 629 

skilled, w. gen. 449 



IN DBS 



XXVII 



slay 244 

slight 247 

slope 2 IS 

smile 287 

snatch 251 

snoiv 278 

so-called 508 

sodes 654 

Boleo 220, co. 543, 590 

solus 169, as appos. 409 

- w. cl. of charact. 677 

solvo 249, co. 4S6 

son6 232 

soothe 287 

sortior 270 

sound 232, 2-14 

sow 241 

space, relations of, 518 sqq. 

spare 244 

spargo 243 

speak 267 

spentf 242, 247 

sperno 241 

ep3rd, co. 419, 547, 553 

spin 235 

splendeo 23d 

split 24(5 

spoil 247 

spolio, co. 486 

spondeo 238 

sponte 76, 510 

spread out 248 

spurn 241, 249 

stab 254 

stand 233; st. around 233; 

- st. open 236; st. out 236; 

- st. up 243 

statuo 249, co. 521, &)^; statu! 59G 

stem 21; of verbs 187 

step 2(58 

sterno 241 

stf/jg- 244 

stipfitus, co. 505 

Bto 2:53, co. 458, 522, 526, 699 

strengthened pron. 135, 139, 141, 154 



strengthening of degrees 105 

strepo 242 
stretch 244, 248 
strew 243 

strike 252, 264; s. down 243 
stringo 243 
strip off 243 
StttVe 267 
strong, be s. 23G 
struo 250 

studed 236, co. 462, 543, 582 
studiosus w. gen. 449 
stuff 261 
stupeo 236 
suadeo 237, co. 697 
sub 298, 323 
subeo 293, co. 418 
aubigo 247 
subject 201, 355; 
s. nom. 860, 380 sqq. 

- indef. s. 384; 

- agreem. 391 sqq. 

- s. complement 366 
subjective genitive 439 
subjugate 247 
subjunctive 199; defined 625 

- s. of future 212, 213 

- s. instead of fat. im. 227; 

- s. in independ. cl. 655 sqq. 

- declarative s. 655 sqq. 

- expr. certainty, likelihood, pos- 
sibility (556; propriety, oblig. 657 

- volitive s. (558 

- optative s. 659 

- hortatory s. 660 

- jussive, prohibitive s. 661 

- expr. delib.. surprise, indign. 662 

- concessive s. 663 

- s. in depend, cl. 665 6qq. 

- expr. another's thought 6(56; 

- by attraction 670 sqq. 
subordinate conj. 325, 332 sqq. 
subsequent action 539, 600, 615, (519 
subsist 269 



XXVIII 



subsum 2S0, co. 282 

subvenio 263, w. dat. 462 

succedo, co. 463 

succendo 248 

succurro 244, w. dat. 462 

suffer 268, 287 

suffero 287 

sui, sibi, se, 134, 144, 759, 764, 766 

suit 273 

sum. 278 sqq. ; as copula 387 

- with adv. 387 n. 

- =am worth 457 

- w. {double) dat. 477 

- =have 467 
summon 235, 241 
summum 414 

suinmus 100, 400, w. gen. 441 

sumo 247 

super 319 

superlative 68 sqq.; w. gen. 446 

superseded 239, co. 486 

supersum 280, co. 282 

supine 200, 538 

- in um 585, in u 587 
supplied, co. 462 
supposing 265 
supra 315, 319 

- as adv. 324; co. 515 n. 
surgo 243 

surnames 403 

surprise 248 

surrender 244 

surround 233, 245 

sus 80 

suscenseo 236 

suscipio 254; w. ger. 580, 5S3 

suspect 251 

suspendo 244, co. 526 

suspicio 251 

suspicor 251 

sustineo 236 

suus & eius 138 sqq., 764 sqq. 

stick 237 

style 258 

swear, co. 553 

syllables 6, 7, 779 sqq. 

synopsis of pres. system 197 

- of perfect s. 195 



- of par tic. s. 193 

- of sequence of t. 332 
syntax 353 sqq. 



taceo 236 

taedet 272, co. 415 

take 247, 254, co. 428 

- away 247, co. 474 

- care 239, 242 

- out 247 

- pains 236 

- up 254 

talis 175, 677; w. consec. cl. 705 

talk 267 

tam 184, 677; w. consec. cl. 705 

- tam diu 180 
tame 232 
tamen 328, 727 

- is tamen=qui 689 
tametsi 728 
tamquam 410 n. 
tandem 154 
tango 244 

tantopere, w. consec. cl. 705 
tantum 175, 177 

- t. abest ut 706 
tantundem 176 

tantus 175, 177; w. gen. 441 

- w. consec. cl. 705 
tarry 265 

teach 236, co. 423 
tear asunder 246 

- t. down 246 

- t. out 248 
tegd 243 

tempero, co. 473 
tempto, co. 646 
tendo 244 

teneo 236, co. 523, 571 
tenses, of noun forms of verb 539 
sqq. 

- defined 589 

- aoristic t. 590 

- descriptive t. 591 

- principal & second, t. 592, 616 

- uses of t. 594 sqq. 



X X I X 



- epistolary t. 599; 

- in depend. cl. 600 sqq.; 

- independ. t. 332, 601 sqq. 

- sequence oi t. 607 sqq. 

- in indir. discourse 700 sqq. 
terms 307 

terni 124, 12-5 

tero 241 

terra niarlque 523 

terreo 236 

terrify 254 

test 270 

text") 212 

thank 721 

the - the 682 

therefore 330 

they (indef. subj.) 384 

threaten 238, 265, co. 553 

throw 254; th. about 213 

- th. away 254; th. up 242 
thrust 243 

thunder 232, 273 

tie together 243 

time, relations of, 534 sqq. 

timeo 236, co. 473, 543, 701 

tinge 243 

tinge") 243 

tollf. 287 

tonat 273 

tondeo 238 

to no 232 

too 87, 108, 111 

tope 231 

torqueo 237 

torture 237 

tot 175 

tot idem 176 

totiens 180 

torus 169; as appos. 409 

- w. names of places 520 
touch 244 

towns co. 518 sqq. 
traditur, traduntur 561 
trado 244, co. 583 
fcraho 243 



trans 316, in cpds. 417 

transeo 293 

transition, phrases of, 70S 

transitive verbs, def 360, 362 n. 

- passive of t. v. 212, 364 

- t. v. as predic. 386 

- syntax 413 sqq. 

- w. gerund & gerundive 580 
translate 243 

transmit 244 

transport, co. 424 

travel over 293 

tremble 242 

tremf) 242 

tribuo 249, co. 477 

trini 124, 125 

trlstis, co. 503 

trouble 243, 248, 254 

trudo 243 

trust 220, 244 

try 270, co. 646 

tueor 266, co. 486 

turn 180; turn - turn 331 

tunc 180 

turn 248 

turpis 587 

tutus, co. 487 

twist 237 

U. 

ubi (adv.) 178; w. gen.^WX 

ubi (conj.) 602, 610, 622, 673, 676, 726 

ubi primum 602 

ubicumque 178 

ubique 178 

-ubus instead of - ibus 65 

ulciscor 269, co. 419 

ullus 161, 169 

ultra 316; as adv. 324; co. 515 n. 

unbecoming, be u. 273 

uncover 260 

unde 178, (>70 

undecumque 178 

undergo 293 

undertake, co. 583 



XXX 



undique 178 

ungo, unguo 250 

mil 124, 125 

unlearn 256 

unquam 180 

ilnus 116, 119 n.; decl. 169; 

- as appos. 403; 

- w. ex, de 447; 

- w. cl. of charact. 677 
unusquisque 165 
urbs, position 405 
urge 237, co. 697 
urged 237 

use 236, 237; use up 267 
useful, be u. 274, 280 
usquam 178 
usque eo, 705 
ut (adv.) 182. 410 
lit (conj.) in cl. of purpose 586, 695, 
697; 

- in cl. ol result 604, 704, 705; 

- = as soon as 602, 622; 

- in questions and exclaw. 662 n. ; 

- in relat. cl. 673, 678; 

- in cl. of fear 701 

- in other cl. 726, 728, 732, 734 
_ omitted 705 n. 

ut non 695 

ut primuni 602 

ut quisque 683 

uter 153, 169, 171, 172, 173 

uterlibet 168 

uterque 153, 166, 167, 172, 173 

- w. gen. 446 
utervis 168 
utilis, co. 483, 587 

utinam 659; quod utinam 690 
utor 267, 620 n., co. 504, 580 
utpote cum 715 
utrum - an 637, 649 
utut, howsoever, co. 629 



V. 



vaco, co. 486 
vacuefacio 254 
vacuus, co. 487 



vado 243 

vae 334, co. 432 n. 

valde 105 

vale 277 

valeo 236, co. 543 

value little 243 

vanish 258 

vas 79 

- ve 9, 327 
veho 243, co. 502 
vel = perhaps 105 

- or 327; vel -vel 331' 
velim, vellem 656, 659 
vel 16 248 
velut si 731 
vendo 292, co. 458 
veneo 224, 292 
venio 263, co. 478, 585 
venit in mentem 451 
venture 220 
verbs 184 sqq. 

- impersonal v. 271 sqq. 

- defective v. 277; 

- syntax 360 sqq. 

- transitive v. 360 sqq. 

- in trans, v. 361 sqq. 

- v. of motion 460 n., 585 

- noun forms 538 sqq. 

- tenses 539 sqq., 589 sqq. 

- v. of saying and perceiving 541 
sqq., 669 

vere 110 

vereor 266, 620 n., co. 543, 701 

vergo 248 

vero 110, 328, 636 

versor 265 

verto 248, co. 477 

verum, v. enim vero 328 

very 87, 105, 111 

vescor 269, co. 504, 580 

vesper 78 

veto 232, co. 549, 560, 561 

vex 236 

video 239, co. 547, 570 

videor, co. 387, 561 

view 248 



X X X I 



vigeo 236 

vigorous, be v. 236 

vine in 261 

vinco 247, co. 502 

- viri, co. 582 

vis 76 

visit 248 

viso 248 

visu 587 

vivo 250 

vix 724 

vocative 19, 35 

voco. co. 428 

volo 288, 289, 543, 550, 553, 571, 

Oil) n. 
vol vo 249 
vomo 242 
vouch for 233 
voveo 239 
vow 239 
vowels, quantity of, 784 sqq. 



W. 



wage war 243 
wait 270, co. 64(5 
want 288 
ward off 248 
warm, be w. 2^6 



wash 234; w. o/7'249 

waste 242 

we (indef. svbj.) 384 

weave 242 

weep 235 

weigh 244 

welcome 277 

what - clauses 644 

when ? 534 sqq. 

whence ? 524, 525 

where? 518, 525, 528 

which - clauses 644 

whither? 527, 528 

who - clauses 644 

will 288, co. 543 

wipe off 237 

wise, be w. 251 

wish 288 

withdraw 243 

within what time ? 534 

without 572, 714; be w. 236 

wont, be w. 220 

word - order 771 sqq. 

word questions 633, 642 sqq. 

world {indef. subj.) 384 

worth, co. 457 

would 595, 627 

wrap about 264 

write 243, co. 521 



CORRIGENDA 



PAGE 

2 

3 

4 

16 

17 

17 

27 

27 

31 

47 

59 

74 

80 

84 

85 

89 

89 

108 

140 

169 

185 

191 

201 

231 

236 

261 

261 

267 

285 

298 

IV Index 



LINE 

2 from below 
2 " above 



2 
14 
24 
18 
14 

8 

7 
lo 
18 
15 
16 
14 
10 

6 
15 

1 

6 

7 
14-15 

1 

2 
15 

9 
10 
11 
15 

8 
13 



below 
above 



below 
above 
below 

above 

below 

/< 
above 

below 
above 



below 
a 

above 

it 

<< 

below 



READ 

in 

vowels 

both 

1 ac 

hone 

lac 

luxuria - luxuries. 

f 1 1 i a b u s 

form 

am icus 

q uandocumqu e 

had heard 

me reor 

c o ercere 

( ace. ) 

edu care 

of 

participialj 

f urtim 

subject 

s e i u n g 6 

s t i p a t u s 

c om itiis 

narrativnm 

negaverit 



interdlcere 

classes 

u t rique 

attain 269, co. 707 



INSTEAD OF 

is 

words 

but both 

lac 

home 

lac 

luxuria - luxureis 

fibiabus 

from 

amicum 

quadocumque 

have heard 

mereo 

coercere 

(abl.) 
educere 

for 

participal 

furtim 

object 

seiungo 

stipatus 

ocmitiis 

narrativum 

negaverit 



interdidere 

clauses 

utri que 

attain 269, 697; co. 707 



Other mistakes will be easily corrected by the reader. 






i 



Aue 5 isoe 



/ 



Hsoks 



